NC0069311_Application (ATC)_20200508

Engineering
LandscSurveyingape Architect,;
r 1
May 6, 2020
RECEIVED
Julie Grzyb MAY p$ 2020
NCDEQ— Division of Water Resources
512 North Salisbury Street, 9th Floor NCDEQ/DWR/NPDES
Raleigh, North Carolina 27604
Re: Franklin County— Franklin County WWTP (NPDES No. NC0069311)
WWTP Rehabilitation
NCDEQ Authorization to Construct Permit
Dear Ms. Grzyb:
Regarding the above referenced project, enclosed please find one digital and one hard copy of
the following items
• Application for Authorization to Construct Permit with supporting attachments
• Engineering Plans
• Engineering Specifications
• Required Engineering Calculations
This project is funded by the Clean Water State Revolving Fund (C370515-04). An
Authorization to Construct permit is needed as this project features numerous
rehabilitation/replacement improvements, complete replacement of aged Triple A basin,
complete replacement of aged aerobic digester, construction of a new blower building to
supply air to two Triple A basins and a new digester with two tanks and a sludge holding tank,
rehabilitation of the WAS pump station and replacement of the WAS pumps, a new plant-wide
SCADA system, as well as other miscellaneous rehabilitation items and electrical improvements.
A complete list of improvements can be found in part D of the attached Application.
If you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact us at [phone] or by email at
[e-mail].
Sincerely,
LKC Engineering, PLLC
Benjamin B Wibbens, E.I.
140 Aqua Shed Court,Aberdeen,North Carolina 28315
PH:910/420-1437*FAX: [phone]
License No.P-1095

RECE IVED jjEirank1in
MAY08 2020 r•••• oun
"
NORTH CAROLINA
NCOE QIDWRINPDES A Research Triangle Region Community
NORTH CAROLINA
PREPARED BY:
DEPARTMENT OF
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY „KC
DIVISION OF WATER LKC ENGINEERING,PLLC
ATTN:Adam Kiker,P.E.
RESOURCES 140 Aqua Shed Court
Aberdeen,NC 28315
[phone]
License#P-1095
AUTHORIZATION TO email: [e-mail]
CONSTRUCT PRIMARY REVIEW AGENCY:
NCDEQ-DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES
ATTN:Julie Grzyb
N.C.Division of Water Infrastructure
512 North Salisbury Street,85h Floor
FRANKLIN COUNTY Raleigh,North Carolina 27604
Email:[e-mail]
CLIENT INFORMATION:
W W T P REHABILITATION FRANKLIN COUNTY
ATTN: Chris Doherty
Public Utilities Director
DWI Project No.: C370515-04 1630 US 1 Highway
Youngsville,NC 27596
[phone]
Email:[e-mail]
SUBMITTED: May 1, 2020

APPLICATION FOR
AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT
FRANKLIN COUNTY
WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT
(NPDES NC0069311)

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 1: INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION
A. The Division of Water Resources will accept this application package for review only if all of the items are provided and the
application is complete.Failure to submit all of the required items will result in the application package being returned as incomplete
per 15A NCAC 02T.0105(b).
B. Plans and specifications must be prepared in accordance with 15 NCAC 02H.0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina General Statute
133-3, North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES
Wastewater Treatment Facilities.
C. The plans and specifications submitted must represent a completed final design that is ready to advertise for bid.
D. Any content changes made to this Form ATC-12-14 shall result in the application package being returned.
E. The Applicant shall submit ONE ORIGINAL and ONE DIGITAL COPY (CD) of the application, all supporting documentation and
attachments. All information must be submitted bound or in a 3-ring binder, with a Section tab for each Section, except the
Engineering Plans.
F. Check the boxes below to indicate that the information is provided and the requirements are met.
G. If attachments are necessary for clarity or due to space limitations, such attachments are considered part of the application
package and must be numbered to correspond to the item referenced.
H. For any project that requires review under the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA), an Authorization to Construct cannot be
issued prior to the completion of a State Clearinghouse advertisement period for a FONSI, EIS,etc. unless the project qualifies for
a Determination of Minor Construction Activity.
I. For more information,visit the Division of Water Resources web site at:https://deq.nc.gov/about/divisions/water-resources/water-
resou rces-permits/wastewater-bra nch/npdes-wastewater/a uthorization-to-construct.
J. In addition to this Authorization to Construct,the Applicant should be aware that other permits may be required from other Sections
of the Division of Water Resources(for example: reclaimed water facilities permits; Class A or B biosolids residuals permit).
SECTION 2: APPLICANT INFORMATION AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. APPLICANT
Applicant's name Franklin County
Signature authority's name per 15A NCAC 02T.0106(b) Chris Doherty
Signature authority's title Public Utilities Director
Complete mailing address 1630 US 1 Highway,Youngsville, NC 27596
Telephone number [phone]
Email address [e-mail]
B. PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
Professional Engineer's name Adam P. Kiker, P.E.
Professional Engineer's title Principal
North Carolina Professional Engineer's License No. 35038
Firm name LKC Engineering, PLLC
Firm License number P-1095
Complete mailing address 140 Aqua Shed Court,Aberdeen, NC 28315
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 1

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
Telephone number [phone]
Email address [e-mail]
C. NPDES PERMIT
NPDES Permit number NC0069311
Current Permitted flow(MGD)—include permit
flow phases if applicable 3.0 MGD
D. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Provide a brief description of the project:This project consists of the following work at Franklin County's Wastewater Treatment
Plant;complete replacement of aged Triple A basin,complete replacement of aged aerobic digester,construction of a new
blower building to supply air to two Triple A basins and a new digester with two tanks and a sludge holding tank, rehabilitation
of the WAS pump station and replacement of the WAS pumps, a new plant-wide SCADA system. and other miscellaneous
rehabilitation items and electrical improvements.
SECTION 3: APPLICATION ITEMS REQUIRED FOR SUBMITTAL FOR ALL PROJECTS
A. Cover Letter
® The letter must include a request for the Authorization to Construct; the facility NPDES Number; a brief project description
that indicates whether the project is a new facility,facility modification,treatment process modification,or facility expansion;
the construction timeline; and a list of all items and attachments included in the application package.
❑ If any of the requirements of 15 NCAC 02H. 0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina General Statute 133-3, North Carolina
General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment
Facilities are not met by the proposed design,the letter must include an itemized list of the requirements that are not met.
B. NPDES Permit
® Submit Part I of the Final NPDES permit for this facility that includes Part A(Effluent Limitations and Monitoring Requirements)
for the monthly average flow limit that corresponds to the work that is requested for this project.
C. Special Order by Consent
❑ If the facility is subject to any Special Orders by Consent(SOC),submit the applicable SOC.
® Not Applicable.
D. Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision
❑ Submit a copy of the Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision for this project.
❑ Provide a brief description of any of the mitigating factors or activities included in the approved Environmental Document
that impact any aspect of design of this project, if not specified in the Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision.
® Not Applicable.
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 2

•
State of North Carolina
INIZ1:7 Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
1 Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
E. Engineering Plans
® Per 15A NCAC 02T.0504(c)(1),submit one set of detailed plans that have been signed, sealed and dated by a North Carolina
Licensed Professional Engineer.
® Per 21 NCAC 56.1103(a)(6),the name, address and License number of the Licensee's firm shall be included on each sheet of
the engineering drawings.
® Plans must be labeled as follows: FINAL DRAWING—FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY—NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
® 15A NCAC 02H .0124 requires multiple (dual at a minimum) components such as pumps, chemical feed systems, aeration
equipment and disinfection equipment. Is this requirement met by the design? ® Yes or ❑ No. If no, provide an
explanation:
Plans shall include:
® Plans for all applicable disciplines needed for bidding and construction of the proposed project(check as appropriate):
® Civil ❑ Not Applicable
® Process Mechanical ❑ Not Applicable
❑ Structural ❑ Not Applicable TO BE PROVIDED AT A LATER DATE
❑ Electrical ❑ Not Applicable TO BE PROVIDED AT A LATER DATE
❑ Instrumentation/Controls ® Not Applicable
❑ Architectural ® Not Applicable
❑ Building Mechanical ® Not Applicable
O Building Plumbing ® Not Applicable
® Plan and profile views and associated details of all modified treatment units including piping,valves,and equipment(pumps,
blowers, mixers, diffusers, etc.)
® Are any modifications proposed that impact the hydraulic profile of the treatment facility? ❑Yes or® No. If yes, provide
a hydraulic profile drawing on one sheet that includes all impacted upstream and downstream units. The profile shall include
the top of wall elevations of each impacted treatment unit and the water surface elevations within each impacted treatment
unit for two flow conditions: (1) the NPDES permitted flow with all trains in service and (2) the peak hourly flow with one
treatment train removed from service.
® Are any modifications proposed that impact the process flow diagram or process flow schematic of the treatment facility?
['Yes or®No. If yes,provide the process flow diagram or process flow schematic showing all modified flow paths including
aeration, recycle/return,wasting,and chemical feed,with the location of all monitoring and control instruments noted.
F. ® Engineering Specifications
® Per 15A NCAC 02T.0504(c)(2), submit one set of specifications that have been signed, sealed and dated by a North Carolina
Licensed Professional Engineer.
® Specifications must be labeled as follows: FINAL SPECIFICATIONS — FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY — NOT RELEASED FOR
CONSTRUCTION.
Specifications shall include:
® Specifications for all applicable disciplines needed for bidding and construction of the proposed project (check as
appropriate):
® Civil ❑ Not Applicable
® Process Mechanical ❑ Not Applicable
❑ Structural [' Not Applicable TO BE PROVIDED AT A LATER DATE
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 3

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources# 1
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
❑ Electrical ❑ Not Applicable TO BE PROVIDED AT A LATER DATE
® Instrumentation/Controls ❑ Not Applicable
❑ Architectural ® Not Applicable
❑ Building Mechanical ® Not Applicable
❑ Building Plumbing ® Not Applicable
® Detailed specifications for all treatment units and processes including piping, valves, equipment (pumps, blowers, mixers,
diffusers,etc.),and instrumentation.
® Means of ensuring quality and integrity of the finished product including leakage testing requirements for structures and
pipelines, and performance testing requirements for equipment.
® Bid Form for publicly bid projects.
G. Construction Sequence Plan
• Construction Sequence Plan such that construction activities will not result in overflows or bypasses to waters of the State.
The Plan must not imply that the Contractor is responsible for operation of treatment facilities. List the location of the
Construction Sequence Plan as in the Engineering Plans or in the Engineering Specifications or in both: Sequence plan is
location in Section 01111 of the Engineering Specifications.
H. Engineering Calculations
® Per 15A NCAC 02T.0504(c)(3),submit one set of engineering calculations that have been signed,sealed and dated by a North
Carolina Licensed Professional Engineer;the seal, signature and date shall be placed on the cover sheet of the calculations.
For new or expanding facilities and for treatment process modifications that are included in Section 4.C,the calculations shall
include at a minimum:
• Demonstration of how peak hour design flow was determined with a justification of the selected peaking factor.
® Influent pollutant loading demonstrating how the design influent characteristics in Section 4.B.2 of this form were
determined.
® Pollutant loading for each treatment unit demonstrating how the design effluent concentrations in Section 4.B.2 of this form
were determined.
® Hydraulic loading for each treatment unit.
® Sizing criteria for each treatment unit and associated equipment(blowers, mixers, pumps,etc.)
® Total dynamic head (TDH) calculations and system curve analysis for each pump specified that is included in Section 4.C.6.
❑ Buoyancy calculations for all below grade.structures.TO BE PROVIDED AT A LATER DATE WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS
❑ Supporting documentation that the specified auxiliary power source is capable of powering all essential treatment units.TO
BE PROVIDED AT A LATER DATE WITH ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
I. Permits
• Provide the following information for each permit and/or certification required for this project:
Permit/ If Not Issued Provide
Not Date Date Certification Status and Expected
Permit/Certification Applicable Submitted Approved Number Issuance Date
Dam Safety N/A
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 4

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
Soil Erosion and Sediment Control N/A
USCOE /Section 404 Permit N/A
Water Quality Certification (401) N/A
USCOE/Section 10 N/A
Stormwater Management Plan N/A
CAMA N/A
NCDOT Encroachment Agreement N/A
Railroad Encroachment Agreement N/A
Other:
J. Residuals Management Plan
❑ For all new facilities, expanding facilities, or modifications that result in a change to sludge production and/or sludge
processes, provide a Residuals Management Plan meeting the requirements of 15A NCAC 02T .0504(j) and 15A NCAC 02T
.0508;the Plan must include:
❑ A detailed explanation as to how the generated residuals(including trash,sediment and grit)will be collected, handled,
processed,stored,treated, and disposed.
❑ An evaluation of the treatment facility's residuals storage requirements based upon the maximum anticipated residuals
production rate and ability to remove residuals.
❑ A permit for residuals utilization or a written commitment to the Applicant from a Permittee of a Department approved
residuals disposal/utilization program that has adequate permitted capacity to accept the residuals or has submitted a
residuals/utilization program application.
❑ If oil,grease,grit or screenings removal and collection is a designated unit process, a detailed explanation as to how the
oil/grease will be collected, handled, processed,stored and disposed.
® Not Applicable.
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 5

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 4: PROJECT INFORMATION
A. WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT FLOW INFORMATION—COMPLETE FOR NEW OR EXPANDING FACILITIES
1. Provide the following flow information:
Plant Flows
Existing Plant Design 3.0 MGD
Current NPDES Permit Limit 3.0 MGD
Current Annual Average
(past 12 months) 1.07 MGD
For Past 12 Months: For Past 24 Months:
Start Date: 10/2018 Start Date: 10/2017
End Date:9/2019 End Date:9/2019
Maximum Month 1.23 MGD 1.23 MGD
Maximum Day 2.03 MGD 2.03 MGD
Peak Hour Unknown MGD Unknown MGD
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 6

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL OUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
B. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY DESIGN INFORMATION—COMPLETE FOR NEW OR EXPANDING FACILITIES AND
FOR TREATMENT PROCESS MODIFICATIONS
1. Have all of the requirements of 15 NCAC 02H.0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina General Statute 133-3, North Carolina
General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment
Facilities been met by the proposed design and specifications?®Yes or No. If no, provide justification as to why the
requirements are not met,consistent with 15A NCAC 02T.0105(n):
2. Provide the design influent and effluent characteristics that are used as the basis for the project design,and the NPDES
permit limits for the following parameters:
Project Basis of Design
Design Influent Design Influent
Influent Concentration Load
Concentration- (Must be (Must be
Current Annual supported by supported by Design Effluent
Average(past Engineering Engineering
12 months)if Calculations Calculations Concentration and/or NPDES Permit Limits
Parameter Available [Section 3.H]) [Section 3.H]) Load (monthly average)
Ammonia Nitrogen 1 mg/L Summer 1 mg/L Summer
21.86 mg/L mg/L lb/day
(NH3-N)
mg/L Winter 2 mg/L Winter
Biochemical 10 mg/L Summer 8 mg/L Summer
Oxygen Demand 147.99 mg/L 250 mg/L 3,128 lb/day
(BOD5) mg/L Winter 18 mg/L Winter
Fecal Coliform per 100 mL 200 per 100 mL
Nitrate+Nitrite
Nitrogen(NO3-N + mg/L Monitor&Report
NO2-N)
Total Kjeldahl 35.04 mg/L
Nitrogen
5 mg/L Monitor&Report
Total Nitrogen
22,831 lb/year 42,784 lb/year
1 mg/L Monitor& Report
Total Phosphorus 4.43 mg/L 5 mg/L 62.5 lb/day
4,566 lb/year 7,732 lb/year
Total Suspended 162.93 mg/L 250 mg/L 3,128 lb/day 10 mg/L 30 mg/L
Solids(TSS)
3. Based on the "Project Basis of Design"parameters listed above,will the proposed design allow the treatment facility to
meet the NPDES Permit Limits listed above?®Yes or❑ No. If no, describe how and why the Permit Limits will not be
met:
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 7

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
4. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(j), by-pass and overflow lines are prohibited. Is this condition met by the design?®Yes or❑ No
If no, describe the treatment units bypassed,why this is necessary, and where the bypass discharges:
5. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(k), multiple pumps shall be provided wherever pumps are used. Is this condition met by the
design?®Yes or❑ No. If no, provide an explanation:
6. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(I), power reliability shall be provided consisting of automatically activated standby power supply
onsite capable of powering all essential treatment units under design conditions, or dual power supply shall be provided
per 15A NCAC 02H.0124(2)(a). Is this condition met by the design? ®Yes or❑ No. If no, provide(as an attachment
to this Application)written approval from the Director that the facility:
➢ Has a private water supply that automatically shuts off during power failures and does not contain elevated water
storage tanks, and
• Has sufficient storage capacity that no potential for overflow exists, and
• Can tolerate septic wastewater due to prolonged detention.
7. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(o), a minimum of 30 days of residual storage shall be provided. Is this condition met by the
design? ®Yes or❑ No. If no, explain the alternative design criteria proposed for this project in accordance 15A NCAC
02T.105(n):
8. Per 15A NCAC 02T.0505(q),the public shall be prohibited from access to the wastewater treatment facilities. Explain how
the design complies with this requirement:The WWTP is fenced off and the entrance gate is locked.
9. Is the treatment facility located within the 100-year flood plain? ❑Yes or® No. If yes,describe how the facility is
protected from the 100-year flood:All structures will be constructed at an elevation above the 100-year floodplain.
C. WASTEWATER TREATMENT UNIT AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INFORMATION—COMPLETE FOR NEW OR
EXPANDING FACILITIES AND FOR MODIFIED TREATMENT UNITS
1. PRELIMINARY AND PRIMARY TREATMENT(i.e., physical removal operations and flow equalization):
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Units Type Size per Unit Reference Reference Provided?
(Yes or No)
Manual Bar Screen MGD at peak hourly flow
Mechanical Bar
Screen MGD at peak hourly flow
Grit Removal MGD at peak hourly flow
Flow Equalization -- gallons
Primary Clarifier Circular ft diameter; ft side
water depth
Primary Clarifier Rectangular square feet; ft side
water depth
Other
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 8

State of North Carolina
hic Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
2. SECONDARY TREATMENT(BIOLOGICAL REACTORS AND CLARIFIERS)(i.e., biological and chemical processes to remove
organics and nutrients)
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Type Size per Unit Provided?
Units Reference Reference
(Yes or No)
Aerobic Zone 1 533,000 gallons M-2 11375 Yes
Anoxic Zone 1 115,000 gallons M-2 11375 Yes
Anaerobic Zone 1 115,000 gallons M-2 11375 Yes
Sequencing Batch
Reactor(SBR) -- gallons
Membrane
Bioreactor(MBR) -- gallons
Secondary Clarifier Circular ft diameter; ft
side water depth
Secondary Clarifier Rectangular square feet; ft
side water depth
Aerated Yes
Other 1 533,000 gallons M-2 11375
Anoxic Zone
3. TERTIARY TREATMENT
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Type Size per Unit Provided?
Units Reference Reference (Yes or No)
Tertiary Clarifier Circular ft diameter; ft
side water depth
Tertiary Clarifier Rectangular square feet; ft
side water depth
Tertiary Filter square feet
Tertiary Membrane square feet
Filtration
Post-Treatment
Flow Equalization -- gallons
Post-Aeration gallons
Other
4. DISINFECTION
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Type Size per Unit Provided?
Units Reference Reference (Yes or No)
gal/day per bank at
Ultraviolet Light (Parallel; in peak hourly flow;
series)
number of banks;
number of lamps/bank
Chlorination (Gas; gallons of contact
tablet; liquid) tank/unit
Dechlorination (Gas; gallons of contact
tablet; liquid) tank/unit
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 9

State of North Carolina
,.'; Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
5. RESIDUALS TREATMENT
No.of Plan Sheet Specification Calculations
Treatment Unit Units Type Size per Unit Reference Reference Provided?
(Yes or No)
Gravity Thickening square feet; ft side
Tank water depth
Mechanical
Thickening/ dry lb/hour
Dewatering
Aerobic Digestion 2 366,000 gallons M-15 11376 Yes
Anaerobic gallons Yes
Digestion
Composting dry lb/hour
Drying dry lb/hour
Other 1 Sludge Holding 206,000 gallons M-15 11376 Yes
Tank
6. PUMP SYSTEMS(include influent, intermediate, effluent, major recycles,waste sludge,thickened waste sludge and plant
drain pumps)
Capacity of
Location No.of Purpose Type each pump Plan Sheet Specificatiou
Pumps GPM TDH Reference Reference
Aerobic Digester 4 Sludge Transfer Submersible 460 15 M-15 11376
Pumps
WAS Pump Station 2 WAS Pumps Submersible 340 55.5 M-25 11200
Triple A Basin 8 Motive Wall Pumps 2100 1.05 M-5 11375
7. MIXERS
No.of Power of Plan Sheet Specification
Location Mixers Purpose Type each(HP)
Mixer Reference Reference
Allow operator to
Triple A Basin 12 shut off air and Submersible 3 M-5 11375
keep tank mixed
Aerobic Digester 2 Keep sludge Submersible 3 M-15 11376
completely mixed
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 10

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
8. BLOWERS
Capacity of
Location No.of Purpose Type each Blower Plan Sheet Specification
Blowers (CFM) Reference Reference
Blower Building 2 Triple A Basin Centrifugal Blowers 1819.3 M-12 11081
Aeration
Aerobic Digester
Blower Building 2 Centrifugal Blowers 1819.3 M-12 11081
Aeration
9. ODOR CONTROL
Location No.of Purpose Type Plan Sheet Specification
Units Reference Reference
D. SETBACKS—COMPLETE FOR NEW WASTEWATER TREATMENT STRUCTURES
1. The minimum distance for each setback parameter to the wastewater treatment/storage units per 15A NCAC 02T .0506(b)
are as follows:
Is Minimum Distance
Minimum Distance
Required from Nearest Requirement met by the
Setback Parameter Design?If"No", identify
Treatment/Storage Setback Waivers in Item D.2
Unit
Below
Any habitable residence or place of assembly under separate 100 ft ®Yes ❑ No
ownership or not to be maintained as part of the project site
Any private or public water supply source 100 ft ®Yes ❑ No
Surface waters(streams—intermittent and perennial, perennial 50 ft ®Yes ❑ No
waterbodies,and wetlands)
Any well with exception of monitoring wells 100 ft ®Yes ❑ No
Any property line SO ft ®Yes ❑ No
2. Have any setback waivers been obtained per 1SA NCAC 02T .0506(d)? ❑ Yes or ® No. If yes, have these waivers been
written, notarized and signed by all parties involved and recorded with the County Register of Deeds? ❑Yes or ❑ No. If
no, provide an explanation:
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 11

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL OUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 5: APPLICATION CERTIFICATION BY PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
Professional Engineer's Certification per 15A NCAC 02T.0105:
I,Adam P. Kiker, P.E., attest that this application package for an Authorization to Construct
(Typed Name of Professional Engineer)
for the Franklin County WWTP,WWTP Rehabilitation
(Facility and Project Name)
was prepared under my direct supervisory control and to the best of my knowledge is accurate, complete and consistent
with the information supplied in the engineering plans, specifications, calculations, and all other supporting
documentation for this project. I further attest that to the best of my knowledge the proposed design has been
prepared in accordance with all applicable regulations and statutes, 15 NCAC 02H. 0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina
General Statute 133-3, North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design
Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment Facilities, and this Authorization to Construct Permit Application, except as
provided for and explained in Section 4.B.1 of this Application. I understand that the Division of Water Resources'
issuance of the Authorization to Construct Permit may be based solely upon this Certification and that the Division may
waive the technical review of the plans, specifications, calculations and other supporting documentation provided in this
application package. I further understand that the application package may be subject to a future audit by the Division.
Although certain portions of this submittal package may have been prepared, signed and sealed by other professionals
licensed in North Carolina, inclusion of these materials under my signature and seal signifies that I have reviewed the
materials and have determined that the materials are consistent with the project design.
I understand that in accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.6B, any person who knowingly makes
any false statement, representation, or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor,
which may include a fine not to exceed $10,000, as well as civil penalties up to $25,000 per violation.
North Carolina Professional Engineer's seal with written signature placed over or adjacent to the seal and dated:
,`......,„„f ffffJJJ i
••. ill .--.Y 1• L
:J
a 8
r �• �
NCINE�:,Z ,,,.
*- .M P ,07
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 12

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
LNVIRONKENI AL OUALiI V APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT(FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 6:APPLICATION CERTIFICATION BY APPLICANT
Applicant's Certification per 15A NCAC 02T.0106(b):
I,Chris Doherty,attest that this application package for an Authorization to Construct
(Typed Name of Signature Authority and Title)
for the Franklin County WWTP,WWTP Rehabilitation
(Facility and Project Name)
has been reviewed by me and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. I also understand that if all
required parts of this application package are not completed and that if all required supporting information and
attachments are not included,this application package will be returned to me as incomplete. I further certify that in
accordance with 15A NCAC 02T.0120(b),the Applicant or any affiliate has not been convicted of environmental crimes,
has not abandoned a wastewater facility without proper closure,does not have an outstanding civil penalty where all
appeals have been abandoned or exhausted,are compliant with any active compliance schedule,and does not have any
overdue annual fees.
I understand that the Division of Water Resources' issuance of the Authorization to Construct Permit may be based
solely upon acceptance of the Licensed Professional Engineer's Certification contained in Section 5,and that the Division
may waive the technical review of the plans,specifications,calculations and other supporting documentation provided
in this application package. I further understand that the application package may be subject to a future audit.
I understand that in accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.6E anyperson who knowingly makes
gY
any false statement,representation,or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor,
which may include a fine not to exceed e !!I as well as civil penalties up to$25,000 per violation.
Signatu sitar Date: �'2_\ ' ZO L3-�
THE COMPLETED APPLICATION AND SUPPORTING INFORMATION SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO:
NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES
DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES/NPDES
By U.S. Postal Service By Courier/Special Delivery:
1617 MAIL SERVICE CENTER 512 N.SALISBURY STREET,9TH FLOOR
RALEIGH,NORTH CAROLINA 27699-1617 RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27604
TELEPHONE NUMBER: [phone]
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit(FORM ATC-12-14) Page 13

`"` t r 10. " PAT MCCRORY
` y
6 117101
DONALD R. VAARTe {'
/ 'z .
S. JAY ZIMMERMAN
Uinti/nv
Water Resources
ENVIROPIMENTAL OUALITY
February 26, 2016
Mr. J. Bryce Mendenhall, Director
Franklin County Public Utilities
1630 US Hwy 1
Youngsville,North Carolina 27596
Subject: NPDES Permit Issuance
. Permit NC0069311
Franklin County WWTP
Franklin County
Class IV Facility
Dear Mr. Mendenhall:
Division personnel have reviewed and approved your application for renewal of the subject
permit. Accordingly, we are forwarding the attached NPDES permit. This permit is issued
pursuant to the requirements of North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1 and the Memorandum
of Agreement between North Carolina and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency dated
October 15, 2007 (or as subsequently amended).
The final permit contains the following changes from your previous permit:
• In response to the County's comments on the draft permit the address for the facility
and the facility description were corrected. The flow trigger for the 3.0 MGD tier was not
modified as it was correct in the draft permit. The 3 MGD flow tier is triggered when
average flow reaches 1.8 MGD.
• Sampling frequency for the effluent pollutant scan was modified to three times during
the permit cycle. See Special Condition A. (9).This condition was also modified to add
narrative for four seasonal 2nd species toxicity tests.
• Individual limits for Total Nitrogen and Total Phosphorus were added to the permit
according to the Tar-Pamlico River Basin 2015 Permitting Strategy. Special Conditions
A. (5), A. (6), and A. (7) describe how to calculate nutrient loads and establish how
compliance will be determined.
• A mercury evaluation was conducted in accordance with the Permitting Guidance
developed for the implementation of the statewide Mercury TMDL to determine the
need for a limit and/or a Mercury Minimization Plan (MMP). A limit will not be
required but you will be required to develop a MMP.See Special Condition A. (11).
• Due to the timing involved in issuing the final permit Special Condition A. (10.) which
addresses the requirement for you to provide electronically-submitted Discharge
Monitoring Reports (eDMRs) was modified to include the final implementation date.
The implementation date when all facilities should be reporting electronically is
State of North Carolina 1 Environmental Quality I Water Resources
1617 Mail Service Center I Raleigh,North Carolina 27699-1617

•
Mr. Mendenhall
February 26, 2016
December 21,2016. See Condition A.(10.) in permit. For information on eDMR,
registering for eDMR and obtaining an eDMR user account, please visit the following
web page:
http://portal.ncdenr.org/web/wq/admin/bog/ipu/edmr.
For information on EPA's proposed NPDES Electronic Reporting Rule, please visit the
following web site:
http://www2.epa.gov/compliance/propose d-npdes-electronic-reporting-rule.
If any parts, measurement frequencies or sampling requirements contained in this permit are
unacceptable to you,you have the right to an adjudicatory hearing upon written request within
thirty (30) days following receipt of this letter. This request must be in the form of a written
petition, conforming to Chapter 150B of the North Carolina General Statutes, and filed with the
Office of Administrative Hearings (6714 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-
6714). Unless such demand is made, this decision shall be final and binding.
Please note that this permit is not transferable except after notice to the Division. The Division
may require modification or revocation and reissuance of the permit. This permit does not affect
the legal requirements to obtain other permits which may be required by the Division of Water
Resources or any other Federal,State, or Local governmental permits that may be required.
If you have any questions concerning this permit, please contact Teresa Rodriguez at telephone
number [phone] or at email [e-mail].
Sincerely,
01
Zimmerman,S.Jay Z , Director
'�'/Division of Water Resources, NCDEQ
cc: NPDES Files
Central Files
EPA Region 4 (e-copy)
Raleigh Regional Office/ Water Quality Program
Aquatic Toxicology Branch,Susan Meadows (e-copy)
Ecosystems Branch,Carrie Ruhlman(e-copy)

Permit No.NC0069311
STATE OF NORTH CAROLINA
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES
PERMIT
TO DISCHARGE WASTEWATER UNDER THE
NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM
In compliance with the provisions of North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1,other lawful standards and
regulations promulgated and adopted by the North Carolina Environmental Management Commission,and
the Federal Water Pollution Control Act,as amended,
Franklin County Public Utilities
is hereby authorized to discharge wastewater from a facility located at the
Franklin County WWTP
1099 Lane Store Rd.,Franklinton
Franklin County
to receiving waters designated as Cedar Creek in the Tar-Pamlico River Basin in accordance with effluent
limitations,monitoring requirements,and other conditions set forth in Parts I,II,III and IV hereof.
This permit modification shall become effective April 1,2016.
This permit and authorization to discharge shall expire at midnight on September 30,2019.
Signed this day February 26,2016.
ORIGINAL SIGNED BY TOM BELNICK
S.Jay Zimmerman,P.G.
Director,Division of Water Resources
By Authority of Environmental Management Commission
Page 1 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
SUPPLEMENT TO PERMIT COVER SHEET
All previous NPDES Permits issued to this facility,whether for operation or discharge are hereby revoked.
As of this permit issuance,any previously issued permit bearing this number is no longer effective.
Therefore,the exclusive authority to operate and discharge from this facility arises under the permit
conditions,requirements,terms,and provisions included herein.
Franklin County Public Utilities
is hereby authorized to:
1. Continue to operate an existing 3.0 MGD wastewater treatment facility located at 1099 Lane Store
Rd.,Franklinton,Franklin County,and consisting of:
• Influent pump station with mechanical and manual bar screens
• Grit chamber
• Dual aeration/anaerobic/anoxic basins
• Dual clarifiers
• Dual tertiary filters
• Dual train UV system
• Parshall flume
• Post aeration
• Aerobic digester;and
2. Discharge from said treatment works, through Outfall 001,into Cedar Creek,a Class C-NSW water
in the Tar-Pamlico River Basin,at the location specified on the attached map.
Page 2 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
PART I
A. (1) EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS AND MONITORING REQUIREMENTS [15A NCAC 02B
.0400 et seq., 02B .0500 et seq.]
Beginning on the effective date of the permit and lasting until the monthly average flow equals or exceeds
90% of 2.0 MGD (1.8 MGD)1, or until permit expiration, the Permittee is authorized to discharge treated
wastewater from Outfall 001. Such discharges shall be limited and monitored2 by the Permittee as specified
below:
EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
PARAMETER
Monthly Weekly Daily Measurement Sample
Average Average Maximum Frequency Sample Type Location 3
Flow 2.0 MGD Continuous Recording I or E
Total Monthly Flow(MG) Monitor and Report Monthly Recorded or I or E
Calculated
BOD5(summer)4.5 8.0 mg/L 12.0 mg/L 3/Week Composite I,E
BOD5 (winter)4.5 18.0 mg/L 27.0 mg/L 3/Week Composite I,E
Total Suspended Solids 4 30.0 mg/L 45.0 mg/L 3/Week Composite I,E
NH3 as N (Summer) 5 1.0 mg/L 3.0 mg/L 3/Week Composite E
NH3 as N (Winter)5 2.0 mg/L 6.0 mg/L 3/Week Composite E
Dissolved Oxygen Daily average not less than 5.0 mg/L 3/Week Grab E
Fecal Coliform 200/100 ml 400/100 ml 3 /Week Grab E
Temperature CC) 3/Week Grab E
Conductivity(umhos) 3/Week Grab E
pH Between 6.0 and 9.0 Standard Units 3/Week Grab E
TKN (mg/1) Monitor and Report Weekly Composite E
NO2-N+NO3-N (mg/1) Monitor and Report Weekly Composite E
TN (mg/1)6 Monitor and Report Weekly Composite E
TN Load 7 Monitor and Report(lb/mo) Monthly Calculated E
42,784 lb/yr(effective 1/1/2016)8 Annually Calculated
TP(mg/1)6 Monitor and Report Weekly Composite E
Monitor and Report(lb/mo) Monthly Calculated E
TP Load 77,732 lb/yr(effective 1/1/2016)8 Annually Calculated
Total Copper 9(}tg/1) Quarterly Composite E
Total Zinc 9(.tg/1) Quarterly Composite E
Chronic Toxicity 10 Quarterly Composite E
Effluent Pollutant Scan Monitor and Report Footnote 11 Footnote 11 E
Footnotes:
1. See Condition A. (3) for Flow Considerations.
2. Beginning on December 21,2016 begin submitting discharge monitoring reports electronically using NC
DWR's eDMR application system. See Special Condition A.(10).
3. I:Influent. E:Effluent. See condition A. (4) for instream monitoring requirements.
4. The monthly average BOD5 and Total Suspended Solids concentrations shall not exceed 15% of the
respective influent value (85%removal).
5. Summer shall be defined as April 1 —October 31 with winter defined as the balance of the year.
6. For a given wastewater sample,TN =TKN +NO3-N +NO2-N,where TN is Total Nitrogen,TKN is
Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen,and NO3-N and NO2-N are Nitrate and Nitrite Nitrogen,respectively.TP is
Total Phosphorus.
Page 3 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
7. TN or TP Load is the mass quantity of Total Nitrogen or Total Phosphorus discharged in a given
period of time. See Special Condition A. (5) Calculation of TN or TP Loads.
P
8. Compliance with mass limits shall be determined in accordance with Special Condition A.(6) Annual
Limits for Total Nitrogen or Total Phosphorus.
9. Sample Copper and Zinc quarterly in conjunction with WET testing.
10. Chronic Toxicity(Ceriodaphnia) @ 66%,January,April,July and October;see condition A. (8).
11. The permittee shall perform three Effluent Pollutant Scans during the term of this permit. See Special
Condition A. (9).
THERE SHALL BE NO DISCHARGE OF FLOATING SOLIDS OR FOAM VISIBLE IN OTHER THAN TRACE AMOUNTS.
A. (2) EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS AND MONITORING REQUIREMENTS [15A NCAC 02B
.0400 et seq.,02B .0500 et seq.]
Beginning on the date monthly average flow increases above 90%of 2.0 MGD (1.8 MGD)1 and lasting until
permit expiration, the Permittee is authorized to discharge treated wastewater from Outfall 001. Such
discharges shall be limited and monitored2 by the Permittee as specified below:
EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
PARAMETER
Monthly Weekly Daily Measurement Sample
e Average Maximum Frequency Sample Type
Average $ q Location 3
Flow 3.0 MGD Continuous Recording I or E
Total Monthly Flow(MG) Monitor and Report Monthly Recorded or I or E
Calculated
BOD5 (summer)4.5 8.0 mg/L 12.0 mg/L Daily Composite I,E
BOD5(winter)4.5 18.0 mg/L 27.0 mg/L Daily Composite I,E
Total Suspended Solids 4 30.0 mg/L 45.0 mg/L Daily Composite I,E
NH3 as N(Summer)5 1.0 mg/L 3.0 mg/L Daily Composite E
NH3 as N(Winter)5 2.0 mg/L 6.0 mg/L Daily Composite E
Dissolved Oxygen Daily average not less than 5.0 mg/L Daily Grab E
Fecal Coliform 200/100 ml 400/100 ml Daily Grab E
Temperature CC) Daily Grab l
Conductivity(umhos) Daily Grab E
pH Between 6.0 and 9.0 Standard Units Daily Grab E
TKN (mg/I) Monitor and Report Weekly Composite E
NO2-N+NO3-N (mg/1) Monitor and Report Weekly Composite E
TN (mg/I)6 Monitor and Report Weekly Composite E
TN Load' Monitor and Report(1b/mo) Monthly Calculated E
42,784 lb/yr(effective 1/1/2016) ' Annually Calculated
TP(mg/I)6 Monitor and Report Weekly Composite E
TP Load 7 Monitor and Report(lb/mo) Monthly Calculated E
7,732 lb/yr(effective 1/1/2016) - Annually Calculated
Total Copper 9(p.g/1) Quarterly Composite I
Total Zinc 9 (tg/l) Quarterly Composite E
Chronic Toxicity 10 Quarterly Composite E
Effluent Pollutant Scan Monitor and Report Footnote 11 Footnote 11 E
Footnotes:
1. See Condition A. (3) for Flow Considerations.
Page 4 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
2. Beginning on December 21,2016 begin submitting discharge monitoring reports electronically using NC
DWR's eDMR application system. See Special Condition A. (10).
3. I:Influent. E: Effluent. See condition A. (4) for instream monitoring requirements.
4. The monthly average BOD5 and Total Suspended Solids concentrations shall not exceed 15% of the
respective influent value (85%removal).
5. Summer shall be defined as April 1 —October 31 with winter defined as the balance of the year.
6. For a given wastewater sample,TN =TKN +NO3-N +NO2-N,where TN is Total Nitrogen,TKN is
Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen,and NO3-N and NO2-N are Nitrate and Nitrite Nitrogen,respectively.TP is
Total Phosphorus.
7. TN or TP Load is the mass quantity of Total Nitrogen or Total Phosphorus discharged in a given
period of time. See Special Condition A. (5) Calculation of TN or TP Loads.
8. Compliance with mass limits shall be determined in accordance with Special Condition A.(6) Annual
Limits for Total Nitrogen or Total Phosphorus.
9. Sample Copper and Zinc quarterly in conjunction with WET testing.
10. Chronic Toxicity(Ceriodaphnia) @ 74%,January,April,July and October; see condition A. (8).
11. The permittee shall perform three Effluent Pollutant Scans during the term of this permit. See Special
Condition A. (9).
A. (3) FLOW MONITORING REQUIREMENTS [G.S. 143-215.66]
Each month,the facility shall evaluate the monthly average flow,expressed as MGD,for the previous
month. If the monthly average flowrate is equal to or greater than 1.8 MGD,the facility shall move up to
the 3.0 MGD flow regime on the permit. The facility shall call the Water Quality Program Supervisor at
the Raleigh Regional Office at(919) 791-4200 and inform him or her of the flow regime change,so that the
BIMS database can be updated. The flow limit does not go back down if the Monthly Average flow
decreases.
A. (4) INSTREAM MONITORING REQUIREMENTS [15A NCAC 02B .0500 et seq.]
Instream monitoring is required for the following parameters at the locations specified:
EFFLUENT Sample
Measurement Frequency uency Sample Type
q p YP
CHARACTERISTICS Locationl
June-Sept 3/week
Dissolved Oxygen Grab U,D
October-May 1/week
June-Sept 3/week
Temperature (°C) Grab U,D
October-May 1/week
June-Sept 3/week
Conductivity (umhos/cm) Grab U,D
October-May 1/week
Footnotes:
1. U - Upstream at NC 1116,D-Downstream at NC 1114
Instream monitoring requirements are waived as long as the Permittee maintains membership in the Tar-
Pamlico Basin Association.If Permittee ceases membership,then all instream monitoring requirements
specified in this permit are immediately reinstated.
Page 5 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
A. (5) CALCULATION OF TOTAL NITROGEN AND TOTAL PHOSPHORUS LOADS [G.S.
143-215.1(b)]
(a.) The Permittee shall calculate monthly and annual TN Loads as follows:
(i.) Monthly TN (or TP) Load (lb/mo) =TN (or TP) x TMF x 8.34
where:
TN or TP = the average Total Nitrogen or Total Phosphorus concentration(mg/L) of
the composite samples collected during the month
TMF = the Total Monthly Flow of wastewater discharged during the month
(MG/mo)
8.34 = conversion factor, from(mg/L x MG) to pounds
(ii.) Annual TN (or TP) Load (lb/yr) = Sum of the 12 Monthly TN (or TP)Loads for the
calendar year
(b.) The Permittee shall report monthly Total Nitrogen and Total Phosphorus results (mg/L and lb/mo)
in the appropriate discharge monitoring report for each month and shall report each calendar year's
results (lb/yr)with the December report for that year.
A. (6) ANNUAL LIMITS FOR TOTAL NITROGEN OR TOTAL PHOSPHORUS [G.S. 143-
215.1(b)]
(a.) Total Nitrogen(TN) and Total Phosphorus (TP) allocations and load limits for NPDES dischargers
in the Tar-Pamlico River basin are annual limits and apply on a calendar year basis.
(b.) For any given calendar year,the Permittee shall be in compliance with the annual TN (or TP) Load
limit in this Permit if:
(i.) the Permittee's annual TN (or TP) Load is less than or equal to the effective limit,or
(ii.) the Permittee is a Co-Permittee Member of a compliance association.
(c.) If the Permittee is not a co-permittee member of a compliance association and the Permittee's
cumulative annual TN (or TP) discharge exceeds the effective TN (or TP)Load limit in this permit at
any point during the calendar year,the Permittee is in violation of its TN (or TP) Load limit for the
remainder of the calendar year,and each day of continuing violation shall constitute a separate
violation. Compliance with annual limits shall be determined separately for each calendar year,and an
exceedance in one year does not carry forward to subsequent years.
(d.) The TN (or TP)Load limit in this Permit(if any) may be modified as the result of allowable changes
in the Permittee's allocations.
(i.) Allowable changes include those resulting from purchase of TN (or TP) allocation from an
authorized mitigation banker,the Ecosystem Enhancement Program,or other source allowed
under applicable regulations;purchase,sale,trade,or lease of allocation between the Permittee
and other dischargers;and other transactions approved by the Division and consistent with the
Tar-Pamlico River Basin Association Agreement,as revised.
(ii.) The Permittee may request a modification of the TN (or TP)Load limit in this Permit to reflect
allowable changes in its allocation(s). Upon receipt of timely and proper application,the
Division will modify the permit as appropriate and in accordance with state and federal program
requirements.
(iii.) Changes in TN (or TP) limits become effective on January 1 of the year following permit
modification.The Division must receive application no later than August 31 for changes
proposed for the following calendar year.
(iv.) Application shall be sent to:
Page 6 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
NCDEQ /Wastewater Permits Branch
Attn:Tar-Pamlico River Basin Coordinator
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh,NC 27699-1617
(e.) If the Permittee is a member and co-permittee of an approved compliance association on January 1 of
a given year,its TN and TP discharges during that year are governed by that association's group
NPDES permit and the limits therein.
(i.) The Permittee shall be considered a Co-Permittee Member for any given calendar year in which
it is identified as such in Appendix A of the association's group NPDES permit.
(ii.) Association roster(s) and members'TN and TP allocations will be updated annually and in
accordance with state and federal program requirements.
(iii.) If the Permittee intends to join or leave a compliance association,the Division must be notified
of the proposed action in accordance with the procedures defined in the association's NPDES
permit.
(A) Upon receipt of timely and proper notification,the Division will modify the permit as
appropriate and in accordance with state and federal program requirements.
(B) Membership changes in a compliance association become effective on January 1 of the
year following modification of the association's permit.
(f.) The TN and TP monitoring and reporting requirements in this Permit remain in effect throughout the
term of the Permit and are not affected by the Permittee's membership in a compliance association.
A. (7)NUTRIENT ALLOCATIONS [G.S. 143-215.1(b)]
(a.) Total Nitrogen(TN) and Total Phosphorus (TP) allocations represent the maximum TN and TP
loads that a discharger or group of dischargers is potentially allowed under the Tar-Pamlico nutrient
management strategy.Allocations are not enforceable limits but are the basis for TN and TP limits
established in individual or group NPDES permits.
(b.) The allocations originally assigned to the Tar-Pamlico Basin Association members total 889,274 lb/yr
(404,274 kg/yr)TN and 160,372 lb/yr(73,060 kg/yr)TP.These group allocations have been divided
among the members in proportion to the maximum permitted flow in each member's permit;that is,
Individual Allocation(TP or TN) = Individual Permitted Flow(MGD) x Group Allocation,TPBA(TN or TP)
Total Permitted Flow,TPBA(MGD)
For the purposes of this distribution,individual permitted flows for the Association members are
those in effect as of July 2014 and result in a Total Permitted Flow of 62.495 MGD.
(c.) The following table lists,for information purposes only,the TN and TP allocations assigned to,
acquired by,or transferred to the Permittee in accordance with the Tar-Pamlico River Basin Phase IV
Agreement.Applicable TN or TP limits are established in the Effluent Limitations conditions of this
permit or in the NPDES permit of a compliance association of which the Permittee is a Co-Permittee
Member.
Page 7 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
ALLOCATION ALLOCATION AMOUNT
SOURCE DATE STATUS
TYPE (lb/yr) (kg/Yr)
Tar-Pamlico River
Total Nitrogen Basin Phase IV 7/9/2015 42,784 19,406 Active
Agreement
Tar-Pamlico River
Total Phosphorus Basin Phase IV 7/9/2015 7,732 3,507 Active
Agreement
(d.) Any addition,deletion,or modification of the listed allocation(s) (other than to correct typographical
errors) or any change from Reserve to Active status of any of the listed allocations shall be considered
a major modification of this permit and shall be subject to the public review process afforded such
modifications under state and federal rules.
A. (8) CHRONIC TOXICITY PERMIT LIMIT (QUARTERLY) [15A NCAC 02B .0200 et seq.]
The effluent discharge shall at no time exhibit observable inhibition of reproduction or significant mortality
to Ceriodaphnia dubia at an effluent concentration of 66% (2 MGD) or 74% (3 MGD).
The permit holder shall perform at a minimum,quarterly monitoring using test procedures outlined in the
"North Carolina Ceriodaphnia Chronic Effluent Bioassay Procedure,"Revised December 2010,or subsequent
versions or"North Carolina Phase II Chronic Whole Effluent Toxicity Test Procedure" (Revised-
December 2010) or subsequent versions.The tests will be performed during the months of January,April,
July,and October. These months signify the first month of each three-month toxicity testing quarter
assigned to the facility. Effluent sampling for this testing must be obtained during representative effluent
discharge and shall be performed at the NPDES permitted final effluent discharge below all treatment
processes.
If the test procedure performed as the first test of any single quarter results in a failure or ChV
below the permit limit,then multiple-concentration testing shall be performed at a minimum,in
each of the two following months as described in"North Carolina Phase II Chronic Whole Effluent
Toxicity Test Procedure" (Revised-December 2010) or subsequent versions.
All toxicity testing results required as part of this permit condition will be entered on the Effluent Discharge
Monitoring Form(MR-1) for the months in which tests were performed,using the parameter code TGP3B
for the pass/fail results and THP3B for the Chronic Value. Additionally,DWR Form AT-3 (original) is to
be sent to the following address:
Attention: North Carolina Division of Water Resources
Water Sciences Section/Aquatic Toxicology Branch
1623 Mail Service Center
Raleigh,North Carolina 27699-1623
Completed Aquatic Toxicity Test Forms shall be filed with the Water Sciences Section no later than 30 days
after the end of the reporting period for which the report is made.
Test data shall be complete,accurate,include all supporting chemical/physical measurements and all
concentration/response data,and be certified by laboratory supervisor and ORC or approved designate
Page 8 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
signature. Total residual chlorine of the effluent toxicity sample must be measured and reported if chlorine
is employed for disinfection of the waste stream.
Should there be no discharge of flow from the facility during a month in which toxicity monitoring is
required,the permittee will complete the information located at the top of the aquatic toxicity(Al) test form
indicating the facility name,permit number,pipe number,county,and the month/year of the report with the
notation of"No Flow"in the comment area of the form. The report shall be submitted to the Water
Sciences Section at the address cited above.
Should the permittee fail to monitor during a month in which toxicity monitoring is required,monitoring
will be required during the following month.Assessment of toxicity compliance is based on the toxicity
testing quarter,which is the three month time interval that begins on the first day of the month in which
toxicity testing is required by this permit and continues until the final day of the third month.
Should any test data from this monitoring requirement or tests performed by the North Carolina Division of
Water Resources indicate potential impacts to the receiving stream,this permit may be re-opened and
modified to include alternate monitoring requirements or limits.
NOTE: Failure to achieve test conditions as specified in the cited document, such as minimum control
organism survival,minimum control organism reproduction,and appropriate environmental controls,shall
constitute an invalid test and will require immediate follow-up testing to be completed no later than the last
day of the month following the month of the initial monitoring.
Page 9 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
A. (9) EFFLUENT POLLUTANT SCAN [G.S. 143-215.1(b)]
The Permittee shall perform a total of three (3) Effluent Pollutant Scans for all parameters listed below. One
scan must be performed in each of the following years: 2016,2017, and 2018. Analytical methods shall be in
accordance with 40 CFR Part 136 and shall be sufficiently sensitive to determine whether parameters are present
in concentrations greater than applicable standards and criteria. Samples should be collected with one quarterly
toxicity test each year,and must represent seasonal variation[i.e.,do not sample in the same quarter every year].
Unless otherwise indicated,metals shall be analyzed as "total recoverable."
Ammonia(as N) Trans-I,2-dichloroethylene Bis (2-chloroethyl) ether
Chlorine (total residual,TRC) 1,1-dichloroethylene Bis (2-chloroisopropyl) ether
Dissolved oxygen 1,2-dichloropropane Bis (2-ethylhexyl)phthalate
Nitrate/Nitrite 1,3-dichloropropylene 4-bromophenyl phenyl ether
Kjeldahl nitrogen Ethylbenzene Butyl benzyl phthalate
Oil and grease Methyl bromide 2-chloronaphthalene
Phosphorus Methyl chloride 4-chlorophenyl phenyl ether
Total dissolved solids Methylene chloride Chrysene
Hardness 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane Di-n-butyl phthalate
Antimony Tetrachloroethylene Di-n-octyl phthalate
Arsenic Toluene Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene
Beryllium 1,1,1-trichloroethane 1,2-dichlorobenzene
Cadmium 1,1,2-trichloroethane 1,3-dichlorobenzene
Chromium Trichloroethylene 1,4-dichlorobenzene
Copper Vinyl chloride 3,3-dichlorobenzidine
Lead Acid-extractable compounds: Diethyl phthalate
Mercury(EPA Method 1631E) P-chloro-m-cresol Dimethyl phthalate
Nickel 2-chlorophenol 2,4-dinitrotoluene
Selenium 2,4-dichlorophenol 2,6-dinitrotoluene
Silver 2,4-dimethylphenol 1,2-diphenylhydrazine
Thallium 4,6-dinitro-o-cresol Fluoranthene
Zinc 2,4-dinitrophenol Fluorene
Cyanide 2-nitrophenol Hexachlorobenzene
Total phenolic compounds 4-nitrophenol Hexachlorobutadiene
Volatile organic compounds: Pentachlorophenol Hexachlorocyclo-pentadiene
Acrolein Phenol Hexachloroethane
Acrylonitrile 2,4,6-trichlorophenol Indeno(1,2,3-cd)pyrene
Benzene Base-neutral compounds: Isophorone
Bromoform Acenaphthene Naphthalene
Carbon tetrachloride Acenaphthylene Nitrobenzene
Chlorobenzene Anthracene N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine
Chlorodibromomethane Benzidine N-nitrosodimethylamine
Chloroethane Benzo(a)anthracene N-nitrosodiphenylamine
2-chloroethylvinyl ether Benzo(a)pyrene Phenanthrene
Chloroform 3,4 benzofluoranthene Pyrene
Dichlorobromomethane Benzo(ghi)perylene 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene
1,1-dichloroethane Benzo(k)fluoranthene
1,2-dichloroethane Bis (2-chloroethoxy) methane
Reporting. Test results shall be reported on DWR Form-A MR-PPA1 (or in a form approved by the
Director) by December 31st of each designated sampling year. The report shall be submitted to the
Page 10 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
following address: NCDEQ / DWR/ Central Files,1617 Mail Service Center, Raleigh,North
Carolina 27699-1617.
Additional Toxicity Testing Requirements for Municipal Permit Renewal. Please note that Municipal
facilities that are subject to the Effluent Pollutant Scan requirements listed above are also subject to
additional toxicity testing requirements specified in Federal Regulation 40 CFR 122.210)(5). The US EPA
requires four(4) toxicity tests for a test organism other than the test species currently required in this permit.
The multiple species tests should be conducted either quarterly for a 12-month period prior to submittal of
the permit renewal application,or four tests performed at least annually in the four and one half year period
prior to the application. These tests shall be performed for acute or chronic toxicity,whichever is specified
in this permit. The multiple species toxicity test results shall be filed with the Aquatic Toxicology Branch at
the following address:
North Carolina Division of Water Resources
Water Sciences Section/Aquatic Toxicology Branch
1623 Mail Service Center
Raleigh,North Carolina 27699-1623
Contact the Division's Aquatic Toxicology Branch at 919-743-8401 for guidance on conducting the
additional toxicity tests and reporting requirements. Results should also be summarized in Part E (Toxicity
Testing Data) of EPA Municipal Application Form 2A,when submitting the permit renewal application to
the NPDES Permitting Unit.
A. (10) ELECTRONIC REPORTING OF DISCHARGE MONITORING REPORTS [G.S. 143-
215.1(b)]
Federal regulations require electronic submittal of all discharge monitoring reports (DMRs) and program
reports and specify that,if a state does not establish a system to receive such submittals,then permittees
must submit monitoring data and reports electronically to the Environmental Protection Agency(EPA).
The final NPDES Electronic Reporting Rule was adopted and became effective on December 21,2015.
NOTE: This special condition supplements or supersedes the following sections within Part II of this
permit(Standard Conditions for NPDES Permits):
• Section B. (11.) Signatory Requirements
• Section D. (2.) Reporting
• Section D. (6.) Records Retention
• Section E. (5.) Monitoring Reports
1. Reporting Requirements [Supersedes Section D. (2.) and Section E. (5.) (a)]
Effective December 21,2016,the permittee shall report discharge monitoring data electronically using
the NC DWR's Electronic Discharge Monitoring Report(eDMR) internet application.
Monitoringresults obtained
ed during the previous month(s) shall be summarized for each month and
submitted electronically using eDMR. The eDMR system allows permitted facilities to enter monitoring
data and submit DMRs electronically using the internet. Until such time that the state's eDMR
application is compliant with EPA's Cross-Media Electronic Reporting Regulation(CROMERR),
permittees will be required to submit all discharge monitoring data to the state electronically using
eDMR and will be required to complete the eDMR submission by printing,signing,and submitting one
signed original and a copy of the computer printed eDMR to the following address:
Page 11 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
NC DEQ /Division of Water Resources /Water Quality Permitting Section
ATTENTION: Central Files
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh,North Carolina 27699-1617
If a permittee is unable to use the eDMR system due to a demonstrated hardship or due to the facility
being physically located in an area where less than 10 percent of the households have broadband access,
then a temporary waiver from the NPDES electronic reporting requirements may be granted and
discharge monitoring data may be submitted on paper DMR forms (MR 1, 1.1,2,3) or alternative forms
approved by the Director. Duplicate signed copies shall be submitted to the mailing address above. See
"How to Request a Waiver from Electronic Reporting"section below.
Regardless of the submission method,the first DMR is due on the last day of the month following the
issuance of the permit or in the case of a new facility,on the last day of the month following the
commencement of discharge.
Starting on December 21,2020,the permittee must electronically report the following compliance
monitoring data and reports,when applicable:
• Sewer Overflow/Bypass Event Reports;
• Pretreatment Program Annual Reports;and
• Clean Water Act(CWA) Section 316(b)Annual Reports.
The permittee may seek an electronic reporting waiver from the Division(see"How to Request a
Waiver from Electronic Reporting"section below).
2. How to Request a Waiver from Electronic Reporting
The permittee may seek a temporary electronic reporting waiver from the Division. To obtain an
electronic reporting waiver,a permittee must first submit an electronic reporting waiver request to the
Division. Requests for temporary electronic reporting waivers must be submitted in writing to the
Division for written approval at least sixty(60) days prior to the date the facility would be required
under this permit to begin submitting monitoring data and reports. The duration of a temporary waiver
shall not exceed 5 years and shall thereupon expire. At such time,monitoring data and reports shall be
submitted electronically to the Division unless the permittee re-applies for and is granted a new
temporary electronic reporting waiver by the Division. Approved electronic reporting waivers are not
transferrable. Only permittees with an approved reporting waiver request may submit monitoring data
and reports on paper to the Division for the period that the approved reporting waiver request is
effective.
Information on eDMR and the application for a temporary electronic reporting waiver are found on the
following web page:
http://portal.ncdenr.org/web/wq/admin/bog/ipu/edmr
3. Signatory Requirements [Supplements Section B. (11.) (b) and Supersedes Section B. (11.) (d)]
All eDMRs submitted to the permit issuing authority shall be signed by a person described in Part II,
Section B. (11.)(a) or by a duly authorized representative of that person as described in Part II,Section
B. (11.)(b). A person,and not a position,must be delegated signatory authority for eDMR reporting
purposes.
Page 12 of 14

Permit No.NC0069311
For eDMR submissions,the person signing and submitting the DMR must obtain an eDMR user
account and login credentials to access the eDMR system. For more information on North Carolina's
eDMR system,registering for eDMR and obtaining an eDMR user account,please visit the following
web page:
http://portal.ncdenr.org/web/wq/admin/bog/ipu/edmr
Certification. Any person submitting an electronic DMR using the state's eDMR system shall make the
following certification [40 CFR 122.22]. NO OTHER STATEMENTS OF CERTIFICATION WILL
BE ACCEPTED:
"I certify, under penalg of law, that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in
accordance with a ystem designed to assure that quakfied personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted.
Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the
information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware
that there are significant penalties for submitting false information,including the possibility of fines and imprisonment for
knowing violations."
4. Records Retention [Supplements Section D. (6.)]
The permittee shall retain records of all Discharge Monitoring Reports,including eDMR submissions.
These records or copies shall be maintained for a period of at least 3 years from the date of the report.
This period may be extended by request of the Director at any time [40 CFR 122.41].
A. (11) MERCURY MINIMIZATION PLAN [G.S. 143-215.1(b)]
The permittee shall develop and implement a mercury minimization plan during this permit term. The MMP shall be
developed within 180 days of the NPDES Permit Effective Date,and shall be available for inspection on-site. A
sample MMP was developed through a stakeholder review process and has been placed on the Division website for
guidance (http://portal.ncdenr.org/web/wq/swp/ps/npdes,under Model Mercury Minimization Plan). The MMP
should place emphasis on identification of mercury contributors and goals for reduction. Results shall be summarized
and submitted with the next permit renewal. Performance of the Mercury Minimization Plan will meet the
requirements of the TMDL(Total Maximum Daily Load) for mercury approved by USEPA on October 12,
2012,unless and until a Waste Load Allocation specific to this facility is developed and this NPDES permit is
amended to require further actions to address the Waste Load Allocation.
•
Page 13 of 14

Permit No. NC0069311
l,
I % • `
•
. • / I
..,n / /
t. % /
.
1z '
1 / / -�,
! '
• I .
i Hwy 56 • •
•
l ' t
i
•
• 1.,
Outfall 001
... \ i ,
1'
1
r i
1
j / ', •
I i f
it ' : Hwy 1105 /
i= /•� /
/
•/
,„ ;',: /
�r �( ' .�. --I
I•
1 1„j / ` — i
r . �.
J • / (_.
4_ I. . /
Franklin County WWTP Facility Location (not to scale)
Receiving Stream: Cedar Creek Stream Class: C-NSW N
Permitted Flow: 2.0/3.0 MGD
Drainage Basin: Tar-Pamlico River Basin
Sub-Basin: 03-03-01 Latitude: 36°04' 12" N
State Grid: Franklinton Longitude: 78°25'01" w NPDES Permit NC0069311- Franklin County
Page 14 of 14

ATTACHMENT TO APPLICATION
FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT
PERMIT
SECTION 3.F - ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS
�'I

FRANKLIN COUNTY
2019 WWTP REHABILITATION
DWI Project No.: C370515-04
FINAL SPECIFICATIONS - FOR REVIEW
PURPOSES ONLY- NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
.Q s� 1.
o3a
INEI.W
z#fr /D,C)aiC)
Adam P. Kiker, .E.
Prepared by:
nc.
r "` 1
LKC Engineering, PLLC
140 Aqua Shed Court
Aberdeen, NC 28315
[phone]
License # P-1095
April 2020

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
FRANKLIN COUNTY
2019 WWTP REHABILITATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents
Special Provisions
Section 01110 Summary of Work
Section 01111 Sequence of Construction
Section 01330 Submittal Procedures
Section 01450 Quality Control
Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01575 Temporary Environmental Controls
Section 01770 Contract Closeout
Section 01781 Operation and Maintenance Data
Section 02220 Site Demolition
Section 02302 Excavation,Backfilling,and Compacting
Section 02315 Excavation and Fill
Section 02530 Sanitary Sewerage
Section 02540 Valves and Accessories
Section 02921 Turf
Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metal
Section 09900 Painting and Coating
Section 11081 Aeration and Digester Blowers
Section 11200 Submersible Pumps
Section 11280 Water Control Gates
Section 11375 Triple A Basin Process Equipment
Section 11376 Aerobic Digester Equipment
Section 11396 Magnetic Flow Meters
Subsurface Investigation Report

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
FRANKLIN COUNTY,NC
2019 WWTP REHABILITATION
Special Provisions
01. BIDDING/COMPLETION TIME: Work shall be commenced with adequate forces on the date
stipulated in the Notice to Proceed and the Project shall be substantially completed within the
timeframe stipulated in the Agreement.
02. WARRANTY PERIOD: A warranty period shall begin on the date of the substantial
completion and extend for one year. Substantial completion shall be defined as the date at which
the entire Project is able to be placed into service. Partial substantial completions will not be
issued.
The warranty shall include the site cleanup and restoration. The Contractor shall provide
acknowledgement of the warranty in the form of a letter signed by an individual with signing
authority submitted with the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
03. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: If the project remains incomplete after the established time of
completion, the liquidated damages sustained by the OWNER shall be as stipulated in the
Agreement. The Contractor will be liable for additional inspection costs incurred by the OWNER
for the time by which contract time is exceeded in the amount as specified in the Agreement. The
liquidated damages shall not be punitive damages but shall be charged based only on expenses
incurred by the OWNER.
04. BID ITEM FOR MOBILIZATION, INSURANCE, AND BONDING: The Bid Form
contains a lump sum items for Mobilization, Insurance, and Bonding. This item is intended to
cover the upfront administrative costs associated with contract execution and resource preparation
prior to construction. The lump sum amount may not exceed 3% of the total bid amount.
Exceeding 3%of the total bid amount may result in the rejection of the bid.
05. UNIT PRICES FOR UNSUITABLE SOIL CONDITIONS AT THE NEW DIGESTER:
The geotechnical report indicates the presence of potentially unsuitable soils to cause differential
settlement conditions under the new digester. If encountered,those soils will need to be removed
and replaced with compacted select fill.
The Bid Form contains two unit prices pertaining to this condition: (1) removing and disposing
of any soils deemed unsuitable, and (2) the delivery and placement of select backfill. Both unit
prices shall be measured based on the in-situ(placed)volume.
The Contractor is responsible for providing an onsite geotechnical engineer to inspect the
excavation and provide input on the removal of unsuitable soils and the placement of select
backfill.
06. ONSITE SUPERINTENDENT: The Contractor shall be required to provide a full-time, onsite
superintendent throughout the length of the contract. The onsite superintendent shall be the
primary contact of the Owner and the Engineer and shall be responsible for keeping an up-to-date
project schedule,knowing current progress of the construction,and shall be available to attend all
progress meetings associated with the projects.
SP- 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
07. EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the existing site
conditions prior to bidding the project. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining a
workable site condition during the execution of this contract.
08. LOCATION OF UTILITIES: Such information as is included in the drawings and
specifications relative to the identity and location of existing underground utility facilities is the
best information presently available. The Engineer assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of
their location or that all utilities are shown. The Contractor shall verify the location of the
existing utilities in the work area prior to submitting a bid. Existing utilities and obstructions that
will be encountered during construction shall be located and their elevations determined in
advance of construction.
09. UTILITY INSTALLATION INSIDE NCDOT RIGHT-OF-WAY: Except where shown on
the drawings,the force main shall be installed entirely inside the DOT right-of-way. Any damage
to property outside the right-of-way, including landscaping, is the responsibility of the
Contractor. If small trees, shrubs, flowers, grass, or any other landscape feature is damaged or
killed during construction, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to replace those items to the
same condition as before construction began.
10. DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS: Fittings and specials for buried piping shall be Ductile Iron
restrained joint conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10-93 and ANSI/AWWA
C111/A21.11-95. No push-on fittings will be allowed. Compact fittings conforming to
ANSI/AWWA C153/A2.5-94 are acceptable. All fittings shall be restrained joint by using
Mega-Lugs and shall utilize thrust blocking according to the details. The cost for fitting restraint
shall not be paid for directly but shall be included in the cost of the fitting.
11. PIPE SEPARATION: The following minimum pipe separations will be maintained: 18 inches
vertical separation between crossing of sanitary sewer(including force main)and water main,and
10 feet horizontal separation between sanitary sewer (including force main) and water mains. If
these separations cannot be maintained, ductile iron pipe will be used 10 feet either side of
crossing and along entire length of line less than 10 horizontal feet or 18"vertical separation from
water mains. The Contractor shall receive approval from the Engineer in the field before
payment will be made at the ductile iron prices.
12. UTILITY CROSSINGS: The Contractor shall be responsible for the location in the field(prior
to construction) of the exact location and elevation of existing water, sanitary sewer, and storm
drainage crossings. Any conflicts that may arise from this investigation shall be directed to the
Engineer immediately.
13. SELECT BACKFILL: Excavated rock or any other unsuitable material shall not be used as
backfill material. The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining suitable material for
backfilling in areas where rock or other unsuitable material is removed from the trench. The
contractor shall be responsible for removing all rock and other material deemed unsuitable for
backfill from the project site. Over excavation to remove unsuitable material shall be considered
in the unit price for the water and sewer pipe.
14. ASPHALT REPLACEMENT: The Contractor will be required to saw cut in straight lines any
existing asphalt that has to be removed and repair these sections, in accordance with North
Carolina Department of Transportation Standards. Payment for the asphalt open cut patch shall
be at the unit price set forth in the Schedule of Bid Items the width of the open cut and patch shall
be a maximum of 8'.
SP-2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
15. CONCRETE FOR BLOCKING: Concrete for blocking shall be used on all fittings as shown
on the project details, and the cost for the blocking restraint shall be included in the bid cost for
the fitting. All fittings shown on the plans shall be restrained joint and shall utilize concrete thrust
blocks. Only 3,000 PSI shall be used for blocking. Dry pre-bagged mix shall not be allowed on
this project. A blocking schedule is provided on the detail sheets of the plans.
16. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AT THE JOB SITE: The Contractor
shall maintain, in readable condition at the job site, one complete set of working drawings and
specifications for the project,including all shop drawings. Such drawings and specifications shall
be available for use by the OWNER or his representative at all times. This set shall be marked or
noted acceptable to the Engineer, in order to reflect as-built conditions. The changes indicating
such conditions shall be kept current at all times. As-built drawings shall be furnished to the
engineer at the end of each pay period. No payment will be made in that billing cycle until As-
Builts are approved by the Engineer and Owner, a sufficient number of drawings will be
provided to accommodate this process.
17. SUBMITTALS: The Contractor shall obtain approval for all shop drawings and submittals from
the Engineer prior to beginning any installation work. A complete submittal register is contained
in these specifications.
18. VIDEOTAPING: The Contractor is required to videotape an area prior to beginning work in
that area. This video shall be supplied to the OWNER and Engineer. The video shall serve to
document pre-existing conditions of the site. This video will protect the OWNER and Contractor
from claims during construction.
19. TESTING: The Engineer's and Owner's representative shall be present at all pressure tests.
20. COMPACTION OF TRENCHES: All trenches shall be compacted to 95% density. Any
density test requested by the Engineer shall be paid for by the Contractor. All trenches shall be
compacted by mechanical means. Compaction shall be in accordance with AASHTO T-99
modified.
21. SHOP DRAWINGS: Shop drawings shall be submitted for all metal castings including manhole
rings and covers, valve boxes, and catch basin frames and grates. Manufacturer's certifications
shall be submitted to the Engineer certifying that all pipe meets the project specifications.
Concrete mix designs, the detail specifications and bituminous concrete plant mix designs of the
detail specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. None of the above listed
materials shall be used on the projects unless the Engineer has given the necessary approval for
that particular material. The Contractor shall submit six sets of all shop drawings, certifications,
and mix designs required within this contract.
22. ROCK EXCAVATION: All excavation for the project shall be considered unclassified.
Provisions for rock excavation shall not be paid for directly but must be included in the bid.
23. PROGRESS MEETINGS: Monthly progress meetings shall be held to review the progress of
work and to discuss problems which might arise. These meetings shall be attended by the
contractor's foreman and project manager, the Engineer and his resident inspector, and any
representatives of the OWNER wishing to attend. These meetings shall be scheduled by the
Engineer at a date and time to be agreed upon by all to attend. Attendance of the contractor's
superintendent and project manager is mandatory.
SP-3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
24. TRACER WIRE: Tracer wire shall be required for all linear utility installations.
A. Locator wire is to be standard No. 12 gauge coated copper wire.
B. Bury locator wire immediately above pipe.
C. Location wire connections are to be a water tight connection. This may be done by using
Twister DB Plus Waterproof wire connectors or an approved equal.
D. The cost for this tracer wire shall not be paid for directly but shall be considered incidental to
cost of water or sewer main installation.
E. Five feet of tracer wire shall be pulled into each in-line valve box as shown in the detail
drawings for gate valve installations. Tracer Wire installation shall be performed in a manner
not to cause any operational problems with the valve nor causing breaks in the locator wire.
SP-4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 01111
SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SITE WORK
All erosion control devices must be installed prior to beginning any clearing, grubbing, or grading. Upon
inspection of the erosion control devices by the Engineer, the general construction may commence as
described herein.
1.2 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor must adhere to the sequence provided below.
It is not explicitly stated below; however, all new electrical systems necessary for the operation of the
new process must be completed for each item. No electrical demolition for existing systems may occur
until that particular item is no longer a part of the treatment process.
When filling the new concrete structures for testing the Contractor may utilize the reclaimed water
system. Reclaimed water will be provided at no charge. Tees and valves may be installed in the
reclaimed water lines at the Contractor's discretion to allow for easier filling of the tanks. Any such
improvements must be reviewed and approved by the Owner and the Engineer prior to being
implemented.
Any variation from the sequence described above, either significant or minor, must receive written
approval from the Engineer. A schedule must be provided to the Owner and Engineer prior to beginning
construction, and upon any changes or modifications to the schedule, an updated schedule must be
provided.
1. Blower Building
Construction on the blower building will need to be completed before Treatment Unit #2 is
completed and online. The existing blower building in the same location as the new building is
not in service and can be demolished at any time. The existing blowers shall be removed and
disposed of by the Contractor.
The new blower building, including all new electrical equipment associated with the operation of
the blowers and control of the Triple A basins, and all air piping, must be completed before the
new Triple A basin comes online. The yard air piping must be installed going westward to the
14"x12"tee and valves.
2. Proposed Treatment Unit#2
a. All work must be completed on Treatment Unit #2 before any work begins on #1. Unit
#2 may be isolated using the existing gates at the grit unit.
The Contractor must pay close attention to the notes on the drawings (Sheet C-5)
pertaining to supporting the existing grit unit and the sequence for demolishing the
existing steel AAA Basin.
SECTION 01111 -Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
The Contractor is responsible for completely emptying and cleaning the inside of Unit#2
in preparation for the construction. The existing drain lines for the basin enter the side
wall, not the floor, so provisions will be necessary to remove the sludge and liquids from
the basin. All liquids and organic solids can be sent back to the head of the plant through
the drainage system. Inorganic solids such as sand and grit must be hauled off-site by the
Contractor.
At any time after the grit unit support system is installed, the Contractor may begin
demolition of the steel tank walls and interior components. All metal and process
equipment shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. The Contractor is
responsible for maintaining a safe working environment as the tank is being demolished.
b. After the old tank is demolished and cleaned, construction may begin on the new
concrete walls and process equipment. All items must be tested in accordance with the
specifications before Unit#2 is placed back into service. This includes the new blowers,
and all process controls equipment and instrumentation and the necessary training as
required in the specifications.
c. When it is ready to be placed into service, Unit #2 can be filled using the plant influent
flow by opening the gate at the grit unit and allowing the influent flow to enter the basin.
The Contractor must allow for Unit #2 to operate for a minimum of three consecutive
days without disruption before work begins on Unit#1.
3. Treatment Unit#1
After successful operation of Unit#2 and the new Blower Building, the improvements may begin
on Unit#1.
a. The Contractor is responsible for draining, emptying, and cleaning the inside of Unit #1
as necessary for construction efforts. The existing drains are functional. Provisions will
be necessary to remove the liquids and solids from the basin, disposed of using the same
methods as Unit#2 above.
b. All new components in Unit #1, including all new process equipment, instrumentation,
and controls systems, must be completed and tested before the unit is placed back into
service. This includes the training requirements as described in the specifications.
c. When it is ready to be placed into service, the unit can be filled using the influent flow
from the grit unit by opening the gate on the influent line.
4. New Digester
The new digester may be constructed at any time, independent of the Treatment Unit #2 and #1
efforts.
a. The existing structures (old chlorine contact basin, old cascade aerator, etc.) must be
demolished first.
b. The new digester must be completed, and all systems tested, before being placed online.
This includes all process piping, air piping, and drain lines around the digester.
SECTION 01111 -Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
c. The new blower building, air piping, and digester process equipment, instrumentation,
and control systems must be completed and tested before the digester is placed into
service.
d. When the digester is ready, work may begin on the WAS Pump Station. The WAS work
cannot begin before the new digester is ready. The 12" activated sludge bypass must be
installed prior to beginning work in the WAS Pump Station. The existing 18" RAS line
from the clarifiers can be taken offline for a maximum of 4 hours to allow for the
installation of the 18"x 12"tee, 18"plug valve,and 12"piping&plug valve.
After the new WAS pumps are installed and tested, and all other items at the WAS
station completed, the new 8" WAS piping can connect to the existing WAS pipe,
directing the sludge into the new digester.
e. The Contractor must allow for five consecutive days of digester operation without
disruption before demolition begins on the old digester.
5. General
All general construction on the site may proceed at the Contractor's discretion. Any work that
would disrupt the treatment process must follow the sequence above, even if it is not explicitly
stated above.
1.3 SYSTEM STARTUP AND TESTING
Each mechanical component must be started and tested in accordance with the specifications and to the
manufacturer's recommendation prior to being placed into service.
SECTION 01111 -Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 Submittal
Shop drawings,product data, samples, and administrative submittals presented for review and approval.
1.1.2 Types of Submittals
All submittals are classified as indicated in the paragraph "Schedule of Submittal Descriptions". The
submittals also are grouped as follows:
a. Shop drawings: As used in this section, drawings, schedules, diagrams, and other data
prepared specifically for this Contract,by the Contractor or through the Contractor by way of a
subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower tier contractor, to illustrate a
portion of the work.
b. Product data: Preprinted material such as illustrations, standard schedules, performance
charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's descriptive literature, catalog data,
and other data to illustrate a portion of the work,but not prepared exclusively for this Contract.
c. Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or workmanship
that are physically identical to a portion of the work, illustrating a portion of the work or
establishing standards for evaluation of the appearance of the finished work or both.
d. Administrative submittals: Data presented for reviews and approval to ensure that the
administrative requirements of the project are adequately met but not to ensure directly that the
work is in accordance with the design concept and in compliance with the contract documents.
1.1.3 Approving Authority
The person authorized to approve a submittal is the Engineer.
1.1.4 Work
As used in this section, on-and-off-site construction required by the Contract documents, including labor
necessary to produce the construction and materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to
be incorporated in such construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of this section.
1.2.1 SD-18 Records
1.2.1.1 Submittal Register
SECTION 01330-Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
State for each submittal the Contractor's planned submittal date. Submit with the Quality Control Plan
within 30 calendar days after contract award. Insert dates on copies of the "Submittal Register". Obtain
the original from the following source:
a. From a register with submittal items filled in which will be available from the Engineer at the
time of the contract award. The specification section number, SD number, description of item
for which the submittal is required, and approving authority will be listed by the Government.
1.2.1.2 Submittal Register Preparation
Prepare and maintain a submittal register. Instructions are included in paragraph titled "SUBMITTAL
REGISTER INSTRUCTIONS" for use in developing the submittal register. The submittal register with
columns (c) through (f) completed, is designated the initial submittal register required as a part of the
quality control plan. The remaining columns on the submittal register forms shall be completed by the
Contractor. Additional details concerning the use of the submittal register will be explained at the
preconstruction conference.
1.3 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Reviewing,Certifying,Approving Authority
The Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing and certifying that submittals are in compliance with
contract requirements. The approving authority on submittals is the Contractor unless otherwise specified
for the specific submittal. At each "Submittal" paragraph in the individual specification sections, a
notation "E", following a submittal item, indicates the Engineer is the approving authority for that
submittal item.
1.3.2 Constraints
a. Submittals listed or specified in this Contract shall conform to the provisions of this section,
unless explicitly stated otherwise.
b. Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of work; components of the definable
feature interrelated as a system shall be submitted at the same time.
c. When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions, items, or materials included in
separate subsequent submittals, the submittal will be returned without review.
d. Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not imply approval of assembly
in which the item functions.
1.3.3 Scheduling
a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of submittals with performance
of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing. Allow for potential
requirements to resubmit.
b. Except as specified otherwise, allow a review period, beginning with receipt by the approving
authority, that includes at least 20 working days for submittals for Engineer approval. The
period of review for submittals with Engineer approval begins when the Owner receives the
SECTION 01330-Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
submittal from the Contractor. The period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for the
initial submittals.
1.3.4 Variations
Variations from contract requirements require Owner approval and will be considered where
advantageous to the Owner. When proposing a variation, submit a written request to the Engineer, with
documentation of the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial
to the Owner. If lower cost is a benefit, also include an estimate of the cost saving. Identify the proposed
variation separately and include the documentation for the proposed variation along with the required
submittal for the item. When submitting a variation for approval,the Contractor warrants the following:
1.3.4.1 Variation Is Compatible
The Contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible
with other elements of the work.
1.3.4.2 Review Schedule is Modified
In addition to the normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days will be allowed for
consideration by the Owner of submittals with variations.
1.3.4.3 Contractor is Responsible
The Contractor shall take actions and bear the additional costs, including review costs by the
Government,necessary due to the proposed variation.
1.3.5 Contractor's Responsibilities
a. Determine and verify field measurements, materials, field construction criteria; review each
submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and
Contract documents.
b. Transmit submittals to the Engineer in orderly sequence, in accordance with the Submittal
Register, and to prevent delays in the work, delays to the Owner, or delays to separate
contractors.
c. Advise the Engineer of variation, as required by the paragraph entitled"Variations".
d. Correct and resubmit submittal as directed by the approving authority. When resubmitting
disapproved transmittals or transmittals noted for resubmittal, the Contractor shall provide a
copy of that previously submitted transmittal including all reviewer comments for use by the
approving authority. Direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted submittal, to
revisions not requested by the approving authority on previous submissions.
e. Furnish additional copies of submittals when requested by the Engineer.
f. Complete work which must be accomplished as a basis of a submittal in time to allow the
submittal to occur as scheduled.
SECTION 01330-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
g. Ensure no work has begun until submittals for that work have been returned as"approved", or
"approved as noted" except to the extent that a portion of the work must be accomplished as a
basis of the submittal.
1.3.6 Engineer's Responsibilities
When the approving authority is the Engineer,the Engineer will:
a. Note the date on which the submittal was received from the Contractor, on each submittal for
which the Engineer is the approving authority.
b. Review submittals for approval within the scheduling period specified and only for
conformance with project design concepts and compliance with the Contract documents.
c. Identifyreturned submittals with one of the actions defined in theparagraph entitled "Actions
Possible"and with markings appropriate for the action indicated.
1.3.7 Actions Possible
Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations:
a. Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate the submittal has been previously reviewed
and approved, is not required as a submittal, does not have evidence of being reviewed and
approved by the contractor, or is not complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be
returned with an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Returned submittals deemed to
lack review by the Contractor or to be incomplete shall be resubmitted with appropriate action,
coordination,or change
b. Submittals marked"approved as submitted" authorize the Contractor to proceed with the work
covered.
c. Submittals marked "approved as noted" authorize the Contractor to proceed with the work as
noted provided the Contractor takes no exception to the notations.
d. Submittals marked"revise and resubmit" or disapproved" indicate the submittal is incomplete
or does not comply with the design concept or the requirements of the Contract documents and
shall be resubmitted with appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item until the
resubmittal is approved.
1.4 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Transmittal Form
Transmit each submittal, except sample installations and sample panels, to the office of the Engineer.
Transmit submittals with a transmittal form prescribed by the Engineer and standard for the project. The
transmittal form shall identify the Contractor, indicate the date of the submittal, and include information
prescribed by the transmittal form and required in the paragraph entitled "Identifying Submittals".
Process transmittal forms to record actions regarding sample panels and sample installations.
1.4.2 Identifying Submittals
SECTION 01330-Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Identify submittals, except sample panel and sample installation, with the following information
permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each submittal and noted on the
transmittal form. Mark each copy of each submittal identically,with the following:
a. Project title and location.
b. Construction Contract number.
c. The section number of the specification section by which the submittal is required.
d. The submittal description(SD)number of each component of the submittal.
e. When a resubmission, an alphabetic suffix on the submittal description, for example, SD-10A,
to indicate the resubmission.
f. The name, address, and telephone number of the subcontractor, supplier,manufacturer and any
other second tier contractor associated with the submittal.
g. Product identification and location in project.
1.4.3 Format for Product Data
a. Present product data submittals for each section as a complete, bound volume. Include a table
of contents listing page and catalog item numbers for product data.
b. Indicate, by prominent notation, each product which is being submitted; indicate the
specification section number and paragraph number to which it pertains.
c. Supplement product data with material prepared for the project to satisfy submittal
requirements for which product data does not exist. Identify this material as developed
specifically for the project.
1.4.4 Format for Shop Drawings
a. Shop drawings shall not be less than 8 1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30 x 42 inches.
b. Present 8 1/2 x 11 inches sized shop drawings as a part of the bound volume for the submittals
required by the section. Present larger drawings in sets.
c. Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision numbers and dates, in
addition to the information required in the paragraph entitled"Identifying Submittals".
d. Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings; prepare drawings
demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Identify materials and products for work
shown.
1.4.5 Format of Samples
a. Furnish, where specified, samples in the sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the
manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately the same size as specified:
SECTION 01330-Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
(1) Sample of Equipment or Device: Full size.
(2) Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches: Built up to 8 1/2 by 11 inches.
(3) Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches: Cut down to 8 1/2 by 11 inches and
adequate to indicate color,texture, and material variations.
(4) Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10 inch length or length to be supplied, if less
than 10 inches. Examples of linear devices or materials are conduit and handrails.
(5) Sample of Non-Solid Materials: Pint. Examples of non-solid materials are sand and
paint.
(6) Color Selection Samples: 2 inches by 4 inches.
(7) Sample Panel: 4 by 4 feet.
(8) Sample Installation: 100 square feet.
b. Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations are unavoidable due to the nature of
the materials, submit sets of samples of not less than three (3)units showing the extremes and
middle of the range.
c. Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into the work only if so specified or
indicated. Incorporated samples shall be undamaged condition at the time of use.
d. Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation of the area constituting the
sample installation but remove the notation at the final clean up of the project.
e. When a color, texture or pattern is specified in naming a particular manufacturer and style,
include one sample of that manufacturer and style, for comparison.
1.4.6 Format of Administrative Submittals
a. When the submittal includes a document which is to be used in the project or become a part of
the project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply the Contractor's approval stamp to
the document,but to a separate sheet accompany the document.
b. Operation and Maintenance Manual Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01781,
"Operation and Maintenance Data". Include components required in that section and the
various technical sections.
1.5 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS
1.5.1 Number of Copies of Product Data
a. Submit six (6) copies of submittals of product data requiring review and approval by the
Engineer. Submit three (3) copies of submittals of product data for operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.5.2 Number of copies of Shop Drawings
SECTION 01330-Page 6

2019 WWTP RehabilitationFrCo-18.02 FrCo 18.02
Franklin County,NC
Submit shop drawings in compliance with the quantity requirements specified for product date.
1.5.3 Number of Samples
a. Submit, where specified, two (2) samples, or two (2) sets of samples showing range of
variation, of each required item. One (1) approved sample or set of samples will be retained
by the approving authority and one will be returned to the Contractor.
b. Submit one(1) sample panel. Include components listed in technical section or as directed.
c. Submit one(1) sample installation,where directed.
d. Submit one(1)sample of non-solid materials.
1.5.4 Number of copies of Administrative Submittals
a. Unless otherwise specified, submit the administrative submittals compliant with the quantity
requirements specified for product data.
b. Submit administrative submittals required under "SD-19, Operation and Maintenance
manuals"to conform to Section 01781,"Operation and Maintenance Data".
1.6 FORWARDING SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Samples Required of the Contractor
Submit samples to: LKC Engineering PLLC, 140 Aqua Shed Court,Aberdeen,NC 28315.
1.6.2 Shop Drawings,Product Data, and O&M Data
As soon as practicable after award of the contract, and before procurement or fabrication, submit, except
as specified otherwise, to the Engineer: LKC Engineering, the shop drawings, product data and O&M
Data required in the technical sections of this specification. The Engineer for this project will review to
determine if Contractor-approved submittals comply with the contract requirements and will review and
approve those submittals not permitted to be Contractor approved to determine if submittals comply with
the contract requirements.
1.7 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTIONS (SD)
SD-01 Data
Submittals which provide calculations, description, or other documentation regarding the work.
SD-02 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
Data composed of catalog cuts, brochures, circulars, specifications and product data, and printed
information in sufficient detail and scope to verity compliance with requirements of the contract
documents. A type of product data.
SD-03 Manufacturer's Standard Color Charts
SECTION 01330-Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Preprinted illustrations displaying choices of color and finish for a material or product. A type of product
data.
SD-04 Drawings
Submittals which graphically show relationship of various components of the work, schematic diagrams
of systems, detail of fabrications, layout of particular elements, connections, and other relational aspects
of the work. A type of shop drawing.
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations, mix designs, analyses, or other data, written in nature and pertaining to a part of the
work. A type of shop drawing.
SD-06 Instructions
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system, or material, including special notices and
Material Safety Data Sheets, if any, concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions. A type of
product data.
SD-08 Statements
A document, required of the Contractor, or through the Contractor by way of a supplier, installer,
manufacturer, or other lower tier contractor, the purpose of which is to further the quality or orderly
progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel,
qualifications,or other verification of quality. A type of shop drawing.
SD-09 Reports
Reports of inspection and laboratory test, including analysis and interpretation of test results. Each report
shall be properly identified. Test methods used in compliance with recognized test standards shall be
described.
SD-10 Test Reports
A report signed by an authorized official of an independent testing laboratory that a material, product, or
system identical to the material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accordance with
requirements specified by naming the test method and material. The test report must state the test was
performed in accordance with the test requirements; state the test results; and indicate whether the
material, product, or system has passed or filed the test. Testing must have been within three (3)years of
the date of award of this Contract. A type of product data.
SD-11 Factory Test Reports
A written report which includes the findings of a test required to be performed by the manufacturer on a
prototype or on an actual portion of the work prepared for this project,before it is shipped to the job site.
The report must be signed by an authorized official of the manufacturer's test facility or testing laboratory
and must state the test was performed in accordance with the test requirements; state the test results; and
indicate whether the materials,product, or system has passed or failed the test. A type of shop drawing.
SECTION 01330-Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SD-12 Field Test Reports
A written report which includes the findings of a test made at the job site, in the vicinity of the job site, or
on a sample taken from the job site, on a portion of the work, during or after installation. The report must
be signed by an authorized official of a testing laboratory or agency and must state the test was performed
in accordance with the test requirements; state the test results; and indicate whether the material, product,
or system has passed or failed the test. A type of shop drawing.
SD-13 Certificates
Statements signed by responsible officials of a manufacturer of a product, system, or material attesting
that the product, system, or material meet specified requirements. The statements must be dated after the
award of this contract, name the project, and list the specific requirements which it is intended to address.
A type of shop drawing.
SD-14 Samples
Samples, including both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of materials, products, and units
of work as complete units or as portions of units of work. A type of Sample.
SD-15 Color Selection Samples
Samples of the available choice of colors, textures, and finishes of a product or material, presented over
substrates identical in texture to that proposed fort the work. A type of sample.
SD-16 Sample Panels
An assembly constructed at the project site in a location acceptable to the Engineer and using materials
and methods to be employed in the work; completely finished; maintained during construction; and
removed at the conclusion of the work or when authorized by the Engineer. A type of sample.
SD-18 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Data intended to be incorporated in an Operation and Maintenance manual. A type of administrative
submittal.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBMITTAL REGISTER INSTRUCTIONS
Use submittal register form for the project's Submittal Register and to track progress of submittals as they
are processed.
a. The Engineer will supply submittal register forms.
Column(c): Lists each specification section in which a submittal is required.
SECTION 01330-Page 9

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD No. and type, e.g. SD-04, Drawings)
required in each specification section.
Column(e): Lists one principal paragraph in specification section where a material or product
is specified. This listing is only to facilitate submittal reviews. Do not consider entries in
column(e)as limiting project requirements.
Column (f): Indicates approving authority for each submittal. An "E" indicates approval by
the Engineer.
b. Column(g)through(r)will be used by Contractor,Approving Authority organization and the
Owner on their own copies to record data established by the Contractor.
c. Action Codes(j)and(o): NR—Not Received; AN—Approved as noted;A—Approved; RR—
Disapproved,Revised, and Resubmit(others may be prescribed by the Transmittal Form).
CONTRACTOR
Column(g)through(I): Contractor dates.
Column (j): Action code; and (k): Date of action used to record Contractor's review when
forwarding submittals to QC
Column(1): List date submittal
Column(q): List date approval received.
APPROVING AUTHORITY
Column(1): List date submittal received.
Column(m): Through(p).
Column(q): List date returned to Contractor.
-- END OF SECTION--
SECTION 01330-Page 10

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 01450
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 880 (1995) Criteria for Use in Evaluation of Testing
Laboratories and Organization for Examination and
Inspection of Steel, Stainless Steel,and Related Alloys
ASTM C 1077 (1996) Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete
Aggregates in Use in Construction and Criteria for
Laboratory Evaluation
ASTM D 3666 (1996) Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing
and Inspecting Bituminous Paving Materials
ASTM D 3740 (1995) Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering
Design and Construction
ASTM E 329 (1995; Rev. C) Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Materials Used on Construction
CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)
COE EM-385-1-1 (1996) Safety and Health Requirements Manual
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330,"Submittal Procedures".
1.3 QC ORGANIZATION
1.4 MONTHLY PROGRESS MEETINGS
After the start of construction,the Engineer shall conduct monthly progress meetings at the work site with
the project superintendent, owner's representative, state and federal officials, contractor project manager
and any subcontractors. The Engineer shall prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the
Contractor and Owner within 15 working days after the meeting. As a minimum, the following shall be
accomplished at each meeting:
SECTION 01450-Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
a. Review the minutes of the previous meeting;
b. Review the schedule and the status of work:
(1) Work or testing accomplished since last meeting
(2) Rework items identified since last meeting
(3) Rework items completed since last meeting;
c. Review the status of submittals:
(1) Submittals reviewed and approved since last meeting
(2) Submittals required in the near future;
d. Review the work to be accomplished in the next 4 weeks and documentation required:
(1) Establish completion dates for rework items
(2) Update the schedule showing planned and actual dates o the preparatory, initial and
follow-up phases, including testing and any other inspection required by this contract.
(3) Discuss construction methods and the approach that will be used to provide quality
construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable
feature of work.
(4) Discuss any coordination necessary for work involving existing treatment and
operations.
e. Resolve QC and production problems:
(1) Assist in resolving Request for Information issues; and
f. Review erosion control implementation and maintenance.
g. Review health and safety plan
1.5 SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL
Procedures for submission, review and approval of submittals are described in section entitled"Submittal
Procedures".
1.6 TESTING
Except as stated otherwise in the specification sections, perform sampling and testing required under this
Contract.
1.6.1 Testing Laboratory Requirements
SECTION 01450-Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Provide an independent testing laboratory approved by the engineer qualified to perform sampling and
tests required by this Contract. When the proposed testing laboratory is not accredited by an acceptable
"Qualified National Authority" listed in the paragraph entitled "Qualified National Authority", submit to
the Engineer for approval, certified statements, signed by an official of the testing laboratory attesting that
the proposed laboratory,meets or conforms to the following requirements:
a. Laboratories engaged in testing of construction materials shall meet the requirements of
ASTM E 329.
b. Laboratories engaged in testing of concrete and concrete aggregates shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C 1077.
c. Laboratories engaged in testing of bituminous paving materials shall meet the requirements of
ASTM D 3666.
d. Laboratories engaged in testing of soil and rock, as used in engineering design and
construction, shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3740.
e. Laboratories engaged in inspection and testing of steel, stainless steel, and related alloys will
be evaluated according to ASTM A 880.
f. Laboratories engaged in Hazardous materials Testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA
and EPA.
1.6.2 Qualified National Authorities
Qualified National Authorities are the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP)
administered by the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO)program, and the American Association for Laboratory
Accreditation (AALA) program. Furnish to the Engineer, a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation and
Scope of Accreditation. The scope of the laboratory's accreditation shall include the test methods
required by the Contract.
1.6.3 Inspection of Testing Laboratories
Prior to approval of non-accredited laboratories, the proposed testing laboratory facilities and records may
be subject to inspection by the Engineer. Records subject to inspection include equipment inventory,
equipment calibration dates and procedures, library of test procedures, audit and inspection reports by
agencies conducting laboratory evaluations and certifications, testing and management personnel
qualifications,test report forms, and the internal QC procedures.
1.6.4 Capability Check
The Engineer retains the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory and the
laboratory technician's testing procedures,techniques, and other items pertinent to testing, for compliance
with the standards set forth in this Contract.
1.6.5 Test Results
Cite applicable Contract requirements, tests or analytical procedures used. Provide actual results and
include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified
SECTION 01450-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
requirements. If the item fails to conform, notify Engineer immediately. Conspicuously stamp the cover
sheet for each report in large red letters"CONFORMS"or"DOES NOT CONFORM"to the specification
requirements, whichever is applicable. Test results shall be signed by a testing laboratory representative
authorized to sign certified test reports. Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and other
documentation to the Engineer. Furnish a summary report of field tests at the end of each month. Attach
a copy of the summary report to the last daily Contractor Quality Control Report of each month.
1.6.6 Test Reports and Monthly Summary Report of Tests
The Contractor shall furnish the signed reports, certifications, and a summary report of field tests at the
end of each month to the Engineer. Attach a copy of the summary report to pay request submittal of each
month.
1.7 COMPLETION INSPECTIONS
1.7.1 Punch-Out Inspection
Near the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a completion time. The
Contractor shall conduct an inspection of the work and develop a "punch list" of items which do not
conform to the approved drawings and specifications. Include in the punch list any remaining items on
the"Rework Items List"which were not corrected prior to the Punch-Out Inspection. The punch list shall
include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. A copy of the punch list shall be
provided to the Engineer. The Contractor or staff shall make follow-on inspections to ascertain that all
deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished the Contractor shall notify the Engineer that
the facility is ready for the Engineer's"Pre-Final Inspection".
1.7.2 Pre-Final Inspection
The Engineer will perform this inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be occupied.
An Engineer"Pre-Final Punch List"may be developed as a result of this inspection. The Contractor shall
ensure that all items on this list are corrected prior to notifying the Engineer that a"Final"inspection with
the customer can be scheduled. Any items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection shall be corrected in
timely manner and shall be accomplished within the time slated for completion of the entire work, or any
particular increment thereof if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.
1.7.3 Final Acceptance Inspection
The Superintendent or other primary contractor management personnel, and the Engineer's representative
will be in attendance at this inspection. Additional owner personnel may be in attendance. The final
acceptance inspection will be formally scheduled by the Engineer based upon results of the "Pre-Final"
inspection. Notice shall be given to the Engineer at least 30 days prior to the final inspection stating that
all specific items previously identified to the Contractor as being unacceptable, along with all the
remaining work performed under the contract, will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for
the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete
for this inspection will be cause for the Engineer to bill the Contractor for the owner's additional
inspection cost in accordance with the Contract Clause entitled"Inspection of Construction".
1.8 DOCUMENTATION
Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC program operations and activities.
SECTION 01450-Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.8.1 Contractor Production Report
Reports are required for each day that work is performed and shall be attached to the Contractor Quality
Control Report prepared for the same day. Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the
Contract. The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction
schedule. Contractor Production Reports are to be prepared, signed and dated by the project
superintendent and shall contain the following information:
a. Date of report, report number, name of contractor, Contract Number, title and location of
Contract and superintendent present.
b. Weather conditions in the morning and in the afternoon including maximum and minimum
temperatures.
c. Identify work performed by corresponding Schedule Activity No.,PC#, Modification No.,etc.
d. A list of Contractor and subcontractor personnel on the work site, their trades, employer, work
location, description of work performed,hours worked by trade, daily total work hours on work
site, and total work hours from start of construction.
e. A list of job safety actions taken and safety inspections conducted. Indicate that safety
requirements have been met including the results on the following:
(1) Was a job safety meeting held? (If YES, attach a copy of the meeting minutes.)
(2) Were there any lost time accidents? (If YES, attach a copy of the completed OSHA
report.)
(3) Was crane/trenching/scaffold/high voltage electrical/high work done? (If YES, attach a
statement or checklist showing inspection performed.)
(4) Was hazardous material/waste released into the environment? (If YES, attach a
description of meetings held and accidents that happened.)
(5) List safety actions taken today and safety inspections conducted.
f. A list of equipment/material received each day that is incorporated into the job.
g. A list of construction and plant equipment on the work site including the number of hours used,
idle and down for repair.
h. Include a "remarks" section in this report which will contain pertinent information including
directions received, problems encountered during construction, work progress and delays,
conflicts or errors in the drawings or specifications, field changes, safety hazards encountered,
instructions given and corrective actions taken, delays encountered and a record of visitors to the
work site.
1.8.2 Testing Plan and Log
As tests are performed, the contractor shall record on the "Testing Plan and Log" the date the test was
conducted,the date the test results were forwarded to the Engineer,remarks and acknowledgement that an
SECTION 01450-Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
accredited or Engineer approved testing laboratory was used. Attach a copy of the updated "Testing Plan
and Log"to the pay request submittal of each month.
1.8.3 Rework Items List
The Contractor shall maintain a list of work that does not comply with the Contract, identifying what
items need to be reworked, the date the item was originally discovered,the date the item will be corrected
by, and the date the item was corrected. There is no requirement to report a rework item that is corrected
the same day it is discovered. Attach a copy of the "Rework Items List" to the last daily Contractor
Quality Control Report of each month. The Contractor shall be responsible for including on this list items
needing rework including those identified by the Engineer.
1.8.4 As-Built Drawings
The Contractor is required to ensure the as-built drawings, required by Section 01770, "Closeout
Procedures", are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from
the Contract drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified with the appropriate modifying
documentation (e.g. PC no., Modification No., Request for Information No., etc.). The Contractor shall
initial each deviation and each revision. Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall furnish a
certificate attesting to the accuracy of the as-built drawings prior to submission to the Engineer. Final
payment will not be processed until final as-built have been submitted and are acceptable to the Engineer.
1.9 NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE
The Engineer will notify the Contractor of any detected non-compliance with the foregoing requirements.
The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when
delivered to the contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If
the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly,the Engineer may issue an order stopping all or part of
the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to such stop
orders shall be made the subject of claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages by the
Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used
--END OF SECTION--
SECTION 01450-Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA)
AWWA C511 (1992)Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow-Prevention
Assembly
FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION(FHWA)
FHWA MUTCD (1988)Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH
(FCCCHR)
FCCCHR CCC (1993)Manual of Cross-Connection Control
FCCCHR USC (1997) List of Approved Backflow Prevention
Assemblies
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (1996)National Electrical Code
NFPA 241 (1996) Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and
Demolition Operations
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures".
1.2.1 SD-02 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a. Backflow Preventers
1.2.2 SD-04 Drawings
a. Traffic Control Plan G
1.2.3 SD-08 Statements
a. Backflow Tester Certification G
SECTION 01500—Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.2.4 SD-12 Field Test Reports
a. Backflow Preventer Tests G
1.2.5 SD-13 Certificate
a. Backflow Preventers Certificate of Full Approval
1.3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Reasonable amounts of the following utilities will be made available to the Contractor at the prevailing
rates.
The point at which the owner will deliver such utilities or services and the quantity available is as
indicated. The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in connecting, converting, and transferring the
utilities to the work. The Contractor shall make connections, including providing back-flow-preventing
devices on connections to domestic water lines; providing meters; and providing transformers; and make
disconnections.
1.3.1 Contractor Utilities
The Contractor shall provide his own utilities.
1.4 BACKFLOW TESTER CERTIFICATION
Prior to testing, submit to the Engineer certification issued by the State or local regulatory agency
attesting that the backflow tester has successfully completed a certification course sponsored by the
regulatory agency. Tester shall not be affiliated with any company participating in any other phase of this
Contract.
1.5 WEATHER PROTECTION
Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical openings in the building are
monitored carefully. Take immediate actions required to seal off such openings when rain or other
detrimental weather is imminent, and at the end of each workday. Ensure that the openings are
completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building from damage.
1.5.1 Building ite Storm Protection
andS
When a warning of gale force winds is issued, take precautions to minimize danger to persons, and
protect the work and nearby property owners. Precautions shall include, but are not limited to, closing
openings; removing loose materials, tools and equipment from exposed locations; and removing or
securing scaffolding and other temporary work. Close openings in the work when storms of lesser
intensity pose a threat to the work or any nearby property owner.
1.6 STATION OPERATION AFFECT ON CONTRACTOR OPERATIONS
1.6.1 Special Restrictions Regarding Access of Vehicles and Parking
SECTION 01500—Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Contractor shall allow continuous access to and from the parking areas and all serviceable treatment
components throughout the construction period. Any disturbance of normal access to the treatment plant
shall be done solely at the written permission of the Owner.
1.6.2 Interruption of Vehicular Traffic
If during the performance of work, it becomes necessary to modify vehicular traffic patterns at any
locations, notify the Engineer at least 15 calendar days prior to the proposed modification date, and
provide a Traffic control Plan detailing the proposed controls to traffic movement for approval. The plan
shall be in accordance with State and local regulations. Provide cones, signs, barricades, lights, or other
traffic control devices and personnel required to control traffic.
1.7 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
Provide adequate sanitary conveniences of a type approved for the use of persons employed on the work,
properly secluded from public observation, and maintained in such a manner as required and approved by
the Engineer. Maintain these conveniences at all times without nuisance. Upon completion of the work,
remove the conveniences from the premises, leaving the premises clean and free from nuisance. Dispose
of sewage through connection to a municipal, district, or station sanitary sewage system. Where such
systems are not available, use chemical toilets or comparably effective units, and periodically empty
wastes into a municipal, district, or station sanitary sewage system, or remove waste to a commercial
facility. Include provisions for pest control and elimination of odors.
1.8 TEMPORARY BUILDINGS
Locate where directed and within the indicated operations area. ,
1.8.1 Maintenance of Temporary Facilities
Suitably paint and maintain the temporary facilities. Failure to do so will be sufficient reason to require
their removal.
1.8.2 Engineer's Representative's Office
Provide an office with a minimum of 200 square feet of useful floor area for the exclusive use of
Engineer's personnel, in addition to and separate from any other office space provided by the Contractor.
Provide a weather tight structure with adequate heating and cooling, toilet facilities, lighting, ventilation,
a 4 by 8-foot plan table, computer work space, a standard size office desk and chair, and telephone.
Provide either a 1,500-watt radiant heater and a window-mounted air conditioner rated at 9,000 Btus
minimum or a window-mounted heat pump of the same minimum heating and cooling ratings. Include
the utilities required to make these items operable. Provide a door with a cylinder lock and windows with
locking hardware. Make water, sewer, and electric utility connections. If a temporary septic tank is-
provided, engineer's representative's office shall be connected. Otherwise, engineer's representative shall
have access to the portable facilities provided for the Contractor. Locate as directed. After completion of
the work,remove the entire structure and all appurtenances from the site.
1.8.3 Contractor Superintendent Records and Field Office
Provide on the job site an office with approximately 200 square feet of useful floor area for the exclusive
use of the Contractor. Provide a weather tight structure with adequate heating and cooling, toilet
facilities, lighting, ventilation, a 4 by 8-foot plan table, a standard size office desk and chair, computer
SECTION 01500—Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
station, fax machine, and other pertinent working communications facilities. Provide either a 1,500 watt
radiant heater and a window-mounted air conditioner rated at 9,000 BTUs minimum or a window-
mounted heat pump of the same minimum heating and cooling ratings. Provide a door with cylinder lock
and windows with locking hardware. Make utility connection. Locate as directed. File quality control
records in the office and make available at all times to the Owner and Engineer. After completion of the
work,remove the entire structure from the site.
1.8.4 Trailers or Storage Buildings
Trailers or storage buildings will be permitted, where space is available, subject to the approval of the
Engineer. The trailers or buildings shall be in good condition, free from visible damage rust and
deterioration, and meet all applicable safety requirements. Trailers shall be roadworthy and comply with
all appropriate state and local vehicle requirements. Failure to maintain storage trailers or buildings to
these standards shall result in the removal of non-complying units at the contractor's expense. A sign not
smaller than 24 by 24 inches shall be conspicuously placed on the trailer depicting the company name,
business phone number, and emergency phone number. Trailers shall be anchored to resist high winds
and must meet applicable state of local standards for anchoring mobile trailers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Backflow Preventers
Reduced pressure principle type conforming to the applicable requirements AWWA C511. Provide
backflow preventers complete with 150-pound flanged cast iron mounted gate valve and strainer, 304
stainless steel or bronze, internal parts. The particular make, model/design, and size of backflow
preventers to be installed shall be included in the latest edition of the List of Approved Backflow
Prevention Assemblies issued by the FCCCHR USC and shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Full
Approval from FCCCHR USC.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY PHYSICAL CONTROLS
3.1.1 Access Controls
3.1.1.1 Temporary Barricades
Contractor shall provide for barricading around all work areas to prevent public access.
3.1.1.2 Fencing
Fencing shall be provided along the construction site at all open excavations and tunnels to control access
by unauthorized people. Fencing must be installed to be able to restrain a force of at least 200 pounds
against it.
3.1.1.3 Signs
Place warning signs at the construction area perimeter designating the presence of construction hazards
requiring unauthorized persons to keep out. Signs must be placed on all sides of the project,with at least
one sign every 300 feet. All points of entry shall have signs designating the construction site as a hard hat
area.
SECTION 01500—Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.1.1.4 Traffic Work
All work around/involving roadways, to include roadway excavations and utility crossings, will be
conducted in accordance with manual of Traffic Control Devices. Contractors shall provide and ensure
appropriate road closure and detour signs are established as necessary for motor traffic management. All
road closures shall be coordinated with the Engineer in advance. Self-illuminate(lighted)barricades shall
be provided during hours of darkness. Brightly colored (orange) vests are required for all personnel
working in roadways. Road closures shall require a road closure plan showing the location of signage.
3.2 TEMPORARY WIRING
Provide temporary wiring in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 70, Article 305-69b), Assured
Equipment Grounding Conductor Program. Program shall include frequent inspection of all equipment
and apparatus.
3.3 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Provide an approved reduced pressure backflow prevention assembly at each location where the
Contractor taps into the owner portable water supply.
--End of Section--
•
SECTION 01500—Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 01575
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
40 CFR 122.26 EPA National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Permit
Regulations
40 CFR 241 Guidelines for Disposal of Solid Waste
40 CFR 243 Guidelines for the Storage and Collection of Residential,
Commercial,and Institutional Solid Waste
40 CFR 258 Subtitle D Landfill Requirements
40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 262 Generators of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263 Transporters of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 264 Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage,
and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standard for Owners and Operators of Hazardous
Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 266 Management of Specific Hazardous Waste and Specific Types of
Hazardous Waste Management Facilities
40 CFR 268 Land Disposal Restrictions
40 CFR 279 Used Oil Regulations
40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency
Plan
40 CFR 372-SUBPART D EPA Toxic Chemical Release Reporting Regulations
49 CFR 173 Shipments and Packagings
SECTION 01575 -Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ADMINISTRATION(EPA)
EPA 832-R-92-005 Storm Water Management for Construction Activities
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Sediment
Soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff water or wind.
1.2.2 Solid Waste
Garbage, refuse, debris, sludge, or other discharged material (except hazardous waste as defined in
paragraph entitled "Hazardous Waste" or hazardous debris as defined in paragraph entitled "Hazardous
Debris"), including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous materials resulting from domestic
industrial, commercial, mining, or agricultural operations. Material not regulated as solid waste are:
nuclear source or by product materials regulated under the Federal Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as
amended; suspended or dissolved materials in domestic sewage effluent or irrigation return flows, or
other regulated point source discharges; regulated air emissions; and fluids or wastes associated with
natural gas or crude oil exploration or production.
a. Green Waste: The vegetative matter from landscaping, land clearing and grubbing, including,
but not limited to, grass, bushes, scrubs, small trees and saplings, tree stumps and plant roots.
Marketable trees, grasses and plants that are indicated to remain, be re-located, or be re-used
are not included.
b. Surplus Soil: Existing soil that is in excess of what is required for this work, including
aggregates intended, but not used, for on-site mixing of concrete, mortars and paving.
Contaminated soil meeting the definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is not
included.
c. Inert Construction and Demolition Debris: Broken or removed concrete, masonry, and rock
asphalt paving; ceramics; roofing paper and shingles. Inert materials may be re-inforced with
or contain ferrous wire,rods,accessories and weldments.
d. Wood: Dimension and non-dimension lumber, plywood, chipboard, hardboard. Treated
and/or painted wood that meets the definition of lead contaminated or lead based contaminated
paint is not included.
e. Scrap Metal: Scrap and excess ferrous and non-ferrous metals such as re-inforcing steel,
structural shapes,pipe and wire that are recovered or collected and disposed of as scrap. Scrap
metal meeting the definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is not included.
f. Paint Cans: Metal cans that are empty of paints, solvents, thinners and adhesives. If permitted
by the paint can label, a thin dry film may remain in the can.
g. Recyclables: Material, equipment and assemblies such as doors, windows, door and window
frames, plumbing fixtures, glazing and mirrors that are recovered and sold as recyclable.
Metal meeting the definition of lead contaminated or lead based paint contaminated may be
SECTION 01575 -Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal company. Paint cans may be included as
recyclable if sold to a scrap metal company.
1.2.3 Debris
Non-hazardous solid material generated during the construction, demolition, or renovation of a
structure which exceeds 2.5-inch particle size that is: a manufactured object; plant or animal
matter; or natural geologic material (e.g. cobbles and boulders). A mixture of debris and other
material such as soil or sludge is also subject to regulation as debris if the mixture is comprised
primarily of debris by volume,based on visual inspection.
1.2.4 Hazardous Debris
As defined in paragraph entitled "Debris" of this section, debris that contains listed hazardous
waste(either on the debris surface, or in its interstices, such as pore structure)per 40 CFR 261; or
debris that exhibits a characteristic of hazardous waste per 40 CFR 261.
1.2.5 Chemical Wastes
This includes salts, acids, alkalies,herbicides,pesticides, and organic chemicals.
1.2.6 Garbage
Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking,dispensing,and consumption of food.
1.2.7 Hazardous Waste
Hazardous waste as defined in 40 CFR 261 or as defined by applicable State and Local
regulations.
1.2.8 Oily Waste
Petroleum products and bituminous materials.
1.2.9 Class I Ozone Depleting Substance(ODS)
Class I ODS is defined in Section 602(a) of the Clean Air Act and includes the following
chemicals:
chlorofluorocarbon-11 (CFC-11) chlorofluorocarbon-213 (CFC-213)
chlorofluorocarbon-12 (CFC-12) chlorofluorocarbon-214 (CFC-214)
chlorofluorocarbon-13 (CFC-13) chlorofluorocarbon-215 (CFC-215)
chlorofluorocarbon-111 (CFC-111) chlorofluorocarbon-216 (CFC-216)
chlorofluorocarbon-112(CFC-112) chlorofluorocarbon-217 (CFC-217)
chlorofluorocarbon-113 (CFC-113) halon-1211
chlorofluorocarbon-114 (CFC-114) halon-1301
chlorofluorocarbon-115 (CGC-115) halon-2402
chlorofluorocarbon-211 (CFC-211) carbon tetrachloride
chlorofluorocarbon-212(CFC-212) methyl chloroform
SECTION 01575-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Contractor Liabilities for Environmental Protection
The Contractor is advised that this project is subject to Federal, State, and local regulatory agency
inspections to review compliance with environmental laws and regulations. The Contractor shall
fully cooperate with any representative from any Federal, State or local regulatory agency who
may visit the job site and shall provide immediate notification to the Engineer, who shall
accompany them on any subsequent site inspections. The Contractor shall complete, maintain,
and make available to the Engineer, Owner, or regulatory agency personnel all documentation
relating to environmental compliance under applicable Federal, State and local laws and
regulations. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer if a Notice of Violation
(NOV)is issued to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property resulting from
Contractor fault or negligence as well as for the payment of any civil fines or penalties which
may be assessed by any Federal, State or local regulatory agency as a result of the Contractor's or
any subcontractor's violation of any applicable Federal, State or local environmental law or
regulation. Should a Notice of Violation (NOV), Notice of Noncompliance (NON), Notice of
Deficiency (NOD), or similar regulatory agency notice be issued to the Owner as facility
owner/operator on account of the actions or in-actions of the Contractor or one of its
subcontractors in the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor shall fully
cooperate with the Owner in defending against regulatory assessment of any civil fines or
penalties arising out of such actions or in-actions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES
Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent
work. Restore to an equivalent or improved condition upon completion of work. Confine
construction activities to within the limits of the work indicated or specified. Conform to the
national permitting requirements of the Clean Water Act.
3.1.1 Land Resources
Except in areas to be cleared, do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy trees or shrubs
without the Engineer's permission. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to existing
nearby trees for anchorages unless authorized by the Engineer. Where such use of attached ropes,
cables,or guys is authorized, the Contractor shall be responsible for any resultant damage.
3.1.1.1 Protection of Trees
Protect existing trees which are to remain, and which may be injured, bruised, defaced, or
otherwise damaged by construction operations. Remove displaced rocks from uncleared areas.
By approved excavation,remove trees with 30 percent or more of their root systems destroyed.
SECTION 01575 -Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.1.1.2 Replacement
Remove trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment operations, and
replace with equivalent, undamaged trees and landscape features. Obtain Engineer's approval
before replacement.
3.1.2 Water Resources
3.1.2.1 Stream Crossings
The Engineer's approval is required before any equipment will be permitted to ford live streams.
In areas where frequent crossings are required, install temporary culverts or bridges. Obtain
Engineer's approval prior to installation. Remove temporary culverts or bridges upon completion
of work,repair the area to its original condition or as specified.
3.1.2.2 Oily and Hazardous Substances
Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering the ground, drainage areas, or local
bodies of water. For oil, fuel oil, or other hazardous substance spills,verbally notify the Engineer
immediately. Surround all temporary fuel oil or petroleum storage tanks with a temporary earth
berm of sufficient size and strength to contain the contents of the tanks in the event of leakage or
spillage.
3.1.3 Fish and Wildlife Resources
Do not disturb fish and Wildlife. Do not alter water flows or otherwise significantly disturb the
native habitat adjacent to the project and critical to the survival of fish and wildlife, except as
indicated or specified.
3.2 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES
Carefully protect in-place and report immediately to the Engineer historical and archaeological
items or human skeletal remains discovered in the course of work. Stop work in the immediate
area of the discovery until directed by the Engineer to resume work. The Government retains
ownership and control over historical and archaeological resources.
3.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES
3.3.1 Burnoff
Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted.
3.3.2 Protection of Erodible Soils
Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade, as indicated or specified. Immediately
protect the side slopes and back slopes upon completion of rough grading. Plan and conduct
earthwork to minimize the duration of exposure of unprotected soils.
3.3.3 Temporary Protection of Erodible Soils
Use the following methods to prevent erosion and control sedimentation:
SECTION 01575 -Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.3.3.1 Mechanical Retardation and Control of Runoff
Mechanically retard and control the rate of runoff from the construction site. This includes
construction of diversion ditches, benches, berms, and use of silt fences and straw bales to retard
and divert runoff to protected drainage courses.
3.3.3.2 Sediment Basins
Trap sediment in temporary sediment basins. Pump dry and remove the accumulated sediment,
after each storm. Use a paved weir or vertical overflow pipe for overflow. Remove collected
sediment from the site. Institute effluent quality monitoring programs.
3.3.3.3 Vegetation and Mulch
Provide temporary protection on sides and back slopes as soon as rough grading is completed, or
sufficient soil is exposed to require erosion protection. Protect slopes by accelerated growth of
permanent vegetation, temporary vegetation, mulching, or netting. Stabilize slopes by
hydroseeding, anchoring mulch in place, covering with anchored netting, sodding, or such
combination of these and other methods necessary for effective erosion control.
a. Seeding: Provide new seeding where ground is disturbed. Include topsoil or
nutriment during the seeding operation necessary to establish a suitable stand of grass.
3.4 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID WASTES
Pick up solid wastes, and place in covered containers which are regularly emptied. Do not
prepare or cook food on the project site. Prevent contamination of the site or other areas when
handling and disposing of wastes. At project completion, leave the areas clean. Recycling is
encouraged and can be coordinated with the Engineer and the activity recycling coordinator.
Remove all solid waste (including non-hazardous debris) from Owner property and dispose off-
site at an approved landfill. Solid waste disposal off-site must comply with most stringent local,
State, and Federal requirements including 40 CFR 241,40 CFR 242,and 40 CFR 258.
3.5 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTES
3.5.1 Hazardous Waste/Debris Management
The contractor shall identify all construction activities which will generate hazardous
waste/debris. The Contractor must provide a documented waste determination for all resultant
waste streams. Hazardous waste/debris shall be identified, labeled, handled, stored, and disposed
of in accordance with Federal, State, and local regulations including 40 CFR 261,40 CFR 262,40
CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 266, and 40 CFR 268. Hazardous waste shall also
be managed in accordance with the approved Hazardous Waste management Section of the
Environmental Protection Plan. Store hazardous wastes in approved containers in accordance
with 49 CFR 173. Hazardous waste generated within the confines of Owner facilities shall be
identified as being generated by the Owner. Prior to removal of any hazardous waste from
Owner property, all hazardous waste manifests must be signed by activity personnel from the
Owner. No hazardous waste shall be brought onto Owner property. Provide to the Engineer a
copy of waste determination documentation for any solid waste streams that have any potential to
SECTION 01575 -Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
be hazardous waste or contain any chemical constituents listed in 40 CFR 372-SUBPART D. For
hazardous wastes spills,verbally notify the Engineer immediately.
3.5.2 Spills of Oil and Hazardous Materials
Take precautions to prevent spills of oil and hazardous material. In the event of a spill,
immediately notify the Engineer. Spill response shall be in accordance with 40 CFR 300 and
applicable State regulations.
3.6 DUST CONTROL
Keep dust down at all times, including during non-working periods. Sprinkle or treat, with dust
suppressants, the soil at the site, haul roads, and other areas disturbed by operations. Dry power
brooming will not be permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping, or wet
power brooming. Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning non-particulate debris such as
steel reinforcing bars. Only wet cutting will be permitted for cutting concrete blocks, concrete,
and bituminous concrete. Do not unnecessarily shake bags of cement, concrete mortar, or plaster.
3.7 NOISE
Make the maximum use of low-noise emission products, as certified by the EPA. Blasting or use
of explosives will not be permitted without written permission from the Engineer, and then only
during the designated times.
--End of Section--
SECTION 01575 -Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 01770
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specifications,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not
limited to,the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project record document submittal.
3. Submittal of warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
Close out requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in
Divisions 2 through 6.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date substantial
Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as
substantially complete.
a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract
Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the
value of incomplete construction,and reasons the Work is not complete.
2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties,workmanship bonds,maintenance agreements, final certifications,
and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
SECTION 01770-Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
5. Submit record drawings,maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys,property
surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and maintenance
personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups,
construction tools,and similar elements.
Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Engineer will either proceed with
inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Engineer will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.
1. The Engineer will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially
complete.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.
1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final
payment,complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously
submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations
where required.
2. Submit a certified copy of the Engineer's final inspection list of items to be completed or
corrected, endorsed and dated by the Engineer. The certified copy of the list shall state that
each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and
dated by the Engineer.
3. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as
of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
4. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
5. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Reinspection Procedure: The Engineer will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work,
including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose
completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Engineer.
SECTION 01770-Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Engineer will prepare a certificate of final acceptance.
If the work is incomplete, the Engineer will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete
or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.
2. If necessary,reinspection will be repeated.
1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from
deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the
Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line whiteprints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies
substantially from the Work as originally shown. Contractor shall also provide markings indicating any
subsurface discoveries not detailed on the construction drawings. Mark which drawing is most capable of
showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the
corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that
would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.
1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations
in separate categories of the Work.
2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract
Drawings or Shop Drawings.
3. Note related change-order numbers where applicable.
4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover
sheets;print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.
PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
General: The General Conditions requires general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning is
included in Division 1 Section"Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each service or
unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Final Acceptance.
a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring
materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
SECTION 01770-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to
their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted
surfaces.
d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and
other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures
and lamps.
e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, or rubbish, litter, and other
foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other
foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-
textured surface.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the Project
of rodents,insects, and other pests.
Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work
during construction.
Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for
cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property.
Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste
materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.
1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work,they become the
Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner.
--END OF SECTION--
SECTION 01770-Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 01781
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data/Manuals which are specifically applicable to this
contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment or product. Organize and
present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain O&M requirements of the system, equipment,
component, and subassembly level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance
with this section and section titled"Submittal Procedures".
1.1.1 Quantity
Submit six (6) sets of the supplier/manufacturer's O&M information specified herein for the components,
assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, and accessories. The items for which O&M Data/manuals are
required are listed in the technical sections which specify those particular items.
1.1.2 Package Quality
Documents must be fully legible. Poor quality copies and material with hole punches interrupting the text
or drawings will not be accepted.
1.1.3 Package Content
Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled "Schedule of Operation and Maintenance
Data Packages". For each product, system, or component piece of equipment requiring submission of
O&M Data, submit the Data Package specified in the individual technical section.
1.1.4 Delivery
Submit O&M Data Manuals to the Engineer for review and acceptance; submit data specified for a given
item within 30 calendar days after the item is delivered to the contract site.
a. In the event the Contractor fails to deliver O&M Data/Manuals within the time limits set forth
above, the Engineer may withhold from progress payments 50 percent of the price of the item
with which such O&M Data/Manuals are associated.
1.1.5 Changes to Submittals
Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall be furnished by the Contractor if a
Component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Changes, additions, or
revisions required by the Engineer for final acceptance of submitted data, shall be submitted by the
Contractor within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change requirement.
1.2 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES
1.2.1 Operating Instructions
SECTION 01781 -Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Include specific instructions,procedures, and illustrations for the following phases of operation:
1.2.1.1 Safety Precautions
List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating conditions.
1.2.1.2 Operator Prestart
Include procedures required to set up and prepare each system for use.
1.2.1.3 Startup, Shutdown, and Post Shutdown Procedures
Provide narrative description for each operating procedure including control sequence for each.
1.2.1.4 Normal Operations
Provide narrative description of normal operating procedures. Include control diagrams with data to
explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment.
1.2.1.5 Emergency Operations
Include emergency procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued
operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment. Include
emergency shutdown instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable contingencies. Provide
guidance on emergency operations of all utility systems including valve locations and portions of systems
controlled.
1.2.1.6 Operator Service Requirements
Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication, adjustment,
inspection,and gage reading recording.
1.2.1.7 Environmental Conditions
Include a list of environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant data)which are best
suited for each product or piece of equipment and describe conditions under which equipment should not
be allowed to run.
1.2.2 Preventive Maintenance
Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize corrective
maintenance and repair.
1 2.2. .1 Lubrication Data
Include lubrication data, other than instructions for lubrication in accordance with paragraph titled
"Operator Service Requirements":
a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and applications;
SECTION 01781 -Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
b. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points, recommended
types and grades of lubricants,and capacities; and
c. A lubrication schedule showing service interval frequency.
1.2.2.2 Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule
Include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, tests and adjustments
required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance and repair.
Provide manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly, monthly,
and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft. For periodic calibrations, provide
manufacturer's specified frequency and procedures for each separate operation.
1.2.3 Corrective maintenance(Repair)
Include manufacturer's recommendations on procedures and instructions for correcting problems and
making repairs.
1.2.3.1 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques
Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions. Describe clearly
why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test
equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement.
1.2.3.2 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits
including factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific
wiring and control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control
tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to actual installation numbering.
1.2.3.3 Maintenance and Repair Procedures
Include instructions and list tools required to restore product or equipment to proper condition or
operating standards.
1.2.3.4 Removal and Replacement Instructions
Include step-by-step procedures and list required tools and supplies for removal, replacement,
disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies, accessories, and attachments.
Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings, and adjustments required. Instructions shall include a
combination of text and illustrations.
1.2.3.5 Spare Parts and Supply Lists
Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and repair to ensure continued service or
operation without unreasonable delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations.
List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead time to obtain.
SECTION 01781 -Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.2.3.6 Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours
Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance work-hours including craft requirements by
type of craft. Corrective maintenance that requires participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be
identified and tabulated separately.
1.2.4 Appendices
Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but
pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment. Include the following:
1.2.4.1 Parts Identification
Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component, assembly, subassembly, and
accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as
requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make,model, serial number, and source
of supply to allow reordering without further identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations,
drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When illustrations omit the part
numbers and description, both the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown in the listings shall be
grouped by components, assemblies, and subassemblies. Parts data may cover more than one model or
series of equipment, components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as a
master parts catalog, in accordance with the manufacturer" standard commercial practice.
1.2.4.2 Warranty Information
List and explain the various warranties and include the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by
the manufacturers or contract documents to keep warranties in force. Include warranty information for
primary components such as the compressor of air conditioning system.
1.2.4.3 Personnel Training Requirements
Provide information available from the manufacturers to use in training designated personnel to operate
and maintain the equipment and systems properly.
1.2.4.4 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information
Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for
the operation,maintenance, and repair of components.
1.2.4.5 Contractor Information
Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the General Contractor and each
subcontractor installing the product or equipment. Include local representatives and service organizations
most convenient to the project site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product or
equipment manufacturers.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES
Furnish the O&M Packages specified in individual technical sections. The required information for each
O&M Data Package is as follows:
SECTION 01781 -Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.3.1 Data Package 1
a. Safety precautions
b. Maintenance and repair procedures
c. Warranty information
d. Contractor information
1.3.2 Data Package 2
a. Safety precautions
b. Normal operations
c. Environmental conditions
d. Lubrication data
e. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
f. Maintenance and repair procedures
g. Removal and replacement instructions
h. Spare parts and supply list
i. Parts identification
j. Warranty information
k. Contractor information
1.3.3 Data Package 3
a. Safety precautions
b. Normal operations
c. Emergency operations
d. Environmental conditions
e. Lubrication data
f. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
g. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
h. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
SECTION 01781 -Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
i. Maintenance and repair procedures
j. Removal and replacement instructions
k. Spare parts and supply list
1. Parts identification
m. Warranty information
n. Testing equipment and special tool information
o. Contractor information
1.3.4 Data Package 4
a. Safety precautions
b. Operator prestart
c. Startup, shutdown, and post shutdown procedures
d. Normal operations
e. Emergency operations
f. Operator service requirements
g. Environmental conditions
h. Lubrication data
i. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
j. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
k. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
1. Maintenance and repair procedures
m Removal and replacement instructions
n. Spare parts and supply list
o. Corrective maintenance man-hours
p. Parts identification
q. Warranty information
SECTION 01781 -Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
r. Personnel training requirements
s. Testing equipment and special tool information
t. Contractor information
1.3.5 Data Package 5
a. Safety precautions
b. Operator prestart
c. Start-up, shutdown, and post shutdown procedures
d. Environmental conditions
e. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
f. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
g. Wiring and control diagrams
h. Maintenance and repair procedures
i. Spare parts and supply list
j. Testing equipment and special tools
k. Warranty information
1. Contractor information
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used
--END OF SECTION--
SECTION 01781 -Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 02220
SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Engineer. Remove rubbish and debris
from the project site; do not allow accumulations. Store materials that cannot be removed daily in areas
specified by the Engineer.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Class I and Class II Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)
Class I and Class II ODS are defined in Section, 602(a)and(b),of The Clean Air Act.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with section entitled"Submittal Procedures".
1.3.1 SD-08, Statements
a. Demolition Plan
Submit proposed demolition and removal procedures for approval before work is started.
1.3.1.1 Required Data
Demolition plan shall include procedures for coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection
schedule of utility services,a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation
and of the sequence of operations.
1.4 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the requirements of
the"Contract Clauses", safety requirements shall conform with ANSI A10.6
1.4.1 Notifications
1.5 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL
Prevent the spread of dust and debris and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding
area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to,
ice, flooding,or pollution.
1.6 PROTECTION
1.6.1 Traffic Control Signs
SECTION 02220-Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic barricades with
flashing lights. Notify the Engineer prior to beginning such work.
1.6.2 Existing Work
Protect existing work which is to remain in place,be reused, or remain the property of the Owner. Repair
items which are to remain and which are damaged during performance of the work to their original
condition, or replace with new.
1.6.4 Trees
Conform to Section 01575,"Temporary Environmental Controls", for protection of natural resources.
1.6.5 Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement
is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and
temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities.
1.7 BURNING
Burning will not be permitted.
1.8 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades
involved. Repair items to be relocated which are damaged or replace damaged items with new
undamaged items as approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
Remove indicated existing structures to 5 feet below existing adjacent grade, unless indicated on the
drawings otherwise.
3.1.1 Utilities and Related Equipment
Remove existing utilities, as indicated and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized
code covering the specific utility and approved by the Engineer. Remove meters and related equipment
and deliver to a location in accordance with instructions of the Engineer. If utility lines are encountered
that are not shown on drawings, contact the Engineer for further instructions.
3.1.2 Paving and Slabs
Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs including aggregate base as indicated to a depth
of 24 inches below existing adjacent grade.
SECTION 02220-Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
No. 1 Sawcut and remove masonry so as to prevent damage to surfaces to remain where new masonry
adjoins existing. The new work shall abut or tie into the existing construction as indicated.
3.1.3 Concrete
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of not less than 2 inches. Make each cut in walls
perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of
the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining concrete is
sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through
the concrete.
3.1.4 Patching
Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work, patch and repair these
holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces. Where new work is to be applied to
existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving
new work. Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall
match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to texture and finish. Patching shall be as
specified and indicated, and shall include:
a. Holes and depressions left as result of removals in existing masonry walls to remain shall be
completely filled with an approved masonry patching material, applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
b. Where existing partitions have been removed leaving damaged or missing resilient tile
flooring,patch to match the existing floor tile.
c. Patch acoustic lay-in ceiling where partitions have been removed. The transition between the
different ceiling heights shall be effected by continuing the higher ceiling level over the first
runner on the lower ceiling and closing the vertical opening with a painted sheet metal strip.
3.2 FILLING
Fill holes, open basements, and other hazardous openings as indicated.
3.3 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
3.3.1 Title to Materials
Except where specified in other sections, all materials and equipment removed, and not reused, shall
become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Owner property. Title to materials
resulting from demolition, and materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon
approval by the Engineer of the Contractor's demolition and removal procedures,and authorization by the
Engineer to begin demolition. The Owner will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage
to, such property after contract award. Materials and equipment shall not be viewed by prospective
purchasers or sold on the site.
3.3.2 Reuse of Materials and Equipment
SECTION 02220-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Remove and store materials and equipment to be reused or relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as
the work �'ro esses.
P
3.3.3 Salvaged Materials and Equipment
Remove materials and equipment that are to be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the
property of the Owner, and deliver to a storage site.
3.4 CLEANUP
3.4.1 Debris and Rubbish
Remove and transport debris and rubbish in a manner that will prevent spillage on streets or adjacent
areas. Clean up spillage from pavements, streets and adjacent areas. Conform to other applicable
requirements under Section 01575.
-- END OF SECTION--
SECTION 02220-Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 02302
EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING,AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
(ASSHTO)
AASHTO HB14 (1992)Highway Bridges
AMERICAN CONCRETE PIPE ASSOCIATION (ACPA)
ASME B31.3 (1990)Concrete Pipe Installation Manual
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
ASME B31.3 (1996)Process Piping
ASME/ANSI B31.4 (1992) Liquid Transportation Systems for Hydrocarbons, Liquid
Petroleum Gas,Anhydrous Ammonia, and Alcohols
ASME B31.8 (1995)Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A139 (1993; Rev. A) Electrical-Fusion (ARC)-Welded Steel Pipe
(NPS 4 and Over)
ASTM A 252 (1993)Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles
ASTM C 12 (1995)Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines
ASTM C 14M (1995)Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe (Metric)
ASTM C 14 (1995)Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe
ASTM C 33 (1993)Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 76M (1996) Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
Pipe
SECTION 02302-Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
ASTM D 422 (1963; R 1990)Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D 698 (1991) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using
Standard Effort(12,400 ft-lbf/ft(600 kN-m/m))
ASTM D 1140 (1992) Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. 200 (75-
Micrometer) Sieve
ASTM D 1556 91990; R 1996) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D 1557 (1991) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using
Modified Effort(56,000 ft-lbf/ft(2,700 kN-m/m))
ASTM D 1586 (1984; R 1992) Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of
Soils
ASTM D 2321 91989) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
ASTM D 2487 (1993) Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System)
ASTM D 2680 (1995; Rev. A) Acrylonitrile-Butadience-Styrene (ABS) and
Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Composite Sewer Piping
ASTM D 2774 (1994) underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure
Piping
ASTM D 2922 (1991) Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D 3017 (1988; R 1993) Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by
Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)
ASTM D 3786 (1987) Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitted Goods and
Nonwoven Fabrics — Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester
Method
ASTM D 3839 (1994; Rev. A) Underground Installation of"Fiberglass" (Glass-
Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting Resin)Pipe
ASTM D 4253 (1993) Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a Vibratory
Table
ASTM D 4254 (1991) Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and
Calculation of Relative Density
ASTM D 4318 (1995; Rev. A) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index
of Soils
SECTION 02302-Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
ASTM D 4355 (1992) Deterioration of Geotextiles from Exposure to Ultraviolet
Light and Water(Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus)
ASTM D 4491 (1995)Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity
ASTM D 4533 (1991)Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles
ASTM D 4632 (1991)Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles
ASTM D 4751 (1995)Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile
ASTM D 4759 91988; R 1992) Determining the Specification Conformance of
Geosynthetics
ASTM D 4833 (1988; R 1996) Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles,
Geomembranes, and Related products
AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA)
AWPA C2 (1995) Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties — Pressure
Treatment
AWPA P5 (1995)Waterborne Preservatives
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY(AWS)
AWS D1.1 (1996) Structural Welding Code Steel
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C300 (1989; Addendum 1993) Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe,
Steel-Cylinder Type, for Water and Other Liquids
AWWA C600 (1993) Installation of ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their
Appurtenances
AWWA M9 (1979)Concrete Pressure Pipe
AWWA M1 1 (1989) Steel pipe—A Guide for Design and Installation
AWWA M23 (1980)PVC Pipe—Design and Installation
COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)
CID A-A-203 (Rev. C)Paper, Kraft,Untreated
CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)
COE EM-385-1-1 (1996) Safety and Health Requirements Manual
SECTION 02302-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE(DOA)
DOA SSIR (April 1984) Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 1, Soil Survey
laboratory Methods and procedures for collecting Soil Samples,
Soil Conservation Service
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION(NEMA)
NEMA TC 2 (1990) electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40)
and EPC-80)
NEMA TC 6 (1990) PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installation
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION(NFPA)
NFPA 30 (1996)Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
NFPA 70 (1996)National Electrical Code
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Backfill
Material used in refilling a cut, trench or other excavation.
1.2.2 Cohesive Materials
Soils classified by ASTM D 2487 as GC, SC, ML,CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as Gm and SM
will be identified as cohesive only when fines have a plasticity index greater than zero
1.2.3 Cohesionless Materials
Soils classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Materials classified as GM and SM will be
identified as cohesionless only when the fines have a plasticity index of zero.
1.2.4 Compaction
The process of mechanically stabilizing a material by increasing its density at a controlled moisture
condition. "Degree of Compaction"is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the
test procedure described in ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for general soil types.
1.2.5 Granular Pipe Bedding
A dense, well-graded aggregate mixture of sand, gravel, or crushed stone (mixed individually, in
combination with each other, or with suitable binder soil) placed on a subgrade to provide a suitable
foundation for pipe. Granular bedding material may also consist of poorly graded sands or gravels where
fast draining soil characteristics are desired.
SECTION 02302 -Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.2.6 Hard Material
Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits or conglomerate materials (excluding man made materials
such as concrete) which are not included in the definition of"rock" but which usually require the use of
heavy excavation equipment,ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal.
1.2.7 In-Situ Soil
Existing in place soil.
1.2.8 Lift
A layer (or course) of soil placed on top of subgrade or a previously prepared or placed soil in a fill or
backfill.
1.2.9 Porous Fill
A granular soil material having a large void ratio when placed and compacted, allowing a free flow of
fluid to or from the surrounding soil, with no more than 5 percent of the material passing the No. 100
Sieve.
1.2.10 Refill
Material placed in excavation to correct over cut in depth.
1.2.11 Rock
Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated masses
or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting,
drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-mounted pneumatic hole
punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or concrete other than pavement
exceeding 1 cubic yard in volume. Removal of"hard material" will not be considered rock excavation
because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to increase production.
1.2.12 Topsoil
In natural or undisturbed soil formations, the fine-grained, weathered material on the surface or directly
below any loose or partially decomposed organic matter. Topsoil may be a dark-colored, fine, silty, or
sandy material with a high content of well decomposed organic matter, often containing traces of the
parent rock material. Gradation and material requirements specified herein apply to all topsoil references
in this contract. The material shall be representative of productive soils in the vicinity.
1.2.13 Unyielding Material
Rock rib, ridge, rock protrusion, or soil with cobbles in the trench bottom requiring a covering of finer
grain material or special bedding to avoid bridging in the pipe or conduit.
1.2.14 Unsatisfactory Material
In-Situ soil or other materials which can be identified as having insufficient strength characteristics or
stability to carry intended loads in the trench without excessive consolidation or loss of stability. Also
SECTION 02302-Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
backfill material which contains refuse, frozen material, large rocks, debris, soluble particles, and other
could damage the pipe or cause the backfill not to compact. Materials classified as PT, OH, or OL by
ASTM D 2487 are unsatisfactory.
1.2.15 Unstable Material
Material in the trench bottom which lacks firmness to maintain alignment and prevent joints from
separating in the pipe, conduit, or appurtenance structure during backfilling. This may be material
otherwise identified as satisfactory which has been disturbed or saturated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.3.1 SD-08 Statements
a. Shoring and Sheeting Plan
b. Dewatering Plan
1.3.1.1 Shoring and Sheeting Plan
Describe materials of shoring system to be used. Indicate whether or not components will remain after
filling or backfilling. Provide plans, sketches, or details along with calculations by a professional
engineer registered in any jurisdiction. Indicate sequence and method of installation and removal.
1.3.1.2 Dewatering Plan
Describe methods for removing collected water from open trenches and diverting surface water or piped
flow away from work area. Describe the basic components of the dewatering system proposed for use
and its planned method of operation. Dewatering plan, as a minimum, shall address those requirements
outlined in paragraph entitled"Drainage and Dewatering".
1.3.1.3 Welder's Qualifications
Submit prior to on-site welding.
1.3.2 SD-11 Factory Test Reports
a. Under drainage backfill material tests
b. Concrete tests
c. Trench backfill material tests
d. Pipe bedding material tests
e. Topsoil tests
SECTION 02302-Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.3.3 SD-12 Field Test Reports
a. Test for moisture-density relation
• b. Topsoil tests
c. Density and moisture tests
Submit field test data not listed above sufficiently in advance of construction so as not to delay work.
1.3.3.1 Test for moisture-Density Relation
Submit 7 days prior to commencing utility excavation.
1.3.3.2 Topsoil Tests
Submit topsoil tests verifying conformance to required parameters prior to commencing seeding and
planting operations.
1.3.3.3. Density and Moisture Tests
Submit within 14 days of test date.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Materials and workmanship specified herein with reference to DOT State Standard shall be in accordance
with the referenced articles, sections, and paragraphs of the standard except that contractual and payment
provisions do not apply.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
Deliver and store materials in a manner to prevent contamination, segregation, freezing, and other
damage. Store synthetic fiber filter fabric to prevent exposure to direct sunlight.
1.6 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria(Excavation is to be bid unclassified):
a. Surface elevations are as indicated.
b. No pipes or other man-made obstructions, except those indicated,will be encountered.
c. The character of the material to be excavated or found in the trench is as indicated. Rock or
hard material is considered unclassified and shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove.
d. Ground water elevations indicated as those existing at the time subsurface investigations were
made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at the time of construction.
c. Suitable backfill and bedding material in the quantities required is available on Owner
PrePeft
SECTION 02302-Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
f. Blasting will be permitted.
1.7 PROTECTION
1.7.1 Dewatering Plan
Base on available soil and hydrological data.
1.7.2 Utilities
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction shall be
at the Contractor's risk. Perform work adjacent to non-owner utilities as indicated in accordance with
procedures outlined by utility company. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a
utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction,
excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the
obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other
existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Engineer.
Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
Provide soil materials as specified below free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetable matter,
refuse, soft unsound particles, ice, or other deleterious and objectionable materials.
2.1.1 Backfill
Bring trenches to grade indicated on the drawings using materials excavated on the site of this project.
This material will be considered unclassified and no testing other than to compaction will be required
before use as backfill.
2.1.2 Special Backfill for Structures and Pavements
Backfill trenches under roads, structures, and paved areas with material conforming to the requirements
stated above except that the liquid limit of the material cannot exceed 35 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 4318, the plasticity index cannot exceed 12 percent when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 4318, and not more than 35 percent by weight can be finer than the No. 200 sieve when
tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140.
2.1.3 Sand
Clean, coarse-grained sand classified as SW or SP by ASTM D 2487 for bedding and backfill as
indicated.
2.1.4 Gravel
Clean, coarsely graded natural gravel, crushed stone or a combination thereof identified as #57.
Maximum particle size shall not exceed 3 inches.
SECTION 02302-Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.1.5 Backfill for Under Drainage Systems
Clean sand, crushed rock, or gravel meeting the following requirements:
a. Perforated or Slotted-Wall Pipe: Backfill meeting requirements of Type I material as specified
in Table 1.
b. Open Joint Pipe: Backfill consisting of both Type I and Type II materials as specified in Table
1.
c. Blind or French Drains: Backfill consisting of Type II material as specified in Table 1.
d. Any Type Drain Used With Filter Fabric: clean gravel or crushed stone or gravel conforming
to ASTM C 33 coarse aggregate grading size 57,67,or 7.
Table 1
Type I Graduation E 11
ASTM C 33
Type II Graduation 57
ASTM 33
ASTM D 422
Sieve Size Percent Passing Percent Passing
1.5 inches -- 100
1 inch -- 90 - 100
3/8 inch 100 25 - 60
No.4 95 - 100 5 - 40
No. 8 -- 0 - 20
No. 16 45 - 80 --
No. 50 10- 30 --
No. 100 0 - 10 --
2.1.6 Topsoil Material
Salvaged topsoil from stockpile. Prior to spreading, test topsoil, and add necessary soil modifiers to bring
material within the ranges specified in Table 2. Furnish additional topsoil from approved sources off the
site meeting requirements specified in Table 2 if stockpiled material is insufficient to complete work
indicated.
Free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than 3/4 inch in diameter (with maximum 3 percent retained on 1/4
inch sieve), brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material or substance detrimental to plant growth.
Topsoil shall be a natural,friable soil representative of productive soils in the vicinity. Modify the topsoil
provided if necessary to meet the requirements specified in Table 2.
SECTION 02302-Page 9

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Table 2
DOA SSIR Soil Survey Investigation Acceptable
Report No. 1,Laboratory Test for: Limits
Sand Content 20—45 percent by weight
Silt Content 25—50 percent by weight
Clay Content 10—30 percent by weight
Organic Material(Walkley-Block) 5 percent
pH 5.0 to 7.6
Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum
Absorption Rate 0.5 inch per hour minimum
2.1.7 Borrow
Provide materials meeting requirement for pipe bedding, sand, gravel, backfill, and topsoil. Obtain
borrow materials in excess of those furnished from excavations specified herein from sources off owner
property.
2.1.8 Piping Bedding
TABLE 02302-1 UTILITY EARTHWORK REFERENCES
PIPE SOIL INSTALLATION
MATERIALS MATERIAL REFERENCE REF
a. Acrylonitrile- ASTM D 2680,Appendix ASTM D 2321
Butadiene- XI and ASTM D 2321
Styrene(ABS) except bedding shall
Composite be Class I,gravel
Sewer pipe Haunching to
Spring line shall be
Class I,gravel
b. Acrylonitrile- ASTM D 2321, except ASTM D 2321
Butadiene- bedding shall be
Styrene(ABS) Class I,gravel
Nonpressure Haunching to spring
Pipe(Solid line shall be Class
Wall) I,gravel
c. Acrylonitrile- ASTM D 2774, except ASTM D 2774
Butadiene- bedding shall be GW
Styrene(ABS) GP, SW, SP and all
Pressure Pipe material surrounding
Pipe shall have
Maximum particle size
of 1/2 inch.
SECTION 02302-Page 10

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
TABLE 02302-1 UTILITY EARTHWORK REFERENCES
PIPE SOIL INSTALLATION
MATERIALS MATERIALS REFERENCE REF
d. Ductile Iron AWWA C600, except AWWA C600
and Ductile refill of over cut
Iron Pressure shall be gravel,
Pipe bedding shall be
GW,GP, SW, SP.
e. Electrical NEMA TC 2 Section 16302
Plastic Tubing NFPA 30
And Conduit NFPA 70
f. Vitrified Clay ASTM C 12 except ASTM C 12
Pipe Class B,
Gravel bedding
Installed as
Indicated.
g. Concrete Encased NEMA TC 2 Section 16302
Electrical 3000 psi
Plastic Tubing Concrete, one inch
(EPT) and max aggregate size
Conduit
h. Concrete ACPA 01-103
Gravity, Sewer ASTM C 76
Culvert (Reinforced)
Non-Reinforced)Class ASTM C14
A bedding material
i. Concrete AWWA C300,AWWA M9,AWWA M9
except shall be
Type 3,Compacted
Excavated Material
j. Corrugated AASHTO HB14 AASHTO HB14
Aluminum and Division II, Section
Corrugated 23,except bedding
Steel Pipe shall be GW, GP,
SW, SP.
k. Direct Burial NFPA 70,Article 710-3 Section 16302
Electrical NFPA 70,Articles
Cables Section 300-5 and 300-6
16302
1. Glass Fiber MIL-P-29206 ASTM D 3839
SECTION 02302-Page 11

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Reinforced MIL-P-38584
(FRP)Piping
m. Metallic Water AWWA C600 Same
Service Line
Pipe(Steel, Copper
Tube, Brass)
n. except Polyethylene ASTM D 2774, ASTM D 2774
(PE)Pressure bedding shall be GW
Pipe and all material
surrounding the pipe
shall have maximum
li particle size of
1/2 inch.
o. Polyvinyl ASTM D 2321, except ASTM D 2321
Chloride(PVC) bedding shall be AWWA M23
Nonpressure Pipe Class I,gravel
Haunching to
Spring line shall be
Class I,gravel
p. Polyvinyl ASTM D 2774, except ASTM D 2774
Chloride(PVC) bedding shall be GW
GP, SW, SP and
all material sur-
rounding pipe shall
have maximum particle
size of 1/2 inch.
q. PVC and ABS NEMA TC 6 Section 16302
Plastic NFPA 30
Utilities Duct NFPA 70
r. Rigid Metallic Section 16302
Conduit NFPA 60
(Electrical) Articles 300-6
NFPA 70
Articles 710-3
And 300-5
s. Steel Fuel Oil Concrete work in ASME B31.3
and Aviation accordance ASME/ANSI B31.4,
Fuel Piping Division 3 NFPA 30
t. Steel Gas Piping ASME B31.8
u. Steel Water Main AWWA M 11 AWWA M1 1
SECTION 02302-Page 12

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
v. Underground Heat Provide bedding and Section 02553
Distribution backfill material in
Systems(Pre- accordance with system
Fabricated or manufacturer's recom-
Pre-Engineered mendations as approved
Types)
TABLE 02302-1 UTILITY EARTHWORK REFERENCES
PIPE SOIL INSTALLATION
MATERIALS MATERIALS REFERENCE REF
In paragraph titles
"Submittals".
provide Class I,
gravel bedding.
haunching to
spring line shall
be Class I.
Provide material for pipe bedding conforming to Section 304-4, "Preparation of Pipe Foundation", of the
DOT State Standard as classified in accordance with ASTM D 2487.
2.2 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid-and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic
warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape
on rolls, 3 inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and
identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and
identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service LINE BELOW", or similar wording.
Color and printing shall be permanent,unaffected by moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
Yellow: Electric
Yellow: Gas, Oil,Dangerous Materials
Orange: Telephone and Other Communications
Blue: Water Systems
Green: Sewer Systems
White: Steam Systems
Gray: Compressed Air
2.2.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping
Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing
requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.003 inch. Tape shall have a
minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and 1250 pis crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent
elongation.
SECTION 02302-Page 13

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.2.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above.
Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi
lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing, or other
means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic
element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.
2.3 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Detection wire shall be insulated single strand, solid copper with a minimum diameter of 12 AWG.
2.4 MATERIAL FOR PIPE CASING
2.4.1 Casing Pipe
ASTM A 139, Grade B, or ASTM A 252, Grade 2, smooth wall pipe. Casing size shall be of the outside
diameter and wall thickness as indicated. Protective coating is not required on casing pipe.
2.4.2 Wood Supports
Treated Yellow Pine or Douglas Fir,rough, structural grade. Provide wood with nonleaching water-borne
pressure preservative (ACA or CCA) and treatment conforming to AWPA P5 and AWPA C2,
respectively. Secure wood supports to carrier pipe with stainless steel or zinc-coated steel bands.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
3.1.1 Shoring and Sheeting
Provide shoring trench boxes and sheeting where required. Include provisions in the shoring and sheeting
plan that will accomplish the following:
a. Prevent undermining of pavements, foundations and slabs.
b. Prevent slippage or movement in banks or slopes adjacent to the excavation.
c. Allow for the abandonment of shoring and sheeting materials in place in critical areas as the
work is completed. In these areas, backfill the excavation to the elevation indicated within 3
feet of the finished grade and remove the remaining exposed portion of the shoring before
completing the backfill.
3.1.2 Drainage and Dewatering
Plan for and provide the structures, equipment, and construction for the collection and disposal of surface
and subsurface water encountered in the course of construction.
SECTION 02302-Page 14

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.1.2.1 Drainage
Surface water shall be directed away from excavation and construction sites so as to prevent erosion and
undermining of foundations. Diversion ditches, dikes and grading shall be provided and maintained as
necessary during construction. Excavated slopes and backfill surfaces shall be protected to prevent
erosion and sloughing. Excavation shall be performed so that the site and the area immediately
surrounding the site and affecting operations at the site shall be continually and effectively drained.
3.1.3 Dewatering
Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of excavation
slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly
progress of construction. French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches will not be permitted within 3 feet of
the foundation of any structure, except with specific written approval, and after specific contractual
provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made. Control measures shall be taken by the
time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While
the excavation is open, the water level shall be maintained continuously, at least 3 feet below the working
level.
Operate the dewatering system until construction work below existing water levels is complete. Measure
and record the performance of the dewatering system. Have a back-up pump and system available for
immediate use.
3.1.4 Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically verify the
location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction. The Contractor
shall physically verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting
construction. The Contractor shall contact the owner for assistance in locating existing utilities.
3.1.5 Structures and Surfaces
Protect newly backfilled areas and adjacent structures, slopes, or grades from traffic, erosion settlement,
or any other damage. Repair and re-establish damaged or eroded grades and slopes and restore surface
construction prior to acceptance.
3.1.5.1 Disposal of Excavated Material
Dispose of excavated material so that it will not obstruct the flow of runoff, streams, endanger a partly
finished structure, impair the efficiency or appearance of any facilities, or be detrimental to the completed
work.
3.1.5.2 Stockpile Rock
Stockpile rock from trench excavations and use for constructing slopes or embankments adjacent to
streams, sides and bottoms of channels (rip-rap), etc. Remove excess stockpiles rock upon completion of
construction.
SECTION 02302-Page 15

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.1.6 Channels and Ditches
Construct (rip-rap) rock protection in areas indicated to the lines and thickness indicated to dissipate
stream energy and prevent channel erosion. Place rip-rap on a layer of filter fabric.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
3.3.1 Stockpiling Topsoil
Strip suitable soil from the site where excavation or grading is indicated and stockpile separately from
other excavated material. Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be stockpiled and used for
backfilling. Locate topsoil so that the material can be used readily for the finished grading. Where
sufficient existing topsoil conforming to the material requirements is not available on site,provide borrow
materials suitable for use as topsoil. Protect topsoil and keep in segregated piles until needed.
3.3.2 Cutting Pavement,Curbs, and Gutters
Make cuts with neat, parallel, straight lines one foot wider than trench width on each side of trenches and
one foot beyond each edge of pits. When the saw cut is within 6 feet of an existing joint, remove
pavement to the existing joint.
3.4 GENERAL EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING
Keep excavations free from water while construction is in progress. Notify the Engineer immediately in
writing if it becomes necessary to remove rock or hard,unstable, or otherwise unsatisfactory material to a
depth greater than indicated. Make trench sides as nearly vertical as practicable except where sloping of
sides is allowed. Sides of trenches shall not be sloped from the bottom of the trench up to the elevation of
the top of the pipe. Excavate ledge rock, boulders, and other unyielding material to an over depth at least
6 inches below the bottom of the pipe unless otherwise indicated or specified. Over excavate soft, weak,
or wet excavations as indicated. Use bedding material placed in 6 inch maximum layers to refill over
depths to the proper grade. At the contractor's option, the excavations may be cut to an over depth of not
less than 4 inches and refilled to required grade as specified. Grade bottom of trenches accurately to
provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on undisturbed soil, or bedding material as
indicated or specified at every point along its entire length except for portions where it is necessary to
excavate for bell holes and for making proper joints. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after trench
has been graded. Dimension of bell holes shall be as required for properly making the particular type of
joint to ensure that the bell does not bear on the bottom of the excavation. Trench dimensions shall be as
indicated.
3.4.1 Shoring and Sheeting
Shore and sheet excavations as described in the plan submitted with various member sizes arranged to
prevent injury to persons and damage to structures. Arrange shoring and sheeting to prelude injurious
caving during removal. Obtain approval from the Engineer prior to removing shoring, sheeting, or
bracing in excavations adjacent to on-grade slabs, foundations, or other structural elements.
3.5 BEDDING
Of materials and depths as indicated or specified for utility lines and utility line structures. Place bedding
in 6 inch maximum loose lifts. Provide uniform and continuous support for each section of structure
except at bell holes or depressions necessary for making proper joints.
SECTION 02302-Page 16

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.5.1 Concrete Cradles
Specified in lieu of other types of bedding for a particular type of pipe material, shall be as indicated or
specified.
3.6 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Install tape in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations except as modified herein. Bury tape 12
inches below finished grade;under pavements and slabs,bury tape 6 inches below top of subgrade.
3.7 BURIED DETECTION WIRE
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inches above the top
of pipe. The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. The ends of the
wire shall terminate inside the manholes at each end of the pipe,with a minimum of 3 feet of wire, coiled,
remaining accessible in each manhole. The wire shall remain insulated over it's entire length. The wire
shall enter manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal
between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, the wire shall terminate in the valve pit at the
pump station end of the pipe.
3.8 BACKFILLING
Construct backfill in two operations (initial and final) as indicated and specified in this section. Place
initial backfill in 6 inch maximum loose lifts to one foot above pipe unless otherwise specified. Ensure
that initially placed material is tamped firmly under pipe haunches. Bring up evenly on each side and
along the full length of the pipe. Ensure that no damage is done to the utility or its protective coating.
Place the remainder of the backfill (final backfill) in 9 inch maximum loose lifts unless otherwise
specified. Compact each loose lift as specified in the paragraph entitled "General Compaction" before
placing the next lift. Do not backfill in freezing weather or where the material in the trench is already
frozen or is muddy, except as authorized. Provide a minimum cover from final grade of 2 1/2 feet for
water piping, gas mains, storm drains and 3 feet for sewer mains. Where settlements greater than the
tolerance allowed herein for grading occur in trenches and pits due to improper compaction, excavate to
the depth necessary to rectify the problem, then backfill and compact the excavation as specified herein
and restore the surface to the required elevation. Coordinate backfilling with testing of utilities. Testing
for the following shall be complete before final backfilling: water distribution, sanitary sewer, gas
distribution systems. Provide buried warning and identification tape installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation.
3.9 COMPACTION
Use hand-operated, plate-type, vibratory, or other suitable hand tampers in areas not accessible to larger
rollers or compactors. Avoid damaging pipes and protective pipe coatings. Compact material in
accordance with the following unless otherwise specified. If necessary, alter, change, or modify selected
equipment or compaction methods to meet specified compaction requirements.
3.9.1 Compaction of Material in Sub Cuts or Over Excavations
In rock, compact to 95 percent to AST D 1557 maximum density. In soft, weak, or wet soils, tamp refill
material to consolidate to density of adjacent material in trench wall. In stable soils, compact to 90
percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density.
SECTION 02302-Page 17

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.9.2 Compaction of Pipe and Conduit Bedding
In rock,compact to 95 percent and in soil, compact to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density.
3.9.3 Compaction of Backfill
Compact initial backfill material surrounding pipes, cables, conduits, or ducts, to 90 percent of ASTM D
1557 maximum density except where bedding and backfill are the same material. Where bedding and
backfill are the same material, compact initial backfill to the density of the bedding. Under areas to be
seeded or sodded, compact succeeding layers of final backfill to 85 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum
density. For utilities under railroad or highway right-of-way, structures and pavements, compact
succeeding layers of final backfill as specified under paragraph entitled "Special Earthwork Installation
Requirements".
3.10 SPECIAL EARTHWORK INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.10.1 Manholes and Other Appurtenances
Provide at least 12 inches clear from outer surfaces to the embankment or shoring. Remove rock as
specified herein. Remove unstable soil that is incapable of supporting the structure to an over depth of
one foot and refill with gravel to the proper elevation. Stabilize soft, weak, or wet excavations as
indicated. Refill over depths with gravel to the required grade and compact to 90 percent of ASTM D
1557 maximum density.
3.10.2 Steel Cased Pipelines
Excavate and place bedding and backfill as indicated.
3.10.3 Hole for Pipeline Casing
Mechanically bore holes and case through the soil with a cutting head on a continuous auger mounted
inside the casing pipe. Weld lengths of pipe together in accordance with AWS D1.1. Do not use water or
other fluids in connection with the boring operation.
3.10.4 Cleaning
Clean inside of the pipeline casing of dirt, weld splatters, and other foreign matter which would interfere
with insertion of the piped utilities by attaching a pipe cleaning plug to the boring rig and passing it
through the pipe.
3.10.5 End Seals
After installation of piped utilities in pipeline casing, provide watertight end seals at each end of pipeline
casing between pipeline casing and piping utilities. Provide watertight end seals as indicated.
3.10.6 Compaction for Structures and Pavements
Place final backfill in 6 inch maximum loose lifts. If a vibratory roller is used for compaction of final
backfill, the lift thickness can be increased to 9 inches. Compact all backfill surrounding pipes, ducts,
conduits, and other structures to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density except compact the top
SECTION 02302-Page 18

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC •
12 inches of subgrade to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density. Backfill to permit the rolling
and compacting of the completed excavation with the adjoining material, providing the specified density
necessary to enable paving of the area immediately after backfilling has been completed.
3.11 RIP-RAP CONSTRUCTION
Construct rip-rap on filter fabric in the areas indicated.
3.11.1 Preparation
Trim and dress indicated areas to conform to cross sections, lines and grade shown within a tolerance of
0.1 foot.
3.11.2 Bedding Placement
Spread filter fabric bedding material uniformly to a thickness of at least 3 inches on prepared subgrade as
indicated.
3.11.3 Stone Placement
Place rock for rip-rap on prepared bedding material to produce a well graded mass with the minimum
practicable percentage of voids in conformance with lines and grades indicated. Distribute larger rock
fragments, with dimensions extending the full depth of the rip-rap throughout the entire mass and
eliminate"pockets"of small rock fragments. Rearrange individual pieces by mechanical equipment or by
hand as necessary to obtain the distribution of fragment sizes specified above.
3.12 FINISH OPERATIONS
3.12.1 Grading
Finish to grades indicated within one-tenth of a foot. Provide sod or topsoil in areas to be seeded or
sodded as indicated and in accordance with requirements specified in Section 02921, "Turf'. Grade areas
to drain water away from structures and to provide suitable surfaces for mowing machines. Grade
existing grades that are to remain but have been distributed by the Contractor's operations.
3.12.2 Spreading Topsoil
Clear areas to receive topsoil for the finished surface of materials that would interfere with planting and
maintenance operations. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 2 inches. Do not place topsoil when the subgrade
is frozen, extremely wet or dry, or in other conditions detrimental to seeding, planting, or grading.
Comply with the requirements of Section 02921, TURF. Spread topsoil to a uniform depth of 4 inches
over the designated areas.
3.12.3 Borrow Area
Grade to drain properly. Maintain and restore borrow pits as specified in Section 01575, TEMPORARY
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
SECTION 02302-Page 19

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin Cdunty,NC
3.12.4 Disposition of Surplus Material
Surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for filling, backfilling, or grading shall be wasted by
disposition in the area indicated. Spread and level wasted material, grade to the elevations indicated.
Comply with requirements of Section 01575, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
3.12.5 Protection of Surfaces
Protect newly graded areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements that may occur and as required in
Section 01575, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS. Repair or re-establish damaged
grades, elevations, or slopes.
3.12.6 Pavement Repair
Repair pavement, curbs, and gutters. Do not repair pavement until trench or pit has been backfilled and
compacted as specified herein. Provide a temporary road surface of crushed stone over backfilled portion
until permanent pavement is repaired. Remove and dispose of temporary road surface material when
permanent pavement is placed. As a minimum, maintain one-way traffic on roads and streets crossed by
trenches. Fully open roads and streets to traffic within 14 days.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Test bedding for conformance to specified requirements. Test backfill to be used under roads and paved
areas for conformance to special requirements. Test bedding and backfill for moisture-density relations in
accordance with ASTM D 1557 as specified herein. Perform at least one of each of the required tests for
each material provided. Perform sufficiently in advance of construction so as not to delay work. Provide
additional tests as specified above for each change of source. Perform final tests on topsoil to ensure
adjustment of parameters into the ranges specified. Perform density and moisture tests in randomly
selected locations and in accordance with ASTM D 1556 as follows:
a. Bedding and backfill in trenches: One test per 400 linear feet in each lift.
--END OF SECTION--
SECTION 02302-Page 20

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 02315
EXCAVATION AND FILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 33 (1993)Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 136 (1995; Rev. A) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM D 698 (1991) Laboratory Compaction characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort(12,400 ft-lbf/ft(600 kN-m/m))
ASTM D 1140 (1992) Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-
Micrometer) Sieve
ASTM D 1556 (1990) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-
Cone Method
ASTM D 1557 (1991) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort(56,000 ft-lbf/ft(2,700 kN-m/m))
ASTM D 2321 (1989) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
ASTM D 2487 (1993) Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified •
Soil classification System)
ASTM D 2922 (1991) Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods(Shallow Depth)
ASTM D 3017 (1988; R 1993) Water Content of Soil and rock in Place by
Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)
ASTM D 4318 (1955)Liquid Limit,Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C600 (1993) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their
Appurtenances
SECTION 02315—Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)
CID A-A-1909 Fertilizer
CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)
COE EM-385-1-1 (1992) Safety and Health Requirements Manual
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Hard Materials
Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included in the
definition of"rock"but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment,ripper teeth, or jack
hammers for removal.
1.2.2 Rock
Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated masses
or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting,
drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-mounted pneumatic hole
punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or concrete other than pavement
exceeding 1 cubic yard in volume. Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation
because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to increase production.
1.2.3 Cohesive Materials
Materials ASTM D 2487 classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and
SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater than zero.
1.2.4 Cohesionless Materials
1.2.5 Pile Supported Structure
As used herein,a structure where both the foundation and floor slab are pile supported.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with section entitled"Submittal Procedures".
1.3.1 SD-04,Drawings
a. Supporting System Drawings
1.3.1.1 Required Drawings
Submit drawings and calculations by a registered professional Engineer. Drawings shall include material
sizes and types, arrangement of members, and the sequence and method of installation and removal.
SECTION 02315—Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.3.2 SD-05, Design Data
a. Supporting System Calculations
1.3.2.1 Required Data
Submit drawings and calculations by a registered professional Engineer. Calculations shall include data
and references used.
1.3.3 SD-08, Statements
a. Supporting System Work Plan
b. Dewatering Work Plan
c. Blasting Work Plan
Submit 15 days prior to starting work.
1.3.4 SD-12,Field Test Reports
a. Fill and Backfill Test
b. Select Material Test
c. Porous Fill Test for Capillary Water Barrier
d. Density Tests
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials.
1.5 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria(Excavation to be bid unclassified):
a. Surface elevations are as indicated.
b. Pipes or other artificial obstructions,except those indicated,will not be encountered.
c. Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time subsurface
investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at the time
of construction.
d. Blasting will be permitted. Blasting shall be conducted in accordance with COE EM-385-1-1,
and Federal, State, and local safety regulations. Submit for approval a blasting plan, including
calculations for over pressure and debris hazard, prepared and sealed by a registered
professional Engineer. Blasting mats shall be provided, and non-electric blasting caps shall be
used. Notify the Engineer 24 hours prior to blasting.
SECTION 02315—Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
Free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and frozen,
deleterious, or objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the maximum particle diameter shall
be one-half the lift thickness at the intended location.
2.1.1 Common Fill
Approved, unclassified soil materials with the characteristics required to compact to the soil density
specified for the intended location.
2.1.2 Backfill and Fill Material
ASTM D 2487, classification GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC with a maximum ASTM D 4318
liquid limit of 35, maximum ASTM D 4318 plasticity index of 12, and a maximum of 25 percent by
weight passing ASTM D 1140,No. 200 sieve.
2.1.3 Topsoil
natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of subsoil, stumps,
rocks larger than one inch diameter, brush,weeds,toxic substances and other material detrimental to plant
growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
2.1.4 Select Material
ASTM D 2487, classification GW, GP, SW, SP with a maximum of 10 percent by weight passing ASTM
D 1140,No. 200 sieve.
2.2 POROUS FILL FOR CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER
ASTM C 33 fine aggregate grading with a maximum of 3 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No.
200 sieve, or coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 77 and conforming to the general soil material requirements
specified in the paragraph entitled"Soil Materials".
2.3 BORROW
Obtain borrow materials required in excess of those furnished from excavations from sources outside of
Owner property.
2.4 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid-and-alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic
warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape
on rolls, 3 inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and
identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and
identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (INTENDED SERVICE) LINE BELOW" or similar
wording. Color and printing shall be permanent,unaffected by moisture or soil.
SECTION 02315—Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Warning Tape Color Codes
Yellow: Electric
Yellow: Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials
Orange: Telephone and Communications
Other
Blue: Water Systems
Green: Sewer Systems
White: Steam Systems
Gray: Compressed Air
2.4.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping
Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing
requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.003 inch. Tape shall have a
minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent
elongation.
2.4.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above.
Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi
lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing, or other
means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic
element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.
2.5 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Detection wire shall be insulated single strand, solid copper with a minimum of 12 AWG.
2.6 MATERIAL FOR RIP-RAP
Bedding material, filter fabric and rock conforming to these requirements.
2.6.1 Bedding Material
Consisting of sand, gravel, or crushed rock, well graded with a maximum particle size of 2 inches
Material shall be composed of tough, durable particles. Fines passing the No. 200 standard sieve shall
have a plasticity index less than six.
2.6.2 Rock
Rock fragments sufficiently durable to ensure permanence in the structure and the environment in which
it is to be used. Rock fragments shall be free from cracks, seams, and other defects that would increase
the risk of deterioration from natural causes. The size of the fragments shall be such that no individual
fragment exceeds a weight of 150 pounds and that no more than 10 percent of the mixture, by weight,
consists of fragments weighing 2 pounds or less each. Specific gravity of the rock shall be a minimum of
2.50. The inclusion of more than trace 1 percent quantities of dirt, sand, clay, and rock fines will not be
permitted.
SECTION 02315—Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
3.1.1 Clearing and Grubbing
Unless indicated otherwise, remove trees, stumps, logs, shrubs and brush within the clearing limits.
Remove stumps entirely. Grub out matted roots and roots over 2 inches in diameter to at least 18 inches
below existing surface.
3.1.2 Stripping
Strip existing topsoil to a depth of 4 inches without contamination by subsoil material. Stockpile topsoil
separately from other excavated material and locate convenient to finish grading area.
3.1.3 Unsuitable Material
Remove vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, mulch, and rubbish underneath paved areas or
concrete slabs.
3.1.3.1 Proof Rolling
Proof rolling shall be done on an exposed subgrade free of surface water (wet conditions resulting from
rainfall) which would promote degradation of an otherwise acceptable subgrade. After stripping, proof
roll the existing subgrade of the structure with six (6) passes of a 15 ton, pneumatic-tired roller. Operate
the roller in a systematic manner to ensure the number of passes over all areas, and at speeds between 1
1/2 to 3 1/2 miles per hour. Notify the Engineer a minimum of 3 days prior to proof rolling. Proof
rolling shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. Rutting or pumping of material shall be
undercut to a depth of 12 inches and replaced with fill and backfill material.
3.2 PROTECTION
3.2.1 Protective Systems
Provide shoring,bracing and sheeting in accordance with COE Em-385-1-1.
3.2.2 Drainage and Dewatering
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction.
3.2.2.1 Drainage
So that construction operations progress successfully, completely drain construction site during periods of
construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. Provide temporary ditches, swales,and other drainage
features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils. When unsuitable working platforms for
equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop, remove
unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein.
SECTION 02315—Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.2.2.2 Dewatering
Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of excavation
slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly
progress of construction. French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches will not be permitted within 3 feet of
the foundation of any structure, except with specific written approval, and after specific contractual
provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made. Control measures shall be taken by the
time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While
the excavation is open, the water level shall be maintained continuously, at least 3 feet below the working
level.
3.2.3 Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically verify the
location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction.
3.2.4 Machinery and Equipment
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall be at the
Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe that has
been displaced or damaged.
3.3 EXCAVATION
Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated materials that meet the
specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location. Keep excavations free from
water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils softened or made unsuitable
for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather. Refill with backfill and fill material and compact
to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density. Unless specified otherwise, refill excavations cut
below indicated depth with backfill and fill materials and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557
maximum density.
3.3.1 Structures With Spread Footings
Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to concrete
placement. Fill over excavations with concrete during foundation placement.
3.3.2 Pile Cap Excavation and Backfilling
Excavate to bottom of pile cap prior to placing or driving piles, unless authorized otherwise by the
Engineer. Backfill and compact over excavations and changes in grade due to pile driving operations to
95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density.
3.3.3 Pipe Trenches
Excavate to the dimension indicated. Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform support for each
section of pipe after pipe bedding placement.
SECTION 02315—Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.3.4 Hard Material and Rock Excavation
Remove hard material and rock to elevations indicated in a manner that will leave foundation material in
an unshattered and solid condition. Roughenlevel surfaces and cut sloped surfaces into benches for bond
with concrete. Protect shale from conditions causing decomposition along joints or cleavage planes and
other types of erosion. Removal of hard material and rock beyond lines and grades indicated unless
previously authorized by the Engineer will not be grounds for a claim for additional payment.
3.4 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
Fill and backfill to contours, elevations, and dimensions indicated. Compact each lift before placing
overlaying lift.
3.4.1 Common Fill Document
Provide for general site. Place in 6 inch lifts. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with
mechanical hand tampers. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to a satisfactory moisture
content. Finish to a smooth surface by blading,rolling with a smooth roller, or both.
3.4.2 Backfill and Fill Material Placement
Provide for paved areas and under concrete slabs, except where select material is provided. Place in 6
inch lifts. Place backfill material adjacent to structures as the structural elements are completed and
accepted. Backfill against concrete only when approved. Place and compact material to avoid loading
upon or against the structure.
3.4.3 Select Material Placement
Provide under structures not pile supported. Place in 6 inch lifts. Backfill adjacent to structures shall be
placed as structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill against concrete only when approved.
Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against structure.
3.4.4 Porous Fill Placement
Provide under floor slab on a compacted subgrade. Place in 4 inch lifts.
3.4.5 Trench Backfilling
Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and acceptance of work permits. Place and compact backfill
under structures and paved areas in 6 inch lifts to top of trench and in 6 inch lifts to one foot over pipe
outside structures and paved areas.
3.4.5.1 Bedding Requirements
Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for buried piping in
accordance with AWWA C600, type 4, except as specified herein. Backfill to top of pipe shall be
compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring
line of pipe. Provide ASTM D 2321 materials as follows:
a. Class I: Angular, 0.25 to 1.5 inches, graded stone, including a number of fill materials that
have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed shells.
SECTION 02315—Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
b. Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1.5 inches, including various
graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally granular and
noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are included in this class as
specified in ASTM D 2487.
3.5 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12 inches below finished grade;
under pavements and slabs,bury tape 6 inches below top of subgrade.
3.6 BURIED DETECTION WIRE
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inches above the top
of pipe. The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. The ends of the
wire shall terminate inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 3 feet of wire, coiled,
remaining accessible in each manhole. The wire shall remain insulated over it's entire length. The wire
shall enter manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal
between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, the wire shall terminate in the valve pit at the
pump station end of the pipe.
3.7 COMPACTION
Expressed as a percentage of maximum density. Determine in-place density of existing subgrade; if
required density exists,no compaction of existing subgrade will be required.
3.7.1 General Site
Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5 foot line of the structure to 85
percent of ASTM D 1557.
3.7.2 Structures, Spread Footings,and Concrete Slabs
compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557. Compact fill and backfill material to
95 percent of ASTM D 1557.
3.7.3 Porous fill for Capillary Water Barrier
Compact with two (2)passes of a hand-operated,plate type vibratory compactor.
3.7.4 Adjacent Area
Compact areas within 5 feet of structures to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557.
3.7.5 Paved Areas
Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557. Compact fill and backfill materials
to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557.
SECTION 02315—Page 9

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.8 FINISH OPERATIONS
3.8.1 Grading
Finish grades as indicated within one-tenth of one foot. Grade areas to drain water away from structures.
For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by Contractor's operations, grade as
directed.
3.8.2 Seed
Provide as indicated on plans.
3.8.3 Protection of Surfaces
Protect newly graded areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements that may occur. Repair or re-establish
damaged grades, elevations, or slopes.
3.9 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Remove from Government property surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or
backfilling, and brush,refuse, stumps,roots, and timer.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.10.1 Sampling
Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests.
3.10.2 Testing
Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used. Provide additional tests for each source
change.
3.10.2.1 Fill and Backfill Material Testing
Test fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487
gradation limits; ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D 4318 for liquid limit
and for plastic limit; ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.
3.10.2.2 Select Material Testing
Test select material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits;
ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture
density relations, as applicable.
3.10.2.3 Porous Fill Testing
Test porous fill in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to graduation specified in ASTM C 33.
SECTION 02315—Page 10

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.10.2.4 Density Tests
Test density in accordance with ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017. When ASTM D
2922 and ASTM D 3017 density tests are used, verify density test results by performing an ASTM D
1556 density test at a location already ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 tested as specified herein.
Perform an ASTM D 1556 density test at the start of the job, and for every 10 ASTM D 2922 and ASTM
D 3017 density tests thereafter. Test each lift at randomly selected locations every 2000 square feet of
existing grade in fills for structures and concrete slabs, and every 2500 square feet for other fill areas and
every 2000 square feet of subgrade in cut.
--End of Section--
SECTION 02315—Page 11

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 02530
SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Latest Revisions shall be applicable to all
references.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE(ANSI)
ANSI B18.5.2.1M Metric Round Head Short Square Neck Bolts
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
ASME/ANSI B 16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME/ANSI B 18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts(Inch Series)
ANSI/ASME B18.5.2.2M Metric Round Head Square Neck Bolts
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 47 Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A 48M Gray Iron Castings(Metric)
ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 126 Standard Specification for Grey Iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges and Pipe Fittings
ASTM A 307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength
ASTM A 536 Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A 746 Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe
ASTM C 14 Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe
ASTM C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
SECTION 02530-Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement
ASTM C 478M Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections(Metric)
ASTM C 478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C 923M Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Structures, Pipes and Laterals(Metric)
ASTM C 923 Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Structures,Pipes and Laterals
ASTM C 990 Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections
Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants
ASTM C 990M Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections
Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants (Metric)
ASTM D 1784 Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride)(CPVC)Compounds
ASTM D 1785 Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80,
and 120
ASTM D 2241 (Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR
Series)
ASTM D 2321 Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers
and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
ASTM D 2412 Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic
Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
ASTM D 2464 Threaded Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Fittings,
Schedule 80
ASTM D 2466 Polyvinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D 2467 Socket-Type Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80
ASTM D 3034 Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM D 3139 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric
Seals
ASTM D 3212 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipe Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals
SECTION 02530-Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
ASTM F 402 Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners
Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F 477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM F 949 Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a
Smooth Interior and Fittings
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA)
AWWA C104/A21.4 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for
Water
AWWA C110/A21.10 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through 48 in. (75
mm Through 1200 nun), for Water and Other Liquids
AWWA C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings
AWWA C115/A21.15 Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron
Threaded Flanges
ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other
Liquids
AWWA C153/A21.53 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. Through 24 in. (76 mm
Through 610 mm) and 54 in. Through 64 in. (1,000 mm
Through 1,600 mm), for Water Service
AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage
Systems
AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their
Appurtenances
AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C900 PVC Pressure Pipe
AWWA M23 PVC Pipe-Design and Installation
UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION(UBPPA)
UBPPA UNI-B-3 Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Pressure Pipe
UBPPA UNI-B-6 Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.2.1 General
SECTION 02530-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
fequifeeh The following general guidelines for design and materials shall be adhered to.
1. Force Main pipe material shall be Ductile Iron or PVC. Requirements for ductile iron pipe class
can be found in the paragraphs below. All PVC pipe 4" through 12" shall be a minimum
classification of AWWA C900 DR 18 (Class 150). 2"PVC pipe shall be CL 200.
2. Isolation valves shall have a minimum spacing of 1,000'.
3. Maximum manhole spacing shall be 400'.
4. Minimum depth of bury for water mains shall be 4'.
5. All force main crossing under storm drain shall be ductile iron.
6. Force mains shall not be installed under pavement section,curb and gutter,or sidewalk.
7. Force Main PVC will be green with green dig tape.
8. Force Main to Force Main connections will not be allowed. Force Mains should discharge into a
sewer manhole or lift station.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3.1 Sanitary Sewer Gravity Pipeline,Force Main,and Services
Install new sanitary sewer gravity mains, force main, manholes and service lateral lines. Gravity sewer
mains shall be of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and ductile iron pipe. Force main shall be of ductile iron
and polyvinyl chloride. Service lateral piping shall be PVC, schedule 40 (4" diameter unless otherwise
pp g
indicated). Manholes shall bepre-cast concrete manholes (4' diameter unless indicated otherwise.
Inside drops and manhole depth over 12' need to be 5' diameter). Any manhole having a bury depth of
15ft or greater shall require DIP gravity sewer main. This DIP shall extend from manhole to manhole.
Transition of pipe material between manholes shall not permitted.p p be pe t ed.
Materials, installation and workmanship shall be as specified herein.
The Following shall represent minimum manhole sizes based upon pipe size and depth:
Diameter Manhole Main Size or Depth
4' 8"to 15" 0' to 12'
5' 18"to 27" 12' to 20"
6' 30"to 39" 20' and greater
7' 42"to 51"
8' 54"to 60"
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit six(6)copies of the following to Franklin County for approval before beginning construction.
1.4.1 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts.
A. Pipeline materials including joints, fittings, and couplings.
B. Gate Valves, Check Valves,and AirNacuum Valves.
SECTION 02530-Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.4.2 Shop Drawings
A. Precast concrete manhole.
B. Metal items.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
1.5.1 Delivery and Storage
1.5.1.1 Piping
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of handling. Store materials on site in
enclosures or under protective coverings. Store plastic piping and jointing materials and rubber gaskets
under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes
and fittings free of dirt and debris.
1.5.2 Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound
undamaged condition. Take special care not to damage linings of pipe and fittings; if lining is damaged,
make satisfactory repairs. Carry, do not drag pipe to trench.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
All products supplied and installed as part of this specification must have been manufactured within 6
months of the date of shipment to the project site. Any exception to this requirement must be approved
by the Owner and Engineer prior to shipment.
2.1 PIPELINE MATERIALS
2.1.1 Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe and Associated Fittings
2.1.1.1 Ductile Iron Gravity Pipe and Fittings
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be Pressure Class 350 and shall conform to ASTM A 746. Fittings shall conform
to AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53. Fittings shall have strength at least equivalent to that
of the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be suitable for the joints specified hereinafter. Pipe and
fittings shall have cement-mortar lining conforming to AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness.
2.1.1.2 Ductile Iron Gravity Joints and Jointing Materials
Pipe and fittings shall have push-on joints or mechanical joints, except as otherwise specified in this
paragraph. Mechanical joints only shall be used where indicated. Push-on joint pipe ends and fitting
ends, gaskets, and lubricant for joint assembly shall conform to AWWA C111/A21.11. Mechanical joint
requirements for pipe ends, glands,bolts and nuts, and gaskets shall conform to AWWA C l 11/A21.11.
2.1.2.3 Interior Lining of Ductile Iron Pipe
SECTION 02530-Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Interior of all DIP Pipe and Fittings shall be factory coated with 40-60 mils (dry film thickness) of
Tnemec Series 431 Perma-Shield PL, Protecto 401, or equal, modified polyamine ceramic epoxy lining.
Coating shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation or as described below:
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP5/NACE 1/ISO Sa 3 White Metal Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular
anchor profile of 3.0 mils(76.2 microns)
All internal surfaces of ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be delivered to the application facility without
asphalt or any other protective lining on the interior surface. All oils, small deposits of asphalt paint,
grease, and soluble deposits shall be removed in accordance with NAPF 500-03-01 Solvent Cleaning
prior to abrasive blasting.
Pipe: Uniformly rotary-abrasive blast using angular abrasive to a NAPF 500-03-04: Internal Pipe Surface
condition, full removal of annealing oxide layer. When viewed without magnification, the interior
surfaces shall be free of all visible dirt, dust, annealing oxide, rust, mold coating and other foreign matter.
Any area where rust reappears before application shall be reblasted. The surface shall contain a minimum
angular anchor profile of 3.0 mils (76.2 microns) (Reference NACE RP0287 or ASTM D 4417, Method
C).
Fittings: Uniformly abrasive blast using angular abrasive to a NAPF 500-03-05: Fitting Blast Clean #1
condition, no staining. When viewed without magnification, the interior surfaces shall be free of all
visible dirt, dust, annealing oxide, rust, mold coating and other foreign matter. Any area where rust
reappears before application shall be reblasted. The surface shall contain a minimum angular anchor
profile of 3.0 mils(76.2 microns)(Reference NACE RP0287 or ASTM D 4417,Method C).
2.1.2 Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Gravity Sewer Piping
2.1.2.1 PVC Plastic Gravity Pipe and Fittings
For pipe diameter larger than 15" PVC corrugated pipe with a smooth interior shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM F949-99 (or latest revision), with ends suitable for elastomeric gasket joints. The
pipe and fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign, inclusions
or other injurious defects. Minimum pipe stiffness when measured in accordance with ASTM Test
Method D2412 shall be 50 psi. There shall be no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when the
pipe is tested per ASTM Test Method D2412 at 60 percent flattening. The pipe shall be made of PVC
compound having a minimum cell classification of 12454B as defined in ASTM Specification D1784.
All manufactures of PVC sewer pipe must be pre-qualified at least 10 days prior to bid opening to be
considered as approved material suppliers. Pre-qualification submittals must demonstrate a minimum 2
years' experience of manufacturing proposed pipe material, pipe performance history including a project
installation list with at least five (5) successful sanitary sewer installations in excess of 3000' per project,
product literature and installation recommendations.
PVC pipe 15" or below shall conform to ASTM 3034, SDR 35 or SDR 26 with ends suitable for
elastomeric gasket joints.
2.1.2.2 PVC Plastic Gravity Joints and Jointing Material
Large Diameter PVC Joints shall conform to ASTM F949-99 Section 5.2.3. Gaskets shall conform to
ASTM F 477.
SECTION 02530-Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Small Diameter PVC Joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477.
2.1.3 PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings for Service Laterals and Cleanouts
Pipe and fittings shall be solid wall manufactured from virgin rigid PVC vinyl compounds with a Cell
Class of 12454-B as identified in ASTM D-1784. Pipe shall be PVC Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size (ips)
conforming to ASTM D-2665. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured to the normal dimension cited in
the ASTM Standard.
2.1.3.1 Connections to Sewer Main
A. PVC Sewer Mains: Provide a wye or tee-wye fitting meeting above requirements for sewer mains
to correspond with appropriate service lateral size.
B. Ductile Iron Pipe Sewer Mains: Provide compression-fit or saddle type service connection
specifically designed for use with ductile iron pipe specified for sewer main installation.
2.1.4 Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe for Sewer Force Mains
Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51, Pressure Class 350 for 12"diameter pipe
and smaller. Flanged ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C115/A21.15. Mechanical Joint fittings
shall conform to AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53. Fittings with push-on joint ends shall
conform to the same requirements as fittings with mechanical joint ends, except that the bell design shall
be modified, as approved, for push-on joint. Fittings shall have pressure rating at least equivalent to that
of the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be suitable for the joints specified hereinafter. Pipe and
fittings shall have cement-mortar lining conforming to AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness.
Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Joints shall be interior lined as described in Paragraph 2.1.2.3 above.
2.1.4.1 Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe Joints
Joints for pipe shall be push-on joints unless otherwise indicated. Joints at fittings shall be mechanical
joints unless otherwise indicated. Joints made with sleeve-type mechanical coupling may be used in lieu
of push-on joint, subject to the limitations specified in paragraph entitled "Sleeve-Type Mechanical
Couplings."
A. Push-On Joints: Shape of pipe ends and fitting ends, gaskets, and lubricant for joint assembly,
AWWA C111/A21.11.
1. Restrained Push-On Joints: Restrained push-on joints for pipe where indicated shall be
designed for a working pressure of 350 psi for 4"-24" pipe. Restrained push-on joints shall
be capable of being deflected a minimum of 4 degrees after assembly for pipe through 12"
and 3 degrees for pipe 14" — 24". Restrained push-on joints shall be manufactured, not by
specialized gripping segment gasket installation.
B. Mechanical Joints: Dimensional and material requirements for pipe ends, glands, bolts and nuts,
and gaskets,AWWA Cl 11/A21.11.
1. Restrained Flexible Bolted Joints: Restrained mechanical joint pipe (and connections to MJ
fittings and valves) shall utilize a flexible bolted joint designed for a working pressure of 350
psi for 4" —24" pipe. Restrained flexible bolted joints shall be capable of being deflected a
SECTION 02530-Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
minimum of 4 degrees for pipe through 12", 3 degrees for 14" and 16" pipe, 2.5 degrees for
18"and 20"pipe and 2 degrees for pipe 24"through 36".
C. Flanged Joints: Bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanged connections as recommended in the
Appendix to AWWA C115/A21.15. Flange for setscrewed flanges shall be of ductile iron,
ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12, and conform to the applicable requirements of ASME/ANSI
B16.1, Class 250. Setscrews for setscrewed flanges shall be 190,000-psi tensile strength, heat
treated and zinc-coated steel. Gasket for setscrewed flanges shall conform to applicable
requirements for mechanical joint gaskets specified in AWWA C111/A21.11. Design of
setscrewed gasket shall provide for confinement and compression of gasket when joint to
adjoining flange is made.
D. Sleeve-Type Mechanical Coupled Joints: As specified in paragraph entitled "Sleeve-Type
Mechanical Couplings."
2.1.5 PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe for Sewer Force Mains
2.1.5.1 AWWA C900 Standard Dimension Ratio 18
PVC pipe shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C900-97 or latest revision for polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe
sizes 4 inch through 12 inch. Class 150, DR 18 pipe as called for on the plans or in the schedule bid items
shall be furnished. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the following information: manufacturer's name,
size, material (PVC) type and grade or compound, NSF seal, pressure class and reference to appropriate
product standards. Pipe shall be furnished in 20 ft. laying lengths. Random lengths shall be a minimum of 10
feet long and shall comprise no more than 15 percent of the length of the piping system. Pipe shall be
furnished in factory-packaged units. Pipe shall not fail when subjected to the following tests; (1) sustained
pressure (2) burst pressure (3) flattening and extrusion quality. Tests shall be conducted as outlined in
ANSI/AWWA C900-97. Each length of PVC pipe shall pass a hydrostatic integrity test at the factory of 4
times the pressure class of the pipe for 5 seconds.
2.1.5.3 PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe Joints
Joints for pipe shall be push-on joints. Joints at fittings shall be mechanical joints unless otherwise
indicated.
2.1.6 High-Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings.
HDPE pipe and fittings shall conform to AWWA C906-99 for polyethylene pressure pipe and fittings 4"
through 63". 12" DIPS DR 11 pipe as indicated by the plans shall be furnished. HDPE pipe shall be
manufactured from resin with a cell classification of PE 345464C according to ASTM D 3350-02. Pipe
will be legibly marked at intervals of no more than five feet with the manufacturer's name, trademark,
pipe size, HDPE cell classification, appropriate legend (DR #, ASTM and AWWA Standards and NSF
seal), date of manufacture and point of origin. Pipe not marked as indicated above will be rejected. The
material used in the production of potable water pipe shall be approved by the National Sanitation
Foundation(NSF).
2.1.6.1 HDPE Pipe Joints
Butt fusion or Electrofusion welded in accordance with ASTM D3261.
2.1.7 Ductile Iron Fittings for Ductile Iron and PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe
SECTION 02530-Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Ductile iron fittings shall conform to ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C-110), latest revision with the exception
of the manufacturer's design dimensions and thickness. Fittings shall have a working pressure rating of
350 psi for fittings, 12 inch and under and 250 psi for fittings over 12 inch. Ductile iron shall conform to
ASTM A-536, latest revision, Grade 70-50-05. Nominal thickness of the fittings shall be equal to Class
51 ductile iron pipe as specified in ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C-151). Fittings shall have a cement mortar
lining and seal coating conforming to ASNI A 21.4 (AWWA C-104), latest revision. Fittings shall have
an outside coating of bituminous material in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. The fmal
coat shall be continuous and smooth being neither brittle when subjected to low temperatures nor sticky
when exposed to hot sun. The coating shall be strongly adherent to the pipe at all temperatures. Fittings
shall have mechanical or flanged joints as indicated and specified herein.
2.1.7.1 Mechanical Joint Fittings
ANSI Specification A 21.11 (AWWA C-111), latest revision, for three inch pipe and larger. Bolted
mechanical joint fittings shall be used with ductile iron pipe, PVC pipe, and where specifically called for
on the plans or in the Schedule of Bid Items.
A. Restrained Flexible Bolted Joint(DIP only): Restrained MJ fittings shall be designed for a
working pressure of 350 psi for 4"-24" ductile iron pipe. Fittings such as these shall be part of a
manufactured flexible bolted pipe restraint system as described above for MJ ductile iron pipe.
B. Megalug Restraint for MJ Fittings (DI or PVC Pipe): Mega Lugs may be used for restraint of
mechanical joint fittings. The restraint mechanism shall consist of a plurality of individually
actuated gripping surfaces to maximize restraint capability. Glands shall be manufactured of
ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536-80. The gland shall be such that it can replace the
standardized mechanical joint gland and can be used with the standardized mechanical joint bell.
Twist off nuts, sized the same as tee-head bolts shall be used to insure proper actuating of
restraining devices. The restraining glands shall have a pressure rating equal to that of the pipe
on which it is used. When mechanical thrust restraints are used concrete thrust blocking shall be
deleted from the installation.
2.1.7.2 Flanged Joint Fittings
Flanged fittings shall be constructed of ductile iron with flanges drilled and faced per ANSI B 16.1 for
both 125 Lb.working pressure.
2.1.8 Sleeve-Type Mechanical Couplings for Pressure Pipe
Couplings shall be designed to couple plain-end piping by compression of a ring gasket at each end of the
adjoining pipe sections. The coupling shall consist of one middle ring flared or beveled at each end to
provide a gasket seat; two follower rings; two resilient tapered rubber gaskets; and bolts and nuts to draw
the follower rings toward each other to compress the gaskets. The middle ring and the follower rings
shall be true circular sections free from irregularities, flat spots, and surface defects; the design shall
provide for confinement and compression of the gaskets. For ductile iron and PVC plastic pipe, the
middle ring shall be of cast-iron or steel; and the follower rings shall be of malleable or ductile iron. Cast
iron, ASTM Malleable and ductile iron shall, conform to ASTM A 47 and ASTM A 536, respectively.
Steel shall have a strength not less than that of the pipe. Gaskets shall be designed for resistance to set
after installation and shall meet the applicable requirements specified for gaskets for mechanical joint in
AWWA C111/A21.11. Bolts shall be track-head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A, with nuts, ASTM A 563,
Grade A; or round-head square-neck type bolts, ANSI B 18.5.2.1 M and ANSI/ASME B18.5.2.2M with
SECTION 02530-Page 9

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
hex nuts, ASME/ANSI B18.2.2. Bolts shall be 5/8 inch in diameter; minimum number of bolts for each
coupling shall be 8 for 12-inch pipe, 8 for 8-inch pipe, and 6 for 6-inch pipe. Boltholes in follower rings
shall be of a shape to hold fast the necks of the bolts used. Mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-
type mechanical coupling shall not be used as an optional method of jointing except where pipeline is
adequately anchored to resist tension pull across the joint.
2.1.9 Pressure Pipe Appurtenances
2.1.9.1 Gate Valves
Gate valves shall be manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C509-94 or latest
revision for 2" —16" valves. All valves shall be of iron body, bronze mounted, resilient-seat type. The
sealing mechanism shall provide zero leakage at the water working pressure against line flow from either
direction. Valves shall be manufactured with "0" Ringstem seals. The area between the "0"-Rings shall
be filled with lubricant. Anti-friction washers shall be provided at the stem collar for inside screw design.
Valves for buried use shall be nonrising stem (NRS) with 2-inch square operating nut. Valves for
aboveground use or for use inside vaults shall be NRS design with handwheel. Valves shall open by
turning in a counterclockwise direction. The minimum valve design working water pressure shall be 200
psi. Valves shall be shell tested at 400 psi. Valve ends for buried use with Ductile Iron pipe and PVC pipe
shall be bolted mechanical joint. Valve ends for use in above ground or vault installations shall be flanged
joint. Valves for buried use on Ductile Iron pipe fire hydrant legs shall be bolted mechanical joint. Resilient-
seated gate valves shall be manufactured by Clow.
A. Valve Boxes: Adjustable valve boxes shall be of equal quality and workmanship to those
manufactured by Mueller Company, or Resselaer Valve Company. Valve boxes shall be of
close-grained gray cast iron. The valve boxes shall be the two-piece screw type and the cover or
cap shall have cast on the upper surface in raised letters the word "Sewer". Valve boxes shall be
painted with a coat of protective asphaltum paint before being shipped from the factory. Concrete
protector rings shall be placed around valve boxes.
B. Indicator Posts: UL 789. Provide for gate valves where indicated.
2.1.9.2 Check Valves
Check valves installed in above ground vault installations shall be of the swing full body flanged type,
with a domed access cover and only one moving part, the valve disc. The valve body shall have full flow
equal to the nominal pipe diameter at any point, through the valve. The seating surface shall be on a 45°
angle to minimize disc travel. The top access port shall be full size, allowing removal of the disc without
removing the valve from the pipeline. The access cover shall be domed in shape, to allow the disc to be
fully operational in lines containing a high solids content. The disc shall be of one-piece construction,
precision molded with an integral 0-ring type sealing surface and contain steel and nylon reinforcements
in the hinge and disc areas. The flex portion of the disc shall be warranted for twenty-five years. Non-
slam closing characteristic shall be provided through a short 35° disc stroke and a memory retentive disc
return action. Provisions shall be made for backflow capability. Provide all special tools, accessories, etc.
required to back flush the valve. The valve body and cover shall be ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. The
disc shall be Buna-N (NBR) ASTM D2000-BG. The interior of the valve shall be coated with an epoxy.
The exterior shall be coated with a universal primer. The valve shall be Series 500 as manufactured by
Val-Matic Valve and Manufacturing Corporation or approved equal.
2.1.9.3 Air and Vacuum Valves for Sewage
SECTION 02530-Page 10

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
The Contractor shall furnish and install air vacuum/pressure air release valve assemblies where shown on the
drawings. Air/vacuum valve assemblies shall include an air and vacuum valve, pressure air release valve,
gate valve, manhole, piping, corporation stop, fittings and appurtenances required for a complete and
operable installation. The air and vacuum pressure air release valve shall be constructed of cast iron with
stainless steel trim and stainless-steel float, and all working parts shall be bronze, brass, stainless steel, or
other corrosion resistant material. The valves shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 150 PSI
and a test pressure of 200 PSI. The valves shall include isolation valve and back flushing attachments,which
shall consist of blow-off valves,quick,disconnect couplings,and a minimum of 4 feet of rubber hose suitable
for back flushing without dismantling the valve. All valves 1-inch diameter and larger shall have a '/4 inch
minimum diameter drain plug. A protective hood shall be supplied on each air/vacuum valve to prevent
debris from entering that valve outlet. The pressure air release valve shall have a 2-inch minimum threaded
connection and a minimum orifice of inch diameter, and also be furnished with back flushing provisions.
Each valve assembly shall include a gate valve conforming to the preceding specifications and be installed in
a manhole as shown on the detail sheet. Acceptable valves shall be of equal quality and workmanship to
those manufactured by Crispin,APCO or Valmatic.
2.1.9.4 Tracer Wire for Nonmetallic Piping
Provide bare copper or aluminum wire not less than 0.10 inch in diameter in sufficient length to be
continuous over each separate run of nonmetallic pipe and fixed to pipe.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.2.1 Precast Concrete and Associated Materials
2.2.1.1 Precast Concrete Manhole Sections
Precast concrete manhole risers, base sections, and tops shall conform to ASTM C 478. Base and first
riser shall be monolithic.
2.2.1.2 Gaskets and Connectors
Gaskets for joints between manhole sections shall conform to ASTM C 443. Resilient connectors for
making joints between manhole and pipes entering manhole shall conform to ASTM C 923.
2.2.2 Metal Items
2.2.2.1 Manhole
Manhole frames and covers shall be designed for heavy traffic weighting not less than 310 lbs. Iron shall
be tough,dense and even grained,cast in a true symmetrical pattern free from defects of any kind.
2.2.2.2 Manhole Steps
Zinc-coated steel conforming to 29 CFR 1910.27. As an option, plastic or rubber coating pressure-
molded to the steel may be used. Plastic coating shall conform to ASTM D 4101, copolymer
polypropylene. Rubber shall conform to ASTM C 443, except shore a durometer hardness shall be 70
plus or minus 5. Aluminum steps or rungs will not be permitted. Steps are not required in manholes less
than 4 feet deep.
SECTION 02530-Page 11

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT CONSTRUCTION
3.1.1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines
These requirements shall apply to all PVC and Ductile Iron pipeline installation except where specific
exception is made in the "Special Requirements..." paragraphs. HDPE pipe installation specifications as
part of directional bores is described in Section 3 "Earthwork and Borings" for utilities. The Contractor
shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment and other incidentals required for the construction of the sewer
collection and force main system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. The work shall
include laying pipe and setting fittings, valves, services, and testing of the sewer system. Materials shall
be as specified in previous sections of these specifications.
Apply except where specific exception is made in the following paragraphs entitled "Special
Requirements."
3.1.1.1 Location
The work covered by this section shall terminate at the edge of the existing street or utility easement
right-of-way as indicated on the plan drawings.
A. Sanitary piping installation parallel with water line:
1. Normal conditions: Sanitary piping or manholes shall be laid at least 10 feet horizontally from
a water line whenever possible. The distance shall be measured edge-to-edge.
2. Unusual conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 10 feet, the
sanitary piping or manhole may be laid closer to a water line provided that:
(a)The top (crown) of the sanitary piping shall be at least 18 inches below the bottom(invert)
of the water main.
(b) Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, the sanitary piping shall be constructed
of AWWA-approved ductile iron water pipe pressure tested in place without leakage
prior to backfilling.
(c)The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and tested in place.
B. Installation of sanitary piping crossing a water line:
1. Normal conditions: Lay sanitary piping crossing water lines to provide a separation of at
least 24 inches between the top of the sanitary piping and the bottom of the water line
whenever possible.
2. Unusual conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described above,use
the following construction:
(a) Sanitary piping passing over or under water lines shall be constructed of AWWA-
approved ductile iron water pipe, pressure tested in place without leakage prior to
backfilling.
SECTION 02530-Page 12

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
(b) Sanitary piping passing over water lines shall,in addition,be protected by providing:
(1) A vertical separation of at least 24 inches between the bottom of the sanitary piping
and the top of the water line.
(2) Adequate structural support for the sanitary piping to prevent excessive deflection of
the joints and the settling on and breaking of the water line.
(3) That the length, minimum 20 feet, of the sanitary piping be centered at the point of
the crossing so that joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from the water
line.
(c) Sanitary sewer manholes: No water piping shall pass through or come in contact with
any part of a sanitary sewer manhole.
3.1.1.2 Earthwork
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 3, "Earthwork and Borings for Utilities."
3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing
Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation; replace those found defective and remove from
site. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lay non-pressure pipe with the
bell ends in the upgrade direction. Adjust spigots in bells to give a uniform space all around. Blocking or
wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted. Replace by one of the proper dimensions, pipe
or fittings that do not allow sufficient space for installation of joint material. Do not joint dislike pipe
types together (example: PVC to DI, DI to PVC, etc.) pipe material shall meet the most stringent laying
condition between manholes. At the end of each workday, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood
blocks or bulkheads. Provide batter boards not more than 25 feet apart in trenches for checking and
ensuring that pipe invert elevations are as indicated. Laser beam method may be used in lieu of batter
boards for the same purpose.
3.1.1.4 Connections to Existing Lines
Obtain approval from Franklin County before making connection to existing line. Conduct work so that
there is minimum interruption of service on existing line.
3.1.2 Special Requirements
3.1.2.1 Installation of Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe
Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and associated fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled
"General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section and with the requirements of AWWA
C600 for pipe installation and joint assembly.
A. Make push-on joints with the gaskets and lubricant specified for this type joint and assemble in
accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly. Make
mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint and
assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly and
the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11.
SECTION 02530-Page 13

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.1.2.2 Installation of PVC Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe
Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of
Pipelines" of this section and with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for laying and joining pipe and
fittings. Make joints with the gaskets specified for joints with this piping and assemble in accordance with
the requirements of ASTM D 2321for assembly of joints. Make joints to other pipe materials in
accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.
3.1.2.3 Installation of PVC Plastic Piping for Service Laterals and Cleanouts
Installation shall comply with the manufacturer's recommended instructions. Solvent cement joints shall
be made in a two-step process with primer manufactured for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent
cement conforming to ASTM D-2564.
3.1.2.4 Installation of Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe
Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General
Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" and with the requirements of AWWA C600 for pipe
installation,joint assembly,valve-and-fitting installation, and thrust restraint.
A. Push-On Joints: Make push-on joints with the gaskets and lubricant specified for this type joint;
assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C900 for joint assembly.
Clean gasket and spigot and inside of bell thoroughly to remove all dirt and other foreign matter.
Insert gasket furnished by the pipe manufacturer into the gasket seat in the bell. Gasket shall be
properly seated in the grooves provided in the pipe bell. Using a non-toxic vegetable soap, apply a
film by hand to the inside surface of the gasket that comes into contact with the entering pipe and to
the first 1" of the spigot end of the entering pipe. Use only lubricant specified by the pipe
manufacturer. Align entering pipe with the bell to which it is to be joined. Enter the spigot end into
the bell until it just makes contact with the gasket. Apply sufficient pressure to force the spigot end
past the gasket up to solid contact with the bell. When it is necessary to field cut pipe with rubber
gaskets,chamfer the cut end 1/8 inch x 30 degrees before inserting into a rubber gasket bell.
B. Mechanical Joints: Make mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts specified for
this type joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C900 for
joint assembly and the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. Clean last 8"
outside the spigot, and the inside of the bell of mechanical joint pipe or fitting to remove oil,grit,tar
(other than standard coating)and other foreign matter from the joint and then paint area clean with an
approved soap solution. The ductile iron gland shall then be slipped on the spigot end of the pipe
with the extension of the gland toward the socket or bell end. The rubber gasket shall be painted
with the soap solution and placed on the spigot end with thick edge toward the gland. Push entire
section of pipe forward to seat spigot end in the bell. Press gasket into place within the bell, being
careful to have the gasket evenly located around the entire joint. Move ductile iron gland along the
pipe into position for bolting,insert all bolts,and screw nuts up tightly with fingers. Tighten all nuts
with a suitable (preferably torque-limiting) wrench. Tighten nuts that are spaced 180 degrees apart
alternately in order to produce equal pressure on all parts of the gland.
C. Flanged Joints: Make flanged joints with the gaskets,bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint.
Make flanged joints up tight; avoid undue strain on flanges, fittings,valves, and other accessories.
Align bolt holes for each flanged joint. Use full size bolts for the boltholes; use of undersized
bolts to make up for misalignment of boltholes or for any other purpose will not be permitted. Do
SECTION 02530-Page 14

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
not allow adjoining flange faces to be out of parallel to such degree that the flanged joint cannot
be made watertight without overstraining the flange. When flanged pipe or fitting has dimensions
that do not allow the making of a proper-flanged joint as specified, replace it by one of proper
dimensions. Use setscrewed flanges to make flanged joints where conditions prevent the use of
full-length flanged pipe and assemble in accordance with the recommendations of the setscrewed
flange manufacturer.
D. Sleeved Joints: Assemble joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings in accordance with
the recommendations of the coupling manufacturer.
E. Fittings: Fittings shall be installed where and as shown on the plans or as directed by Franklin
County. All bends (1/16 to 1/4), y-branches, plugs and all other fittings requiring such shall be
sufficiently backed,blocked,or braced to preclude the possibility of their blowing off the main.
3.1.2.5 Installation of PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe
Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General
Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section; with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for
laying of pipe,joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, and setting of valves, and fittings; and with
the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7,
"Installation".
A. Push-On Joints: Make push-on joints with the elastomeric gaskets specified for this type joint,
using either elastomeric-gasket bell-end pipe or elastomeric-gasket couplings. For pipe-to-pipe push-
on joint connections, use only pipe with push-on joint ends having factory-made bevel; for push-on
joint connections to fittings, cut spigot end of pipe off square and re-bevel pipe and to a bevel
approximately the same as that on ductile-iron pipe used for the same type of joint. Use an approved
lubricant recommended by the manufacturer for push-on joints. Assemble push-on joints for pipe-to-
pipe joint connecting in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for laying the pipe and
the recommendations in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation", for pipe joint assembly. Assemble
push-on joints for connection to fittings in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for
joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories and with the applicable requirements of AWWA C900
for joint assembly. Make compression-type joints/mechanical-joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts,
nuts, and internal stiffeners specified for this type joint and assemble in accordance with the
requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, with the
applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly, and with the recommendations of
Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. Cut off spigot end of pipe for compression-type
joint/mechanical-joint connections and do not re-bevel.
3.1.2.6 Pipe Anchorage for Ductile Iron and PVC Pressure Pipe
Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) for pipe anchorage. Thrust blocks shall be in
accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for thrust restraint. Use concrete, ASTM C 94,
having a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days; or use concrete of a mix not leaner than
one part cement, 2 1/2 parts sand, and 5 parts gravel, having the same minimum compressive strength.
Blocking shall be formed and placed in such a manner that the pressure to be exerted at the point of
blocking shall be transferred to firm, undisturbed earth at a maximum load of 2,000 lbs, per square foot.
The Contractor shall insure that blocking at all tees, bends, plugs, etc., shall be sufficient to contain all
pressure exerted by the pipe up to 200 psi hydraulic pressure within the pipe, e.g., pressure at plug=200
x (area of pipe in inches). Blocking shall be constructed as shown on the detail sheet contained in the
SECTION 02530-Page 15

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
project plans. The Contractor shall also be responsible for any damage or repairs caused by blowouts of
any insufficiently blocked pipe.
3.1.2.7 Installation of Gate Valves
Install gate valves, AWWA C500 and UL 262, in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for
valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation,
and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C509. Make and assemble joints to gate valves and check
valves as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings. Valves
shall be set and anchored with steel bars and concrete as shown on the detail sheet contained in the project
detailed drawings. All valves set by the Contractor shall include a cast iron or ductile iron valve box set to
grade encircled and protected by a precast concrete donut.
3.1.3 Manhole Construction
Construct base slab of cast-in-place concrete or use precast concrete base sections. Make inverts in cast-
in-place concrete and precast concrete bases with a smooth-surfaced semi-circular bottom conforming to
the inside contour of the adjacent sewer sections. For changes in direction of the sewer and entering
branches into the manhole, make a circular curve in the manhole invert of as large a radius as manhole
size will permit. For cast-in-place concrete construction, either pour bottom slabs and walls integrally or
key and bond walls to bottom slab. No parging will be permitted on interior manhole walls. For precast
concrete construction, make joints between manhole sections with the gaskets specified for this purpose;
install in the manner specified for installing joints in concrete piping. Parging will not be required for
precast concrete manholes. Cast-in-place concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified under paragraph entitled "Concrete Work" of this section. Make joints between concrete
manholes and pipes entering manholes with the resilient connectors specified for this purpose; install in
accordance with the recommendations of the connector manufacturer. Where a new manhole is
constructed on an existing line, remove existing pipe as necessary to construct the manhole. Cut existing
pipe so that pipe ends are approximately flush with the interior face of manhole wall, but not protruding
into the manhole. Use resilient connectors as previously specified for pipe connectors to concrete
manholes.
3.1.4 Miscellaneous Construction and Installation
3.1.4.1 Metal Work
A. Workmanship and finish: Perform metal work so that workmanship and finish will be equal to
the best practice in modern structural shops and foundries. Form iron to shape and size with
sharp lines and angles. Do shearing and punching so that clean true lines and surfaces are
produced. Make castings sound and free from warp, cold shuts, and blowholes that may impair
their strength or appearance. Give exposed surfaces a smooth fmish with sharp well defined lines
and arises. Provide necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets wherever necessary for fitting and
support.
B. Field painting: After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratings, and steps not buried in
concrete to bare metal of mortar, rust, grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials and apply a
coat of bituminous paint. Do not paint surfaces subject to abrasion.
SECTION 02530-Page 16

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.2.1 Field Tests and Inspections
Franklin County will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section. The
Contractor shall perform field tests and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing and
be able to produce evidence, when required, that each item of work has been constructed in accordance
with the drawings and specifications.
3.2.2 Tests for Non-pressure Lines
Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a light in a manhole; it shall show a
practically full circle of light through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line. Any
obstructions revealed during visual inspection of the line shall be removed by flushing with water at a
minimum velocity of 2.5 feet per second until the line is clean. When pressure piping is used in a non-
pressure line for non-pressure use, test this piping as specified for non-pressure pipe.
3.2.2.1 Leakage Tests
Test lines for leakage by performing either infiltration / exfiltration tests or low-pressure air tests.
Leakage (exfiltration or infiltration) shall not exceed 100 gallons per inch pipe diameter, per mile per day
for any section of new sewer main.
A. Infiltration/Exfiltration Tests: Each leg of sewer shall be tested by plugging the high side opening
of both the upper and lower manholes. The pipe will then be filled with water with approximately six
feet of head above the crown of the pipe maintained in the upper manhole. Leakage will be
determined by measured additions of water required to maintain the specified head. If ground water
is present to a point at least four feet above the crown of the sewer,the leakage test may be made by
measuring the amount of infiltration.
B. Low-pressure Air tests: Testing of gravity sewer lines shall be performed according to the
manufacturer's recommended procedures for "Air Testing". The duration allowed for a
prescribed low-pressure air exfiltration pressure drop between two consecutive manholes shall
not be less than that shown in the table below or as specified by the manufacturer. If conflicting
information exists, the more stringent of the two shall take precedence. The allowable pressure
drop shall not exceed 0.5 psi from 3.5 psi to 5.0 psi in excess of ground water pressure above the
top of the sewer. During air testing, manholes shall be plugged with inflatable stoppers to plug all
pipe entrances being tested. Lines shall be tested completely including service connections.
Minimum Duration for Air Test Pressure Drop
Pipe Size(Inches) Time(Minutes)
4 2.5
6 4.0
8 5.0
10 6.5
12 7.5
15 9.5
SECTION 02530-Page 17

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.2.2.2 Deflection Testing
Deflection Testing: This test will be required on all PVC composite pipes and shall be conducted after
the final backfill has been in place a minimum of 30 days to permit stabilization of the soil-pipe system.
In lieu of the waiting period, the Contractor may submit documentation from an approved soil-testing
firm certifying the backfill has been compacted to at least 95% maximum density. The test shall be
performed using a nine-prong mandrel pulled through the pipe. The maximum allowable deflection will
be five percent. Mandrel size will be in accordance with the following table:
Main Size Mandrel Dimensions
8" 7.40"
10" 9.31"
12" 11.22"
15" 14.09"
3.2.3 Tests for Manholes
Franklin County shall require that a portion or all of the sanitary sewer manholes installed in this project
shall be vacuum tested for infiltration. Each manhole shall be tested after assembly, preferably prior to
backfilling. All lift holes and pipe entrances shall be plugged and braced as necessary. A vacuum of 10-
inches mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be
measured for which it takes the vacuum to drop 9-inches of mercury. The manhole shall be approved as
passing the test if the time is greater than the values shown below:
Manhole Depth 48" 60" 72"
Less than 10' 60 sec. 75 sec. 90 sec.
10'— 15' 75 sec. 90 sec. 105 sec.
15' —25' 90 sec. 105 sec. 120 sec.
If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made with an approved non-shrink grout.
Retesting shall continue until the manhole satisfactorily passes the test. All tests shall be performed in the
presence of Franklin County's Inspector. The Contractor will furnish all personnel, facilities, and
equipment necessary to conduct the testing.
3.2.4 Tests for Pressure Mains
Hydrostatic pressure and leakage testing shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C600-93 or latest revision for
ductile iron water main and ANSI/AWWA C605-94 or latest revision for polyvinyl chloride pipe. Pressure
testing shall be performed on all pipe,valves and fittings. The test shall be conducted on line segments from
shut valve to shut valve in segments not exceeding 5,000 linear feet. The Contractor shall provide a suitable
pump for applying pressure and an accurate gauge for measuring the pressure and an Engineer approved
method of determining volume of water used. All newly laid pipe and any valved sections thereof shall be
subject to a hydrostatic pressure of at least 1.5 times the working pressure at the point of testing or 200 psi
(whichever is greater). At the same time the test pressure shall not be less than 1.25 times the working
pressure at the highest point along the test section. The hydrostatic test shall be of at least two-hour duration.
Removal of air shall be performed to the satisfaction of Franklin County through use of the air release valve
assemblies(automatic and manual). If determined necessary by Franklin County, the Contractor shall install
additional air taps to be abandoned after all air removal at no additional cost to Franklin County. Leakage
shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe or any valved section
thereof to maintain pressure within 5 psi(35 MPa or 0.35 bar)of the specified test pressure after the pipe has
been filled with water and the air has been expelled. Leakage shall not be measured by a drop in pressure in a
SECTION 02530-Page 18

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
test section over a period of time. No installation will be accepted if the leakage is greater than that
determined by the following formulas:
When testing Ductile Iron Pipe:
L= SD4P
133,200
Where:
L =allowable leakage,in gallons per hour
S =length of pipe tested,in feet
D =nominal diameter of the pipe,in inches
P =average test pressure during the leakage test,in pounds per square inch
(gauge)
When testing Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe:
L= NDAiP
7,400
Where:
L =allowable leakage,in gallons per hour
N =number of joints is length of pipeline tested
D =nominal diameter of the pipe,in inches
P =average test pressure during the leakage test,in pounds per square inch
(gauge)
When testing against closed metal-seated valves, an additional leakage per closed valve of 0.0078 gph/in.
(0.0012 L/h/m) of nominal valve size shall be allowed. Acceptance shall be determined on the basis of
allowable leakage. If any test of laid pipe discloses leakage greater than that specified above, the Contractor
shall, at his own expense, locate and make approved repairs as necessary until the leakage is within the
specified allowance. All visible leaks are to be repaired,regardless of the amount of leakage.
3.2.4.1 Hydrostatic Leakage Testing for HDPE Pipe
3.2.4.1 Hydrostatic Testing for HDPE Pipe
Leakage testing for HDPE pipe shall be accomplished hydrostatically. The testing procedure shall consist of
filling, an initial expansion phase, a test phase, and depressurization. The test pressure shall be 1.5 times the
system design operating pressure as measured at the lowest elevation in the test section. Fill the test section
completely. Begin the initial expansion phase by gradually pressurizing the test section to the test pressure.
Maintain the test pressure for two (2)hours by adding test water as required to maintain pressure, as the pipe
will expand slightly during this phase. It is not required to monitor the amount of water added. Immediately
following the initial expansion phase, monitor the amount of make-up water required to maintain test
pressure for two (2) hours. No leakage is indicated when the amount of make-up water needed to maintain
test pressure does not exceed the amount listed below.
Pipe Size(Inches) Make-Up Water Allowance per 100 ft. of Pipe(Gallons)
12" 2.3 gallons
At the conclusion of the test,carefully depressurize the test section by the controlled release of test water.
SECTION 02530-Page 19

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
PART 4 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
/I.I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Payment for work in this section shall be at the Contractor's unit prices for estimated quantities of
41.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1.2.1 Sanitary Sewers
4.2.1.1 Sanitary Sewer Gravity Main and Force Mains
and class of pipe.
41.2.1.2 Fittings
Force main fittings and shall be measured according to unit complete in place and accepted. Couplings
are considered and incidental part of the water main construction and will not be paid for directly but
shall be included in the price per foot of water main installation. Concrete for thrust blocking shall bo
made at the Contractor's unit price with respect to the particular dimensions and configuration of the
mechanical joint fittings as furnished in the Schedule of Bid Items.
1.2.1.3 Valves
All valves including valves boxes and marker posts and air valves including concrete manhole set to
finished grade shall be measured according to unit, complete in place and accepted. Payment shall be
ems.
/1.2.2 Manholes
'1.2.3 1" Sanitary Service Laterals
SECTION 02530-Page 20

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1" service laterals shall bo measured by individual unit, complete in place and accepted. The average
length shall be 25'. Service lateral shall terminate with clean out assembly and above grade stub out as
indicated. Payment shall be made at the Contractor's unit prices with respect to the type of sewer main
piping the connection is made. For connections to Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) sower mains the unit price
Ghall include costs for approved tapping saddles or an in place wyo or tee wye fittings. For connections
to ductile iron pipe sewer mains, the unit price shall include costs for installation of approved
eempressien-type-er-saddle-eenneetien7
--END OF SECTION--
SECTION 02530-Page 21

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 02540
VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
The general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The extent of work under this item includes providing and installing all pipe, pipe fittings, valves and
gates as shown on the drawings and described herein necessary to make complete and serviceable the
piping system.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
General: Class numbers or pressure rating shall be clearly marked on the pipe and fittings at the factory.
All water piping shall be NSF approved,and shall bear the NSF seal of approval.
Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes and standards except as
otherwise shown or specified.
AWWA: All applicable standards
North Carolina Department of Environment, Health and Natural Resources: All rules and regulations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
SD-02 Material Certificates:
Provide notarized materials, certificates signed by the material manufacturer. Certify that each material
item complies with the specified requirements, and was purchased for this project. CONTRACTOR shall
provide a PIPING SCHEDULE, denoting all pipe materials, sizes, specifications (ASTM, AWWA, etc),
location, etc.
SD-04 Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings on all flanged fittings, valves, operators, gates and special items including torque
tubes,hangers, supports and brackets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
All products supplied and installed as part of this specification must have been manufactured within 6
months of the date of shipment to the project site. Any exception to this requirement must be approved
by the Owner and Engineer prior to shipment.
SECTION 02540-Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.1 Gate Valves:
Gate valves shall conform with AWWA C-509 latest revision covering resilient sealed gate valves. Gates
for all valve sizes shall be completely encapsulated in rubber including stem bore, shall be field
replaceable and shall provide a dual seal on the mating body seat. Valves shall be capable of installation
in any position with rated sealing in both directions. Rubber seats of specially compounded vulcanized
rubber material shall be utilized and be capable of sealing under normal conditions. The valves shall have
integral guides engaging integral lugs in the gate in a tongue and groove manner, supporting the gate
throughout the entire open/close travel. The urethane sealing rubber shall be permanently bonded to the
wedge to meet ASTM tests for rubber metal bond ASTM D429. Valve body shall be fusion body epoxy
coated to AWWA C550 cast iron body design. Valves shall be rated for zero leakage at 200 psi water
working pressure and have a 400 psi hydrostatic test for structural soundness for valves 4" through 12".
All testing shall be conducted in accordance with C-509.
Valves for buried use shall be NRS with 2-inch square operating nut. Valves for above ground use shall
be NRS with a hand wheel. NRS stem thrust collars shall be integral with the stem and machined to size.
A stainless steel thrust bearing shall be incorporated, as required, to optimize operating torques. The
valve assembly mechanism shall be capable of withstanding an input torque of 300 ft.-lbs. Valve
operators shall be designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80 pounds on the
operator.
Gate valves shall be furnished with type of end connection as follows: 125#ANSI B 16.1 flange drilling
or mechanical joint per AWWA C-111.
2.2 Plug Valves:
All plug valves shall be eccentric plug valves unless otherwise specified. Valves shall be on the non-
lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and shall be furnished with end connections as shown
on the plans. Flanged valves shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI 125/150 lb. Standard. Mechanical
joint ends shall be to the AWWA Standard C111-64, grooved ends per AWWA C-606-87. Screwed ends
shall be to the NPT standard.
Valves bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. Bodies in 4" and larger valves shall be
furnished with a 1/8"welded overly seat of not less than 90%pure nickel. Seat area shall be raised, with
raised surface completely covered with weld to ensure that the plug face contacts only nickel. Screwed-in
seats shall not be acceptable.
Plugs shall be of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. The plug shall have a cylindrical seating surface
eccentrically offset from the center of the plug shaft. The interference between the plug face and body
seat, with the plug in the closed position, shall be externally adjustable in the field with the valve in the
line under pressure. Plug shall be resilient faced with neoprene or hycar, suitable for use with alum
sludge.
Valves shall have sleeve type metal bearings and shall be of sintered, oil impregnated permanently
lubricated type 316 ASTM A743 Grade CF-8M in 1/2"-36" sizes. In valves larger than 36", the upper
and lower plug journals shall be fitted with ASTM A-240 type 316 stainless sleeves with bearings of
ASTM B30,Alloy C95400 aluminum bronze. Non-metallic bearings shall not be acceptable.
Valve shaft seals shall be of the multiple V-ring type and shall be externally adjustable and repackable
without removing the bonnet or actuator from the valve under pressure. Valves utilizing 0-ring seals or
non-adjustable packing shall not be acceptable.
SECTION 02540-Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Valve pressure ratings shall be 175 psi through 12" and 150 psi for 14"through 72". Each valve shall be
given a hydrostatic and seat test of up to 200 psi with test results being certified.
Manual valves shall have lever or gear actuators and tee wrenches, extension stems, floor stands, etc., as
indicated on the plans. All valves 6" and larger shall be equipped with gear actuators. The maximum
pull on the hand wheel shall not exceed 80 pounds. All gearing shall be enclosed in a semi-steel housing
and be suitable for running in a lubricant with seals provided on all shafts to prevent entry of dirt and
water into the actuator. The actuator shaft and the quadrant shall be supported on permanently lubricated
bronze bearings. Actuators shall clearly indicate valve position and an adjustable stop shall be provided
to set closing torque and to provide seat adjustment to compensate for change in pressure differential or
flow direction change. All exposed nuts,bolts and washers shall be zinc plated.
Valves and gear actuators for buried or submerged service shall have seals on all shafts and gaskets on the
valve and actuator covers to prevent the entry of water. Actuator mounting brackets for buried or
submerged service shall be totally enclosed and shall have gasket seals. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs,
and washers shall be stainless steel.
2.3 Butterfly Valves
Shall be of the tight-closing, rubber seat type with rubber seats that are securely fasted to the valve body.
No metal-to-metal seating surfaces shall be permitted. Valves shall be bubble-tight at rated pressures
with flow in either direction and shall be satisfactory for frequent operation and for applications involving
valve operation after long period of inactivity. Valve discs shall rotate 90 degrees from the full open
position to the tight shut position. Valves shall meet the full requirements of AWWA C504 for Class
150. Valve bodies shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A126 Class B (for flanged end valves) or
ASTM A48 Class 40 (for mechanical joint valves) or ductile iron per ASTM A536. Flange drilling shall
be in accordance with ANSI B 16.1 for flanges. Mechanical joints shall meet ANSI A21.11. Two
trunnions for shaft bearings shall be integral with each valve body. Body thickness shall be in strict
accordance with AWWA Standard C504.
Valve discs shall be constructed of alloy cast iron or ductile iron.
Shafts of all valves shall be turned, ground and polished. Valves shafts shall be constructed of 18-8 Type
304 or Type 316 stainless steel. Shaft diameters must meet minimum requirements established by
AWWA Standard C504 for Class 150.
Valve seats shall be of a synthetic compound. Valves shall have seats that are simultaneously molded in,
vulcanized and bonded to the body. Seat bond must withstand 75 lbs. Pull under test procedure ASTM
D429, Method B.
Valves shall be fitted with sleeve-type bearings. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant and self-lubricating.
Bearing load shall not exceed 1/5 of the compressive strength of the bearing or shaft material.
Manual operators shall be of the traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the valve in
any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. Operators
shall be equipped with mechanical stop-limiting devices to prevent over-travel of the disc in the open and
closed positions. Valves shall close with a clockwise rotation. Operators shall be fully enclosed and
designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80 lb. On the operator or chainwheel.
Operator components shall withstand an input of 150 Ft.-Lbs. at extreme operator position without
damage.
SECTION 02540-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.4 Check Valves
2.4.1 Swing Check Valves
Three(3")and larger shall be of the spring loaded cushion swing type. The valves shall be constructed of
heavy cast iron or cast steel designed to withstand the test pressure for the pipelines in which they are
installed. Discs shall be of bronze or of alloy cast iron with bronze or stainless steel disc rings. Pivot pins
and bushings shall be of bronze or stainless steel. Disc seats shall be replaceable. (Check valves on
blower piping shall be as per plans and specifications).
2.4.2 Slanting Disc Check Valve
The body shall be two-(2) piece construction, bolted together through the center section, in a manner to
capture the seat on a 55 degree angle. The seat ring and disc ring must be hand replaceable in the field
without need for machining. The area throughout the valve body must be equal to full pipe area. Valve
must have sufficient clearance around the pivot pins to permit free seating. The valve must be guaranteed
not to stick in the closed position. The valve shall be hydrostatically tested to 350 psig. A limit switch
shall be provided and mounted on valve body for indication of valve operation.
All materials must conform to the following:
Body Castings Cast Iron ASTM A48 CI30
Seat Ring and Disc Ring Centrifugally Cast Bronze ASTM B 584
Pivot Pins Stainless Steel ASTM A 582
Bushings Stainless Steel ASTM A 269
2.5 PVC Ball Valves
Shall be manufactured from Type 1, Grade 1, Polyvinyl Chloride as outlined in ASTM D1784. The ball
valves shall have Teflon ball seals and Vitron stem and body seals. The valves shall carry a pressure
rating of 150 psi at 73 degrees F. Valves 1/2"to 4" shall be true union design.
2.6 PVC Ball Check Valves
Shall be manufactured from Type 1, Grade 1, Polyvinyl Chloride as outlined in ASTM D1784. The
valves shall insure a positive seal to prevent reverse flow even with extremely low back pressure. The
valves shall be designed for horizontal or vertical installation and have union connectors to permit
inspection. The valves shall carry a pressure rating of 150 psi at 73 degrees F.
2.7 Polypropylene True Union Ball Valves
Shall be pressure rated at 150 lbs.working pressure. Construction shall be of virgin polypropylene and
resin mixtures meeting ASTM D1784.
2.8 Yard Hydrants
Shall be 2 1/8" post type hydrants with 2" mechanical joint inlets as manufactured by Mueller, Grinnell,
or equivalent. Each hydrant shall be equipped with one 2 1/2"hose nozzle for fire and one standard 3/4"
hose nozzle for wash down.
SECTION 02540-Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.9 Valve Boxes
Shall be of close-trained gray cast iron. The valve boxes shall be the two piece screw type and the cover
or cap shall have cast on the upper surface in raised letters the word "Water" or "Sewer" based on
application. Valve boxes shall be painted with a coat of protective asphaltum paint before being shipped
from the factory.
2.10 Pressure Relief Valves
Wall and floor type hydrostatic pressure relief valves installed in the structures shown on the drawings
shall be cast iron body, with neoprene seat on both the body and cover. Retaining lugs on the floor-type
valve keep the non-hinged cover from being separated by ground water pressure. The valve shall start to
operate at a head of approximately 9 inches of water and shall be 1 inch in length less than the floor or
wall in which installed. The valves shall be American Darling, American Cast Iron Pipe, Clow or
approved equal.
2.11 Telescoping Valves
Telescoping valves shall be stainless steel tubes of 304 stainless steel. Tube lengths shall be as shown or
noted on the contract drawings. The lengths shall be of sufficient length to facilitate valve travel and
maintain an appropriate insert depth. Valve tubes shall be attached to connecting stems by use of a lifting
bail.
A stainless-steel companion flange and neoprene slip seal gasket shall be provided by the valve
manufacturer. The gasket must be a minimum '/" thick. The inside diameter of the gasket is to be 1/8"
smaller than the outside diameter of the valve tube to provide a friction seal. The gasket is to be
sandwiched between the riser pipe flange and the companion flange. The gasket and companion flange
shall include a 125#standard drilling pattern to match the riser pipe.
The lifting bail is to be stainless steel construction. The bail shall include a half-moon shaped top
opening which shall interfere with the stem to prevent valve body rotation. The bail is to be fastened to
the valve body with stainless steel attaching bolts.
Stems shall be manufactured from solid type 304 stainless steel rounds and shall include 29-degree stub
acme threads for the entire length. Stems shall be keyed to match the lift nut at the top. The remainder of
the stem is to engage the thrust nut and provide valve travel.
Lifts shall be ball bearing supported handwheel type with a fabricated steel non-rising stem pedestal. The
pedestal shall be manufactured with a square, main vertical member and a telescoping type torque tube.
The torque tube must incorporate a square thrust pocket at the top to house a square thrust nut. The size
and shape of the thrust pocket inside of the pedestal body prevents rotation of the torque tube assembly.
The bottom of the torque tube is attached to the lifting bail by use of an attaching stud and lock nuts.
The handwheel on the valve operator shall be a minimum of 18" diameter, cast iron, spoked and
minimum 1" thick. The handwheel shall be painted with factory coat and touched up in the field per the
painting specifications for the use area where installed.
The telescoping valve shall be Waterman, Golden Harvest, K-M or equal.
SECTION 02540-Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.12 Electric Valve Operators
Electric operators shall be provided complete with modulating actuators, speed controls and accessories.
The actuators shall operate on 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 hz with a 75 percent duty cycle and shall be
equipped with an AC thermal overload protector with automatic rest, reversing (bi-directional) operation
for use with quarter-turn valves, or rotating equipment to full rotation. Gearing shall be a two-stage
planetary, permanently lubricated self-locking gear train with self-lubricating bearings; connections via
male output staff. The start-up torque shall be 120 foot-pound. The stall torque shall be 150 foot-pound.
Two travel stop limit switches with cams, internal, independent, adjustable, and actuated by cams shall be
mounted on the drive shaft. A side mounted hand turn wheel shall be provided for a manual override.
The actuators shall have a NEMA 250 Type 4 enclosure with a corrosion resistant, baked epoxy finish as
standard. The actuator shall operate in a temperature range of-40 to 150 degrees F. Actuators shall fail
in last position unless otherwise indicated. Electric operators shall be furnished with features noted on the
Valve Schedule in the contract drawings. Limit switches shall be provided on all actuators.
a. Limit Switches. Limit switches shall be single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) type, rated 10
amps at 120 volts ac, housed in a NEMA Type 4 enclosure, and adjustable for open and
closed valve positions.
b. Positioners. The positioners for modulating actuators shall control valve positions as a
function of the input signals. The positioner shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The mode
of operation shall be direct acting. Modulating valve positioners shall operate on a 4 to 20
mA input signal unless otherwise indicated. Corrosion-resistant enclosures for positioners
shall be splash-and moisture-proof with gasketed covers.
Part 3—INSTALLATION AND PERFORMANCE
3.1 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
All equipment provided under this specification shall be shipped and stored onsite in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall provide means for protecting necessary
equipment from sunlight and rain as the manufacturer recommends. Electrical equipment and stainless-
steel items shall not be stored on the ground.
All items shall be transported and handled with care. Any item that is scratched, dented, or damaged in
any way shall be removed and replaced with brand new.
3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Three (3)paper copies and two (2) compact discs with electronic copies of the Operation & Maintenance
Manuals for mechanical and electrical equipment shall be furnished prior to system start-up. These
manuals shall include maintenance instructions for all equipment provided.
Operation& Maintenance Manual shall include a Functional Design Specification (description of control
software logic)and Operational Description(description of process).
SECTION 02540-Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.3 FIELD SERVICES, START-UP AND TRAINING
This section applies only to electronic or mechanical components supplied from this specification.
The services of the field representative shall include minimum 8 hours, exclusive of travel time. The
Contractor shall notify the manufacturer a minimum of ten working days prior to the time that the field
services are desired. The field person shall do a functional check of each item furnished and start-up of
the process.
3.4 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall warranty all items included in this specification to be free from defects in material
and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion (not system startup).
The warranty shall cover material, equipment, and labor.
--END OF SECTION--
SECTION 02540-Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 02921
TURF
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOD PRODUCERS ASSOCIATION (ASPA)
ASPA GSS (1988)Guideline Specifications for Sodding
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 602 (1995;Rev.A)Agricultural Liming Materials
ASTM D 4427 (1992)Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing
ASTM E 11 (1995)Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)
CID A-A-1909 Fertilizer
DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (DOA)
DOA FSA (January 1985) Federal Seed Act Rules and Regulations
of the Secretary of Agriculture
DOA SSIR (April 1984) Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 1,
Soil Survey Laboratory Methods and Procedures for
Collecting Soil Samples, Soil Conservation Service
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Stand of Turf
95 percent ground cover of the established species.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.3.1 SD-02 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a. Wood cellulose fiber mulch
b. Fertilizer
SECTION 02921 -Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Include physical characteristics,and recommendations.
1.3.2 SD-06 Instructions
a. Erosion Control Materials
1.3.3 SD-07 Schedules
a. State certification and approval for seed.
b. Nursery or sod farm certification for sods and sprigs. Indicate type of sod or sprig in
accordance with ASPA GSS.
1.3.4 SD-10 Test Reports
a. Topsoil composition tests(reports and recommendations).
b. Plant tissue sample test
1.3.4.1 Topsoil composition Tests
Submit reports for test specified in DOA SSIR.
1.3.4.2 Plant Tissue Sample Test
Submit reports for the test specified in DOA SSIR.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Delivery
1.4.1.1 Seed, Sod,and Sprig Protection
Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery,on-site storage, and handling.
1.4.1.2 Fertilizer, Gypsum and Lime Delivery
Deliver to the site of original,unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis,name, trade
name, trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers,
fertilizer, gypsum and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information.
1.4.2 Storage
1.4.2.1 Sod and Sprig Storage
Lightly sprinkle with water, cover with moist burlap, straw, or other approved covering; and protect from
exposure to wind and direct sunlight until planted. Provide covering that will allow air to circulate so that
internal heat will not develop. Do not store sod longer than 24 hours. Do not store directly on concrete or
bituminous surfaces.
SECTION 02921 -Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.4.2.2 Seed,Fertilizer, Gypsum and Lime Storage
Store in cool,dry locations away from contaminants.
1.4.2.3 Topsoil
Prior to stockpiling topsoil, treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non-
selective herbicide. Clear and grub existing vegetation three (3) to four (4) weeks prior to stockpiling
topsoil.
1.4.2.4 Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.
1.5 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS
1.5.1 Restrictions
Do not plant when the ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy, or when air temperature exceeds 90
degrees Fahrenheit.
1.6 TIME LIMITATIONS
1.6.1 Seed
Apply seed within twenty-four hours after seed bed preparation.
1.6.2 Sod
Place sod a maximum of thirty-six hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with ASPA GSS as
modified herein.
1.6.3 Sprigging
Perform sprigging a maximum of thirty-six hours after initial harvesting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED
2.1.1 Classification
Provide State-certified seed of the latest season's crop delivered in original sealed packages, bearing
producer's guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures, purity, germination, weed seed content, and
inert material. Label in conformance with DOA FSA and applicable state seed laws. Wet, moldy, or
otherwise damaged seed will be rejected.
2.1.2 Composition
Name of Grass or Legume Botanical and Common
SECTION 02921 -Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Min. Min. Percent Max.
Percent Germination Percent
Seed Pure Seed and Hard Seed Weed Seed
Tall Fescue 85 85 1%
Rye Grain 88 85 0.5
German Millet 83 85 0.5
Pensacola Bahiagrass NOT ALLOWED
Sericea Lespedeza 88 85 1
2.1.3 Seed Mixture
Planting Season Variety Rate(lb/Acre)
Spring/Summer Tall Fescue,hulled 40
German Millet 10
Fall/Winter Rye Grain 40
Tall Fescue 40
Proportion seed mixtures by weight. Seeding during Season 3 is for temporary ground cover which must
later be replaced by Season 1 plantings for a permanent stand of grass. The same requirements for turf
establishment apply for Season 1 as for Season 3.
2.2 SODS
Lay sod from April 1 to July 15 for warm season spring planting and from August 15 to September 15 for
cool season fall planting.
2.2.1 Classification
Certified as classified in the ASPA GSS. Machine cut sod at a uniform thickness of 3/4 inch within a
tolerance of 1/4 inch, excluding top growth and thatch. Each individual sod piece shall be strong enough
to support its own weight when lifted by the ends. Broken pads, irregularly shaped pieces, and torn or
uneven ends will be rejected.
2.2.2 Composition
Proportion grass species as follows.
Botanical and common Name Percent:
Bermuda Grass 100
2.3 SPRIGS
Healthy living stems, stolons, or rhizomes and attached roots of locally adapted grass without adhering
soil, including two(2)or three(3)nodes and from 4 to 6 inches long,obtained from heavy and dense sod.
Provide sprigs which have been grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the
project. Coordinate harvesting and planting operations to prevent exposure of sprigs to the sun for more
than 30 minutes before covering and moistening. Sprigs containing weds or other detrimental material or
SECTION 02921 -Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
that are heat damaged will be rejected. Sow sprigs from April 1 to July 1 for warm season planting and
from August 15 to September 15 for cool season planting
2.4 TOPSOIL
2.4.1 Existing Soil
Modify existing soil to conform to the requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition".
2.4.2 On-Site Topsoil
Reusable surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site if requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph
entitled"Composition"are met.
2.4.3 Off-Site topsoil
Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition". Additional topsoil shall be
furnished by the Contractor.
2.4.4 Composition
Containing from 8 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the
Organic Carbon, 6A, chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR. Maximum particle size, 3/4
inch, with maximum 3 percent retained on 1/4 inch screen. Other components shall be within the
following percentages:
Silt 25-50
Clay 10-30
Sand 20-35
pH 5 to 7.6
Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum
2.5 pH ADJUSTERS
2.5.1 Lime
ASTM C 602, commercial agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 85% of total carbonates and
15% magnesium. Provide the following ASTM E 11 graduation: 50% will pass through a 50 mesh
screen and 90%will pass through a 10 mesh screen.
2.5.2 Aluminum sulfate
Commercial grade.
2.5.3 Sulfur
100 percent elemental.
2.5.4 Iron
100 percent elemental.
SECTION 02921 -Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.6 SOIL CONDITIONERS
Provide singly or in combination as required to meet specified requirements for topsoil. Soil conditioners
shall be nontoxic to plants.
2.6.1 Peat
Sphagnum moss peat derived from a freshwater site and conforming to ASTM D 4427 as modified
herein. Shred and granulate peat to pass 1/2 inch mesh screen and condition in storage pile for minimum
6 months after excavation.
2.6.2 Sand
Clean and free of materials harmful to plants.
2.6.3 Perlite
Horticultural grade.
2.6.4 Vermiculite
Horticultural grade.
2.6.5 Rotted Manure
Composted, horse or cattle manure containing maximum 25 percent by volume of straw, or other bedding
materials. Manure shall be free of stones, sticks, and soil, viable weed seed and other materials harmful
to plants.
2.6.6 Composted Derivatives
Ground bark, nitrolized sawdust, humus, or other wood green waste material free of stones, sticks, and
soil stabilized with nitrogen and having the following properties:
2.6.6.1 Particle Size
Minimum percent by weight passing:
No. 4 mesh screen 95
No. 8 mesh screen 80
2.6.6.2 Nitrogen Content
Minimum percent based on dry weight:
Fir Sawdust 0.7
Fir or Pine Bark 1.0
2.6.7 Calcined Clay
SECTION 02921 -Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Granular particles produced from montmorillonite clay calcined to minimum temperature of 1200 degrees
F to the following gradation: minimum 90 percent passing 8 mesh screen, 99 percent retained on 60 mesh
screen and, maximum 2 percent passing 100 mesh screen. Bulk density: 40 pounds maximum per cubic
foot.
2.6.8 Gypsum
Coarsely ground gypsum comprised of calcium sulfate dihydrate 91 percent, calcium 22 percent, sulfur 17
percent; minimum 96 percent passing through a No. 20 mesh screen, 100 percent passing through a No.
16 mesh screen.
2.7 FERTILIZER
2.7.1 Pre-Plant Fertilizer Mixture
Fertilizer mixtures not to exceed one percent granular dust and CID A-A-1909, as specified below.
2.7.1.1 Fertilizer"A"
Organic, granular fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food
nutrients:
10 percent available nitrogen
10 percent available phosphorus
10 percent available potassium
2.7.1.2 Fertilizer"B"
Synthetic, granular, controlled-release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages, by
weight,of plant food nutrients:
10 percent available nitrogen
10 percent available phosphorus
10 percent available potassium
2.7.1.3 Fertilizer"C"
Controlled release fertilizer, to use with [hydroseeding] [and] [hydrosprigging], composed of pills coated
with plastic resin to provide a continuous release of nutrients for at least 6, months and containing the
following minimum percentages,by weight, of plant food nutrients.
10 percent available nitrogen
10 percent available phosphorus
10 percent available potassium
2.8 SURFACE TOP DRESSING
Free from,noxious weeds,mold,and other deleterious materials.
2.8.1 Humus
SECTION 02921 -Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
95 percent decomposed vegetable matter and wood fiber with a particle size of 1/4 to 1/2 inch.
2.8.2 Straw
Stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, or rice. Furnish in air-dry condition and of proper consistency for
placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment.
2.8.3 Hay
Air-dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment.
Provide only marsh hay for lawn areas.
2.8.4 Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch
Use recovered materials of either paper-based (100 percent) or wood-based (100 percent) hydraulic
mulch. Processed to contain no growth or germination-inhibiting factors and dyed an appropriate color to
facilitate visual metering of materials application. Composition on air-dry weight basis: 9 to 15 percent
moisture,pH range from 3.5 to 5.0. Use with hydraulic application of grass seed and sprigs and fertilizer.
2.9 WATER
Source of water to be approved by Engineer, suitable quality for irrigation.
2.10 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS
2.10.1 Net
Heavy, twisted jute mesh.
2.10.2 Blanket
Fiber,excelsior.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
Provide soil preparation, fertilizing, seeding, sprigging, and surface top dressing of all newly graded
finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of
construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.
3.1.2 Soil Preparation
Remove existing topsoil to a minimum depth of 2 inches and stock pile. After areas have been brought to
finish subgrade elevation, thoroughly till to minimum depth of 6 inches by scarifying, disking,harrowing,
or other methods approved by the Engineer. Remove debris and stones larger than one inch in any
dimension remaining on surface after tillage. Spread stock piled topsoil evenly to provide positive
drainage. Provide off-site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade. Do not spread topsoil when frozen or
excessively wet or dry. Thoroughly mix subgrade and topsoil and off-site topsoil to a depth of 8 inches
SECTION 02921 -Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
by disking,harrowing, tilling or other method approved by the Engineer. Correct irregularities in finished
surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished prepared soil areas from damage by vehicular or
pedestrian traffic.
Provide off-site topsoil to meet indicated finishgrade. After areas have been brought to indicated finish
P g
grade, incorporate fertilizer, pH adjusters, soil conditioners into soil a minimum depth of 6 inches by
disking, harrowing, tilling, or other method approved by the Engineer. Remove debris and stones larger
than one inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after tillage. Correct irregularities in finish
surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian
traffic.
3.1.2.1 pH Adjuster Application Rates
Apply pH adjuster at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. For
bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following:
Lime 3000 pounds per acre
3.1.2.3 Fertilizer Application Rates
Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. For bidding
purposes only apply at rates for the following:
Organic Fertilizer 1,000 pounds per acre
Synthetic Fertilizer 1,000 pounds per acre
Hydroseeding Fertilizer 1,000 pounds per acre
Hydrosprigging Fertilizer 1,000 pounds per acre
3.2 SEEDING
3.2.1 Seed Application Seasons and Conditions
Immediately before seeding, restore soil to proper grade and thoroughly moisten soil to a depth of 6
inches. Do not seed when ground is muddy frozen snow covered or in an unsatisfactory condition for
seeding. If special conditions exist that may warrant a variance in the above seeding dates or conditions,
submit a written request to the Engineer starting the special conditions and proposed variance. Apply
seed within twenty-four hours after seedbed preparation. Sow seed by approved sowing equipment. Sow
one-half the seed in one direction, and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing.
3.2.2 Seed Application Method
3.2.2.1 Broadcast and Drop Seeding
Use broadcast or drop seeders. Sow one-half the seed in one direction, and sow remainder at right angles
to the first sowing. Cover seed uniformly to a maximum depth of 1/4 inch in clay soils and 1/2 inch in
sandy soils by means of spike-tooth harrow, cultipacker,raking or other approved devices.
SECTION 02921 -Page 9

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.2.2.2 Drill Seeding
Use grass seed drills. Drill seed uniformly to average depth of 1/2 inch.
3.2.2.3 Hydroseeding
Mix seed, fertilizer, and wood cellulose fiber in required amount of water to produce a homogeneous
slurry. When hydraulically sprayed on the ground, material shall form a blotter like cover impregnated
uniformly with grass seed. Cover shall allow rainfall or applied water to percolate to underlying soil.
3.2.3 Surface Top Dressing
Spread straw hay over seed bed area to an even depth of 1/2 inch. Take precautionary measures to
prevent top dressing materials from spilling onto pavements,utilities structures, or planter beds.
3.2.4 Rolling
Immediately after seeding, firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not
exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width. If seeding is performed with cultipacker-type seeder or
by hydroseeding,rolling may be eliminated.
3.2.5 Erosion Control Material
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2.6 Watering
Start watering areas seeded as required by temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate
sufficient to insure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 6 inches without run off. During the
germination process, seed is to be kept actively growing and not allowed to dry out.
3.3 SODDING
3.3.1 Placing
Place sod a maximum of 36 hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with ASPA GSS as modified
herein. Thoroughly moisten areas to be sodded immediately prior to placing sod.
3.3.2 Spot Sodding
Cut sod into plugs 2 inches square or 2 inches in diameter. Place individual pieces of sod on 12 inch
centers and press firmly into soil by foot pressure or by tamping. Overseed for erosion control on 3 to 1
or greater slopes and drainage ways in spot sodded areas. Apply seed in accordance with applicable
portions of paragraph entitled"Seed Composition".
3.3.3 Sodding Slopes and Ditches
For slopes 2:1 and greater, lay sod with long edge parallel to slope. For V-ditches and flat bottomed
ditches, lay sod with long edge parallel to flow of water. Anchor each piece of sod with wood pegs or
wire staples maximum 2 feet on center. On slope areas, start sodding at bottom of the slope.
SECTION 02921 -Page 10

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.3.4 Finishing
After completing sodding,blend edges o sodded area smoothly into surrounding area.
3.3.5 Rolling
Immediately after sodding, firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not
exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width.
3.3.6 Watering
Start watering areas sodded as required by daily temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate
sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to minimum depth of 6 inches.
3.4 SPRIGGING
3.4.1 Rate
Perform sprigging a maximum 36 hours after initial harvesting. Inspect sprigs for heat damage during
planting operation. Plant groups of sprigs at 12 inch maximum intervals. Limit the interval between
dropping sprigs and covering with soil as required by temperature and wind conditions.
3.4.2 Planting
Plant sprigs in furrows spaced a maximum 12 inches apart. Immediately after opening furrows, place
sprigs. Fill furrows so that surface is flush with designated grade and a live portion of each sprig is
exposed.
Plant to a depth of approximately 4 inches and cover sprigs so that surface is flush with designated grade
and a live portion of each sprig is exposed.
3.4.3 Overseeing
Apply seed in accordance with applicable portions of paragraph entitled "Seed Application method" at
rates in accordance with paragraph entitled"See Composition".
3.4.4 Rolling
Immediately after completion of sprigging operations and additional seeding, roll planted area with
culltipacker or roller not exceeding 90 pounds per foot for each foot of roller width. If sprigging is
performed by hydro-sprigging,rolling may be eliminated.
3.4.5 Watering
Apply water at the time of sprigging operations at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to a
depth of 6 inches.
3.5 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS
Immediately after turfing,protect area against traffic and other use.
SECTION 02921 -Page 11

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.6 RENOVATION OF EXISTING TURF AREA
3.6.1 Aeration
Upon completion of weed eradication operations and Engineer's approval to proceed, aerate turf areas
indicated, by approved device. Core, by pulling soil plugs, to a minimum depth of 2 inches. Leave all
soil plugs,that are produced, in the turf area.
Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to
each building. Clean all soil plugs off of other paving when work is complete.
3.6.2 Vertical Mowing
Upon completion of aerating operation and Engineer's approval to proceed, vertical mow turf areas
indicated, by approved device, to a depth of 1/2 inch above existing soil level, to reduce thatch build-up,
grain, and surface compaction. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one
paved vehicular access route to each building. Clean other paving when work is complete. Remove all
debris generated during this operation off site.
•
3.6.3 Over Seeding
Apply seed in accordance with applicable portions of paragraph entitled "Seed Application Method" at
rates in accordance with paragraph entitled"Seed Composition".
3.7 RESTORATION
Restore to original condition existing turf areas which have been damaged during turf installation
operations. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular
access route to each building. Clean other paving when work in adjacent areas is complete.
--End of Section--
SECTION 02921 -Page 12

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section provides information regarding miscellaneous metal to be used for this project.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Miscellaneous Metal Items;
Detail drawings indicating material thickness, type, grade, and class; dimensions; and
construction details. Drawings shall include catalog cuts, erection details, manufacturer's
descriptive data and installation instructions, and templates. Detail drawings shall be
submitted for items specified in this section.
SD-04 Samples
Miscellaneous Metal Items;
Samples of the following items: Handrail, Grating, Plate. Samples shall be full size, taken
from manufacturer's stock, and shall be complete as required for installation in the structure.
Samples may be installed in the work, provided each sample is clearly identified and its
location recorded.
SD-05 Design Data
Structural analysis for stairs, steps, ladders, handrails and railing systems, floor grating and
frames and floor plates sealed and signed by the Professional Engineer registered in the
State of North Carolina who is in responsible charge of the preparation.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall take all field measurements necessary before
fabrication. Welding to or on structural steel shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Items specified
to be galvanized, when practicable and not indicated otherwise, shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M,ASTM A 653/A 653M, or
ASTM A 924/A 924M, as applicable. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials, shall
generally match in color and finish, and shall harmonize with the material to which fastenings are
applied. Materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely
shown or specified, shall be included. Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause for rejection.
Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and
supports shall provide strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude
water.
SECTION 05500=Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1.4 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, or where aluminum is in contact with concrete, mortar,
masonry, wet or pressure-treated wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting, the surfaces shall be
protected with a coat of bituminous paint or asphalt varnish.
1.5 WORKMANSHIP
Miscellaneous metalwork shall be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles and true
curves. Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces. Welding shall be continuous
along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Exposed connections of work
in place shall not be tack welded. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth. Exposed surfaces of work
in place shall have a smooth finish, and unless otherwise approved, exposed riveting shall be flush.
Where tight fits are required, joints shall be milled. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well
formed, and in true alignment. Work shall be accurately set to established lines and elevations and
securely fastened in place. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions and approved drawings, cuts,and details.
1.6 ANCHORAGE
Anchorage shall be provided where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in
place. Anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated shall include slotted inserts made to engage with
the anchors, expansion shields, and power-driven fasteners when approved for concrete; toggle bolts
and through bolts for masonry;machine and carriage bolts for steel; and lag bolts and screws for wood.
1.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
Unless otherwise specified, aluminum items shall have standard mill finish. The thickness of the
coating shall be not less than that specified for protective and decorative type finishes for items used in
interior locations or architectural Class I type finish for items used in exterior locations in AA DAF-45.
Items to be anodized shall receive a polished satin finish. Aluminum surfaces to be in contact with
plaster or concrete during construction shall be protected with a field coat conforming to CID A-A-344.
1.8 SHOP PAINTING
Surfaces of ferrous metal except galvanized surfaces, shall be cleaned and shop coated with the
manufacturer's standard protective coating unless otherwise specified. Surfaces of items to be
embedded in concrete shall not be painted. Items to be finish painted shall be prepared according to
manufacturer's recommendations or as specified.
1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.9.1 General
In engineering steps, ladders, handrail and railing systems and floor grating and frames to withstand
structural loads indicated,determine allowable design working stresses of materials based on the following:
Aluminum: AA"Specifications for Aluminum Structures".
Stainless Steel: ASCE"Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless
Steel Structural Members".
SECTION 05500-Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franldin County,NC
Cold-Formed Structural Steel: AISI"Specification for the Design of Cold-
Formed Steel Structural Members".
Structural Steel: AISC"Steel Construction Manual".
Floor Grating: NAAMM MBG 531 "Metal Bar Grating Manual"
1.9.2 Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems
Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E 985
for structural performance based on the following:
Testingperformed according toASTME894andE935.
Structural computations.
Handrails shall be designed to resist a concentrated load of 200 pounds in any direction at any
point of the top of the rail or 50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction at the top of the
rail, whichever is more severe, but in no case less than the live loads prescribed by the North
Carolina State Building Code.
1.9.3 Structural Performance of Steps,Ladders,Anchors and Connections
Engineer, fabricate, and install to withstand structural loads without exceeding the allowable design
working stress of the materials for steps, ladders, anchors, and connections. Apply each load to produce
the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising handrails and railing systems.
Structural loads shall be as prescribed by the N.C. State Building Code.
1.9.4 Structural Performance of Floor Grating and Frames:
Engineer, fabricate and install to withstand the structural loads indicated without exceeding the
allowable working stress of the materials for floor grating and frames. Apply each load to produce the
maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising the floor grating and frame system.
Floor grating and frames shall be designed to resist the following live loads and deflections but in
no case less than the loads prescribed by the North Carolina State Building Code:
300 lb/sq. ft.uniform load
700 lb/ft. width concentrated load
0.25 inch deflection under 100 lb/sq. ft. uniform load
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Doors and panels shall be flush type unless otherwise indicated. Frames for access doors shall be
fabricated of not lighter than 16 gauge stainless steel with welded joints and finished with anchorage
for securing into construction. Access doors shall be a minimum of 14 by 20 inches and of not lighter
than 14 gauge stainless steel, with stiffened edges, complete with attachments. Access doors shall be
hinged to frame and provided with a flush face, screw driver operated latch.
2.2 FLOOR GRATINGS AND FRAMES
SECTION 05500-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.2.1 All grating on this project shall be aluminum grating, either 6061-Y6 or 6063-T6 alloy. Cross
bars shall be swaged aluminum 6063-T1 at four inches on center. All grating shall be furnished
with a mill finish as fabricated.
Bearing bars shall be on 1-3/16" centers and shall be called 19S4. (Options for 15S4, 11S4, or 7S4
occur here). Panel widths shall not exceed 36 inches in width nor weigh more than eighty
pounds. The fabricator shall remove all sharp edges and burrs before shipping to the job site.
All ends and cuts shall be banded with flat bar materials of the same alloys, flush with the top,and
securely welded to the grating. Trim bands at the ends of the grating shall be welded at six inch
intervals, and load carrying bands shall be welded to every intersection of cross and bearing bars.
Field cuts of one or two bars need not be banded. Longer cuts shall be returned to the fabricator
for mending.
When required, 19S4 grating shall be fastened to supporting members with stainless or galvanized
steel saddle clips and 1/4" tech screws. A minimum of two clips per piece shall fasten the grating
when required. Grating installed into concrete rebates shall not be fastened. Grating with less
spacing shall be fastened with recessed plates welded into the grating or inset plates across
bearing bars.
All stair treads shall be manufactured in the same alloy as the grating. Each tread shall have a
corrugated nosing and endplates for fastening into stringers per NAAMM standards. Loading
shall be consistant with the standards of NAAMM.
Finishing of the grating beyond mill finish is to be coordinated with the factory as to color, matte,
grain, and depth. Any painting of aluminum grating shall be to pre-approved color samples and
procedures.
Grating shall be field measured by the general contractor or metal fabricator prior to fabrication.
The grating fabricator shall furnish the contractor with a final, as built set of erection drawings
with each shipment. Grating will be clearly marked to agree with the erection drawings.
2.3 FLOOR PLATES
Floor plates shall be 1/4 inch thick,aluminum. Pattern indicated.
2.4 HANDRAILS
2.4.1 Aluminum Handrails
Handrails shall consist of minimum 1-1/2 inch nominal Schedule 40 pipe ASTM B 429. Railings and
pipe collars shall be mill finish. All fasteners shall be Series 300 stainless steel. Posts may be larger or
stronger as required by design. Meet the indicated load requirements.
a. Jointing shall be by one of the following methods:
(1) Flush type rail fittings, welded and ground smooth with splice locks secured with 3/8
inch recessed head setscrews.
(2) Mitered and welded joints, made by fitting post to top rail and intermediate rail to post
and corners, shall be groove welded and ground smooth. Splices, where allowed by the
SECTION 05500-Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Engineer, shall be butted and reinforced by a tight fitting dowel or sleeve not less than 6
inches in length. Dowel or sleeve shall be connected to one side of the splice by tack
welding or by using epoxy cement.
(3) Railings shall be assembled using slip-on aluminum-magnesium alloy fittings for joints.
Fittings shall be fastened to pipe or tube with 1/4 inch or 3/8 inch stainless steel recessed
head setscrews. Assembled railings shall be provided with fittings only at vertical supports
or at rail terminations attached to walls. Expansion joints shall be at the midpoint of panels.
A setscrew shall be provided in only one side of the slip-on sleeve. Alloy fittings shall
conform to ASTM B 26/B 26M.
b. Removable sections, toe-boards and brackets shall be provided where indicated, using flange
castings as appropriate.
2.5 LADDERS
Ladders shall be stainless steel or aluminum, fixed rail type in accordance with ANSI A14.3. Meet the
indicated load requirements.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS
Miscellaneous plates and shapes for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework,
such as lintels, sill angles, miscellaneous mountings, and frames, shall be provided to complete the
work.
2.7 SAFETY CHAINS
Safety chains shall be welded stainless steel, proof coil chain tested in accordance with ASTM A
467/A 467M, Class CS. Safety chains shall be straight link style, 3/16-inch diameter, minimum 12
links per foot and with bolt type snap hooks on each end. Eye bolts for attachment of chains shall be
galvanized 3/8-inch bolt with 3/4 inch eye, anchored as indicated. Two chains shall be furnished for
each guarded opening.
2.8 SAFETY NOSING
Safety nosings shall be of cast aluminum with cross-hatched, abrasive surface. Nosing shall be 3
inches wide and terminating at not more than 6 inches from the ends of treads, except nosing for metal
pan cement-filled treads shall extend the full length of the tread. Safety nosings shall be provided with
anchors not less than 3/4 inch long. Integrally cast mushroom anchors are not acceptable.
2.9 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
Cabinets to be located in fire-rated walls shall be fire-rated type, fabricated in accordance with ASTM
E 814, and shall be listed by an approved testing agency for 1- and 2-hour combustible and non-
combustible wall systems. The testing agency's seal shall be affixed to each fire-rated cabinet.
Cabinets shall be of the recessed type suitable for 10 pound extinguishers. Box and trim shall be of
heavy gage rolled steel. Door shall be a rigid frame with full length piano type hinge and double
strength (DSA) glass panel. Door and panel shall be prime-coated inside and out and have the
manufacturer's standard white baked enamel finish inside and out.
SECTION 05500-Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
All items shall be installed at the locations shown and according to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Items listed below require additional procedures as specified.
3.2 REMOVABLE ACCESS PANELS
A removable access panel not less than 12 by 12 inches shall be installed directly below each valve,
flow indicator, damper, or air splitter that is located above the ceiling, other than an acoustical ceiling,
and that would otherwise not be accessible.
3.3 ATTACHMENT OF HANDRAILS
Toeboards and brackets shall be installed where indicated. Splices, where required, shall be made at
expansion joints. Removable sections shall be installed as indicated.
3.3.1 Installation of Aluminum Handrails
Installation shall be by means of flanges anchored to concrete or masonry by expansion shields. Bolts
used to anchor aluminum alloy flanges shall be stainless steel of a size appropriate to the standard
product of the manufacturer. Where aluminum or alloy fittings or extrusions are to be in contact with
dissimilar metals or portland cement concrete, the contact surface shall be given a heavy coating of
bituminous paint or asphalt varnish.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF METAL GRID WALKWAYS
Walkways shall be installed after final flood coat and aggregate surfacing. Each stand shall be set on a
protective pad; the pad may be adhesively attached to the bottom of the stand or set loose under the
stand. The area where the supports are to be located shall be swept clear of loose aggregate. Protective
pad shall be placed on the roof membrane except on inverted roofs where the protective pad shall be set
on the rigid insulation.
3.5 MOUNTING OF SAFETY CHAINS
Safety chains shall be mounted 3 feet 6 inches and 2 feet above the floor.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF SAFETY NOSINGS
Nosing shall be completely embedded in concrete before the initial set of the concrete occurs and shall
finish flush with the top of the concrete surface.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
Metal fire extinguisher cabinets shall be furnished and installed in accordance with NFPA 10 where
shown on the drawings or specified.
--END OF SECTION--
SECTION 05500-Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 09900
PAINTINGS AND COATINGS
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals required to provide
a protective coating system for the surfaces listed herein and not otherwise excluded.
B. The scope of the painting in this project shall include the following,plus other items specifically
referenced on the drawings:
1. Contractor shall coat all ductile iron piping, fittings, and pump base elbow, within the
WAS wetwell and valve vault in accordance with Section 4.2.
2. Contractor shall coat all ductile iron piping, fittings, and steel pipe supports within the
new AAA treatment unit, including the 24" influent and effluent pipes, in accordance
with Section 4.2.
3. Contractor shall coat all ductile iron piping, fittings, and steel pipe supports within the
existing AAA treatment unit, including the 24" influent and effluent pipes, in accordance
with Section 4.2.
4. Contractor shall coat all ductile iron piping, fittings, and steel pipe supports within the
new Sludge Digester in accordance with Section 4.2.
5. Contractor shall coat all exposed ductile iron air piping in accordance with Section 4.3.
6. Contractor shall coat all new above ground ductile iron piping, fittings, and steel pipe
supports not in contact with plant processes in accordance with Section 4.3.
C. Factory-applied coating systems. To the fullest extent possible, all factory-applied coating
systems must be as specified herein or must be proven to be compatible with the field-applied
systems. Documentation of system compatibility must be provided during the submittal phase
for any material receiving a factory-applied coating system. Any surface delivered to the site
with a coating system that does not meet this requirement must have the coating system
completely removed and the coating system start over with the proper prime coat.
D. The following items shall not be painted:
1. Signs and nameplates. Including any code-requiring labels, such as Underwriters'
Laboratories and Factory Mutual,or any equipment identification,performance
rating, name or nomenclature plates.
2. Any moving parts of operating units,mechanical and electrical parts, such as
operators, linkages, sensing devices,motor and fan shafts,unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Aluminum components: (access hatch,brackets, etc.)
SECTION 09900- Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
4. Stainless steel components: (flow diverter,pipe supports, brackets, etc.)
5. Flexible couplings and lubricated bearing surfaces.
6. Products with polished chrome,aluminum,nickel,or stainless steel finish.
7. Plastic switch plates and receptacle plates.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
B. Metal Ladder Manufacturer's Association-Specification for Ladders and Scaffolds.
C. UL Requirement for Ladders and Scaffolds.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Workmanship shall be performed by skilled workmen thoroughly trained in necessary crafts
and completely familiar with specific requirements and methods specified herein. The
complete labor force associated with the coating process shall be trained and vetted with the
coating manufacturer for the particular type and method of application.
B. All materials shall be produced by a single manufacturer. Total paint system shall be from
one manufacturer and no cross coating allowed between primers and finish coats.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's printed literature and other data as required to certify compliance with
requirements and systems specified herein.
B. Colors to be selected by Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, and indicated on
schedule.
C. Samples:
1. Samples of each finish and color shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for
approval before any work is started.
2. Such samples when approved in writing shall constitute a standard, as to color and
finish only, for acceptance or rejection of the finish work.
3. Rejected samples shall be resubmitted until approved.
D. VOC Requirements: Submit manufacturer's certification that paints and coatings comply with
Federal, State, and Local, whichever is more stringent, requirements for VOC (Volatile
Organic Compound).
1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
SECTION 09900- Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
A. Deliver all material to site in original, new, unopened containers, labeled and bearing
manufacturer's name and stock number, product and brand name, contents by volume for
major constituents, instructions for mixing and reducing, and application instruction.
B. Provide adequate storage facilities designed exclusively for the purpose of paint storage and
mixing. Facility area shall be located away from open flames, be well ventilated, and be
capable of maintaining ambient storage temperature of no less than 45 degrees F.
C. Paint, coatings, reducing agents, and other solvents must be stored in original containers until
opened; if not resealable, then must be transferred to UL approved safety containers. Provide
proper ventilation,personal protection and fire protection for storage and use of same.
D. Comply with requirements set forth by Occupational Safety and Health Act, OSHA, for
storage and use of painting materials and equipment.
1.06 EXTRA STOCK
A. Upon completion of work, provide owner with at least one gallon of each type and color of
product used.
B. Containers shall be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. General: Paint products/systems specified are not intended to limit competition, but to
establish a standard of quality desired. The owner will consider equivalent systems by other
manufacturers.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Equivalent materials of other manufacturers may be substituted on approval of the Owner's
Representative. Request for substitution shall include manufacturer's literature for each
product giving name, generic type, descriptive information, performance and test data, and
evidence of satisfactory past performance. No request for substitution shall be considered that
would decrease film thickness and/or number of coats or offer a change in the generic type of
coating specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Thoroughly examine surface scheduled to be painted prior to commencing work. Report in
writing to the Owner's Representative any condition that may affect proper application and
overall performance of coating system. Do not proceed with work until such conditions have
been corrected. Commencing with work indicates acceptance of existing conditions and for
responsibility for performance of applied coating.
B. A NACE Level 3 Certified technical representative from the paint manufacturer shall visit the
job site and to support the Contractor's personnel or the Owner as needed and/or requested.
SECTION 09900- Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Visits shall be made on a weekly basis as a minimum or as needed to review hold points for
the Owner. Additional visit shall be made as needed and/or requested by Owner or
Contractor. 48 hours' notice is required by the Contractor for each hold point inspection.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Extreme diligence shall be taken to ensure that vehicles, equipment, hardware, fixtures,
materials, etc., are protected against paint spillage, overspray, etc. Such damages shall be
corrected at no expense to Owner.
B. Surfaces not to be coated shall be masked, removed, or otherwise covered to protect against
cleaning and coating application procedures and weather. Drop cloths shall be used to protect
floor,walls,machinery, equipment, and previously coated surfaces.
C. Exercise care in erecting,bracing,handling, and dismantling staging and scaffolding,to avoid
scratching or damaging walls, floors, equipment,etc.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with manufacturer's
instructions for each substrate condition.
B. Ferrous metals (structural steel and miscellaneous metals) requiring shop or field priming
shall be prepared as listed in PART 4 "Coating System Schedule" specified herein and listed
for each individual coating system. All metal surfaces shall be cleaned prior to sandblasting
to remove oil and grease present by following methods and procedures outlined in SSPC-SP1
Solvent Cleaning.
C. Surface preparation for field touch-up of ferrous metals shop-primed shall be as follows:
1. Immersion - Remove all oil, grease, dirt, dust and foreign matter from the surface.
Weld slag, weld spatter, rough edges and sharp corners of weld seams shall be ground
smooth. All rusted, abraded and unpainted areas shall be blast cleaned to a Near-White
Finish as outlined in Steel Structures Painting Council's Specification SP-10.
2. Non-Immersion- Remove all oil, grease, dirt, dust and foreign matter from the surface.
Follow cleaning with Steel Structures Painting Council's Specification SP-3 Power
Tool cleaning.
D. Galvanized metals requiring paint (only as directed by Owner's Representative) shall be
cleaned by removing all oil, grease, dirt, dust and foreign matter by solvent cleaning as listed
in Part 4 coating system scheduling,prior to applying any finish.
E Concrete and concrete masonry surfaces shall be cleaned and free of oils, laitance, dust, dirt,
loose mortar, and excess moisture. Structural cracks and defects shall be repaired. All
surfaces must be completely dry prior to applying any coatings/paint.
3.04 TOUCH-UP OF SHOP APPLIED COATINGS
SECTION 09900- Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
A. All shop applied coatings with manufacturer's standard paint and in non-immersion service,
shall be touched-up with compatible barrier coating, Series 135 Chembuild, able to receive
specified topcoat(s). Notify Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative in writing of
anticipated problems due to incompatible coating systems.
B. All shop applied coatings with specified primer as listed in PART 4 "Coating System
Schedule" shall be touched up with same primer before any topcoat(s)are applied.
3.05 APPLICATION
A. No paint shall be applied when surrounding air temperature, as measured in the shade, is
below 45 degrees F. No paint shall be applied when the temperature of the surface to be
painted is below 40 degrees F. Paint shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces, and shall
not be applied in rain, snow, fog or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%. Paint
shall not be applied when the substrate temperature is within 5 degrees of the dewpoint. Paint
manufacturer's temperature guidelines must be followed.
B. No paint shall be applied when it is expected that the relative humidity will exceed 85% or
that the air temperature will drop below 45 degrees F within 4 hours after the application of
the paint.
C. Maintain proper ventilation in area of work to alleviate volatile solvents evaporating from
coating materials.
D. All ingredients in any container of the coating materials shall be thoroughly mixed and shall
be agitated often enough during application to keep the pigment suspended.
E. Should thinning be required use only the amounts specified by the coating manufacturer.
F. Application of coating shall be by brush, roller, mitt, or spray and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. All material shall be evenly applied to form a smooth,
continuous,unbroken coating. Drips,runs, sags, or pinholes shall not be acceptable.
G. Provide proper application equipment, including ladders, scaffolding, masking materials, and
tools to perform work. Ladders and scaffolding shall meet or exceed UL requirements and
Metal Ladder Manufacturer's Association.
H. Meet all requirements set forth by Occupational Safety and Health Act, OSHA, for confined
space.
I. An additional brush or roller applied stripe coat of epoxy shall be applied to all sharp angles,
edges,weld seams,nuts,bolts, flanges etc.
J. Follow manufacturer's detail application guide for termination of coating on concrete
surfaces and liner applications.
3.06 SYSTEM INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. After application of each coating in the specified system and its surface has cured, measure
its thickness with a properly calibrated Nordson Microtest Dry Film Thickness Gauge, or
SECTION 09900- Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
equivalent. Follow standard method for measurement of dry paint thickness with magnetic
gauges as outlined in Steel Structures Painting Council's SSPC-PA2
B. Make as many determinations as needed to ensure the specified thickness values in each
typical area. To all surfaces having less dry film thickness than specified, apply additional
coat(s)at no extra cost to Owner to bring thickness up to specifications.
C. Structural metals in immersion service that receive a protective coating system shall be
checked with a non-destructive holiday detector that shall not exceed 67 1/2 volts. All
pinholes or defects shall be repaired in accordance with manufacturer's printed
recommendations and then retested.
D. Masonry, drywall, or other non-metallic surfaces shall be continuously checked with wet-film
thickness gauges during application to ensure proper dry film thickness will be attained. Also,
square feet coverage needs to be monitored to verify proper coverage rates.
E. Painting contractor shall permit Owner's Representative and/or paint & coating manufacturer
(as requested by owner) to inspect his work for conformance to this specification. Owner
reserves the right to reject all work that does not comply with this specification.
3.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Quality assurance procedures and practices shall be utilized to monitor all phases of
surface preparation, application, and inspection throughout the duration of the project.
Procedures or practices not specifically defined herein may be utilized provided they meet
recognized and accepted professional standards and are approved by the Owner.
B. Surface Preparation: Surface preparation will be based upon comparison with: "Pictorial
Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces", SSPC Vis 1 and ASTM
Designation D2200; "Standard Methods of Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel
Surfaces" SSPC Vis 2 and ASTM Designation D610; "Visual Standard for Surfaces of New
Steel Airblast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive" or "Guideline for Selecting and Specifying
Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coating and Polymer Overlays" and ICRI CSP
Surface Profile Chips.
C. Application: No coating or paint shall be applied: When the surrounding air temperature or
the temperature of the surface to be coated is below the minimum required temperature for
the specified product; to wet or damp surfaces or in fog or mist; when the temperature is less
than 5 degrees F. above the dewpoint; when the air temperature is expected to drop below 40
degrees F. within six hours after application of coating. Dewpoint shall be measured by use
of an instrument such as a Sling Psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of
Commerce Weather Bureau Psychrometric Tables. If above conditions are prevalent, coating
or painting shall be delayed or postponed until conditions are favorable. The day's coating or
painting shall be completed in time to permit the film sufficient drying time prior to damage
by atmospheric conditions.
D. Thickness and Holiday Checking: Thickness of coatings and paint shall be checked with a
non destructive,magnetic type thickness gauge. The integrity of coated interior surfaces shall
be tested with an approved inspection device. Non destructive holiday detectors shall not
exceed the voltage recommended by the manufacturer of the coating system. For thicknesses
between 10 and 20 mils (250 microns and 500 microns), a non-sudsing type wetting agent,
SECTION 09900- Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
such as Kodak Photo Flo,may be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. All
pinholes shall be marked, repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
recommendations, and retested. No pinholes or other irregularities will be permitted in the
final coating.
E. Inspection Devices: The Contractor shall furnish, until final acceptance of coating and
painting, inspection devices in good working condition for detection of holidays and
measurement of dry film thickness of coating and paint. The Contractor shall also furnish
U.S. Department of Commerce; National Bureau of Standard certified thickness calibration
plates to test accuracy of dry film thickness gauges and certified instrumentation to test
accuracy of holiday detectors.
F.All necessary testing equipment shall be made available for the Owner's use at all times until
final acceptance of application. Holiday detection devices shall be operated in the presence
of the Owner.
G. All parties, to include the Owner or Owners representative, Engineer, general contractor,
applicator, installer, any subs and the product manufacture, shall meet prior to any work is
started to review the spec and discuss job specific expectations,need and requirements
3.08 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion, painting contractor shall clean up and remove from site all surplus
materials, tools, appliances, empty cans, cartons, and rubbish resulting from painting work.
Site shall be left in neat, orderly condition.
B. Remove all protective drop cloths and masking from surfaces not being painted. Provide
touch-up around same areas as directed by Owner's Representative.
C. Remove all misplaced paint splatters or drippings resulting from this work.
PART 4 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE
The coating systems described below provide the quality and performance standard for each surface.
Equal coating systems are acceptable as long as the submitted produce meets or exceeds the performance
and quality standards of the coating systems below.
4.1. HIGH H2S RESISTANT COATINGS FOR CONCRETE WET WELL&MANHOLES:
(125+Mil Epoxy Mortar)
Surface Preparation of Concrete (New or Existing): Remove any existing coatings and
mechanically abrade or abrasive blast clean in accordance with SSPC-SP13/NACE 6 to achieve
a minimum ICRI CSP-5 surface profile. (Reference SSPC-Guide No.11 & ICRI Technical
Guidelines 03732). Surface must be clean and dry prior to painting.
Skim Coat Concrete (New or Existing): As needed, the concrete shall be skim coated with
Series 218 Mortar Clad to fill all bugholes, voids, and surface irregularities not exceeding '/a"-
''h" inch to provide a smooth and even finish.
Cementitious Resurfacer (Existing Concrete Only): As needed, apply Cementitious Repair
Mortar where thickness greater than 'h" inch restoration is required. Use edge conditioning
SECTION 09900- Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
method described by the manufacturer's application guide. (Performance equal to Tnemec
Series 217 MortarCrete)
ls`Coat: 100% Solids Aliphatic amine epoxy mortar applied at 100.0-125.0 mils.
(Performance equal to Tnemec Series 434 Perma-Shield H2S)
2nd Coat: 100% Solids Polyamine epoxy applied at 15.0-20.0 mils.
(Performance equal to Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze)
Note: Follow Tnemec Perma-Shield Details Guide on terminations, penetrations, joint details
etc.
4.2. EXPOSED STEEL COMPONENTS AND D.I. PIPING IN HIGH H2S ENVIRONMENT:
(IMMERSION&NON-IMMERSION)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2 Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning to achieve a
minimum 3.0 mil anchor profile.
Shop Prime: Polyamidoamine Epoxy applied at 4.0-8.0 mils.
(Performance equal to Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II)
1st Coat:100%Solids Polyamine epoxy applied at 15.0-20.0 mils.
(Performance equal to Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze)
2nd Coat: 100%Solids Polyamine epoxy applied at 15.0-20.0 mils.
(Performance equal to Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze)
UV Resistant Topcoat(Exterior exposed pipe only): Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane applied at
2.0—3.0 dry mils.
(Performance equal to Tnemec Series 73U Endura-Shield)
4.3. EXPOSED STEEL COMPONENTS AND D.I. PIPING IN DRY BENIGN OR NON-H2S
EXPOSED ENVIROMENT:
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2 Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning to achieve a
minimum 3.0 mil anchor profile.
Shop Prime: Polyamidoamine Epoxy applied at 4.0-8.0 mils.
(Performance equal to Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II)
1 s`Coat: Polyamidoamine Epoxy applied at 4.0-8.0 mils.
(Performance equal to Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II)
UV Resistant Topcoat(Exterior exposed pipe only): Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane applied at
2.0—3.0 dry mils.
(Performance equal to Tnemec Series 73U Endura-Shield)
4.4. COLOR SYSTEM MATERIAL INDENTIFICATION
SECTION 09900- Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Color options shall be submitted to Engineer and Owner with the appropriate painting or coating
submittal.
SECTION 09900- Page 9

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 11081
AERATION AND DIGESTER BLOWERS
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish, install, test and place in satisfactory operation four(4) electric motor driven,
single stage centrifugal blower units,main motor drive starters,master control panel,blower manufacturer
designed software in conjunction with the aeration system and digester system process designers, and
appurtenances as shown on the contract drawings. Each of the supplied blowers shall be capable of
producing aeration output for all the data points given that cover both the aeration and digester process
designs. Aeration blowers, instrumentation,controls,and appurtenances shall be provided as shown on the
drawings and as specified herein for a complete and automated aeration system by the manufacturer.
1.2 MANUFACTURER
The air blower/motor assemblies, all accessories, control and run time software shall be supplied by the
integrally geared turbo blower supplier. The blower manufacturer shall have at least ten (10) installations
of single-stage centrifugal blowers of equal design that have been in operation for at least five(5)years.
The Local Control Panel(LCP)and Master Control Panel(MCP)design,construction,and testing shall be
completed in-house by the manufacture. This controls,panel and software work shall not be outsourced to
ensure quality assurance, control, and testing.
The blower manufacturer must have assembly shops that are ISO 9001 certified to assure conformance to
the highest quality standards of the industry.
Equipment shall be the standard product of the manufacturer and shall be modified, re-designed from the
standard mode, if necessary, or furnished with special features, accessories, materials, or finishes as may
be necessary to conform to the detailed requirements of these specifications or contract drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION &MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Submittals during construction, and the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be made in accordance
with these specifications. In addition,provide this information in the following format:
1. Comments and exceptions by specification paragraph. Provide detailed information on structural,
mechanical,electrical,or other changes or modifications necessary to adapt non-specified materials
to the arrangement or details shown.
2. General description of blower with all performance data,blower curves,and model information.
3. Mechanical drawings with general arrangement showing blower base dimensions, floor mounting,
skid piping,overall weights,and weights of largest components requiring removal for maintenance.
4. Process and instrumentation diagrams.
5. Drawings of all control panels to include:
a. Electric ladder diagram.
b. Interconnects to all components outside the panel.
c. Door layout.
d. Interior layout.
e. Sample Operator Interface screens.
SECTION.11081 -Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
6. Drawings of the main drive motor starter shall include:
a. All installation dimensions.
b. Access locations.
c. Maintenance clearance requirements.
d. Weights of assembly and any"rack out components".
e. Mounting requirements.
7. Furnish a main drive motor starter schematic showing one-line power diagrams and all control
wiring with wire numbered.
8. Provide a main drive motor start analysis showing compliance with motor acceleration
requirements, line current limits, and generally that the starter/motor combination will accelerate
the load to full speed within the specified parameters.
9. Starter installation, line and load wire sizing, installation, and connection hardware (lugs) is the
responsibility of others.
10. Operating description for the local and master control panels.As a minimum,provide more detailed
description than given in this specification,covering all logic and sequences of operation.
11. Provide a detailed description of the data acquisition, monitoring, and predicted preventative
maintenance software. Typical Operator Interface screens shall be provided with detailed
descriptions, the various tattletale monitors, preventative maintenance items, and data logging
features.
In addition to the above, Operation and Maintenance manuals shall include:
1. Unloading,handling, storage, and maintenance requirements.
2. Spare parts recommended list and those supplied per specifications.
3. Recommended lubricants.
4. Surface preparation and shop paint specifications.
5. Instrument settings.
6. Troubleshooting guide.
7. List of components and catalog cuts fully describing all items.
8. Maintenance summary forms.
9. Copy of the test results.
1.4 TOOL AND SPARE PARTS
The blower manufacturer shall furnish all special tools and appliances necessary to disassemble, service,
repair and adjust the equipment and appurtenances. The following spare parts shall be furnished:
1. One complete set of 0-rings and gaskets for the blowers.
2. One actuator for each type variable diffuser vanes.
3. One set of oil filter cartridges for each unit.
4. One set of primary inlet air filters for each unit.
All spare parts shall be suitably packaged and clearly identified with indelible marking on the containers.
Tools and spare parts (except for the air and oil filters) shall be supplied in a wooden box for long-term
storage and marked with Manufacturer's name, along with a complete description of contents.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
The single stage centrifugal blowers will be used to supply variable volume of air for process air to the
aeration basins. The MCP, instrumentation, and accessories shall optimize system operation. All items
specified in this section shall be supplied by the manufacturer to provide a sole source responsibility for a
SECTION 11081 -Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
properly functioning aeration system with the objective to minimize power consumption while providing
the proper volume of air to each aeration basin zone.All components shall be new. Both workmanship and
materials shall be of the very best quality and conform to all applicable sections of these specifications. It
shall be understood that components specified establish minimum requirements only,and do not relieve the
supplier of responsibility for providing a properly functioning system.
The blowers shall be motor driven, single-stage centrifugal, vertical split type complete with integral
gearbox and accessories as described herein. Each blower shall be provided with axial inlet,side discharge
adjustable radially in fifteen(15)degree increments.
Blower and accessories shall be furnished as a complete assembled package and must include all
interconnecting piping, instrumentation and supports needed to ship the assembly as a complete unit. The
blower packager shall be able to show that similar units have been in successful operation for five years.
A sound enclosure shall be supplied with each blower.
2.2 DESIGN CONDITIONS
There shall be two blowers provided for the aeration tanks, (one blower per aeration tank)and one blower
for the two digester tanks and sludge holding tank. A fourth blower shall serve as a spare for both the
aeration process and the sludge process blowers.
All blowers shall be capable of the following design operating conditions and guarantee points:
1. Flow Rate, scfm measured at 14.54 PSIA,
Design Flow at Delivered Pressure Wire to Temp at
Point Inlet SCFM (psig)at Water Hp inlet, F
SCFM discharge
1 1819.3 1,571 8.75 88.52 105
2 1632.9 1,414 8.75 78.90 105
3 1264.4 1,100 8.75 64.31 105
4 809.7 707 8.00 48.33 105
2. Atmospheric Pressure: 14.54 psia
3. Inlet Temperature, High: 105°F
4. Inlet Temperature,Low: 10°F
5. Relative Humidity, %: 36%
6. Inlet Pressure at Blower Inlet Flange: 14.34 psia
7. Discharge Air Pressure: 8.75 psig
8. Blower Turndown,percent of Capacity: 100 percent to 49 percent
Blower power consumptions shall be guaranteed. In the event the Total Factored Power Draw(as tested)
is in excess of the specified Total Factored Power Draw, the units shall be re-worked and re-tested at no
additional cost to the OWNER,until they comply with the specifications.
Blowers shall not surge or exceed the nameplate motor rating over the entire range of operation.
Blowers of a design requiring synchronization of air flow in order that two or more may operate in parallel
shall not be acceptable; that is, the blowers shall operate in a cascade,not parallel,mode.
SECTION 11081 -Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.3 BLOWER AND INTEGRAL GEARBOX
Blower casing shall be made of ductile iron ASTM A536-60-40-18 vertically split, have a maximum
continuous duty design temperature of 400 Deg F, and a design pressure of 50 psig. The blower inlet shall
be field connected by the CONTRACTOR, directlyto the inlet pipe bya flexible connection supplied
p P PP by
manufacturer. Air inlet shall be axial through an annular inlet. The discharge flange shall be faced and
drilled to ANSI B 16.1,Class 125 pound.A threaded port shall be provided at the lowest point of the casing
for drainage. The blower casing shall be provided with lifting lugs capable of supporting the
blower/gearbox.
The gear drive housing shall be of close-grained cast iron ASTM A48, Class 30B, vertically split and
sufficiently rigid to maintain the shaft positions under maximum loads. Two inspection ports,with bolt-on
covers, shall be provided in the upper portion of the gearbox housing. The ports shall allow access to the
gearbox internals for the purpose of inspection. Adjustment of the vibration proximity probes on the high-
speed shaft shall be possible from the outside of the gearbox. The requirement to disassemble the gearbox
for fast-shaft proximity probe adjustment shall not be acceptable. A circular, bolt-on plate located on the
fast shaft centerline, opposite the impeller end, shall be removable. This removable plate shall facilitate
inspection and replacement of the fast shaft opposite impeller end journal and thrust bearing without
disassembly of the gearbox.
Gearbox configuration shall incorporate a single helical gear set in an over/under configuration. The
overhung impeller and fast-shaft shall operate between the first and second critical speeds of the assembly.
The blower and gear housing assemblies shall be machined to close tolerances for bearing fit, gear
alignment,air and oil tightness.
The gearbox shall be ample size and rated to transmit the maximum torque and horsepower input
requirement to the blower under all operating conditions and continuous duty.
All exposed machined surfaced shall be coated with grease prior to shipment.
2.4 IMPELLERS
A. The impeller shall be of the open radial flow type, with backward leaning blades and milled from
forged aluminum alloy. Impellers constructed of any other method or material shall be acceptable,
except as described below. The impeller shall be attached to the shaft by shrink fit and locknut
arrangement. The impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
B. The axial gap between the impeller and compressor casing shall be adjustable by means of shims
in order to assure the prescribed gap. Gap adjustments by means of machining the casings or shafts
are not acceptable.
2.5 VARIABLE VANES
A. Variable discharge diffuser vanes shall be provided for capacity and designed to obtain the highest
efficiency over the entire regulating range. Vanes shall be aerodynamically shaped for maximizing
efficiency.
B. Flat steel plates shall not be used for inlet guide vanes or the variable diffuser vanes.
SECTION 11081 -Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
C. The variable diffuser assemblies shall be mounted integrally with each blower, multi-leaf and
pivoted, and located in cast iron housings. All vanes shall be mounted in permanently lubricated
sleeve bearings. Operating linkages for variable diffusers shall be housed within the blowers.
Blowers with variable vane assemblies located external to the blower housing and/or have ball in-
socket linkages or other moving parts requiring periodic lubrication shall not be acceptable.
D. Each variable vane assembly shall include a skid mounted electric actuator, limit switches, and
open/close indication on the LCP. Independent floor mounting of the actuator or its operating
mechanisms shall not be allowed.
E. The position of each set of vanes, from fully open to fully close, shall be transmitted to the LCP
via an analog signal.Position of both sets of vanes shall be indicated by an adjustable manual lever
arm and calibrated dial on the blower, per se. The diffuser vane position shall be indicated on the
LCP.
2.6 SHAFTS,GEARS, SEALS
A. The blower gear shafts shall be machined from heat-treated,forged steel and suitably ground.Any
responsive lateral critical speed of the rotating assembly shall be at least fifteen (15)percent from
the normal operating speed. Any torsional resonances of the package shall be at least ten (10)
percent from the normal operating speed. All shafting shall conform to "Design and Selection of
Components for Enclosure Gear Drives" (AGMA 6001-D97).
B. The speed-increasing, helical, parallel shaft type gears shall be made of case-hardened alloy steel
forgings with the gear teeth precision ground. All gears shall be rated in accordance with
"Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for Involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth"
(AGMA 2101-C95). The gears shall be manufactured to a minimum AGMA quality number of
twelve(12)per"Gear Classification and Inspection Handbook"AGMA 2000-A88.
C. The shaft seals shall be of a non-contact, multi-point, labyrinth type and operated dry. A vented
space between air and oil seals shall be provided. Any leakage shall be minimized by having small
clearances between female and male parts. The female part shall be made of aluminum or bronze
to avoid damage to the shaft in the event of a seal rube.Numerous slinger rings(diameter changes)
on the shaft shall be provided in the sealing area to ensure oil is centrifugally slung off the shaft.
Uniform shaft diameter without multiple slinger rings in each sealing area will not be acceptable.
2.7 BEARING
A. Hydrostatic tilt pad bearings shall be used for drive shaft and compressor shaft. Rated for
100,000-hour minimum life. Anti-friction ball bearings are not acceptable.
2.8 COUPLING
A. A flexible, forged steel, double-disc, dry type spacer coupling shall be furnished to connect to the
blower and motor. Coupling and spacer shall be balanced to AGMA, Class 8, or better, and sized
with a minimum service factory of 1.5. Coupling construction shall be such that either shaft of the
unit may be removed without disturbing adjustment of the other. An OSHA approved steel guard
shall be provided and installed over the coupling and painted Safety Yellow.
B. A complete torsional critical speed analysis shall be conducted by the manufacturer to ensure that
the blower, motor and coupling are properly designed. This analysis shall be included in the
submittal to confirm that there are no torsional critical speeds within the operating range of the unit.
SECTION 11081 -Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.9 OIL LUBRICATION SYSTEM
A. A lube oil system shall be provided with each blower, installed integral with the blower skid. A
gearbox shaft-driven oil pump shall supply lubrication for the air blower/gearbox. A separate motor
driven oil pump shall start the unit before shaft driven pump takes over. The oil reservoir shall be
integral to the gearbox. All associated oil piping shall be 316 SS.
B. The oil filter shall be of the full flow,replaceable cartridge type,capable of removing particles over
10 microns with a clean oil filter pressure drop not exceeding 15 psi at design temperature and
flow. A visual gauge shall indicate when a filter is dirty and requires cleaning.
C. Provide an air-to-oil cooler to maintain constant oil temperature,mounted on each blower skid.
D. Provide one oil transfer pump for the purpose of removing spent oil from the blower oil reservoir,
pumping into 55-gallon drums and refilling the oil reservoir from 55-gallon drums of fresh oil.The
oil pump shall be Viking or equal gear pump with 1 HP, 115V, 60 Hz, 1 Phase motor (with
CONTRACTOR) suitable for pumping a minimum 5 gpm of the appropriate viscosity oil. The
pump and motor shall be mounted on a suitable base, with coupling, guard, and an on/off switch
mounted in conduit box.A 20 FT electric cord with three-prong plug shall be provided to plug into
a wall socket. Provide a 2 IN PVC drum pipe/standpipe for inserting into a drum to fill/empty drum
contents, fitted with a 90°F elbow, and all required fitting. Provide two (2), 8 FT lengths of 1 IN
diameter oil resistant hose,with appropriate fittings and worm clamps,and connections to the pump
inlet and outlet. Provide one-half of a male/female quick coupling on the end of each length of
hose,and the other half attached to the drum pipe/standpipe and to the drain line(fitted with on/off
valve) on each blower base. Mount the oil pump and appurtenances on a two-wheel cart, with
appropriate storage hooks for the electric cord,hose,and drum pipe/standpipe.
2.10 EQUIPMENT BASE AND MOUNTINGS
A. The manufacturer shall furnish a base of adequate size to support the blower, gearbox, motor,
lubricating system, and accessories. The base shall be constructed of fabricated A36 steel in an
integral welded box configuration with a drip lip, lifting eyelets, and have sufficient rigidity to
permit lifting(using a four-point lift)with all equipment mounted.
B. The base shall be fully self-supporting and mounted on vibration isolators provided by the
manufacturer and be suitable to absorb the weight and vibration of the blower assembly without
undue stress or distortion. The vibration isolators shall be designed for a transmissibility of less
than two(2)percent.
C. The units shall be factory aligned on the base prior to shipment.
2.11 ELECTRIC MOTORS
A. Each blower shall be provided with a horizontal, constant speed, open drip proof/TEFC, squirrel
case induction motor designed in accordance with current NEMA,ANSI and IEEE standards. The
motor horsepower shall be equal to, or more than, maximum normal load that will be imposed at
any point in the operating range of the design conditions specified. Each motor shall have a 1.15
service factor with Class "F" insulation. Each motor shall be premium balanced for reduced
vibration and supplied with lifting lugs and space heaters.
SECTION 11081 -Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
B. Motors shall be premium efficiency design. Efficiencies shall be determined in accordance with
NEMA Standard MGI-12.53a and IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. Nominal and guaranteed
efficiencies shall be included on motor nameplates in compliance with NEMA Standard MGI-
12.53b.
C. All motors shall be suitable for operation on 460/3/60 power for ambient air temperature up to 104
Deg F. Motors shall be suitable for full voltage, across the line start, but reduced voltage starters
shall be supplied.
D. Power factor correction capacitors shall be utilized.Power factor shall be a minimum of 80 percent
lagging at full load, except on motors with speed slower than 900 RPM. The general contractor
shall insure that power factor correction capacitors shall be supplied in the motor control centers.
2.12 INLET FILTER SILENCER
A. Each blower shall be provided with an inlet filter/silencer designed for maximum air flow at
absolute minimum pressure drop and connected directly to the inlet of the blower via a flexible
connector. Walls of the silencer shall consist of sandwiched galvanized steel outer skin and an
acoustical sound deadening material of one(1)inch sound insulation containing an inert barrier,on
the inside of the housing. The inert barrier on the walls shall have a thin aluminum foil on its
exterior, affixed to the barrier with an industrial adhesive. The silencer housing structural frame
shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Legs shall be adjustable for vertical positioning and leveling.
B. The integral inlet silencer shall consist of a set of lamella,mounted internally in the filter/silencer
between the filter elements and the blower inlet, suitably wrapped with sound deadening material.
Lamella construction shall be such that there is no direct line of sight (direct flow) through the
lamella, and the lamella so configured such that the line of air flow shall make at least four turns,
for maximum attenuation. An air tight seal shall be provided between the filter frame and silencer.
C. The filter elements shall be rectangular, replaceable elements mounted on a flat, vertical track of
aluminum construction and removable through galvanized steel doors located on each side of the
galvanized steel housing. A two-stage filter panel system shall be supplied. The coarse pre-filter
shall have a removal efficiency of 93 percent on 10 micron. The final filter element shall have a
removal efficiency of 99.5 percent on 2 micron. The filters shall be sized for a maximum face
velocity of 575 FT/minute at peak air flow.
D. Maximum clean filter pressure drop of the inlet filter/silencer with the elements installed shall be
2.5 in.water column(w.c.) (0.09 psig). Maximum pressure drop with dirty inlet filters shall be 4.2
IN w.c. (0.15 psig).
E. The inlet filter/silencer shall be installed by the Project General CONTRACTOR by press fitting a
one(1)IN foam rubber gasket,provided by the manufacturer between the wall transition assembly
and the flange around the periphery of the inlet filter frame. The Project General CONTRACTOR
shall connect the filter/silencer to the blower inlet via the flexible connector provided.
2.13 DISCHARGE EXPANSION JOINT
A. Provide each blower with a discharge expansion joint, for field installation by the Contactor,
capable of withstanding the vacuum, pressure, and high discharge air temperature under all
operating conditions. The expansion joint shall be suitable for mounting between flanges drilled
for standard ANSI 150-pound pattern.
SECTION 11081 -Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.14 DISCHARGE CONE/SILENCER
A. Provide a discharge cone/silencer, for field installation by the Contactor, to increase the blower
outlet size to the larger diameter air discharge piping. Maximum sidewall angle increase shall be
7° per side (14 ° total). Minimum IO-gauge carbon steel shall be used with discharge flange and
bypass flange size as shown on the Drawings. Instrument connections shall be provided, for
components mounted on the cone/silencer. The inside of the discharge cone/silencer shall be lined
with deep layers of sound absorbing material, resistant to high temperatures, and covered by high
temperature fiberglass cloth and a perforated steel plate (minimum IO-gauge thickness), so as to
form sandwiched layers of the external cone/silencer surface, acoustical material, and internal
perforated steel plate.
2.15 BLOW-OFF (BYPASS)VALVE
A. Provide each blower with a steel or cast iron body blow - off wafer type butterfly valve for field
installation and wiring to the LCP to allow unloaded start-up and stop, for air service. The valve
operator shall be motorized, 460/60/3, NEMA 4, open/close in fifteen (15) seconds or less,
equipped with starter,open/close limit switches, and shall be suitable for air service up to 250 Deg
F. Controls for the valve shall be mounted in each LCP with indicator lights to annunciate fully
open or closed. Bolting and gaskets shall be provided by the manufacturer.
2.16 DISCHARGE VALVE
A. Provide each blower with a wafer type discharge butterfly valve for field installation and wiring to
the LCP,identical to the blow-off valve,except for size and actuation speed,which shall open/close
no faster than thirty(30) seconds.
2.17 CHECK VALVE
A. Provide each blower with a wafer type discharge check valve of the dual, plate type with center
hinge, spring closure, cast iron body, Viton-B seal and aluminum-bronze plates, Inconel springs,
and rated for temperatures up to 400 DegF. The check valve shall be mounted and installed in a
horizontal run of piping, as shown on the Drawings.
2.18 BLOW-OFF VALVE SILENCER
A. A carbon steel blow - off silencer shall be provided for each blower and the main air header blow
off valve.Internal baffles,packed with sound absorbent material, shall direct air flow around three
(3) 90 ° turns in an annular flow configuration. The blow - off silencer shall be an integral unit,
fitted with one (1) flange for direct bolting to the blow-off valve, with installation by the Project
General CONTRACTOR.
2.19 INSTRUMENTATION
A. Instrumentation components shall be provided by the manufacturer in accordance with Division
17,Instrumentation. These components shall be mounted on the blower skid,except as noted,with
all electrical connections external to the skid, brought to the skid - mounted LCP, by the Project
General CONTRACTOR.
B. Instrumentation for each blower shall include, as a minimum:
SECTION 11081 -Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1. Inlet air filter differential pressure combination switch gauge, first stage(installed on the filter
housing and wired to the LCP by the Project General CONTRACTOR).
2. Inlet air filter differential pressure combination switch gauge, second stage (installed on the
filter housing and wired to the LCP by the Project General CONTRACTOR).
3. Inlet air temperature gauge.
4. Inlet air temperature transmitter 4-20 mA.
5. Surge switch.
6. Discharge air pressure gauge(installed by the Project General CONTRACTOR).
7. Differential pressure (inlet/discharge) transmitter 4-20 mA (1/4 IN tubing between the
transmitter and the discharge cone provided by and installed by the Project General
CONTRACTOR).
8. Oil temperature transmitter.
9. Oil temperature gauge.
10. Oil low pressure switch(if applicable).
11. Low oil level switch.
12. Vibration switch.
13. Variable diffuser position transmitter.
14. Blow-off valve limit switches(integral with blow-off valve and wired to the LCP by the Project
General CONTRACTOR).
15. Discharge valve limit switches (integral with discharge valve and wired to the LCP by the
Project General CONTRACTOR).
16. Oil pressure gauge
17. Oil filter differential pressure indicator
18. Oil filter differential pressure switch
19. Oil level dipstick or gauge
20. Zero speed switch
21. Variable diffuser position transmitter
22. Inlet guide vane position transmitter
C. The RTD monitor system shall include 100 ohm platinum RTD's embedded in the motor windings
(two per phase; one active, one spare) and in each loaded journal bearing of both the motor and
blower/gearbox. The system shall monitor and display actual winding and bearing temperature at
the LCP. When the windings or bearings reach the selected temperature, an indicator illuminates
until reset and the unit shuts shown. The PLC shall receive and the
Operator Interface shall graphically display the RTD signals. The manufacturer shall provide the
necessary hardware for direct communication between RTD's,PLC, and Operator Interface.
RTD's may similarly be used to monitor temperature and alarm as listed in Paragraph B above, in
lieu of switches.
D. A shaft vibration monitoring system shall be furnished for each blower and motor.The system shall
include:
1. Blower gearbox pinion shaft X-Y configuration shaft vibration detectors
2. Blower gearbox pinion shaft(Z)thrust bearing(axial)position/vibration detectors
3. X-Y configuration vibration detectors at each bearing of the motor,four(4)probes total
per motor.
The vibration detectors shall be factory wired to the skid mounted LCP. The PLC in the LCP shall
receive, and the Operator Interface shall graphically display,the vibration probe signals.
The Operator Interface shall include an adjustable alarm feature on the rising vibration levels that
first alarms and is followed by unit shutdown. The alarm/shutdown shall be displayed until reset.
SECTION 11081 -Page 9

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Provide necessary hardware for direct communication between vibration probes, PLC, and
Operator Interface. Duplicate the output of existing units.
E. NEMA 12 terminal boxes shall be provided on the skid(one for digital and one for analog wiring).
Skid mounted electrical components shall terminate into these boxes and sufficient terminal blocks
provided for external wiring terminations by the CONTRACTOR.
2.20 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL(LCP)
A. Each blower shall be furnished with a skid-mounted PLC-based sequencing panel.All controls and
instruments shall fail into a safe condition. The controls shall be designed such that the blower
cannot operate unless the controls are energized, nor can they operate with any defective controls.
B. The NEMA 12 rated enclosure shall be mounted on the blower skid and fitted with a hinged door
for front access. The Project General CONTRACTOR shall provide and wire the 460/60/3,
30-amp power supply. Each assembled control panel shall carry a UL label (UL-C for Canadian
service)certifying the assembled industrial control panel complies with UL 508.
C. Each blower LCP shall contain controls for blower motor starting, surge and overload detection,
shutdown control and sequencing,alarm and emergency shutdown systems,variable diffuser vanes,
discharge valve,bypass valve, and the oil lubrication system operation.
D. Each LCP shall contain a main power disconnect,which interlocks the enclosure door. Starters for
variable vane operators shall be mounted inside the panel. Provide for power distribution to feed
motorized valve motor controllers located at the valves.Provide a transformer with 120V secondary
and a separate 24V DC regulated power supply. Starter for the main drive motor is located in the
motor control center(MCC)and provided by the CONTRACTOR.
E. An Allen Bradley PLC shall start and shut down the blower in a permissive sequence,receive input,
monitor and control operating variables.
F. Lightening arrestors and surge suppressors shall be provided for 120V control power.
G. Surge suppressors shall be provided for"noise"protection and to remove transient peaks across all
inductive loads.
H. Isolation amplifiers, R/I transmitters, RTD/vibration transmitters, and other controls shall be
supplied, as required, for complete system control.
I. Identify each end of each wire by a unique wire number printed on a heat shrunk sleeve marker.
J. Provide an Operator Interface touch sensitive, 256-color monitor screen that incorporates all
controls, alarms, and meters in easy-to-interpret color screens. Operator Interface shall be Allen
Bradley Panelview compatible with a 10 IN panel.
K. The operating screens(pages)shall be custom tailored to provide not only start-stop and operational
mode interfaces,but also alarm status,help messages,and diagnostics the following general design
protocol shall be incorporated:
1. Operator Interface scales, graphs, and chart scaling shall be reset without using a
personal computer.
SECTION 11081 -Page 10

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2. Screens may be accessed via one-touch screen point selection.
3. All control functions shall require two touch screen point selection.
4. All alarm and trip set points shall have security access codes.
5. Bar charts,alarm,and trip set points shall use color graphs for ease of di s play and
clarity.
L. The following Operator Interface screens shall be provided, generally as described, and
incorporating state of the art upgrades available at the time of engineering design and submittal for
the Engineer's review.As a minimum,provide the following:
1. Local Control Panel Menu-The master screen lists all operating screens as touch-
sensitive screen points, for selection.
2. Main Blower Operations-Touch-sensitive screen points for blower start,blower
stop, increase or decrease capacity, local or remote selection. This screen shall
display a bar chart of blower capacity(in percent)and numerical amp draw.A 1 x
3 in message center shall display appropriate messages including a troubleshooting
guide,upon alarm.
3. Service Operations - Shall display all electric operating components; air cooler,
discharge diffuser vanes, blow-off, and discharge valves. When in service mode,
touching an identified screen point will display on-off(open-close)screen points
to exercise that item. A normal or service/test screen point shall also be displayed
to change operation status.Two bar charts of inlet and diffuser vane position shall
be illustrated,with actual percent open detailed in a box,below the bar chart.
4. Blower Bearing Temperature Monitor - Shall detail a side view cutaway of the
blower/gearbox, illustrating each bearing. The actual temperature of each bearing
shall be detailed, along with the alarm and trip temperatures. This data shall be
listed in a box with an arrow pointing to the respective bearing. Upon alarm, the
affected bearing shall flash yellow. Upon trip,the affected bearing shall flash red.
5. Miscellaneous Blower Temperature Monitor - Shall display the following
temperatures in bar chart form, and display the actual numerical temperature, or
set point:
a. Oil reservoir:
1. High Trip.
2. High Alarm
3. Actual
4. Low Alarm
5. Low Trip
b. Inlet Air(Recirculation upon surge):
1. High Trip
2. High Alarm
3. Actual
c. Discharge Air(if specified)
1. High Trip
2. High Alarm
3. Actual
6. Main Motor Monitor—Display temperatures in a similar fashion as per(5),above.
a. Motor bearings.
b. Windings.
c. Amperage.
SECTION 11081 -Page 11

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
7. Blower Vibration Monitor-Display the vibration in bar chart form and also the
numerical vibration for the velometer.
8. Motor Vibration Display-As per(7)above,display these vibration signals in both
graphic and numerical fashion.
9. Transmitter Display - Shall list all analog signals in raw value, the engineering
unit, and converted milliamps.
10. Alarm/Trip Counter - Lists all alarms and the cumulative number of trips. Also
displays a reset pad for the alarms and trips.
11. Alarm Help Screen-When in alarm/trip,this screen shall display a troubleshooting
list to use as a guide to correct the alarm.
12. Transmitter Scaling Set-Up-Lists calibration range of all analog signals.Password
access shall be required to change any value.
13. Miscellaneous Set-Up-Shall have a display and set point for pulsing the blow-off
valve on-off,and a display for default on power-up in local/remote mode.
M. Provide touch sensitive screen point control via the Operator Interface screens, status indication,
and readout for the following functions:
1. Start blower.
2. Stop blower.
3. Local Control.
4. Remote/Auto control.
5. Open blow-off valve.
6. Close blow-off valve.
7. Open discharge valve.
8. Close discharge valve.
9. Open variable diffuser vane.
10. Close variable diffuser vane.
11. High oil temperature indicator.
12. Low oil level indicator.
13. Surge control indicator.
14. Inlet air high temperature (recirculation surge)indicator.
15. Inlet air filter high differential pressure indicator, first stage.
16. Inlet air filter high differential pressure indicator, second stage.
17. Discharge air high pressure.
18. High vibration indicator.
19. General alarm indicator. _
20. Global alarm reset.
N. Additional selector switches,pushbuttons, and indicators shall include:
1. Service/Normal/Test-Located on the Operator Interface. This touch sensitive screen
point allows permissive start of the blower components only in the Service Mode.
When in Test Mode, this diverts MCC start signal to test logic that simulates motor
start to facilitate testing of the system without starting the drive motor.
2. Emergency stop mushroom button on panel door.
3. Separate,non-resettable hour meter on panel door.
O. Monitor and indication of all analog signals shall be displayed on the Operator Interface,including,
but not limited to:
1. Motor amps.
2. Variable diffuser vane position(45-100 percent capacity)
SECTION 11081 -Page 12

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3. Temperature signals
4. Pressure signals
P. The blowers shall start under an automatic sequence initiated by the local start signal or the remote
start signal when in remote/auto control as dictated by the aeration or process control system
supplier. Upon signal to start, the PLC shall confirm that the variable diffuser vanes are at
minimum, the blow-off(bypass) valve is open, and the discharge valve is closed. All vanes and
valves shall be equipped with limit switches on both the open and closed position to indicate
position. If components are not properly positioned, they shall move to their respective start
positions automatically via the PLC logic. Once all pre-start permissive are confirmed, the blower
motor shall be started. A feedback signal from the MCC (by Project General CONTRACTOR)
shall confirm that the main drive motor starter has been energized. When the blower reaches
operating speed,as determined by the motor start sequence,the PLC shall open the discharge valve,
close the blow-off(bypass)valve,and release control of the variable diffuser vanes to local/remote
control. If the components are not correctly positioned, interlocks shall be provided to prevent
blower operation after the delay time during start-up. Provide sequence fail alarm and trip if any
portion of the start, run, or stop sequence is not properly executed. The Operator Interface shall
annunciate the function that caused the trip.
Q. The surge detection system shall sense unbalanced/surge conditions by use of pressure sensing
devices. Detection of surge conditions shall trip the blower off-line.
R. Motor overload protection software shall be provided to control the maximum vane setting on the
blower, so that motor current does not exceed a pre-set level.
S. There shall be three means of shutting down the blower:
1. Normal Stop-Initiated by pushing the stop button or remote stop.The unit normally stops such
that no surging occurs.
2. Soft Stop -Initiated by:
a. High oil temperature
b. High inlet air temperature(recirculation/surge).
c. Discharge valve has not fully opened within two(2)minutes after receiving feedback
signal from MCC.
d. Blow-off valve has not closed within five(5)minutes after receiving feedback signal
from MCC.
e. High Discharge Pressure
f. Surge
T. Soft Stop shall de-energize the main drive motor eight (8) seconds after alarm initiation to allow
the blow-off valve to partially open.Normal stop functions follow:
1. Emergency Stop -Initiated by:
a. Pushing emergency stop button.
b. High Vibration
c. No feedback signal from MCC during Start Sequence
d. Loss of feedback signal from MCC during Normal Operation
e. Sequence failure during start-up.
f. PLC Failure
2. Emergency stop shall de-energize the main drive motor immediately. Normal stop functions
follow.
SECTION 11081 -Page 13

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
U. The high inlet air temperature (recirculation) alarm shall be active when there is no main motor
feedback present at the LCP from the MCC. The purpose shall be to detect reverse air flow through
the compressor.
V. Data communication shall be provided between the PLC's, located in each LCP and the plant
computer systems. This compatible interface shall be the responsibility of the systems integrator;
however, the manufacturer shall actively participate in this compatible interface. The Project
General CONTRACTOR shall field wire all items between components,as follows:
1. Data communication to/from the LCP shall be as follows via PLC interface:
1. To plant process control(for blower monitoring purposes):
a. Blower on.
b. Blower off.
c. Common alarm.
d. Control status-Local or remote/auto.
2. To and From MCC (Motor Control Center) - (Hardwired digital signals by the Project
General CONTRACTOR):
a. Motor start signal to MCC (digital).
b. Run confirmation signal(digital feedback from MCC).
c. MCC alarm(digital).
d. Motor amps from MCC (analog).
2.21 TESTING
A. The main drive motor shall be given a standard, short commercial, witnessed test in accordance
with IEEE test procedures. A certified motor data sheet shall be furnished for approval prior to
shipment.
B. The blower shall be tested in accordance with the ASME Power Test Code for Centrifugal
Compressors and Exhausters, PTC-10-1974 (reaffirmed 1986) edition. Tests will be conducted
using a factory-test motor. A calibrated torque meter shall measure the gearbox/compressor shaft
input horsepower as per Paragraph 4.35 of the Code. The test shall include determination of the
surge point and verification of the guarantee points. Shaft power consumption shall include one
operating oil pump. Testing using less accurate heat balance or measuring the wire power draw
shall not be allowed.Compressor net delivered flow rate and discharge pressure shall be guaranteed
with no negative tolerance. There shall be no other tolerances or measuring uncertainties used in
reporting test results (i.e., the tests shall be reported with ±zero percent tolerance). The ASME
PTC-10 tests shall be witnessed. The ENGINEER shall sign each copy of the test data log sheet
certifying that the required tests were performed in strict accordance with these specifications and
the ASME PTC-10 Code,Paragraph 4.35,Torque Meter Tests.
1. The capacity of the blower shall be defined as per Paragraph 4.26 of the ASME PTC-
10 Power Test Code. Specifically, capacity is defined as, "the net rate of flow
compressed and delivered,expressed in terms of cubic feet per minute at the prevailing
inlet temperature and pressure. It shall be measured in a suitable manner to exclude
effectively all external leakage losses from sources such as shaft seals. "That is, air
flow shall be measured on the discharge side of the compressor at zero percent
tolerance.
SECTION 11081 -Page 14

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2. All test equipment shall be calibrated and certified by an independent test agency no
more than twelve(12)months prior to the test date.Certificates shall show the stability
of calibration over a period of at least one year per ISO 9001,Paragraph 4.11.
3. Velocity vibration versus frequency levels shall be recorded within 10-1,000 and 10-
10,000 Hz frequency range.
C. Upon completion of assembly, each blower, motor, and oil lubrication skid shall be functionally
tested with the local control panel(LCP)connected to all skidded instruments,electric valves,and
appurtenances.The oil lubrication system shall be run and tested for leaks.All start/stop sequences
and all safety and alarm systems shall be tested, simulating start of the blower motor. The blower,
motorized valves, and local panel shall be demonstrated to the ENGINEER as an operating system
before shipment. The ENGINEER shall sign the test procedure and results, certifying that the
assembled blowers, auxiliaries, blow-off, discharge, air flow control valves, LCP were tested
together, as a system, in the manufacturer's shop.
D. The OWNER reserves the right to witness testing at any phase. Expenses for the OWNER will be
the responsibility of the OWNER. Provide thirty (30) days prior notice, in writing, for the
witnessing of tests,except travel outside of the U.S.,provide sixty(60)days.
E. The blower,blower motor,blower starter and blower system shall all have witness testing.
F. The blower test report shall present computations in exact accordance with Section 5, 6,&7 of the
ASME PTC-10 Code with performance curves showing capacity,pressure,and horsepower inputs.
Test results not in verbatim agreement with test results presentation format per the Code shall be
cause for rejection of the performance tests.
G. Test results of the motors and blowers shall be included, submitted and reviewed prior to shipment
and be in the Operations& Maintenance Manual.
2.22 SOUND ENCLOSURE
The Manufacturer supplied enclosures shall consist of a freestanding frame of structural steel
shapes with loose and removable side panels. The panels shall 100 mm thick and on the inside
filled with high density mineral wool held into place by a perforated plate for optimum noise
attenuation. The frame shall be designed to allow complete breakdown for shipment, field erected
and installed by the Contractor. The steel panels and frame shall be removable in minutes for
major equipment servicing. The acoustical enclosure shall be made of aluzinc plate or aluminum
plate. The LCP shall be located outside the sound enclosure and connected to the blower skid by
the Contractor with a factory-supplied umbilical cord. The air blast lube oil cooler, if any, shall be
mounted on top of the acoustic enclosure. The enclosure shall be vented by air fans mounted in
the roof and securing maximum temperature rise in the acoustic enclosure of 10 degrees.
PART 3—INSTALLATION
3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. All equipment shall be skid mounted or crated to protect against damage during shipment.All parts
shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay
from the time of shipment until installation is completed,and the units and equipment are ready for
operation.
SECTION 11081 -Page 15

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
B. Finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by fiberboard blank flanges strongly
built and securely bolted thereto.
C. Shipment is not to be made until the manufacturer coordinates shipment to the jobsite with the
CONTRACTOR,assuring that the equipment will be properly received and stored.
D. Upon receipt, store equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and
connect and energize motor space heaters (and any other protective devices), as required.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PAINTING
A. All surfaces shall be prepared, shop primed, and finish painted with one finish coat of
Manufacturer's standard paint system.
B. Machine surfaces that are not painted shall be protected by coating with grease.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. The blowers,motors, all aeration instrumentation, and appurtenances shall be installed by the
Project General CONTRACTOR in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as
shown on the Drawings. All piping shall be supported so as to preclude the possibility of exerting
undue forces and movements on the blower flanges. Each blower unit shall be mounted on a flat
and level concrete pad(± 1/4 IN) in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
B. The Project General CONTRACTOR shall furnish the required piping, pipe supports, flange
gaskets, bolts, nuts, oil, and grease for initial operation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Start-up and training shall be completed as per Paragraph 3.4 for the aeration blowers. The main
air header pressure transmitter, DO probe transmitters, air flowmeters, and air flow control valves
shall all be started-up, and the system optimized for automatic,unattended operation.
3.4 START-UP AND TRAINING
A. The manufacturer shall furnish experienced start-up/ service personnel to inspect the final
installation and supervise the field start-up tests of the equipment. The services shall be provided
for a minimum of one (1), eight-hour(8)day for each unit, two (2) days for the MCP. If there are
difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's fabrication or Project General
CONTRACTOR's installation,additional service shall be provided at no extra cost to the OWNER.
B. A factory representative, who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance shall
be provided for four(4)hours,if necessary,to instruct representatives of the OWNER and Engineer
on proper operation and maintenance, including start-up and shut-down procedures, proper
lubrication practices, and troubleshooting of all equipment.
3.5 GUARANTEE&WARRANTY
SECTION 11081 -Page 16

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
A. Supplier shall warrant all equipment furnished to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship under normal use and service for a period of twelve(12)months after the date first
placed in service, or eighteen(18)months after delivery,whichever occurs first.
--END OF SECTION--
SECTION 11081 -Page 17

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 11200
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The information in this specification applies to the submersible sewer pumps for the WAS Pump Station
modifications and the new Digester. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and
performance of all work necessary to furnish and install the functional sewage pump station(s) as herein
described and noted on the detailed plans.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Latest Revisions shall be applicable to all
references.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A126 Grey Iron Castings for Valves,Flanges and Pipe Fittings
ASTM A153 Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A536 Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A743 Castings,Iron-Chromium,Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General
Application
ASTM B3 Copper Alloys in Ingot Form
ASTM C858 Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures
ASTM C890 Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Monolithic or Sectional
Precast Water and Wastewater Structures
ASTM C990 Joints for Concrete Pipe,Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible
Joint Sealants
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
ASME/ANSI B 16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B40.1 Gauges—Pressure Indicating Dial Type—Elastic Element
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA)
AWWA C104/A21.4 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water
AWWA Cl 10/A21.10 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through 48 in., for Water and Other
Liquids
AWWA C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
SECTION 11200-Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
AWWA C115/A21.15 Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges
AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION(NEMA)
NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit six(6)copies of the following to the Engineer for approval before beginning construction.
1.3.1 Product Data
A. Pump characteristic curves showing capacity in gpm, net positive suction head (NPSH), head,
efficiency, and pumping horsepower from 0 gpm to 110 percent of design capacity. A complete
list of equipment and material, including manufacturer's descriptive data and technical literature,
performance charts and curves,catalog cuts, and installation instructions.
B. Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of the
related submittals, and not later than 1 month prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data
shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply.
C. Piping Materials including joints,fittings,and couplings.
D. Station valves.
Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts for C, D, and E above.
1.3.2 Shop Drawings
A. Structural steel
B. Metal accessory items
C. Drawings containing complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details required to
demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings
shall show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment
relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operation.
1.3.3 Instructions
Diagrams, instructions,and other sheets proposed for posting.
1.3.4 Reports
Performance test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and
SECTION 11200-Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria,upon completion and
testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.
1.3.5 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Three (3) copies of operation and three (3) copies of maintenance manuals for the equipment furnished.
One complete set prior to performance testing and the remainder upon acceptance. Operation manuals shall
detail the step-by-step procedures required for system startup,operation,and shutdown. Operation manuals
shall include the manufacturer's name,model number,parts list,and brief description of all equipment and
their basic operating features.
Maintenance manuals shall list routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and
troubleshooting guides. Maintenance manuals shall include piping and equipment layout and simplified
wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed. Manuals shall be approved prior to the field-training
course.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, excessive
humidity and excessive temperature variation; and dirt,dust, or other contaminants.
1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and
shall advise the Engineer of any discrepancy before performing the work. Field measurements of all station
piping, structural steel, and all other components intended to fit inside the existing stations must be taken
prior to procurement and fabrication of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for
at least 5 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the
opinion of the Engineer,reasonably convenient to the site.
2.1.1 Nameplates
Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial
number,and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment.
2.1.2 Equipment Guards
Belts,pulleys, chains, gears,projecting setscrews,keys, and other rotation parts so located that any person
may come in close proximity thereto shall be enclosed or guarded.
2.1.3 Special Tools
One set of any special tools, calibration devices, and instrument required for operation, calibration, and
maintenance of the equipment shall be provided to the Owner prior to system startup.
SECTION 11200-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.1.4 Electric Motors
Motors shall conform to NEMA MG 1.
2.1.5 Motor Controls
Controls shall conform to NEMA ICS 1.
2.1.6 Bolts,Nuts,Anchors, and Washers
Bolts,nuts, anchors, and washers shall be steel; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153.
2.1.7 Pressure Gauges
One pressure gauge shall be provided for each pump to be installed. Pressure gauge ports shall be installed
at the locations shown on the drawings. The intention is for the ports to be installed and the valves closed,
and the gauges stored by the Owner.
Combination pressure gauges shall be glycerin filled with a built-in pressure snubber and have 4-1/2 inch
minimum diameter faces and be turret style,black phenolic case with clear glass face. The movement shall be
rotary, of 400 Series stainless steel with Teflon coated pinion gear and segment. The gauge shall be bottom
connected and accept a 1/4" NPT female thread. Two 1/4"ball valves shall be provided with each gauge for
isolation and venting and to facilitate easy removal of the gauge. All gauges will be directly tapped to the
spring line or top of the pipe. Incidental brass fittings shall be provided to properly plumb the connection so
the gauge may be easily viewed from inside the valve vault. Combination pressure gauge range and scale
graduations shall be in psi and feet of water as follows:
Outlet Pressure: 0 to 200%of the operating pressure,psi,5 psi figure intervals,with graduating marks every 1
psi.
The gauges shall be Ashcroft Model 1279ASL or approved equal.
2.2 SUBMERSIBLE NON-CLOG PUMPS
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing submersible non-clog sewage pumps capable of meeting the
following minimum design conditions:
Desludge Pumps in Aerobic Digester
Quantity 4
Primary Design Capacity 460 gpm
Primary Total Dynamic Head 15' TDH
Maximum Speed 1,160 rpm
Minimum Design Efficiency 65%
Minimum Solids Capability 3.0"
Maximum Driver Horsepower 3.4 HP
Motor Requirements 3 Phase,460V
Pump Type Single-Channel
Acceptable Pump Manufacturers Wilo,Fairbanks Morse,HOMA,or Pre-Approved Equal
SECTION 11200 -Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
WAS Pump Station
Quantity 2
Primary Design Capacity 340 gpm
Primary Total Dynamic Head 55.5' TDH
Maximum Speed 1,750 rpm
Minimum Design Efficiency 65%
Minimum Solids Capability 3.0"
Maximum Driver Horsepower 12 HP
Motor Requirements 3 Phase,460V
Pump Type Single-Channel
Acceptable Pump Manufacturers Wilo,Fairbanks Morse,HOMA,or Pre-Approved Equal
2.2.1 General
All openings in pump impeller and volute case to be large enough to pass a three-inch(3")diameter sphere.
Discharge flange shall be sized based on requirements for individual pump stations.The pump and motor
assembly shall be FM listed for Class 1,Groups C and D hazardous location service.
2.2.2 Motor
Each pump shall be driven by a submersible squirrel cage induction motor. Motor shall be NEMA Design B
for continuous duty, capable of sustaining a minimum of 15 starts per hour. The pump and motor shall be
produced by one manufacturer and shall be of the oil-filled,watertight design. The motor chamber and sealing
chamber shall be filled with medical white oil. The motor shall be suitable for continuous operation under
full load in submerged or dry-pit conditions.
All stator windings and leads shall be insulated with moisture-resistant Class H Insulation, capable of
withstanding 155°C Max.temperature,dipped and baked three times.Upon assembly,the stator shall be heat-
shrink-fitted into the stator housing; the use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices, which would require
penetration of the stator housing,shall not be acceptable.
In each phase winding, there shall be embedded a bi-metallic temperature sensor, wired in series and
interlocked with the motor overload protection in the control panel.Any of these thermal sensors shall cut out
electric power if the temperature in its winding exceeds 1400C, but shall automatically reset when the
winding temperature returns to normal.The motor shall be non-overloading through the selected performance
curved and have a service factor of 1.15.
Motors larger than 50 HP shall be equipped with a closed loop water/glycol cooling system. The cooling
system shall have an internal pump that pushes the cooling liquid through the motor during operation. Motor
heat shall be dissipated to the pumped media via a heat exchanger.
2.2.3 Seals
Motor compartment shall be isolated from the liquid end by double shaft seal in EMU block design,as well as
separate sealing chamber with medical white oil. Sealing of the motor at the shaft by shall be by a double,
wear-resistant mechanical shaft seal independent of the direction of rotation entirely made of silicon-
carbide, as a closed unit in a stainless-steel sealing cartridge. Both seals in the sealing cartridge shall be
cooled and lubricated by medical white oil. Seals must not require repeated checking or re- adjustment,
SECTION 11200-Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
except periodic inspection of the oil chamber. At the interfaces of major castings, sealing shall be
accomplished by resilient Buna-N 0-Rings, confined within closely fitted, high surface quality rabbet
joints,compressed only to the prescribed dimension by metal-to-metal contact,allowing radial movement
and preventing permanent set.Flat gaskets and seal rings,which may be squeezed unevenly or beyond the
permanent deformation limit, are not allowed.
2.2.4 Impeller
Impeller will be cast as one piece and shall be of the following design: Single-Channel non-clog statically and
dynamically balanced, to assure that vibration amplitudes, measured at the level of the upper bearing while
operating in a vertical position,remain within the limits specified by the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Impeller
shall be fitted with a wear ring,made of 329 Duplex Stainless Steel.
2.2.5 Pump Case
Volute will be cast in one piece, with smooth internal contours and surfaces, providing obstruction-free
passageways with low friction losses. A stationary wear ring,made of 304 Stainless Steel,shall maintain close
tolerances between the rotating impeller and the stationary volute.
2.2.6 Pump and Motor Casting
Major Castings:ASTM A48 Class 35 Cast Iron
Volute Wear Ring:AISI 304 Stainless Steel.
Impeller Wear Ring:AISI 329 Duplex Stainless Steel
Shaft:AISI 416 Stainless Steel.
Fasteners: AISI 304 Stainless Steel.
0-Rings:Nitrile Rubber.
Shaft Seals: Silicon Carbide/Silicon Carbide(impeller and motor side).
Cable Jacket:Neoprene.
Cable Entry:elastomer grommet,stainless steel washers.
Protective Coating(on outside surface): High Solids Epoxy.
2.2.7 Seal Probe
A single wire,conductive seal probe shall be provided with pump.Probe shall be mounted into mechanic seal
chamber and shall be accessible without disassembly of pump. When interlocked with control panel, probe
shall indicate the presence of contaminants within mechanical seal chamber.
2.2.8 Shaft
Pump shaft must have generator shoulder fillet radii to minimize stress concentration and fatigue.Deflection at
the Shaft Seal within the operating range shall not be more than 0.002 inch.
2.2.9 Bearings
Pump shaft shall be supported by anti-friction bearings,designed for 50,000 hours B-10 Life at the pumps Best
Efficiency Point,and shall be factory pre-lubricated for life.The lower impeller-side bearing will be a double-
row, deep groove ball bearing, axially retained, to sustain both axial and radial loads. The upper motor- end
bearing is a single-row,deep groove ball bearing axially floating,to sustain radial loads only.
2.2.10 Power Cables
SECTION 11200-Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Power cord and control cord shall be triple sealed. The power and control conductor shall be single strand
sealed with epoxy potting compound and then clamped in place with rubber seal bushing to seal outer jacket
against leakage and provide for strain pull.A third sealing area shall be provided by a terminal board to separate
the cable entry chamber from the motor chamber.Insulation of power and control cords shall be type NSSHOU.
Both control and power cords shall have a green carrier ground conductor that attaches to motor frame.
2.2.11 Removal System
The removal system shall consist of a discharge base elbow that mounts in the bottom of the wet pit, a
replaceable pump coupling,guide pipes and supports and hardware as required for a complete and operational
system. Connections to piping shall be standard ANSI flanges.
An ASTM A48 Class 30B or higher cast iron discharge base elbow shall be provided to support the full weight
of the submersible pump in the installation and provide a leak proof connection in which the pump coupling
mates using a conformed Buna-N seal which is held in place by the combined weight of the cantilevered pump
and motor. The hydraulic pressure generated while the pump is in operation also aids the sealing. The
discharge base elbow shall be provided guide pipe retention lugs.
The pump coupling shall be close grained gray cast iron construction. The coupling shall be located between
the pump discharge flange and the vertical face of the discharge base. The purpose of the coupling shall be to
allow use of a standard ANSI drilled pump-casing flange on the pump. The coupling acts as the intermediate
part between the pump and the discharge base. The coupling vertical face is designed to seal against the vertical
face of the discharge base using a replaceable Buna-N elastomeric compressible one-piece seal that acts as both
the discharge face seal and the gasket between the coupling and the pump flange. Wet pit installation designs
which utilize the flat face of the pump flange to seal against the discharge base are not allowed.
AISI 304 stainless steel guide rails supported by upper and intermediate brackets of AISI 316 stainless steel
shall guide each pump. The guide rails shall consist of standard dimension schedule 40 piping with a minimum
diameter of 1-1/2". The guide rails shall be supported by a AISI 316 upper guide rail bracket that will be
mounted in the opening of the access cover to support and guide the pump/motor into and out of the wet
well. Intermediate guide rail brackets will be provided for all installations deeper than 20 ft.
Each pump shall be supplied with a lifting chain of AISI 304 Stainless Steel. The manufacturer shall provide
information on recommended testing parameters that shall keep the lifting system capable of service for the life
of the station. Recommendations shall be in written form and shall be discussed during startup training for the
installation.
2.2.12 Spare Parts
The following spare parts shall be furnished for each unit:
• One(1)Complete Mechanical Seal Kit including both upper and lower seals.
• One(1)Complete 0-Ring Kit to permit routine service of pump.
• One(1)Complete Cable Entry Grommet Assembly
2.3 PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM
The system shall be provided with a pump control system as specified in this section and indicated on the
drawings. The following major components shall be provided as a minimum:
SECTION 11200-Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1. Digestor Sludge Transfer Pumps
2. Digestor Sludge Waste Pumps
3. WAS Pump Station
2.4 PIPING,FITTINGS&VALVES
The Contractor shall provide all labor,material, equipment and incidentals to install the necessary piping for
proper operation of the pump station.As required,the following specifications shall apply.
2.4.1 Ductile Iron Flanged Pipe and Fittings
All ductile iron flanged pump station pipe and fittings shall conform to AWWA C115/A21.15 for pipe and
AWWA C110/A21.10 for fittings. Bolts,nuts,and gaskets for flanged connections as recommended in the
Appendix to AWWA C115/A21.15. Flange for set screwed flanges shall be of ductile iron,ASTM A 536,
Grade 65-45-12, and conform to the applicable requirements of ASME/ANSI B16.1,Class 250. Setscrews
for set screwed flanges shall be 190,000-psi tensile strength,heat treated and zinc-coated steel. Gasket for
set screwed flanges shall conform to applicable requirements for mechanical joint gaskets specified in
AWWA C111/A21.11. Design of set screwed gasket shall provide for confinement and compression of
gasket when joint to adjoining flange is made.
2.4.1.1 Interior Lining of Ductile Iron Pipe
Interior of all DIP Pipe and Fittings shall be factory coated with 40-60 mils(dry film thickness)of Tnemec
Series 431 Perma-Shield PL, Protecto 401, or equal, modified polyamine ceramic epoxy lining. Coating
shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation or as described below:
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP5/NACE 1/ISO Sa 3 White Metal Blast Cleaning with a minimum angular
anchor profile of 3.0 mils (76.2 microns)
All internal surfaces of ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be delivered to the application facility without
asphalt or any other protective lining on the interior surface.All oils,small deposits of asphalt paint,grease,
and soluble deposits shall be removed in accordance with NAPF 500-03-01 Solvent Cleaning prior to
abrasive blasting.
Pipe: Uniformly rotary-abrasive blast using angular abrasive to a NAPF 500-03-04: Internal Pipe Surface
condition,full removal of annealing oxide layer. When viewed without magnification,the interior surfaces
shall be free of all visible dirt,dust, annealing oxide,rust,mold coating and other foreign matter.Any area
where rust reappears before application shall be reblasted. The surface shall contain a minimum angular
anchor profile of 3.0 mils (76.2 microns)(Reference NACE RP0287 or ASTM D 4417, Method C).
Fittings: Uniformly abrasive blast using angular abrasive to a NAPF 500-03-05: Fitting Blast Clean #1
condition,no staining. When viewed without magnification,the interior surfaces shall be free of all visible
dirt, dust, annealing oxide, rust, mold coating and other foreign matter. Any area where rust reappears
before application shall be reblasted. The surface shall contain a minimum angular anchor profile of 3.0
mils(76.2 microns)(Reference NACE RP0287 or ASTM D 4417,Method C).
2.4.2 Pipe Fittings
All pipe fittings in the pump station structure shall be short body flange fittings with the exception of the 90-
deg flange and flare to be used on the suction piping. All bends shall conform to ANSI A21.10 (AWWA
C 110)and shall be furnished faced and drilled to 125#template.
SECTION 11200-Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.4.3 Gate Valves
Gate valves shall be manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C509-94 or latest
revision for 2"—16"valves. All valves shall be of iron body,bronze mounted,resilient-seat type. The sealing
mechanism shall provide zero leakage at the water working pressure against line flow from either direction.
Valves shall be manufactured with"0" Ringstem seals. The area between the"O"-Rings shall be filled with
lubricant. Anti-friction washers shall be provided at the stem collar for inside screw design. Valves for
aboveground use or for use inside vaults shall be NRS design with handwheel. Valves shall open by turning
in a counterclockwise direction.The minimum valve design working water pressure shall be 200 psi. Valves
shall be shell tested at 400 psi. Valve ends for use in above ground or vault installations shall be flanged joint.
Resilient-seated gate valves shall be manufactured by American Darling,American Flow Control,U.S.Pipe,
the Mueller Company or an approved equal.
2.4.4 Plug Valves
All plug valves shall be eccentric plug valves unless otherwise specified. Valves shall be on the non-lubricated
eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and shall be furnished with flanged end connections as shown on the
plans. Flanged valves shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI 125/150 lb. Standard. Valves bodies shall be of
ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. Bodies in 4"and larger valves shall be furnished with a 1/8"welded overly
seat of not less than 90%pure nickel. Seat area shall be raised,with raised surface completely covered with
weld to ensure that the plug face contacts only nickel. Screwed-in seats shall not be acceptable. Plugs shall
be of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. The plug shall have a cylindrical seating surface eccentrically offset
from the center of the plug shaft. The interference between the plug face and body seat,with the plug in the
closed position,shall be externally adjustable in the field with the valve in the line under pressure.
Plug shall be resilient faced with neoprene or hycar,suitable for use with activated sludge. Valves shall have
sleeve type metal bearings and shall be of sintered,oil impregnated permanently lubricated type 316 ASTM
A743 Grade CF-8M in 1/2"-36"sizes. In valves larger than 36",the upper and lower plug journals shall be
fitted with ASTM A-240 type 316 stainless sleeves with bearings of ASTM B30, Alloy C95400 aluminum
bronze. Non-metallic bearings shall not be acceptable.
Valve shaft seals shall be of the multiple V-ring type and shall be externally adjustable and repackable without
removing the bonnet or actuator from the valve under pressure. Valves utilizing 0-ring seals or non-adjustable
packing shall not be acceptable. Valve pressure ratings shall be 175 psi through 12" and 150 psi for 14"
through 72". Each valve shall be given a hydrostatic and seat test of up to 200 psi with test results being
certified. Manual valves shall have lever or gear actuators and tee wrenches, extension stems, floor stands,
etc.,as indicated on the plans. Plug valves shall be DeZurik or approved equal.
2.4.5 Check Valves
A check valve shall be provided for each pump. Check valves installed in above ground vault installations
shall be of the swing full body flanged type,with a domed access cover and only one moving part, the valve
disc. The valve body shall have full flow equal to the nominal pipe diameter at any point,through the valve.
The seating surface shall be on a 45° angle to minimize disc travel. The top access port shall be full size,
allowing removal of the disc without removing the valve from the pipeline. The access cover shall be domed
in shape,to allow the disc to be fully operational in lines containing a high solids content.The disc shall be of
one-piece construction, precision molded with an integral 0-ring type sealing surface and contain steel and
nylon reinforcements in the hinge and disc areas. The flex portion of the disc shall be warranted for twenty-
five years. Non-slam closing characteristic shall be provided through a short 35° disc stroke and a memory
retentive disc return action. Provisions shall be made for backflow capability. Provide all special tools,
SECTION 11200-Page 9

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
accessories,etc.required to back flush the valve. The valve body and cover shall be ASTM A126 Class B cast
iron. The disc shall be Buna-N (NBR) ASTM D2000-BG. The interior of the valve shall be coated with an
epoxy. The exterior shall be coated with a universal primer.The valve shall be the series 500 as manufactured
by Val-Matic Valve and Manufacturing Corporation or approved equal.
2.4.6 Globe Style Check Valves
Globe style check valves shall have ANSI 125#flanges,cast iron ASTM/A-126 CLB body,spring of stainless
steel ASTM A-276,disc bronze ASTM B-62 and seat ring bronze ASTM B-62,ANSI maximum rated working
pressure of 150 psi at 100o and a hydrostatic testing pressure for the shell of 300 psi and seat pressure of 175
psi. The valve shall be by Clow,Williams-Hager silent check or equal.
2.4.7 Air Cushioned Swing Check Valve
Body shall be cast iron per AWWA C508 with integral flanges (not Wafer) and have a centrifugally cast
bronze body seat.The seat shall be locked in place with stainless lock screws and be field replaceable,without
the use of special tools. The shaft shall be one (1)piece stainless steel, extending through both sides of the
valve body with a lever and weight,using a side mounted air cushion cylinder.The air cushion cylinder shall
be constructed of corrosion-resistant material and be fitted with an adjustable, one-way control check valve.
The piston shall by totally enclosed within the cylinder and not open at one end. The cylinder shall have a
pivot mount at one end.The
The disc shall have a double clevis hinge connected to a ductile iron disc arm.The disc arm assembly shall be
suspended from the stainless-steel shaft.The disc seat shall be Buna-N(replaceable)to provide watertight shut-
off. Valve to be APCO Series 6000 Cushion Swing Check Valve - Air Cushioned Side-Mounted, as
manufactured by Valve&Primer Corporation,Schaumburg,Illinois,or equal.
2.4.8 Pipe Hangers and Supports
Pipe hangers and supports shall be used in installing all above ground or interior pipelines, conduits,valves,
and fittings.Hangers and supports shall be spaced no greater than 8'apart and at or near all changes in direction
of the conduit. Unless otherwise specified, no pipe, conduit, or appurtenant device shall be supported from
other piping, stairways, or ladders. All non-rigid conduits requiring continuous support shall be laid in cable
trays adequately ventilated and of adequate size.Metal supports and pipe hangers shall be stainless steel.
2.4.9 Electric Valve Operator
Electric Valve Operators to be installed outside open to the sun and weather shall be constructed from material
• and methods intended for outdoor installation.
Electric operators shall be provided complete with actuators,speed controls and accessories. The actuators
shall operate on 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 hz with a 75-percent duty cycle and shall be equipped with an AC
thermal overload protector with automatic rest, reversing (bi-directional) operation for use with quarter-
turn valves, or rotating equipment to full rotation. Gearing shall be a two-stage planetary, permanently
lubricated self-locking gear train with self-lubricating bearings; connections via male output staff. The
start-up torque shall be 120 foot-pound. The stall torque shall be 150 foot-pound. Two travel stop limit
switches with cams, internal, independent, adjustable, and actuated by cams shall be mounted on the drive
shaft. A side mounted hand turn wheel shall be provided for a manual override. The actuators shall have
a NEMA 250 Type 4 enclosure with a corrosion resistant, baked epoxy finish as standard. The actuator
shall operate in a temperature range of-40 to 150 degrees F. Actuators shall fail in last position unless
otherwise indicated. Electric operators shall be furnished with features noted on the Valve Schedule in the
contract drawings. Limit switches shall be provided on all actuators.
SECTION 11200-Page 10

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
a. Limit Switches. Limit switches shall be single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) type, rated 10 amps at
120 volts ac, housed in a NEMA 250 Type 4 enclosure, and adjustable for open and closed valve
positions.
b. Positioners. The positioners for modulating actuators shall control valve positions as a function of
the input signals. The positioner shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz. voltage. The mode of operation
shall be direct acting. Modulating valve positioners shall operate on a 4 to 20 mA input signal unless
otherwise indicated. Corrosion-resistant enclosures for positioners shall be splash-and moisture-
proof with gasketed covers.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
As noted, the Contractor shall provide labor, material and equipment to install the necessary accessories as
shown on the detailed plans and/or specified herein:
2.5.1 Pipe Supports
Supports for piping and valves in the dry well shall be constructed and installed as shown on the detailed
plans. The discharge piping shall be braced to the wall by means of a pipe jack and a section of 3" steel
pipe with blind flanges.Piping and valves shall be supported to floor with 8"x 8"concrete piers as shown.
Any deviations from the supports as proposed will be coordinated with the Engineer in the field.
2.5.2 Sewage Air Release/Vacuum Breaker Valve
Valve shall be capable of providing four functions of uninterrupted discharge of air/gas during filling,
continuous discharge of dis-entrained pressurized air/gas, unrestricted vacuum break, and pipeline surge
protection in a single chamber. Valves shall be anti-surge and anti-shock air release and vacuum break
valves. Required function of specific valves shall be as indicated on the design plans.
1. The large orifice shall allow air to escape during pipeline filling and allow air intake during
pipeline draining.
2. The small orifice shall release air accumulations after the pipeline is filled,under pressure and in
operation.
3. The valve shall be equipped with an integral surge alleviation mechanism that automatically
dampens surge pressures due to rapid air discharge or the subsequent rejoining of separated water
columns.
Construction and Design:
1. The intake/discharge orifice area is equal to the nominal size of the valve, i.e., an 8" valve shall
have 8" full flow inlet and 8"outlet.
2. Valve shall utilize solid unbreakable HDPE floats with EPDM 0-Ring seals. Floats must not
deform, leak or experience damage of any kind at twice the design pressure,with floats providing
continuous discharge of pressurized air release without levers,pins, springs that can break.
3. Manufacturer shall have ISO 9001, and third party testing of vacuum and air release flow
coefficient to certify sizing and performance of all functions. CFD, FEA or other types of
theoretical modeling are not acceptable.
4. Valve shall have a 10-year in-service warranty for all internal components.
5. The valves furnished shall be standard products in regular production by the manufacturer and
shall have been in satisfactory and successful operation for a period of at least five(5)years.
6. Materials of Construction:
SECTION 11200-Page 1 I

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
a. 304 Stainless Steel barrel, flanges,top cover and fasteners.
b. Floats: High Density Polyethylene
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION
Pumping equipment and appurtenances shall be installed in the position indicated and in accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions. All appurtenances required for a complete and operating pumping
system shall be provided,including such items as piping,conduit,valves,wall sleeves,wall pipes,concrete
foundations, anchors, grouting,pumps,drivers,power supply, seal water units, and controls.
3.2 PAINTING
See Specification Section 09900.
3.3 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
The manufacturer shall coordinate with the contractor so that the station is delivered to the jobsite on the
day of, or the day before the installation. Lifting pins shall be provided by the manufacturer to insure
proper handling of the station equipment.After delivery to the jobsite,the contractor shall store the control
panel off the ground in a dry location until such time as it is mounted and supplied with electrical service.
The Contractor shall also insure that all pump power and control cables, as well as float cables are
protected from submergence until they are properly installed and sealed.
3.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Pumps and motors are to be engineered, manufactured, and assembled under a written Quality Assurance
program. This written Quality Assurance program shall have been in effect for at least five (5)years, and
include a written record of periodic internal and external audits to confirm compliance with UL Quality
Assurance specifications.
3.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE
The initial start-up of the pump station shall be performed by a qualified factory representative of the
manufacturer. The qualified factory representative must be an employee of the pump supplier and must
be a licensed Professional Engineer in North Carolina. It shall be the responsibility of the representative
to supervise the start-up and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance
procedures for the entire pump station.
3.6 FIELD TESTING AND ADJUSTING EQUIPMENT
3.6.1 Operational Test
Prior to acceptance,an operational test of all pumps,drivers,and control system shall be performed
to determine if the installed equipment meets the purpose and intent of the specifications. Tests
shall demonstrate that the equipment is not electrically, mechanically, structurally, or otherwise
defective;is in safe and satisfactory operating characteristics. Prior to applying electrical power to
any motor driven equipment,the drive train shall be rotated by hand to demonstrate free operation
of all mechanical parts. Tests shall include checks for excessive vibration, leaks in all piping and
seals,correct operation of control systems and equipment,proper alignment,excessive noise levels,
SECTION 11200-Page 12

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
and power consumption.
3.6.2 Retesting
If any deficiencies are revealed during any test, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests
shall be re-conducted.
3.7 FIELD TRAINING
A field-training course shall be provided for designated operating and maintenance staff members. Training
shall be provided for a total period of 16 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is
functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests. Field training shall occur either in a single day,
or split between two days. Splitting between more than two days is not allowed. Field training shall cover
all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance manuals.
3.8 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall warrantee the complete pump station, including all items described in this
specification, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of ONE YEAR from the
date of substantial completion (not system startup). The warrantee shall cover material, equipment, and
labor.
--END OF SECTION—
SECTION 11200-Page 13

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 11280
WATER CONTROL GATES AND WEIRS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
All weirs and gates shall be the product of a single manufacturer having five (5) years or more of
experience with successful design and manufacture of low leakage gates and weirs under similar design
conditions.
All welds shall be performed by welders with AWS certification.
1.2 PERFORMANCE
Maximum allowable leakage for the slide gates shall be 0.1 gallons per minute per foot of wetted
perimeter in the seating head direction and 0.2 gallons per minute per foot of wetted perimeter in the
unseating head direction. If alternate manufacturers are proposed, the contractor is responsible for all
costs associated with the system evaluation and redesign including all electrical, mechanical, structural
and civil aspects of installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
In addition to submittal information required by other sections of these specifications, the gate
manufacturer may be required to submit design calculations and supporting data for all gates showing
stresses, loads and deflection for critical parts under design head conditions. At a minimum, these shall
include operating load, slide deflection, slide bending stress shear stress in stiffener welds, slenderness
ratio (L/r) for all operating stems, and pertinent loading information where electric actuators are used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM SLIDE&WEIR GATES
2.1.1 General
This section covers Aluminum Slide and Weir Gates. The equipment provided under this section shall be
fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the
drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions and recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer.
Gates and operators shall be supplied with all the necessary parts and accessories indicated on the
drawings, specified, or otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation, and shall be the
latest standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of fabricated gates.
2.1.2 Standards
Except as modified or supplemented herein, all gates and operators shall conform to the applicable
requirements of AWWA standards. The manufacturer shall have 5 years experience in the production of
substantially similar equipment, and shall show evidence of satisfactory operation in at least 10
Section 11280—Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
installations. The manufacturer's shop welds, welding procedures and welders shall be qualified and
certified in accordance with the requirement of the latest edition of AWS Sections D1.1, 1.2 and 1.6.
The fully assembled gates shall be shop inspected, tested for operation and leakage, and adjusted before
shipping. There shall be no assembling or adjusting on the job sites other than for the lifting mechanism.
2.1.3 Submittals
1. The manufacturer shall submit for approval by the purchaser, drawings showing the principal
dimensions, general construction and materials used in the gate and lift mechanism.
2. The manufacturer shall submit for approval by the purchaser, complete engineering design
calculations in compliance with AWWA standards latest edition.
2.1.4 Performance
Gates shall be substantially watertight under the design head conditions. Under the design seating head,
the leakage shall not exceed 0.1 US gallons per minute per foot of seating perimeter. Under the design
unseating head,the leakage shall not exceed 0.1 US gallons per minute per foot of perimeter.
2.1.5 Materials and Construction
2.1.5.1 General Design
Gates shall be either self-contained or non self-contained of the rising stem or non-rising configuration as
indicated on the gate schedule.
All parts of the gate shall have a minimum thickness of inch.
2.1.5.2 Frame
The gate frame shall be extruded aluminum weighing not less than 4-1/4 pounds per foot. The guide
grooves in which the head guide angle travel shall contain ultra high molecular weight polyethylene
bearing bars in dovetail slots.
The frame configuration shall be of the flush-bottom type and shall allow the replacement of the top and
side seals without removing the gate frame from the wall or wall thimble.
2.1.5.3 Yoke&Pedestal
Self-contained gates shall be provided with a yoke made of structural members or formed plates. The
maximum deflection of the yoke shall be 1/360 of the gate's span.
Non-self-contained gates shall be provided with pedestal mounted lifts. Pedestal shall be provided with
shop coating.
2.1.5.4 Slide
The slide shall consist of aluminum plate reinforced with "U" shaped aluminum extrusion welded to the
plate to limit its deflection to 1/360 of the gate's span under the design head. Slides that are designed for
submerged service,with a horizontal top seal, shall be designed to limit deflection to 1/16th inch or less.
Section 11280—Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.1.5.5 Guides and Seals
The guide groves shall contain UHMW bearing bars in dovetail slots and shall be of such length as to
retain and support at least two thirds(2/3)of the vertical height of the slide in the fully open position.
Side and top seals shall be field adjustable resilient J-bulb seals attached to the spigot and held in place by
a bolted retainer bar. Seals shall be fully adjustable.
The flush bottom resilient neoprene seal shall be mounted to bottom of disc and seal against the invert
portion of the frame. Embedded gates only may have frame mounded invert seal.
Downward opening weir gates shall have side and bottom seals of the resilient J-bulb type attached to the
spigot and held in place by a bolted retainer bar. Seals shall be fully adjustable.
2.1.5.6 Lifting Assemblies
The operating stem shall be of stainless steel designed to transmit in compression at least 2 times the rated
output of the operating manual mechanism with a 40 lb effort on the crank or handwheel.
Gates having a width equal to or greater than two times their height shall be provided with two geared
lifting mechanisms interconnected by a tandem shaft.
The stem shall have a slenderness ratio (L/R) less than 200. The threaded portion of the stem shall have
Acme type cold rolled threads with a maximum surface of 16 micro-inches.
Stem lengths requiring more than one piece shall be coupled or pinned to an extension tube.
2.1.5.7 Stem Guides
Stem guides shall be fabricated from stainless steel. Stem guides shall be equipped with a UHMWPE
bushing. Guides shall be adjustable and spaced in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
The L/R ratio shall not be greater than 200.
2.1.5.8 Stem Cover
Rising stem gates shall be provided with a clear polycarbonate stem cover. The stem cover shall have a
cap and condensation vents and a clear mylar position indicating tape. The tape shall be field applied to
the stem cover after the gate has been installed and positioned.
2.1.5.9 Lifting Mechanism
Operators of the types listed in the schedule shall be provided by the gate manufacturer. Each manual
operator shall be designed to operate the gate under the maximum specified seating and unseating heads
by using a maximum effort of 40 lb on the crank or handwheel, and shall be able to withstand, without
damage, an effort of 80 lb.
Gearboxes shall be provided when required to maintain the operating force below 40 lb. All bearings and
gears shall be totally enclosed in a weather tight housing. Geared operators shall be furnished with a
threaded bronze lift nut to engage the threaded portion of the stem. The pinion shaft of crank-operated
mechanisms shall be constructed of stainless steel and supported by roller or needle bearings. The
operating shaft shall be fitted with a 2-inch square operating nut and removable crank. The crank shall be
fitted with a corrosion-resistant rotating handle. The maximum crank radius shall be 15 inches and the
maximum handwheel diameter shall be 24 inches.
Section 11280—Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.1.5.10 Summary
Part Material
Frame, yoke, slide, stem extension Aluminum 6061-T-6 ASTM B-209,ASTM B-211
Side and top seals Neoprene ASTM D-2000
Bearing bar,guides, stem guide liner Ultra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene ASTM
D4020
Bottom seal Neoprene ASTM D-2000
Threaded stem, stem guides,hand crank Stainless steel ASTM A-276,Type 304 or 304L
Fasteners Stainless steel Type 304 or 304L
Pedestal/Wall Bracket Cast Iron ASTM A126, class B or Mild Steel
A36/A36M
Stem cover Butyrate ASTM D-2411
Lift and stop nut Manganeze bronze,ASTM B584,UNS-C86500
2.2 SLUICE GATES
This section covers Stainless Steel Gates and operators. The equipment provided under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the
drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions and recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer.
Gates and operators shall be supplied with all the necessary parts and accessories indicated on the
drawings, specified, or otherwise required for a complete,properly operating installation, and shall be the
latest standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of fabricated gates.
2.2.1 Governing Standards
Except as modified or supplemented herein, all gates and operators shall conform to the applicable
requirements of AWWA-0561 standards.
2.2.2 Quality Assurance
The manufacturer shall have 5 years experience in the production of substantially similar equipment, and
shall show evidence of satisfactory operation in at least 10 installations. The manufacturer's shop welds,
welding procedures and welders shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirement of the
latest edition of AWS Sections D1.1, 1.2 and 1.6.
The fully assembled gates shall be shop inspected, tested for operation and leakage, and adjusted before
shipping. There shall be no assembling or adjusting on the job sites other than for the lifting mechanism.
Section 11280—Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franldin County,NC
2.2.3 Submittals
1. The manufacturer shall submit for approval by the purchaser, drawings showing the principal
dimensions, general construction and materials used in the gate and lift mechanism.
2. The manufacturer shall submit for approval by the purchaser, complete engineering design
calculations in compliance with AWWA standards latest edition.
2.2.4 Performance
Sluice gates shall be substantially watertight under the design head conditions. Under the design seating
head, the leakage shall not exceed 0.10 US gallons per minute per foot of seating perimeter. Under the
design unseating head,leakage shall not exceed 0.10 US gallons per minute per foot of perimeter.
2.2.5 Materials and Construction
2.2.5.1 General Design
Gates shall be either self-contained or non self-contained of the rising stem or non-rising configuration as
indicated on the gate schedule.
All parts of the gate shall have a minimum thickness of inch.
2.2.5.2 Wall Thimble
Wall thimbles shall be supplied by the gate manufacturer. Refer to the gate schedule for types and
applicable locations. Minimum material thickness shall be '/4 inch.
Frame
The gate frame shall be stainless steel and designed for maximum rigidity.
The frame configuration shall be of the flush-bottom type and shall allow the replacement of the top and
side seals without removing the gate frame from the wall or wall thimble.
2.2.5.3 Slide
The slide shall consist of stainless-steel plate reinforced to limit its deflection to L/720 of the gate's span
under the design head.
The head guide angles shall be attached to the slide in such a way to place the slide in an angle
corresponding to the seating surface of the spigot.
2.2.5.4 Guides and Seals
The guides shall be provided with ultra high molecular weight polyethylene seats on both sides of the
slide and shall be of such length as to retain and support at least two thirds (2/3) of the vertical height of
the slide in the fully open position. Guide frame shall not weigh less than 13 lbs.per foot.
Side and top seals shall be frame mounted. Seals shall be resilient neoprene of the J-bulb type with a
stainless-steel retainer bar. Seals shall be fully adjustable.
The flush bottom resilient neoprene seal shall be mounted to bottom of disc and seal against the invert
portion of the frame. Frame mounted invert seals will not be considered.
Section 11280—Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Weir gates shall have side and bottom seals of the resilient J-bulb type attached to the spigot and held in
place by a bolted retainer bar. Seals shall be fully adjustable.
2.2.5.5 Yoke and Pedestal.
The yoke, to support the operating bench stand, shall be formed by two structural members welded at the
top of the guides to provide a one-piece rigid frame.
Self-contained gates shall be provided with a yoke to support the operating bench stand. The yoke shall be
formed by two structural members welded at the top of the guides to provide a one-piece rigid frame. The
maximum deflection of the yoke shall be 1/720 of the gate's span.
Non-self-contained gates shall be provided with pedestal mounted lifts. Pedestal shall be cast iron or mild
steel and provided with shop coating.
2.2.5.6 Stem and Couplings
The operating stem shall be of stainless steel designed to transmit in compression at least 2 times the rated
output of the operating manual mechanism with a 40 lb effort on the crank or handwheel.
Gates having a width equal to or greater than two times their height shall be provided with two geared
lifting mechanisms interconnected by a tandem shaft.
The stem shall have a slenderness ratio (L/R) less than 200. The threaded portion of the stem shall have
Acme type cold rolled threads with a maximum surface of 16 micro-inches.
Stems in more than one piece shall be joined together by solid couplings.
2.2.5.7 Stem Guides
Stem guides shall be fabricated from stainless steel. Stem guides shall be equipped with a UHMWPE
bushing. Guides shall be adjustable and spaced in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
The L/R ratio shall not be greater than 200.
2.2.5.8 Stem Cover
Rising stem gates shall be provided with a clear polycarbonate stem cover. The stem cover shall have a
cap and condensation vents and a clear mylar position indicating tape. The tape shall be field applied to
the stem cover after the gate has been installed and positioned.
2.2.5.9 Lifting Mechanism
Operators of the types listed in the schedule shall be provided by the gate manufacturer. Each manual
operator shall be designed to operate the gate under the maximum specified seating and unseating heads
by using a maximum effort of 40 lb on the crank or handwheel, and shall be able to withstand, without
damage, an effort of 80 lb.
Gearboxes shall be provided when required to maintain the operating force below 40 lb. All bearings and
gears shall be totally enclosed in a weather tight housing. Geared operators shall be furnished with a
threaded bronze lift nut to engage the threaded portion of the stem. Operator housing shall be cast steel or
cast iron. The pinion shaft of crank-operated mechanisms shall be supported by roller bearings. The
operating shaft shall be fitted with a 2-inch square operating nut and removable crank. The crank shall be
Section 11280—Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
fitted with a corrosion-resistant rotating handle. The maximum crank radius shall be 15 inches and the
maximum handwheel diameter shall be 24 inches.
2.2.5.10 Summary
Part Material
Slide, Spigot,Frame, Stiffeners, Stainless Steel Type 304, 304L or 316L ASTM A-276
Yoke,Guide angles.
Side and Top seals Neoprene ASTM D-2000 or EDPM
Invert seal Neoprene ASTM D-2000
Bearing bars, Guides, Stem guideUltra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene ASTM D4020
liner
Bottom seal Neoprene ASTM D-2000
Threaded stem, Stem guides Stainless steel ASTM A-276,Type 304L or 316
Fasteners Stainless steel Type 304L or 316
Pedestal Cast Iron ASTM A126, class B or Mild Steel A36/A36M
Stem cover Polycarbonate ASTM D3935
Lift and stop nut Manganeze bronze ASTM B584 alloy UNS-C86500
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
The complete sluice and slide gates shall be transported to the job site. The Contractor shall provide the
necessary field assembly when required.
Set each component of work securely and accurately in place; plumb, level and properly aligned with
each components and other work. Anchor as required for secure operation.
The field assembly shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 PAINTING
All aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete shall be shop coated with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
Upon completion of the gate installation, the manufacturer's factory-trained representative shall visit the
project for at least one 8 hour day to inspect the sluice and slide gates for proper installation and function
of seals and actuators.
Section 11280—Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
3.1 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall warranty all items included in this specification to be free from defects in material
and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion (not system startup).
The warranty shall cover material, equipment, and labor.
--END OF SECTION--
Section 11280—Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 11375
ANAEROBIC/ANOXIC/AEROBIC TREATMENT SYSTEM(TRIPLE A)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
This specification covers the complete furnishing, delivery, and installation of a new and complete
Anaerobic/Anoxic/Aerobic Treatment System (Triple A Basin) and modifications to an existing Triple A
Basin.
The Triple A system shall include furnishing and installing the necessary equipment and controls to provide
an operating treatment system complete with air diffusion equipment, blower systems, air control valves,
wall pumps, submersible mixers, instrumentation, control panel, and MCC. The system supplier shall
provide installation and start-up assistance training and shall guarantee the process performance.
It is the intent of these specifications that a single manufacturer-supplier, regularly engaged in the design,
manufacture, assembly and production of Triple A systems of the type specified, shall have complete
responsibility for the final design, furnishing, coordination, assembly, and installation supervision of all
components in the triple A system.
Working drawings, including arrangement and erection drawings of the equipment and control equipment;
schematic control diagrams, electrical connection diagrams, and complete description of the control
systems; and equipment operating characteristics shall all be furnished.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit required copies of manufacturer's literature, dimensional drawings, wiring
diagrams, motor data, performance data, materials of construction, a description of the process design
(Operational Description), a description of the control system software logic (Functional Design
Specification), and any other information necessary to determine compliance of the equipment to the
specification and project requirements. Submittals shall be highlighted to indicate project-specific model
numbers and options in equipment data sheets.
At a minimum,submittal shall contain the following:
A. Drawings showing plan,elevation and cross sections of the equipment.
B. Component details of the aeration equipment showing diffusers, diffuser holders, gaskets,retainer
rings, supports,threaded union and/or flanged joints and a purge system.
C. Materials and Manufacturing specifications.
D. Aeration System submittal information to include:
1. Equipment data sheets
2. Performance data including oxygen transfer calculations
3. Certified SOTE curves from previous test runs on equivalent system shop transfer testing.
4. Headloss calculations and pressure requirements.
SECTION 11375—Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
5. Customer contact list with telephone numbers (minimum of 5 contacts from similar size
facilities).
E. Operation and maintenance manual with installation instructions. Submit after approval of
equipment and prior to shipment.
F. Process Performance Guarantee.
1.3 TRIPLE A PROCESS DESCRIPTION
The system shall incorporate activated sludge treatment utilizing Triple A technology. The Triple A system
shall use channel-type reactors operating in simultaneous nitrification/denitirication mode (SNDN) in
which the activated sludge is aerated with diffused aeration. Additional zones for anoxic and/or anaerobic
treatment as required are also utilized, mixed with submersible mixers, with return flows provided by
pumping systems to accomplish nutrient removal. Solid-liquid separation shall occur in secondary clarifiers
with RAS pump system to return a controlled amount of sludge for operation of the activated sludge process.
The functions of aeration and mixing shall be independent and not be provided by a single piece of
equipment.
1.4 INFLUENT WASTEWATER CHARACTERISTICS
Flows listed below are for the entire WWTP, not per basin. The plant will have two Triple A Basins in
operation.
Average Annual Flow 3.0 MGD
Maximum Month Flow 3.0 MGD
Peak Hourly Flow 9.0 MGD
BOD5 250 mg/L
TSS 250 mg/L
TKN 36 mg/L
TP 5 mg/L
Temperature Range(Water) 15-25 °C
Temperature Range(Air) 20-90 °F
Site Elevation 350 ft
1.5 EFFLUENT QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
The following effluent limits shall be on a 30-day arithmetic average:
BOD5 8 mg/L
Total Suspended Solids 10 mg/L
Ammonia NH3-N 1 mg/L
Total Nitrogen 4.7 mg/L
Total Phosphorus 0.86 mg/L
The Triple A has been designed on the assumption that the wastewater does not contain any threshold
concentration of inorganic pollutants that are inhibitory to biological treatment processes. Appendix A lists
these threshold concentrations as published by the United States Environmental Protection Agency.
SECTION 11375—Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation
FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Sufficient alkalinity shall be provided by others, as required to maintain a basin pH of 6.8 and a residual
alkalinity concentration in the effluent of at least 100 mg/1.
1.6 TRIPLE A PROCESS DESIGN
In order to achieve specified effluent quality, the Triple A process has been designed using the following
parameters:
Aerobic SRT 9.8 day
F/M Ratio 0.12 lb BOD/lb MLSS-day
Waste Sludge Produced(Approx.) 2,726 lb/day
MLSS 3,000 mg/L
Each Triple A treatment unit has been configured as follows:
Type of Tank Anaerobic Anoxic Aerated Aerobic
Anoxic Zone
Number of Tanks 1 1 1 1
Tank Volume 0.115 0.115 0.533 0.533 MG
Channel Width/Tank 35 35 ft
Channel Straight Wall 135.8 135.8 ft
Length/Tank
Liquid Depth 15 15 15 15 ft
PART 2 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
2.1 AIR CONTROL VALVES
2.1.1 Scope of Work
The treatment process supplier to furnish the following motor operated air flow control valves to control
independent aeration grids in the aerobic tanks.
Valve Location Triple A Tanks
Number of Tanks 2
Valve Quantity per Tank 4
Valve Diameter 6 inch
Actuator Power Supply 120/1/60 V/c/Hz
Actuator Power 0.1 HP
Actuator Type Modulating
Valve Construction
The valves shall be butterfly valves, wafer body style, EPDM-seat, tight-closing type for installation
between two (2)ANSI Class 125/150 standard flanges.
The valves shall be rated at 50 psi (345 kPa)and provide drop tight shutoff at differentials up to 50 psi.
SECTION 11375—Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Valve bodiesshall
s all be cast iron(ASTM A126, Class B)and have two flange bolt guides to center the body
in the pipeline. Valves shall be provided with power actuators.
The seat shall be tongue-and-grove design and act as a body liner to prevent flow from contacting the body
casting. The seat shall also provide a positive seal without use of flange gaskets. Seats shall be of EPDM
suitable for use with compressed air and shall be field replaceable.
The disc shall be aluminum bronze (ASTM B148-954). The disc-to-shaft connections shall be direct drive
double"D"design requiring no disc screws or pins to connect shaft to disc. Outside diameter of disc shall
be designed that when opened, it will not interfere with adjacent piping.
Shafts shall be one piece and shall be 416 stainless steel (ASTM A582 Type 416). Shafts shall be finish
ground to minimize bearing and shaft seal wear. Shaft seals shall be provided to prevent leakage and to
protect bearings from internal or external corrosion.
Valves shall be furnished with self-adjusting stem seal and non-corrosive Acetal bushings for smooth, low
torque operation.
There shall be one electric modulating control valve per drop pipe to each grid.
There shall be one air flow meter associated with each of the above modulating valves.
Construction—Electric Motor Actuators
All electric actuators shall conform to the requirements of AWWA Standard C-540.
Power actuated valves shall be furnished with electric motor actuators. The valve actuators are to be sized
for design pressure with flow in reverse direction plus a 1.5 safety factor. The actuators shall include,
geared travel limit switches, torque limit switches, manual handwheel, condensation heater, terminals for
motor power and controls and drive nut.
The motor shall be specifically designed for actuator service. The motor will be of the induction type with
class F insulation and protected by means of thermal switches imbedded in the motor windings. Motor
enclosure will be totally enclosed,non-ventilated.
The entire actuator enclosure should be NEMA 4 watertight.
Travel limit switches will be provided to de-energize the motor control circuit when the actuator reaches
the limits of travel in the open and close directions.
Mechanical dial position indicator will be furnished on all valves.
The motor shall have an operating speed adjustment.
Modulating actuators shall accept 4-20ma DC control signal.
Modulating actuator shall provide analog percent open output.
2.2 FINE BUBBLE AERATION
2.2.1 Scope
SECTION 11375—Page 4

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Furnish all materials, equipment, services, and testing for the fine bubble aeration system.
2.2.2 Equipment Components Included
Stainless steel droplegs, supports, and anchors.
PVC manifolds, air distributors, diffuser holders, and retainer rings
Bolts,nuts and gaskets for aeration system flange connections.
Air distributor purge systems.
Membrane disc diffusers with integral 0-ring gaskets.
2.2.3 System Design and Performance
Design aeration system to transfer not less than the following pounds of oxygen per day in clean water at
14.7 PSI, 20°C and zero dissolved oxygen at the specified submergence, air rate and pressure.
Tank
Aerated Anoxic Aerobic
Std. 02 Transfer Rate (SOTR) 3485 4434 1bs02/hr
Volumetric Air Rate 1118 1491 SCFM
Operating Pressure at Top of 6.7 6.9 psig
Dropleg
Diffuser Submergence (@SWD) 14.1 14.1 ft
#of Aeration Grids/Tank 2 2
#Diffusers/Grid 327 327 each
Design air distributors with centerline spacing not to exceed 4 feet to maximize oxygen transfer efficiency
and mixing efficiency and to minimize solids deposition between air distributors.
2.2.4 Materials,Fabrication and Finishing
2.2.4.1 Stainless Steel—Pipe,Fittings and Supports
Fabricate all welded parts and assemblies from sheets and plates of 304L stainless steel with a 2D finish
conforming to ASTM A240, 554, 774, 778.
Fabricate non-welded parts and flanges from sheets, plates or bars of 304 stainless steel conforming to
ASTM A240 or ASTM A276.
2.2.4.2 Welds&Welding Procedure
Weld in the factory using latest standards according to AWS. Continuously weld both sides of face rings
and flanges to eliminate potential for crevice corrosion.
Corrosion Protection and Finishing. Clean all welded stainless steel surfaces and welds after fabrication
by using the following procedure:
Preclean outside and finish clean all interior and exterior welds and piping by full immersion pickling and
rinse with water to remove all carbon deposits and contaminants to regenerate a uniform corrosion resistant
chromium oxide film per ASTM A380 Section 6.2.11,Table A2.1 Annex A2 and Section 8.3.
•
SECTION 11375—Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.2.4.3 Natural Rubber
Furnish all fixed and expansion joint 0-ring gaskets of natural rubber/SBR with a Shore A durometer of 45
±5.
2.2.4.4 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)—Pipe and Fittings
Produce all PVC pipe and fittings from PVC compound with a minimum tensile strength of 7000 psi.
Provide lower drop pipe,i e manifold and air distributors as follows:
Diameter Wall Thickness ASTM
4 inch SDR 33.5 D3915, 3034
6 inch&larger Schedule 40 D1784, 1785, 2466
Factory solvent weld all PVC joints. Field solvent welding will NOT be permitted.
2.2.4.5 EPDM -Membrane Diffusers and Gaskets
Manufacture circular membrane diffuser discs with integral 0-ring of EPDM synthetic rubber compound
with precision die formed slits. Thermoplastic materials (ie plasticized PVC or polyurethane) are not
acceptable.
Add carbon black to the material for resistance to ultraviolet light.
Design diffuser as one piece injection molded part with a minimum thickness of 0.080 inches for 9 inch
diameter unit. Compression molded diffuser elements are not acceptable.
Limit the maximum tensile strength of the diffuser to 10 psi when operating at 2.4 SCFM/ft2 of material.
Furnish proportionately thicker material for larger diameter disc diffusers to limit the maximum tensile
stress and to resist stretching.
Produce diffusers free of tears, voids,bubbles, creases or other structural defects.
Furnish diffuser material to meet the following:
Item Value/Units ASTM
Base Polymer EPDM D573
UV Resistance Carbon Black
Specific Gravity 1.25 or less
Durometer—Minimum 58%±5% D2240
Modulus of Elasticity 500 psi D412
Ozone Resistance No cracks D 1171
(72 hrs:40°C pphm) @ 2X magnification Test A
Tensile Strength 1200 psi D412
Elongation-%
-Retained 70 hrs @ 100°C 75%Max D573
-minimum at break 350% D412
SECTION 11375—Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Quality Control: Test diffusers using primary sampling criteria outlined in Military Standard 105E.
2.2.4.6 Membrane Longevity
Longevity of the proposed membrane diffusers shall have been demonstrated in at least three full-scale
municipal installations operating continuously for a minimum of three years.
Test reports, prepared by an independent testing agency, shall confirm membrane longevity through
compliance with the following maximum allowed percent(+/-)change in each membrane property. Tests
conducted in-house by the Supplier shall not be acceptable.
Data for a minimum of three diffusers from each installation shall be provided.
Property Maximum Change
Durometer 5%
Weight 5%
Permanent Set 0.5%
2.2.5 Fine Bubble Aeration System Components
2.2.5.1 Droplegs
Provide a stainless steel dropleg from the air main connection to the dropleg connection on the manifold.
Provide a Van Stone style flange with a 150 pound bolt pattern for the top connection.
Provide a band clamp coupling with gasket for the lower dropleg to manifold.
2.2.5.2 Manifolds
Provide PVC manifolds for connection to the air distribution headers. Fabricate manifolds with 4 inch
diameter fixed threaded union or flanged joints for connection to the air distributors. Design manifold,
distributor connections and supports to resist thrust generated by expansion/contraction of the air
distributors over a temperature range of 125°F(50°C). Support manifold with a minimum of two supports.
Connect manifolds with fixed threaded union or flanged joints to prevent rotation or blow apart.
2.2.5.3 Air Distributors and Diffuser Holders
Provide 4 inch diameter air distributors perpendicular to the air manifold. Fabricate distributors with single
diffuser holders solvent welded to the crown of the air distributor for complete air seal and strength.
Provide minimum solvent weld area of 15 square inches.
Design distributors and holders to resist a dead load of 200 lbs(90 kgs)applied vertically to the outer edge
of the diffuser holder.
Provide 4 inch diameter threaded removable end caps complete with gasket, threaded coupling and end
plate for clean out at the end of each distributor.
SECTION 11375—Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.2.5.4 Air Distributor and Manifold Connection Joints
Join air distributor sections with positive locking fixed threaded union or flange type joints for all
submerged header joints to prevent blow apart and rotation.
Bell and spigot, slip on or expansion type joints are not acceptable for submerged joints.
Design threaded union joints with spigot section connected to one end of the distribution header,a threaded
socket section connected to the mating distribution header, an 0-ring gasket and a threaded screw on
retainer ring. Solvent welding shall be done in the factory.
Fixed joints shall be designed to resist 80 ft-lb (5.5 kg-m)torque without joint movement or failure.
All fixed joints shall have interlocking splines and grooves to prevent rotation of the air distributors. All
rotational forces shall be transferred through the interlocking splines. Joints that require the o-ring to
transfer rotational forces between the splines are not acceptable. If positive locking fixed joints are not
used, all distributor connections shall be 125 lb flanges.
Design flanged joints with a 125 lb drilling angle face ring, follower flange and stainless steel hardware.
2.2.5.5 Supports
Provide each section of manifold and air distributor with a minimum of two (2)supports. Limit maximum
support spacing to 8 feet. Design all supports to allow for thermal expansion and contraction forces over a
temperature range of 125°F and to minimize stress build up in the piping system. Design supports to be
adjustable without removing the air distributor from the support.
Design supports to allow for complete removal from the tank, less the anchor bolt, to facilitate installation
of additional headers and in-tank maintenance. Support structures which consist of rods Epoxied directly
into the tank floor are not acceptable.
2.2.5.6 Manifold Support—6 inch diameter and larger •
Design supports to include hold down guide straps,support structure and anchor bolts. Design guide straps
with a 2 inch minimum width to eliminate point load on manifold and minimize binding. Design support
for 2 inches plus or minus vertical adjustment for leveling of manifold. Attach supports to tank floor with
two stainless steel anchor bolts.
2.2.5.7 Air Distributor and Manifold Supports—4 inch diameter.
Design supports with hold down straps, support structure and anchor bolt.
Design support for 1 1/2 inch(plus or minus)vertical adjustment for leveling air distributor to plus or minus
1/4 inch.
2.2.5.7.1 Guide support
SECTION 11375—Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Guide straps to have 1 1/2 inch wide top and bottom contoured bearing surface with chamfered edges to
minimize binding and resistance to movement of air distributor under full buoyant uplift load. Design strap
with 1/8 inch clearance around distributor so strap is self-limiting and cannot be over tightened.
2.2.5.7.2 Fixed supports
Fixed straps to have 1 1/2 inch wide top and bottom contoured bearing surface with punched burrs to
positively grip the air distributor when tightened. Design strap to be self-limiting to prevent stressing the
distributor if the clamp is over tightened. Attach supports to tank floor with one stainless steel anchor bolt.
2.3.5.7 Diffuser Assemblies
Furnish diffuser assemblies including diffuser, diffuser gasket, holder, retaining ring and air flow control
orifice. Furnish a 9" Silver Series II Diffuser in the Aeration Tanks and a 9" Silver Series LP Diffuser in
the Digesters. (Remove after selection of diffuser type)
2.3.5.8 Membrane Diffuser
Incorporate an integral check valve into the membrane diffuser.
Design and test aeration diffusers for a dynamic wet pressure (DWP) of 12 ± 20% water column @ 1.0
SCFM/diffser and 2 inches submergence in the Aeration Tanks.
2.3.5.9 Visual Uniformity
Observe diffusers for uniform air distribution across the active surface of the diffuser at 1.0 - 1.5
SCFM/diffuser and 2 inches submergence. Active surface is defined as the perforated horizontal projected
area of the diffuser.
2.3.5.10Quality Control
Test diffuser using primary sampling criteria outlined in Military Standard 105E.
2.3.5.11 Diffuser Support Plate
Provide a PVC support plate to form an air plenum under the diffuser and support for the membrane when
the air is off.
2.3.5.12Diffuser Holders and Retainer Rings
Design holder to provide peripheral support for the diffuser.
Design holder with air flow control orifice below the diffuser.
Design retainer ring to seal the diffuser and o-ring in the holder to prevent air leakage around gasket.
Design retainer ring threads with minimum cross section of 1/8 inch and allow for one complete turn to
engage threads.
2.3.5.13Anchor Bolts
SECTION 11375—Page 9

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Provide a mechanical 304 SS expansion anchor bolts for embedment in 4000 psi concrete with a pullout
safety factor of 4.
2.3.5.14Liquid Purge System
Provide a liquid purge system to drain the entire submerged aeration piping system for each aeration grid
including airlift purge eductor line and control valve.
Package spare parts in a separate container clearly marked as "Spare Parts" and provide inventory list on
exterior of the container.
2.3.6 Installation Procedures
Follow equipment manufacturer's recommendations and O&M manual for of equipment installation.
2.4 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS AND PROPELLER PUMPS
2.4.1 Scope of Work
The Triple A system supplier shall furnish submersible mixers and propeller pumps in each tank as listed
in the table below. Each mixer and pump shall be equipped with a submersible electric motor with
submersible cable (SUBCAB) suitable for submerged mixer applications. All cables shall be oil resistant
chlorinated polyethylene rubber jacketed. Each mixer and pump shall be fitted with an appropriate length
of stainless steel cable of adequate strength to permit raising and lowering the mixer. Leak sensors shall
be used to sense water presence in the oil and stator housings.
Aeration Basin Mixers/Wall Pumps(per basin)
Inner Basin Mixed Liquor
Location/Description Anaerobic Inner Basin Return Motive Wall
Mixer Anoxic Mixer Wall Pump Pumps
Mixers or Pumps per 1* 1* 1* 4
Treatment Basin
Flygt SR4220, Flygt SR4220, Flygt PP4230, Flygt PP4220,
Mixer/Pump Model or approved or approved or approved or approved
equal equal equal equal
Direct drive Direct drive Direct drive Direct drive
Drive Type with integral with integral with integral with integral
VFD VFD VFD VFD
Produced Thrust(N) 671 671 N/A N/A
Design Flow Rate(GPM) N/A N/A 4,224 2,083
Input power in clean water at 1.57 1.57 2.69 0.87
design point(kW)
SECTION 11375—Page 10

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Propeller Diameter(in) 23.0 23.0 22.8 14.6
Propeller RPM at design 252 252 300 516
point
Submersible Cable Length 25 ?5 25 25
(feet)
Lifting Chain Length(feet) 25 25 25 25
Motor Power Supply 460 V/3-Ph/ 460 V/3-Ph/ 460 V/3-Ph/ 460 V/3-Ph/
60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz
Motor Power(HP) 3 3 4 2
*These are not required for the existing basin.
Aeration Basin Supplemental Submersible Mixers (per basin)
Aerobic Grid Aerobic Grid#2 Aerated Aerated
Location/Description Anoxic Grid Anoxic Grid
#1 Mixer Mixer #1 Mixer #2 Mixer
Mixers or Pumps per 1 1 1 1
Treatment Basin
Flygt SR4220, Flygt SR4220, Flygt SR4220, Flygt SR4220,
Mixer/Pump Model or approved or approved or approved or approved
equal equal equal equal
Direct drive Direct drive Direct drive Direct drive
Drive Type with integral with integral with integral with integral
VFD VFD VFD VFD
Produced Thrust(N) 805 805 805 805
3 vanes, 3 vanes, 3 vanes, 3 vanes,
Number of vanes 316 Stainless 316 Stainless 316 Stainless 316 Stainless
and material Steel Steel Steel Steel
Input power in clean water 2.11 2.11 2.11 2.11
at design point(kW)
Propeller Diameter(in) 23.0 23.0 23.0 23.0
Propeller Rpm at design 276 276 276 276
point
Submersible Cable Length 25 25 25 25
(feet)
Lifting Chain Length(feet) 25 25 25 25
Motor Power Supply 460 V/3-Ph/ 460 V/3-Ph/ 460 V/3-Ph/ 460 V/3-Ph/
60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz
SECTION 11375—Page 11

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
IMotor Rating(HP) I 3 I 3 I 3 I 3 I
2.4.2 Mixer and Pump Design
The mixers and pumps shall be capable of handling raw, screened sewage. The mixers and pumps shall be
able to be raised and lowered and shall be easily removed for inspection or service without the need for
personnel to enter mixing vessel or reactor tank. A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of each
mixer and pump unit. The entire weight of each mixer and pump unit shall be guided by a single bracket
which must be able to handle all thrust created by the mixer. Each mixer and pump,with its appurtenances
and cable, shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a
depth of 65 ft.
2.4.3 Mixer and Pump Construction
Each mixer and pump shall be of the integral gear, close coupled, submersible type. All components of the
mixer, including motor and gearbox shall be capable of continuous underwater operation while the mixer
blade is completely submerged.
All surfaces coming into contact with the mixed media, other than stainless steel and fiberglass, shall be
protected by a factory applied spray coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with an epoxy
finish coat on the exterior of the mixer.
Major mixer components excluding stand shall be made of stainless steel AISI 316 or better.
2.4.4 Elastomers
All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with a double set of
Nitrile rubber or Viton 0-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact
between machined surfaces,resulting in controlled compression of the o-rings without requiring a specific
torque limit. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical 0- rings, grease, or other
devices shall be used.
2.4.5 Cable Entry
The cable entry seal shall consist of cylindrical elastomer bushings, without epoxies, silicones, or other
secondary sealing systems.
Epoxies, silicones, or other secondarysealingsystems shall not be considered acceptable.
p Y P
2.4.6 Motor(Non-explosion proof)
motor shall be a high efficiency synchronous speed permanent magnet type with an integrated variable
speed drive, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. The motor is to be purpose built for underwater
operation by the mixer manufacturer. The motor efficiency shall be equivalent to IEC standard 60034-30-
01 for international efficiency, class IE4 levels. The mixer speed shall be adjustable via either remote
communications or a separate operator panel. The drive shall monitor temperature and current and stop the
mixer in case of overload. The stator windings and stator leads shall be insulated with moisture resistant
Class H (356°F)insulation. The stator shall be trickle impregnated with Class H varnish and shall be press
fitted into the stator housing. The motor shall be capable of an unlimited number starts per hour.
SECTION 11375—Page 12

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.4.7 Propeller
The propeller shall be of clogging-resistant back-swept design. The fit between the propeller and the shaft
shall be a sliding fit employing a single screw and washer for securing the propeller to the shaft. The
propeller shall be made of AISI 316 stainless steel,duplex steel,or abrasive-resistant high-chrome alloy.
The propeller shall be capable of handling solids,fibrous materials,heavy sludge and other matter found in
normal sewage applications.
2.4.8 Bearings
The motor shaft shall rotate on three permanently lubricated bearings.
2.4.9 Mechanical Seals
Each mixer shall be provided with a liquid chamber for the shaft sealing system. Each mixer shall be
provided with a dual mechanical shaft seal system consisting of two independent seals assembled into one
plug-in unit. The seals shall operate in a liquid reservoir that hydrodynamically lubricates the seal faces at
a constant rate. The outer seal shall have rings of corrosion resistant cemented carbide (WCCR)or silicon
carbide(RSiC). Only the outer seal shall be exposed to the mixed media. Each seal interface shall be held
in contact by its own spring system. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment. One face
of the inner seal ring pair shall have spiral grooves laser etched in it,to provide a pumping action preventing
leakage from the oil chamber to the stator housing.
2.4.10 Oil Housing
The oil housing shall contain two compartments consisting of an inner and an outer section with four ports
to connect and facilitate oil flow. In the event that the mixed media bypasses the other seal,this design will
allow the outer compartment to collect the heavier (denser) fluids by means of a simple gravity process.
Mixers which require propeller removal for oil change shall not be acceptable. Separate fill and drain plugs
shall be provided to facilitate oil replacement.
2.4.11 Gear Unit(for gear driven units)
The gearbox shall be a two-stage, cylindrical, helical gearbox equipped with high precision, low loaded
gears designed for infinite life. The motor shaft shall be provided with an integral driving gear.The gearbox
intermediate shaft containing the first driven gear shall mate with the motor shaft driving gear. The
intermediate shaft shall rotate in two spherical roller bearings and contain the second driving gear. The
propeller shaft shall contain the second driven gear and rotate in one single row and one double row,angular
contact set of ball bearings.
All bearings shall be designed for a minimum of 100,000 hours operation.
All bearings shall be designed for a minimum of 50,000 hours operation.
2.4.12 Mixer Control System
An integrated mixer control system installed in the mixer/motor housing shall ramp up the speed at start-
up of the mixer to reduce the start-up current and secure that the direction of the impeller rotation is always
SECTION 11375—Page 13

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
correct. There shall be no need for any human intervention to ensure that the impeller is rotating in the
correct direction.
The control system that is integrated within the mixer/motor housing shall be encapsulated to protect it
against moisture ingress,and vibrations.
Motor,mixer and control system shall be designed and produced by the same manufacturer.
The integral control system mounted within the mixer/motor housing shall be capable of autonomously
adjusting the motor/impeller speed so that the mixer can safely operate without overloading.
The mixer shall incorporate an "propeller-cleaning" function to remove debris from the propeller. The
cleaning function shall be initiated when the integral control system senses an increase in current draw due
to debris on the propeller. The cleaning function shall consist of forced slowdown of the propeller to allow
for debris to fall from the propeller.
After cleaning cycle is complete, the mixer shall resume to automatic operation.
2.4.13 Remote communications
The mixer shall be capable of communicating with a SCADA or other machine communication systems
via its surface mounted "gateway", either using a Modbus RTU or TCP communications structure. A 4-
20mA input to the gateway can also be used for speed control.
The mixer communication protocol is to be designed to operate with, or without, a master controller.
Allowed commands must include start, stop, reference frequency and configuration of settings. An
intermittent signal should be provided to verify connectivity with the mixer.
Parameters that must be readable remotely include:
Rotational Speed(RPM)
Power Consumption
Cumulative kW—hours
Running hours
Alarm Status
Alarm History
Controls must give the operator the ability to define how the mixer reacts to a leakage alarm, and to set a
ramp up and ramp down time for the soft start and stop functions.
The mixer must also be user configurable to either start on its own whenever 3 phase power is provided, or
require re-established communications before resuming.
Key settings must be stored in non-volatile memory within the mixer enabling it to resume normal operation
when power is restored even if communication is not.
SECTION 11375—Page 14

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.4.14 Gateway(s)
Each mixer shall be supplied with a gateway that links to the mixer(1 gateway per mixer).
Gateway shall offer at least 1 x USB, 1 x RS485 1 x Ethernet RJ 45 1 x Display interface, 4 x Digital
outputs,4 x Digital inputs, 1 x Analog input&output.
Each gateway shall provide 2 wire connections for mixer communication.
Gateway Housing shall be isolated according to protection class IP 20 and able to operate in ambient
temperature of-20 °C to+60°C. The supply power to the Gateway shall be 24 V DC. The gateway shall
have LED to indicate mixer alarms and the unit shall be capable of communicating these alarms to a higher
level control unit. Gateways have the UL mark and be designed and manufactured by the mixer supplier.
The Gateway shall include a USB service port for software updates, and shall be capable of being mounted
on DIN rail.
The Gateway shall provide for operation of the mixer via:
Discrete digital and analog I/O's
Modbus RTU and TCP
Internal web server-based HMI
Gateway shall allow for alarms to be configurable as critical or warning.Configurable alarms will include:
Analog input under range
Analog input over range
Gateway startup failure
Motor leakage
Over temperature
Locked rotor alarm
Internal fault(#)
Motor fault(#)
Over current
Motor thermal overload
DC bus over voltage
DC bus under voltage
DC bus ripple high
Heatsink over temperature
Under temperature
Phase loss
Over current drive output
Overload reduced speed
Leakage sensor fault
Factory default values set
Time for service
2.4.15 Shroud Assembly for propeller pumps
The pump assembly shall incorporate a bell shaped inlet shroud,360 degrees around the propeller.
SECTION 11375—Page 15

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.4.16 Mounting Mast Assembly for Direct Drive Mixers
Mast shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Mast shall enable the operator to position and lock the
mounting mast and mixer at different operating angles along the horizontal and vertical planes respectively.
Mixer mounting system shall be designed to accommodate tanks with sloped walls and floors. For deep
tanks, mixer mounting masts will include the use of additional intermediate mast mounting brackets,
preventing mast deflection. For closed tanks, utilizing the adjustable 316 stainless steel cable, the mixer
shall be supported at the desired operating level, allowing the davit's lifting cable to be slackened and
removed from the winch. This feature shall.enable the portable davit to be removed from its mounting
socket and stored, while the davit's lifting cable may be secured below the roof of the tank. This in turn
permits the tank roof doors to be closed during mixer operation.
2.4.17 Davit and Winch Assembly
A manual winch assembly shall be provided at each mast assembly station to raise and lower the mixer(s)
and pumps(s) for installation and service. It shall consist of a lifting davit, winch, hook and 40 feet of 316
stainless steel lifting cable.
2.4.18 Performance Testing
Mixer performance testing included in Part 4 performance Testing section.
2.5 CONTROL PANEL
2.5.1 Scope of Work
The Triple A Process equipment supplier shall furnish a control panel that shall include a Graphic Operator
Interface, Programmable Logic Controller, Control Switches,and Pilot lights.
2.5.2 Panel Enclosure
The control panel enclosure shall be a heavy duty,NEMA 12, enclosure with a flange mounted disconnect
if three-phase power is required. The panel shall be made of 10-gauge steel and fully braced. The doors
shall be heavy duty 3-point latching doors with a padlocking handle. The master circuit breaker disconnect
shall be on the far right,and be interlocked with the doors.
Control power shall be provided by a transformer if three-phase power is required. In addition, a voltage
filter and surge protective device shall be used for PLC and HMI power supply. The voltage filter will
combine active tracking technology with UL listed surge protection against the full spectrum of voltage
transients and surges. It must continuously track the input AC line power and respond instantly upon
detecting extraneous high frequency noise and high voltage transients. The device must be UL1449 and
UL1283 listed.
Surge suppressers shall be used with all relays and contactors. All control voltage branch feeders shall be
protected by circuit breakers or fuses.
Control relays shall be industrial plug-in type,rated at 7 to 10 amps.
Motor starters shall be UL Listed as a self-protected control device type of combination starter rated at
42,000 AIC.
SECTION 11375—Page 16

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Terminal blocks shall be high-density type, rated for 600 VAC, 30 amp minimum. Ten percent spare
terminals shall be provided. All devices shall be clearly marked and identified on the inside of the panel.
All terminals and wires shall be clearly tagged in accordance with the schematic and wiring diagrams.
Pilot lights shall be industrial Monolithic style, 22mm devices, or equal. A "Hand-Off-Auto" switch will
be provided for each motor. Selector switches shall be industrial, NEMA 4/13, 30mm, water/oil tight
devices. The Auto position will allow automatic PLC operation while the Hand position will allow the
operator to bypass the PLC when operating equipment.
2.5.3 Programmable Logic Controller(PLC)
The Programmable Logic Controller(PLC)shall have a built in Ethernet port for network communications.
2.5.3.1 Human Machine Interface(HMI)
A Graphic Operator Interface Terminal(HMI)shall be mounted on the front of the panel for control of the
system and shall provide graphic display of the process parameters and equipment status on a color display.
The HMI shall also allow for entry of setpoint changes for system control. The display shall be 15.5"
widescreen touchscreen,aspect ratio 16:9. The display shall be connected to a DIN rail mounted industrial
computer.
Minimum HMI functions shall include:
• Graphical display of all status information available for each device in the biological treatment
system in the form of a pop-up window for quick and easy access.
• Display all smart sensor status information available from the sensors.
• Electronic O&M Manuals for all hardware provided by the SBR manufacturer shall reside on the
HMI and be quickly obtained by pushing a button.
• Alarm screen that allows the operator to select an alarm and push a button to display
troubleshooting tips for that alarm.
• Easy navigation set up with control mode select buttons for each basin along the left and HMI
screen navigation buttons along the top.
• Maintenance dashboard screen with quick read gauges of maintenance life span for all biological
treatment devices requiring maintenance.
• Historical trend screen displays 10 days of key process variables, logged once per minute,
including, where applicable, each basin's DO, Temp, DO Setpoint, Level, Clock, Waste pump
running and air valve opened signals.
• HMI software shall provide a minimum of one (1) secure client, one (1) web client and one (1)
SMA client license for operation staff use.
2.5.3.2 Remote connection
A webport with a built in four-port Ethernet switch shall be provided to allow direct access for online
technical support via a standard internet connection.
A customer account shall be set up by the supplier to allow operations staff access to view the plant HMI
via the client licenses using a computer or other portable electronic device for the duration of the supplier's
SECTION 11375—Page 17

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
warranty period. Starting at the expiration of the warranty period an annual fee shall be assessed by the
biological treatment supplier to maintain the customer account/access.
2.5.3.3 Biological Process Control Logic
The operator shall be able to enable or disable any of the process control logic functions at any time through
the HMI. When a control logic function is disabled, the equipment may be operated manually through
operator inputted setpoints.
Blower Control: The control system will interface with the blowers to provide the proper amount of air
required for the system.
The control system will include the following controllers, as well as instruments for monitoring process
parameters, as detailed subsequently in this specification:
• Aeration Controller
• MLR Flow Controller
• Ditch Velocity Flow Controller
2.6 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER(MCC)
2.6.1 Scope of Work
The aeration equipment supplier to furnish an MCC shall for all motors associated with the mechanical
equipment described below. Quantities are total for(2)Triple A Treatment Units:
Power Requirements
Equipment Type Count Size
Aeration Blowers Direct Drive 2 150 HP
Anoxic Mixers Motor Starter 2 3.25 HP
Anaerobic Mixers Motor Starter 2 3.25 HP
Aerated Anoxic Zone VFD 8 2 HP
Wall Pumps
MLR Wall Pumps VFD 2 3 HP
Power Supply 480/3/60 V/I/Hz
Aerobic Zone#1 Direct Drive 1 2 HP
Aerobic Zone#2 Direct Drive 1 2 HP
Aerated Anoxic#1 Direct Drive 1 2 HP
Aerated Anoxic#2 Direct Drive 1 2 HP
2.6.2 Equipment
The motor control center shall be Allen Bradley 2100, or equal. The unit shall have main lugs and bus
system, which shall be tin plated copper and shall be fully braced for 42,000A RMS AIC with continuous
horizontal and vertical bus bracing. The bus shall be rated for a minimum of 600 amps. Molded
polycarbonate isolating material will separate the main bus from the unit starters and wire way. The
enclosure will have a NEMA 1 rating.
Motor starter disconnecting devices shall be magnetic type circuit protectors (HMCP) and rated for
100,000A RMS. Motor starters shall be NEMA rated, shall incorporate overload protection, surge
SECTION 11375—Page 18

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
suppressers, and disconnecting terminal blocks. Starters for motors 50 hp and above shall be solid state
reduced voltage type. Control wiring shall be 16AWG, MTW copper and color coded by voltage. The
MCC shall have a 4.3" vertical wire way separated from unit starters. The MCC shall have a full length
copper ground bus. The motor control center shall be wired to NEMA Class 1, Type B standard.
2.7 INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL
2.7.1 Scope of Work
The Aeration equipment su lier to furnish, configure and commission the instrumentation for the
PP
biological process. In addition, the Aeration equipment supplier shall furnish the control algorithms
detailed below to control the process with the supplied instrumentation. The following online
instrumentation shall be provided as a total for(2)Triple A treatment units.:
Location No. per Triple Total Count
A
Air Flow Meter Aeration Header 1 2
Air Pressure Aeration Header 1 2
Transmitter
Terminal/Controller Transferable 1 1
Air Flow Meters Drop pipes 4 8
DO Aerobic&Aerated Anoxic Zones 4 8
ORP Non-aerated and Swing Zones 2 4
*Included as optional, if XXX Controller is selected
2.7.2 Air Flow Meter
2.7.2.1 Scope of Supply
The aeration equipment supplier to furnish the following insertion mass air flow meters for monitoring and
feedback of airflow to each aeration basins.
Flow Meter Location Aeration Tank
Flow Meter Diameter 6 inch
Flow Meter Range 200-1200 scfm
Power Supply 120/1/60 V/'b/Hz
2.7.2.2 Installation
The air flow meter shall be mounted such that there is a section of straight pipe a minimum of 10 pipe
diameters before the flow element and a minimum of 20 pipe diameters after the flow element. The air
flow meter shall be mounted downstream of the air control valve.
2.7.2.3 Construction—Flow Element
Connection Type: Male NPT Stainless Steel
Type: Insertion Thermal Dispersion
Body Material: 316 Stainless Steel with Adjustable Teflon Ferrule
Sensor Material: Hastelloy C
Temperature Range: 4 to 37 Degree C
SECTION 11375—Page 19

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Accuracy: +/- 1.0%of upper range value
Pressure Range: 0 to 15 PSIG
2.7.2.4 Construction—Transmitter
Casing:NEMA 4X Cast Aluminum,Epoxy Coated
Mounting: Remote
Output: 4-20 mA
Display Type: LCD (rate) in engineering units(scfm)
III 2.7.3 Air Pressure Transmitters
2.7.3.1 Scope of Supply
The aeration equipment supplier to furnish the following insertion air pressure transmitters for monitoring
and feedback of air pressure in the air header.
Pressure Transmitter Location Aeration Header
Connection Size y2 inch
Range 0-30 psig
Power Supply 120/1/60 V/D/Hz
2.7.3.2 Type
Force balance or electro-mechanical,two-wire, indicating with a remote diaphragm.
2.7.3.3 Function
Measure a pressure (either absolute, gauge, differential or vacuum) and produce an analog output signal
directly proportional to that pressure.
2.7.3.4 Performance Specifications
Range: As shown in table
Accuracy: +0.5 percent of the calibrated range
Deadband: +0.075 percent of span maximum
Rangeability: 100:1
Temperature Range: 0-300 degrees F
Output: 4-20mA DC
2.7.3.5 Required Features
• Positive over-range protection of at least 1.25 times the maximum span limit
• Electronic zero and span adjustments
• Temperature compensation
• Static pressure compensation
• Adjustable internal dampening
• Field wiring Reversal: Accidental reversal of field wiring shall not damage transmitter
• Built-in electrical surge and RFI protection. Also provide an integral transient protection terminal
block which meets IEEE standard 587 category B and IEEE standard 472.
SECTION 11375—Page 20

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
• Weatherproof and splash proof NEMA 4X enclosure.
• 3/4-inch NPT electrical conduit connection
• Designed to operate on power from receiver or other remote power supply at 24VDC
• Integral output digital LCD signal indicator
• '/2-inch NPT process connection
2.7.3.6 Materials
Use transmitters constructed of the following materials. Materials shall be suitable for mounting on the
blower discharge pipe which will have a temperature of up to 350 degrees F.
Measuring element: Type 316 or 430 Stainless Steel
Flanges: Type 316 or 430 Stainless Steel
Bolts and mounting brackets: type 316 Stainless Steel
Gaskets: Teflon
Base and Cover: Die cast low copper aluminum with epoxy-based finish.
2.7.3.7 Acceptable Manufacturers
ABB Series 2600T with manifold.
2.7.4 Terminal/Controller
The analyzer shall be a digital multi-channel, multi-parameter system capable of controlling up to 20
sensors, in any combination, for the determination of water and wastewater parameters.
The controller must be configurable to include the following measurements:COD,TOC,DOC,SAC,BOD,
PH ORP, NH4-N, NO3-N, PO4-P, Conductivity, DO, Turbidity, TSS, Temperature and Sludge Level
Monitor.
The controller shall receive 4 to 20 mA signals from third party instruments.
Communication between controller and sensor shall be digital,allowing cable runs up to 3,000 feet without
further amplification.
The system will provide up to 20 programmable analog outputs(max.load 500 ohms)and 20 programmable
alarm relays (rated to 5A at 250VAC). System shall also be capable of Ethernet/IP and Profibus IP
communication.
90VAC-264VAC power required.
Enclosure is NEMA-4X rated.
Entire system including the sensors shall have built in lightning and surge protection.
Ambient operating temperature—20°C to+55°C.
System diagnostics shall be standard.
System shall also have a USB interface port, data storage capability, and 3 levels of security.
SECTION 11375—Page 21

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
System must have integrated lightening and overvoltage protection.
Backup controller function to increase reliability.
The terminal controller shall be YSI/WTW model 2020 IQ Sensor Net.
All instruments associated with the biological system must be connected to the terminal/controller
communication network back to the Control Panel.
Universal Mounting Kits with all necessary hardware shall be provided for each sensor.
A sunshield and mounting bracket shall be provided for the system display/controller and each local
component to be mounted outside.
2.7.5 Aeration Controller
Each aerated zone in each lane shall be equipped with a dissolved oxygen probe and each aerated anoxic
zone shall be equipped with a DO and an ORP (oxidation reduction potential)probe.
The control system will interface with the blowers to provide the proper amount of air required for the
system.
The control system will control the airflow to each aerated zone with an airflow modulating valve and
airflow meter.
The control system will promote low system pressure by adjusting the air main pressure setpoint while
ensuring adequate air supply to the process.
Communication to controller shall be digital.
Connection to IQ Sensor Net shall be through two wire shielded cable. The sensor shall be calibration free
using intelligent membrane technology.
Membranes shall last up to two years with replacement membranes containing calibration data chip.
Sensor shall use soft green fluorescent light with calibrated optics and equal path reference system. Sensor
shall have a measuring range of 0-20.00 mg/l. Sensor shall integrated temperature measurement and
compensation.
Temperature operating range of-5° C to+ 50°C and measuring range of-5°C to+50°C.
System accuracy shall be±0.05 mg/1< 1.00 mg/1,±0.1 mg/1> 1.00 mg/l.
Sensor shall include self-diagnostics.
2.7.5.1 Oxidation Reduction Potential Probe
ORP Probes shall meet the following requirements:
• Communication to controller shall be digital with calibration value storage.
SECTION 11375—Page 22

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
• Connection to IQ Sensor Net shall be through two wire shielded cable.
• The sensor assembly shall include pre-amplification of electrode signal.
• Sensor assembly shall include an integrated NTC thermistor.
• Sensor shall have a measuring range of+/-2,000 mV.
• Temperature operating range of 0° C to+60°C.
• Sensor shall include self-diagnostics.
The dissolved oxygen and oxidation reductionpotential signals shall be displayed at the main control panel
Yg �
display unit and be an input to the PLC. The PLC, using a control algorithm will output a 4-20ma signal
to control the air flow to each aeration grid. The control system will control the airflow to provide only the
amount of air required to maintain the dissolved oxygen(and oxidation reduction potential) setpoints.
2.7.6 Ammonium Controller
Each lane shall be equipped with an ammonia(as ammonium -NH4)probe.
• Communication to controller shall be digital.
• Connection to IQ Sensor Net shall be through two wire shielded cable.
• Sensor assembly shall last up to two years
• Compensation for up to 1,000 mg K/1 shall be automatic and dynamic with optional compensation
electrodes.
• Sensor shall have a measuring range of 0.1 to 1000 mg/1 for ammonium as N and potassium (K)
compensation parameters.
• Sensor shall include integrated temperature measurement and compensation.
• Temperature operating range of 0° C to+40°C and measuring range of 0°C to+40° C.
• System accuracy shall be±0.2 mg/1 or±5%of measured value, in standard solutions.
• Sensor shall include self-diagnostics.
2.7.7 Aerated Anoxic Zone and MLR Wall Pump Controllers
Provide a 4-20ma signal to each of the wall pumps. The pumping capacity of each wall pump shall be
controlled by an algorithm based on the influent flow to the Triple A Basin, and the speed shall also be
modifiable by the operator based on nutrient removal performance.
2.7.8 Aeration System Controls
It is the intent of these specifications to have all the controls necessary for the system to incorporate
activated sludge treatment utilizing technology that alternates between aerobic,anaerobic and anoxic stages
within the two tanks. The system shall use channel-type reactors operating in simultaneous
nitrification/denitirication mode (SNDN) in which the activated sludge is aerated with diffused aeration.
Additional zones for anoxic and/or anaerobic treatment as required are also utilized, mixed with
submersible mixers,with return flows provided by pumping systems to accomplish nutrient removal. Solid-
liquid separation shall occur in secondary clarifiers with RAS pump system to return a controlled amount
of sludge for operation of the activated sludge process. The controls, valves and instruments necessary to
obtain the resulting effluent specified herein must be provided. All software,hardware,plc and computer
components must be provided under this section.
PART 3 —INSTALLATION AND PERFORMANCE
3.1 BIOLOGICAL PROCESS PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
SECTION 11375—Page 23

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Triple A Supplier shall provide a Process Performance Guarantee to the Owner, guaranteeing the Triple A
process shall meet effluent wastewater quality,as determined during the Performance Test.
The full Process Performance Guarantee language and details of the Performance Test; defining conditions
of guarantee,responsibilities,testing protocol,sampling,and analysis shall be provided with the Equipment
Submittal.
The supplier shall guarantee that the Triple A process shall meet effluent wastewater quality,as determined
during the Performance Test equal to or less than the effluent quality as defined in paragraph 1.8 Effluent
Quality Requirements.
The influent wastewater to the Triple A process shall be defined by paragraph 1.4 Influent Wastewater
Characteristics. The influent BOD5,TSS,TKN,and TP loadings are defined by the Maximum Month Flow
and the respective concentrations as outlined in paragraph 1.4.
3.2 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
All equipment provided under this specification shall be shipped and stored onsite in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall provide means for protecting necessary equipment
from sunlight and rain as the manufacturer recommends. Electrical equipment and stainless-steel items
shall not be stored on the ground.
All items shall be transported and handled with care. Any item that is scratched,dented,or damaged in any
way shall be removed and replaced with brand new.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Three (3)paper copies and two (2) compact discs with electronic copies of the Operation& Maintenance
Manuals shall be furnished prior to system start-up. These manuals shall include maintenance instructions
for all equipment provided.
Operation & Maintenance Manual shall include a Functional Design Specification (description of control
software logic)and Operational Description(description of process).
3.4 FIELD SERVICES, START-UP AND TRAINING
The services of the field representative shall include minimum ten(10) days, exclusive of travel time, and
two (2)travel trips. The Contractor shall notify the manufacturer a minimum of ten working days prior to
the time that the field services are desired.
The first trip shall occur as training when the first Triple A basin is ready to be placed into service. The
second trip shall occur after the existing Triple A basin is retrofitted with the new process equipment,prior
to the basin being placed into service.
The Contractor shall notify the system supplier when the installation of the Triple A equipment has been
completed. A representative of the supplier shall inspect the installation. The Owner shall be advised in
writing of any corrections or adjustments that are required for the Triple A equipment installation. After
the Triple A installation has been completed to the supplier's satisfaction, a letter of certification that all
equipment is installed in accordance with its instructions and that the Triple A equipment is ready for
operation shall be furnished.
SECTION 11375—Page 24

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
The field person shall do a functional check of each item furnished and start-up of the process. During this
time, the field representative will provide operation training, which shall include familiarization with the
Triple A process,its requirement and review of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
3.5 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall warranty all items included in this specification to be free from defects in material
and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion (not system startup).
The warranty shall cover material,equipment, and labor.
--END OF SECTION—
SECTION 11375—Page 25

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 11376
AEROBIC DIGESTER TREATMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
Furnish, deliver, and install a new and complete Aerobic Digester Treatment System.
The Aerobic Digester System shall include furnishing and installing the necessary equipment and controls
to provide an operating aerobic digestion system complete with air diffusion equipment, decant
mechanisms, blower systems, air control valves, sludge pumps, submersible mixers and instrumentation.
The system supplier shall provide installation and start-up assistance training.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
It is the intent of these specifications that a single manufacturer-supplier,regularly engaged in the design,
manufacture, assembly and production of aerobic digester systems of the type specified, shall have
complete responsibility for the final design, furnishing, and coordination of all components in the aerobic
digester system. The manufacturer-suppler shall meet the following criteria:
1. The system supplier shall have a minimum of three (3) in-house electrical engineers with a
combined experience of twenty years in industrial control systems and system integration
responsible for programming and commissioning the control panel.
2. The system supplier shall have a minimum of three(3)in-house process engineers with a combined
experience of twenty years in activated sludge processes responsible for process training and
commissioning support.
3. The system supplier shall provide aftermarket services during the first year of operation,
including additional visits by a qualified biological process engineer.
4. It is the intent of these specifications that a single manufacturer-supplier,regularly engaged in the
design,manufacture,assembly and production of control panel systems for biological processes
of the type specified, shall have complete responsibility for the final design and fabrication of
the control panel, the biological process training and the aftermarket services.
5. Detailed drawings, including arrangement and installation of the mechanical equipment,
electrical control system diagram with field connections identification, control system
description, and equipment operating characteristics shall all be furnished.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit required copies of manufacturer's literature, dimensional drawings, wiring
diagrams,motor data, performance data, materials of construction, a description of the process design
(Operational Description), a description of the control system software logic (Functional Design
Specification), and any other information necessary to determine compliance of the equipment to the
specification and project requirements. Submittals shall be highlighted to indicate project-specific model
numbers and options in equipment data sheets.
At a minimum the submittals shall consist of the following:
A. Drawings showing plan, elevation and cross sections of the equipment.
SECTION 11376-Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
B. Component details of the aeration equipment showing diffusers,diffuser holders,gaskets,retainer
rings, supports,threaded union and/or flanged joints and a purge system.
C. Materials and Manufacturing specifications.
D. Aeration System submittal information to include:
1. Equipment data sheets
2. Performance data including oxygen transfer calculations
3. Certified SOTE curves from previous test runs on equivalent system shop transfer testing.
4. Headloss calculations and pressure requirements.
5. Customer contact list with telephone numbers.
E. Operation and maintenance manual with installation instructions. Submit after approval of
equipment with equipment shipment.
F. Process Performance Guarantee
Working drawings, including arrangement and erection drawings of the equipment and control equipment;
schematic control diagrams, electrical connection diagrams, and complete description of the control
systems; and equipment operating characteristics shall all be furnished.
1.4 AEROBIC DIGESTER PROCESS DESCRIPTION
The system shall incorporate continuous digester technology with intermittent systems operation. The
system shall use a single reactor in which the activated sludge is alternately aerated and mixed over a
number of pre-determined cycles. Solids liquid separation shall occur during a settling phase of the cycle.
After the settling phase, treated decant liquid shall be decanted or withdrawn from the liquid surface.
Influent flow to the vessel can be received at any time.
1.5 INFLUENT SLUDGE CHARACTERISTICS
Average Daily Sludge Flow 62,300 gpd
Average WAS load 4,156 lbs/day
WAS concentration 0.80 %TS
Temperature Range(Water) 15-25 °C
Temperature Range(Air) 20-90 °F
Site Elevation 350 ft
The Aerobic Digester System has been designed on the assumption that the wastewater does not contain any
threshold concentration of inorganic pollutants that are inhibitory to biological treatment processes.
1.6 AEROBIC DIGESTER PROCESS DESIGN
In order to achieve specified effluent quality, the Aerobic Digester process shall be designed using the
following parameters:
Digester SRT 21.7 days
Decanter
Normal Cycle Time 42 min
SECTION 11376-Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Normal Decant Flow Rate 762 gpm
Digester Operating TSS 13500 mg/L
The aerobic digester has been configured as follows:
Number of Basins 2
Basin dimensions 62' x 42' ft
Water Depth at Top Water Level 18.5' ft
It is understood that headworks consisting of screening and grit removal facilities are to be provided
upstream of secondary treatment process. In order for this system to function as designed, influent
screening facilities have a maximum of 1/2" opening should be provided.
PART 2—MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
2.1 AEROBIC DIGESTER FINE BUBBLE AERATION
2.1.1 Scope
Furnish all materials, equipment, services, and testing for the fine bubble aeration system.
Equipment Components Included
1. Stainless steel droplegs, supports, and anchors.
2. PVC manifolds, air distributors, diffuser holders, and retainer rings
3. Bolts,nuts and gaskets for aeration system flange connections.
4. Air distributor purge systems.
5. Membrane disc diffusers with integral 0-ring gaskets.
2.1.2 System Design and Performance
Design aeration system to transfer not less than the following pounds of oxygen per day inclean water at
14.7 PSI,20-deg C and zero dissolved oxygen at the specified submergence,air rate and pressure.
Tank AEROBIC DIGESTERS
Standard 02 Transfer Rate 7805 /basin LB/DAY
(SOR)
Volumetric Air Rate/Mixing 1317 SCFM
Operating Pressure at Top of 7.99 PSI
Dropleg
Diffuser Submergence 16.9 Ft
(@SWD)
#Diffusers/Tank 481
Design air distributors with centerline spacing not to exceed 4 feet to maximize oxygen transfer efficiency
and mixing efficiency and to minimize solids deposition between air distributors.
2.1.3 Materials,Fabrication and Finishing
2.2.3.1 Stainless Steel—Pipe,Fittings and Supports
SECTION 11376-Page 3

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Fabricate all welded parts and assemblies from sheets and plates of 304L stainless steel with a 2D finish
conforming to ASTM A240, 554, 774,778.
Fabricate non-welded parts and flanges from sheets, plates or bars of 304 stainless steel conforming to
ASTM A240 or ASTM A276.
2.2.3.2 Welds&Welding Procedure
Weld in the factory using latest standards according to AWS. Continuously weld both sides of face rings
and flanges to eliminate potential for crevice corrosion.
2.2.3.3 Corrosion Protection and Finishing
Clean all welded stainless steel surfaces and welds after fabrication by using the following procedure:
Preclean outside and finish clean all interior and exterior welds and piping by full immersion pickling and
rinse with water to remove all carbon deposits and contaminants to regenerate a uniform corrosion resistant
chromium oxide film per ASTM A380 Section 6.2.11,Table A2.1 Annex A2 and Section 8.3.
Natural Rubber — Furnish all fixed and expansion joint 0-ring gaskets of natural rubber/AEROBIC
DIGESTER with a Shore A durometer of 45 ±5.
2.2.3.4 Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)—Pipe and Fittings
Produce all PVC pipe and fittings from PVC compound with a minimum tensile strength of 48,000kPa.
Provide lower drop pipe,manifold and air distributors as follows:
Diameter Wall Thickness ASTM
100 mm SDR 33.5 D3915, 3034,124524
150 mm&larger Schedule 40 D1784, D1785,D2466,12454-B
Design air distributors and manifolds to withstand 54°C mean wall temperature. Add two parts by weight
of titanium dioxide per 100 parts of resin to PVC compounds for manifolds,air distributors,joints and PVC
diffuser assembly components to minimize ultraviolet light degradation.
Factory solvent weld all PVC joints and fittings.Field solvent welding will NOT be permitted.
2.2.4 EPDM-Membrane Diffusers and Gaskets
Manufacture circular membrane diffuser discs with integral 0-ring of EPDM synthetic rubber compound
with precision die formed slits. Thermoplastic materials (i.e. plasticized PVC or polyurethane) are not
acceptable.
Quality Control: Test diffuser using primary sampling criteria outlined in Military Standard 105E.
2.2.5 Fine Bubble Aeration System Components
2.2.5.1 Droplegs
Provide a stainless steel dropleg from the air main connection to the dropleg connection on the manifold.
SECTION 11376-Page 4

ICI
2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.2.5.2 Manifolds
Provide PVC manifolds for connection to the air distribution headers. Fabricate manifolds with 4 inch
diameter fixed threaded union positive locking anti rotational or flanged joints for connection to the air
distributors.
Air Distributors and Diffuser Holders: 4 inch diameter PVC air distributors e endicular to the
perpendicular air
manifold
Fabricate distributors with single diffuser holders solvent welded to the crown of the air distributor for
complete air seal and strength.
Provide 4 inch diameter threaded removable end caps complete with gasket, threaded coupling and end
plate for clean out at the end of each distributor.
2.2.5.3 Air Distributor and Manifold Connection Joints
Join air distributor sections with positive locking anti rotational fixed threaded union or flange type joints
for all submerged header joints to prevent blow apart and rotation. Design flanged joints with a 56.7 kg
drilling angle face ring, follower flange and stainless steel hardware.
2.2.5.4 Supports
Provide each section of manifold and air distributor with a minimum of two(2)supports. Limit maximum
support spacing to 2.5 meters. Design all supports to allow for thermal expansion and contraction forces
over a temperature range of 52°C and to minimize stress build up in the piping system.
2.2.5.5 Diffuser Assemblies
Furnish diffuser assemblies including diffuser, diffuser gasket, holder, retaining ring and air flow control
orifice.
2.2.5.6 Membrane Diffuser
Incorporate an integral check valve into the membrane diffuser.
Design and test diffusers for a dynamic wet pressure (DWP) of 12 inches ❑ 20% water column @ 1.0
SCFM/diffuser and 2 inches submergence.
Visual Uniformity—Observe diffusers for uniform air distribution across the active surface of the diffuser
at 1.0 SCFM/diffuser and 2 inches submergence. Active surface is defined as the perforated horizontal
projected area of the diffuser.
Quality Control: Test diffuser using primary sampling criteria outlined in Military Standard 105E.
2.2.5.7 Diffuser Holders and Retainer Rings
Design holder with air flow control orifice. Holder to provide peripheral support for the diffuser.
Design retainer ring to seal the diffuser and 0-ring in the holder to prevent air leakage around gasket.
SECTION 11376-Page 5

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Design retainer rings threads with minimum cross section of 1/8-inch and allow for one complete turn to
g g p
engage threads.
2.2.5.8 Anchor Bolts
Provide a mechanical 304 SS expansion anchor bolts for embedment in 4000 psi concrete with a pullout
safety factor of 4.
2.2.5.9 Liquid Purge System
Provide a liquid purge system to drain the entire submerged aeration piping system for each aeration grid
including airlift purge eductor line and control valve. The purge system shall use a solenoid valve for
automatic operation coordinated with the AEROBIC DIGESTER operation. Package spare parts in a
separate container clearly marked as"Spare Parts"and provide inventory list on exterior of the container.
2.2.6 Installation Procedures
Follow equipment manufacturer's recommendations and O&M manual for of equipment installation.
2.3 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
2.2.1 Scope of Work
The Aerobic Digester system supplier shall furnish submersible mixers in each tank as listed in the table
below. Each mixer shall be equipped with a submersible electric motor with submersible cable(SUBCAB)
suitable for submerged mixer applications. All cables shall be oil resistant chlorinated polyethylene rubber
jacketed. Each mixer shall be fitted with an appropriate length of stainless steel cable of adequate strength
to permit raising and lowering the mixer. Leak sensors shall be used to sense water presence in the oil and
stator housings.
Mixers per System 1 per system
(2 total for project)
Mixer Model Flygt 4320, or
approved equal
Drive Type Direct drive with
integral VFD
Thrust in clean water at
design point(N) 2,128
Input power in clean 1.79
water at design point(kW)
Propeller Diameter(in) 98
Propeller RPM at design 27
point
Lifting Chain Length(ft) 25
Motor Power Supply 460 V/3-Ph/60 Hz
Motor Rating(HP) 3.0
SECTION 11376- Page 6

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.2.2 Mixer Design
The mixers shall be capable of handling raw, screened sewage. The mixers shall be able to be raised and
lowered and shall be easily removed for inspection or service without the need for personnel to enter mixing
vessel or reactor tank.A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of each mixer unit. The entire weight
of each mixer unit shall be guided by a single bracket which must be able to handle all thrust created by the
mixer. Each mixer, with its appurtenances and cable, shall be capable of continuous submergence
underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 65 ft.
2.2.3 Mixer Construction
Each mixer shall be of the integral gear, close coupled, submersible type. All components of the mixer,
including motor and gearbox shall be capable of continuous underwater operation while the mixer blade is
completely submerged.
All surfaces coming into contact with the mixed media, other than stainless steel and fiberglass, shall be
protected by a factory applied spray coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with an epoxy
finish coat on the exterior of the mixer.
Major mixer components excluding blades and stand shall be of grey cast iron,ASTM A-48 Class 35B, or
EN1561-GJL250 with smooth surfaces devoid of blow holes or other irregularities. The Sliding Bracket
and mixer Stand assembly shall be 316 stainless steel. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be of 316 stainless
steel
2.2.4 Elastomers.
All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with a double set of
Nitrile rubber or Viton 0-rings.Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact
between machined surfaces,resulting in controlled compression of the 0-rings without requiring a specific
torque limit. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical 0-rings, grease, or other
devices shall be used.
2.2.5 Cable Entry
The cable entry shall be an integral part of the stator casing. The cable entry shall be comprised of a single
cylindrical elastomer grommet, flanked by washers and a ferrule designed with close tolerance fit against
the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter. This will provide a leak proof, torque free seal at
the cable entrance. The assembly shall bear against a shoulder in the stator casing opening and be
compressed by a brass gland nut threaded into it. Interaction between the gland nut and the ferrule should
move the grommet along the cable axially instead of with a rotary motion.
Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be considered acceptable.
2.2.6 Motor(Non-explosion proof)
P p f)
The mixer shall have a high efficiency synchronous speed motor with an integrated variable speed drive,
housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. The motor efficiency shall be equivalent to IE4 levels. The
mixer speed shall be adjustable via either remote communications or a separate operator panel. The drive
shall monitor temperature and current and stop the mixer in case of overload.The stator windings and stator
leads shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H (180 oC) insulation. The stator shall be trickle
SECTION 11376-Page 7

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
impregnated with Class H varnish and shall be force fitted into the stator housing.The motor shall be capable
of an unlimited number starts perhour
2.2.7 Propeller
The propeller shall consist of two or three fiberglass-reinforced polyurethane blades, each integrated with
a stainless steel shaft for mounting in a cast iron hub capable of handle changing hydraulic load conditions
across their surface, thus shall capable of "flexing" and absorbing loads which would otherwise be
transmitted to the gearbox and motor. Thus, metal blades will not be acceptable due to their inelasticity.
Each blade shall be mounted into a socket in the side of the hub and will be held in place by a keyed propeller
shaft to resist torsional forces,as well as a bolt and lock washer system along the axis of the propeller shaft.
The blade shape shall be a nonclogging,backward curved design which starts at the hub leaving no part of
the shaft exposed.
The propeller shall be capable of handling solids,fibrous materials,heavy sludge andother matter found in
normal sewage applications.
2.2.8 Bearings
The mixer motor shaft shall rotate on two permanently lubricated bearings. The inner bearing shall be a
single row deep groove ball bearing and the outer bearing a spherical roller bearing, both having 100,000
hours service life.
2.2.9 Mechanical Seals
Each mixer shall be provided with three seals to separate the various parts of the mixer.The outer seal on the
propeller shaft shall be a lapped end face type mechanical seal containing one stationary and one positively
driven rotating, corrosion resistant, tungsten carbide face ring running in the mixed media for cooling and
lubrication. All seal face surfaces must be capable of re-lapping. In order to prevent seal spring jamming
and failure, the seal spring shall not be exposed to the mixed media. The inner seal on the propeller shaft
shall be a nitrile rubber,lip seal isolating the propeller shaft oil chamber from the gearbox oil chamber.The
third seal shall be a fluorinated rubber,lip seal mounted on the motor shaft to isolate the gearbox oil chamber
from the dry motor stator housing.
2.2.10 Oil Housing
Each mixer shall be provided with an oil chamber for the shaft sealing system, and a second separate oil
chamber for the gearbox. The drain and inspection plugs, with positive anti-leak seal, shall be easily
accessible from the outside.
2.2.11 Gear Unit
The gearbox shall be a two-stage, cylindrical, helical gearbox equipped with high precision, low loaded
gears designed for infinite life.The motor shaft shall be provided with an integral driving gear.The gearbox
intermediate shaft containing the first driven gear shall mate with the motor shaft driving gear. The
intermediate shaft shall rotate in two spherical roller bearings and contain the second driving gear. The
propeller shaft shall contain the second driven gear and rotate in one single row and one double row,angular
contact set of ball bearings.
All bearings shall be designed for a minimum of 100,000 hours operation.
SECTION 11376-Page 8

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.2.12 Mixer Control System
An integrated mixer control system installed in the mixer/motor housing shall ramp up the speed at start-
up of the mixer to reduce the start-up current and secure that the direction of the impeller rotation is always
correct. There shall be no need for any human intervention to ensure that the impeller is rotating in the
correct direction.
The control system that is integrated within the mixer/motor housing shall be encapsulated to protect it
against moisture ingress, and vibrations.
Motor,mixer and control system shall be designed and produced by the same manufacturer.
The integral control system mounted within the mixer/motor housing shall be capable of autonomously
adjusting the motor/impeller speed so that the mixer can safely operate without overloading.
The mixer shall incorporate an "propeller-cleaning" function to remove debris from the propeller. The
cleaning function shall be initiated when the integral control system senses an increase in current draw due
to debris on the propeller.The cleaning function shall consist of forced slowdown of the propeller to allow
for debris to fall from the propeller.
After cleaning cycle is complete, the mixer shall resume to automatic operation.
2.2.13 Remote communications
The mixer shall be capable of communicating with a SCADA or other machine communication systems
via its surface mounted"gateway", either using a Modbus RTU or TCP communications structure. A 4-
20mA input to the gateway can also be used for speed control.
The mixer communication protocol is to be designed to operate with, or without, a master controller.
Allowed commands must include start, stop, reference frequency and configuration of settings. An
intermittent signal should be provided to verify connectivity with the mixer.
Parameters that must be readable remotely include:
• Rotational Speed(RPM)
• Power Consumption
• Cumulative kW—hours
• Running hours
• Alarm Status
• Alarm History
Controls must give the operator the ability to define how the mixer reacts to a leakage alarm, and to set a
ramp up and ramp down time for the soft start and stop functions.
The mixer must also be user configurable to either start on its own whenever 3 phase power is provided,
or require re-established communications before resuming.
Key settings must be stored in non-volatile memory within the mixer enabling it to resume normal
operation when power is restored even if communication is not.
SECTION 11376-Page 9

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.2.14 Gateway
Each mixer shall be supplied with a gateway that links to the mixer(1 gateway permixer). Gateway shall
offer at least 1 x USB, 1 x RS485 1 x Ethernet RJ 45 1 x Display interface,4 x Digital outputs, 4 x Digital
inputs, 1 x Analog input & output. Each gateway shall provide 2 wire connections for mixer
communication.
Gateway Housing shall be isolated according to protection class IP 20 and able to operate in ambient
temperature of-20 `C to+60`C. The supply power to the Gateway shall be 24 V DC.
The gateway shall have LED to indicate mixer alarms and the unit shall be capable of communicating
these alarms to a higher level control unit.
Gateways have the UL mark and be designed and manufactured by the mixer supplier. The Gateway shall
include a USB service port for software updates, and shall be capable of being mounted on DIN rail.
The Gateway shall provide for operation of the mixer via:
• Discrete digital and analog I/O's
• Modbus RTU and TCP
• Internal web server based HMI
Gateway shall allow for alarms to be configurable as critical or warning. Configurable alarms will
include:
• Analog input under range
• Analog input over range
• Gateway startup failure
• Motor leakage
• Over temperature
• Locked rotor alarm
• Internal fault(#)
• Motor fault(#)
• Over current
• Motor thermal overload
• DC bus over voltage
• DC bus under voltage
• DC bus ripple high
• Heatsink over temperature
• Under temperature
• Phase loss
• Over current drive output
• Overload reduced speed
• Leakage sensor fault
• Factory default values set
• Time for service
2.2.15 Tripod Guide Bar System
Mixer Mounting System shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. The Tripod Mounting System shall fix
the elevation of the mixer at the optimum level at the time the system is installed.
SECTION 11376 -Page 10

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
The Tripod Mounting System shall be shipped in the nearest available coarse length(20,25,or 30 feet),
and must be fine-tuned by the installing contractor in the field by cutting the nonwelded mast end to
exact length shown on the manufacturer's submittal drawings.
2.2.16 Davit and Winch Assembly
A socket for mounting a portable davit crane shall be provided at each mast assembly station to raise and
lower the mixer(s) [and pumps(s)] for installation and service. One (1) portable davit crane shall be
provided,consisting of a lifting davit,winch,hook and 40 feet of 316 stainless steel lifting cable.
2.2.17 Performance Testing
Mixer performance testing included in Part 4 performance Testing section.
2.3 DECANT MECHANISM
2.3.1 Scope of Work
The aerobic digester equipment supplier to furnish decanter assemblies with drive actuator for each
digester basin. The decanters shall be designed to automatically remove supernatant to thicken the
digester solids and increase the SRT.
Decanter Quantity 2
Decanters per Basin 1
Decanter Weir Length 4 ft
Decanter Material of 304L SS
Construction
Actuator Quantity 1
Actuators per Basin 1
Actuator Power Supply 460/3/60 V/I/Hz
Actuator Power .25 hp
2.3.2 Design Parameters
The maximum decanter loading shall not exceed 35 ft3/ft/min(3.15 m3/m/min).
The maximum headloss through the decanter at the design flow shall not exceed 15 inches.
The decanter weir and trough shall always be visible from the basin side wall thereby providing the
operator with a visual check of the supernatant quality during the decant phase of the cycle.
The decanter shall be parked above the design top water level during react and settling phases, thereby
eliminating any possibility of solids carryover during these phases. Decanters floating on the liquid
surface during react and settling, with the weir of entry ports submerged below the surface shall not be
allowed.
At top park position, the decanter shall provide 'fail safe' overflow protection in the event of a power
failure. Settled supernatant will flow via gravity, under the scum guard, over the weir, and into the
decanters.
SECTION 11376-Page 11

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
The decanter shall be designed with a scum guard mechanism to prevent the discharge of scum and
floatables during decanter or overflow operation.
All in-basin seals and bearings shall be maintenance free.
Decanter assembly components requiring routine maintenance shall be accessible from the walkway and
shall not require confined space entry into the basin.
The drive mechanism or actuator shall be designed for a continuous duty, variable speed mode of
operation thereby producing a uniform effluent flow rate throughout the decant phase.
Actuator limit switches and motor shall be integrated with process control system to prevent blower
operation during the decant phase of the cycle.
The decanter assembly shall not require effluent valves, valve vaults, flex joints, throttling capabilities,
or dewatering supports.
2.3.3 Equipment
The decanters shall be supplied with the following components:
• Upper collection trough with integral, overflow weir
• Scum guard mechanism
• Downcomer pipes
• Collector pipe (for decanters>6ft)
• Swivel Joint or Seals&bearings,as required
• Electro-mechanical actuator
The drive mechanism or actuator shall consist of an electro-mechanical screw jack with protective boot
and end position limit switches. The actuator shall be equipped with a VFD rated motor suitable for
continuous duty in an outdoor,wet environment. The motor shall be driven by a variable frequency drive
allowing the controls to vertically lower the decanter at a continuous and uniform rate.
The decanter shall not require spring loaded valves, flexible joints, and/or throttling effluent valves to
control discharge rate.
The decanter must be self-supporting when the basin is drained.
2.3.4 Controls
Decanter shall be operated per the Aerobic Digester hydraulic controller described in the controls section.
2.3.5 Materials
All in-basin welded decanter components, except seals and bearings, shall be constructed of corrosion
and ultra-violet resistant stainless steel. All fasteners shall be constructed of stainless steel.
The decanter seals and bearings shall be constructed of maintenance free, synthetic materials for longest
possible service life. All seals and bearings shall be shipped factory assembled,simplifying installation.
2.3.6 Fabrication and Finishing
SECTION 11376-Page 12

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation
FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
All decanter welding must be conducted by welders certified under ASME Code 9.
All joints to be finish tested for integrity by either air pressure(3.0 psi)or dye penetrate methods.
All finished decanter units to be fee of abrasions,damage,flaws,carbon contamination and discoloration.
All weld burn and discoloration shall be removed with pickle paste. All stainless steel surfaces shall be
passivated and shall have a pleasing and uniform passivated appearance.Decanters shall be power washed
for final cleaning prior to shipment.
2.4 PROCESS PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZER
2.4.1 Scope of Work
The Aerobic Digester supplier to furnish a complete Aerobic digester control system. This shall include
Programmable Logic Controller,Motor Starters, and Variable Frequency Drives.
The Aerobic Digester control system shall be housed in the Control Panel for the Triple A Treatment
System.
Local control stations shall be included for the Decanters.
Motor Starters and Variable Frequency Drives shall be included in a separate Motor Control Center.
2.4.2 Digester Control Logic
The Digester controls shall operate on a time cycle basis. In automatic operation, the processor shall at
all times maintain the proper sequence of operation even in the event of power failure. All phases of the
process and equipment shall be interlocked so that the process cannot be upset. If an equipment failure
takes place an alarm will be displayed on the operator terminal until cleared.The display will indicate the
time of the alarm and status. Time critical sequences and other process variables can be adjusted via the
operator interface terminal as follows: [1] React (aeration and mix)run times, [2] Settling time, [3] The
decanter lowering rate, [4] Special process variables such as DO, ORP, or DINO (Potassium control)
setpoints if required.
The control system will include the following controllers, as well as instruments for monitoring process
parameters,as detailed subsequently in this specification:
• Decanter Controller
• Aeration Controller
2.4.3 Panel Mounted Power Equipment
2.4.3.1 Scope of Work
The aeration equipment supplier to furnish the following Motor Starters and/or Variable Frequency
Drives (VFDs) for the motors associated with the mechanical equipment described below:
Equipment Type Count Size (HP) Power Supply
V/I/Hz
Decanter VFD 2 .25 460/3/60
SECTION 11376-Page 13

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
2.4.4 Equipment
Motor starters shall be UL Listed as a self-protected control device type of combination starter[rated
at 42,000 AIC].
VFD package shall incorporate internal common mode cores. No additional external cores are
required to keep common mode noise from disrupting sensitive electronics.
VFD package shall incorporate an internal EMC filter to meet environmental standards without
requiring additional panel space.
Three control modes available for VFD: Vector Control with FORCE Technology, Sensorless
Vector and V/Hz control.
2.5 INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL
2.5.1 Scope of Work
The AEROBIC DIGESTER supplier to furnish, configure and commission the instrumentation for the
AEROBIC DIGESTER system. In addition,the AEROBIC DIGESTER supplier shall furnish the control
algorithms and instrumentation detailed below to control the process:
Location No. per Total
tank Count
Terminal/Controller Transferable 1 2
DO AEROBIC DIGESTER I 2
ORP AEROBIC DIGESTER 1 2
PO4 AEROBIC DIGESTER 1 2
2.5.2 Terminal/Controller
The analyzer shall be a digital multi-channel, multi-parameter system capable of controlling up to 20
sensors, in any combination, for the determination of water and wastewater parameters.
a. The controller must be configurable to include the following measurements: COD,TOC,
DOC,SAC,BOD,pH,ORP,NH4-N,NO3-N,K,PO4-P,Conductivity,DO,Turbidity,TSS,
Temperature and Sludge Level Monitor.
b. The controller shall receive 4 to 20 mA signals from third party instruments.
c. Communication between controller and sensor shall be digital, allowing cable runs up to
3,000 feet without further amplification.
d. The system will provide up to 20 programmable analog outputs (max. load 500 ohms)and
20 programmable alarm relays (rated to 5A at 250VAC). System shall also be capable of
Ethernet/IP or Profinet communication.
e. 90VAC-264VAC power required.
f. Enclosure is NEMA-4X rated.
g. Entire system including the sensors shall have built in lightning and surge protection.
h. Ambient operating temperature—20°C to+55°C.
i. System diagnostics shall be standard.
j. System shall also have a USB interface port,data storage capability,and 3 levels of security.
k. System must have integrated lightening and overvoltage protection.
SECTION 11376-Page 14

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
1. Backup controller function to increase reliability.
All instruments associated with the biological system must be connected to the terminal/controller
communication network back to the Control Panel. Universal Mounting Kits with all necessary hardware
shall be provided for each sensor.
A sunshield and mounting bracket shall be provided for the system display/controller and each local
component to be mounted outside.
2.5.3 Decanter Controller
Decanter is used to remove supernatant from the basin during the decant phase of the system cycle.
The decanter controller uses an algorithm to descend the decanter weir throughout the cycle at a
constant vertical rate ensuring a constant discharge flow rate.
The decanter controller ensures proper synchronization between process decant time and weir
position prior to the next phase starting to prevent solids contamination in the decanter effluent.
Decanter speed will be controlled by a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) which controls the speed
of the decanter actuator motor.
The decanter drawdown will be dependent on a user input to the HMI.
The VFD shall be microprocessor based, all-digital, compact style, low-noise PWM type. It shall
allow programming of the torque curve, speed and voltage, over current and overload protection. It
shall have protective warning and diagnosis functions. The unit shall have programmed automatic
fault restarts and low power ride through. The control unit display shall be mounted in an easily
accessible location. The unit shall have a NEMA 1 rating suitable for mounting in a panel or on a
wall.The VFD will be setup,programmed,and post commissioned supported by Sanitaire personnel.
The speed is determined by the PLC in order to maintain a uniform vertical lowering of the decanter
weir.The maximum decanter travel is controlled by magnetic limit switches mounted on the decanter
actuator. In addition, there shall be a decanterlocal control station for each basin consisting of a 4-
position switch enclosed in a NEMA 4X enclosure. The local station allows manual raise and lower
control as well as off and automatic control. The VFD must be properly wired and programmed so
that manual raise and lower control does not require any input from the PLC.
2.6 AEROBIC DIGESTER AERATION CONTROLLER
2.6.1 Description of the controller
The aeration controller is used during the react period to reduce energy,increase VSS destruction,and
reduce nutrient concentrations in recycle streams. Mixers are operated at all times. Four optional
modes of operation are available,as described herein:
• Timer control mode-Blower runs at a fixed speed during user-defined aeration sequences
• DO control mode - Blower runs at a variable speed during user-defined aeration sequences
to maintain a user-defined DO setpoint.
• ORP control mode—Blower is controlled with user defined High and Low ORP setpoints
and delay times for variable aeration and mixing sequences,based on the load being treated.
When blowers are operated, blower speed is controlled at a variable speed to maintain the
user-defined ORP setpoint.
SECTION 11376-Page 15

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
• DINO control mode — Blower is controlled with user-defined fixed speed, air-off delay
times, and potassium setpoints. Duration of aeration period is variable based on rate of
change of potassium concentration,to ensure phosphorus uptake prior to initiation of solids
handling processes(i.e.—thickening,dewatering,or decanting)that send recycle streams to
the secondary treatment process.
The aeration controller algorithm shall switch between modes of operation and make process control
adjustments and decisions based on diagnostic information that tests the integrity of the data and utilizes
fault indications from the sensors.
The intent of the multiple modes of operation is to protect the process operation when instrumentation has
faulted or is in need of maintenance.
2.6.2 Instrumentation specifications
2.6.2.1 Dissolved Oxygen Probes
Each AEROBIC DIGESTER shall be equipped with a dissolved oxygen probe. Communication to
controller shall be digital. Connection to IQ Sensor Net shall be through two wire shielded cable.
The sensor shall be calibration free using intelligent membrane technology. Membranes shall last up to two
years with replacement membranes containing calibration data chip.
Sensor shall use soft green fluorescent light with calibrated optics and equal path reference system. Sensor
shall have a measuring range of 0-20.00 mg/l. Sensor shall integrated temperature measurement and
compensation.
Temperature operating range of-5°C to+50°C and measuring range of-5°C to+50°C. System accuracy
shall be±0.05 mg/1< 1.00 mg/1,±0.1 mg/1> 1.00 mg/l.
Sensor shall include self-diagnostics.
2.6.2.2 Ammonium/Nitrate(NH4/NO3/K)probe
Each aerobic digester basin shall be equipped with combined ammonia (NH4), nitrate (NO3), and
Potassium (K)probe. Communication to controller shall be digital. Connection to IQ Sensor Net shall be
through two wire shielded cable.
Sensor assembly shall last up to two years. Compensation for up to 1,000 mg K/1 and 1,000 mg C1/1 shall
be automatic and dynamic with optional compensation electrodes.
Sensor shall have a measuring range of 0.1 to 1000 mg/I for both ammonium and nitrate as N and both
potassium(K)and chloride(Cl)compensation parameters.
Sensor shall include integrated temperature measurement and compensation. Temperature operating range
of 0°C to+40° C and measuring range of 0° C to+40° C.
System accuracy shall be±0.2 mg/1 or±5%of measured value, in standard solutions.
Sensor shall include self-diagnostics.
SECTION 11376-Page 16 •

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
The NH4/NO3/K signal shall be displayed at the main control panel display unit and be an input to the PLC.
2.6.2.3 Oxidation Reduction Potential(ORP)Probes
Each AEROBIC DIGESTER basin shall be equipped with a ORP probe. Communication to controller shall
be digital with calibration value storage. Connection to IQ Sensor Net shall be through two wire shielded
cable.
The sensor assembly shall include pre-amplification of electrode signal. Sensor assembly shall include an
integrated NTC thermistor.
Sensor shall have a measuring range of+/- 2,000 mV. Temperature operating range of 0° C to + 60°C.
Sensor shall include self-diagnostics.
The ORP signal shall be displayed at the main control panel display unit and be an input to the PLC.
2.6.2.4 Instrument Calibration Equipment
The Aerobic Digester supplier to furnish one(1)portable colorimeter to be used for calibrating ion-selective
electrodes (ISE). The colorimeter shall be a YSI pHotoFlex STD or equal. The colorimeter shall have 6
wavelengths, 50 user-defined methods,plus 35 pre-defined tests and a 100 data set memory.
The colorimeter shall have PC connectivity via RS232 cable.
The following reagent sets shall be provided with the colorimeter:
• Ammonia(0.01 to 0.5 mg/1 as NH4-N); YSI 341.
• Nitrate(0.2 to 30 mg/1 NO3-N); YSI 314
PART 3 INSTALLATION AND PERFORMANCE
3.1 MIXER THRUST AND POWER TESTING
A mixer thrust and power test should be performed according the ISO 21630-2007. Manufacturer shall
also perform the following inspections and tests on each mixer before shipment from the factory:
• Motor insulation test for detection of insulation defects
• Tightness test of the assembled mixer using a vacuum method
• Dry-run test to establish mechanical integrity and correct rotation.
3.2 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
All equipment provided under this specification shall be shipped and stored onsite in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall provide means for protecting necessary
equipment from sunlight and rain as the manufacturer recommends. Electrical equipment and stainless-
steel items shall not be stored on the ground.
All items shall be transported and handled with care. Any item that is scratched, dented, or damaged in
any way shall be removed and replaced with brand new.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Three(3)paper copies and two(2)compact discs with electronic copies of the Operation&Maintenance
SECTION 11376-Page 17

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
Manuals shall be furnished for all critical process equipment prior to system start-up. These manuals shall
include maintenance instructions for all equipment provided.
Operation&Maintenance Manual shall include a Functional Design Specification(description of control
software logic)and Operational Description(description of process).
3.4 FIELD SERVICES, START-UP AND TRAINING
The services of the field representative shall include minimum Five (5) days, exclusive of travel time,
and Two (2) travel trips. The Contractor shall notify the manufacturer a minimum of ten working days
prior to the time that the field services are desired.
The Contractor shall notify the equipment supplier when the installation of the aerobic digester equipment
has been completed. A representative of the supplier shall inspect the installation. The Owner shall be
advised in writing of any corrections or adjustments that are required for the aerobic digester equipment
installation.After the aerobic digester installation has been completed to the supplier's satisfaction,a letter
of certification that all equipment is installed in accordance with its instructions and that the aerobic
digester equipment is ready for operation shall be furnished.
A process engineer shall complete operator process training onsite, including review of the controls
description, a discussion of the process control features,and recommendations for process setpoints.
3.5 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall warranty all items included in this specification to be free from defects in material
and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion (not system startup).
The warranty shall cover material, equipment, and labor.
--END OF SECTION--
SECTION 11376-Page 18

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
SECTION 11396
MAGNETIC FLOW METER
1. General:
a. Function: Measure, indicate, and transmit the process flow in a full pipe. Meter must be a full-bore
meter with the magnetic field traversing the entire cross-section of the flow tube. Insertion
magmeters or multiple single point probes inserted into a spool piece are not acceptable.
b. Type: Magnetic flowmeter, operating based on Faraday's law, using a pulsed do type coil excitation
with high impedance electrodes.
c. Parts: Flow tube,transmitter,interconnection cables,mounting hardware.
d. All magnetic flowmeters shall be supplied with epoxy packs to insure conduit seals. All magnetic
flowmeters shall be rated for submersible proof enclosure for 24 hours under 10' of water.
2. Service: Potable Water or Sewer
3. Performance:
a. Range: 1000 to 1 for 6"and smaller, 1500 to 1 for 8"and larger.
b. Accuracy: Accuracy shall be+/- .2%optional for all flow rates greater than 1.7 feet per second.
c. Repeatability: ±0.05%or±0.0008ft/s,whichever is greater.
d. Calibration shall be per compliance with OIML R49 Type P standards
e. Flow range: As noted
4. Process Connection:
a. Meter Size: As noted
b. Connection Type: Flanged: ASME/ANSI B16.5 Class 150 in sizes up to and including 24"
For sizes larger than 24"
ANSI/AWWA C207-94 Class B (87 psi)
ANSI/AWWA C207-94 Class D(150 psi)
ANSUAWWA C207-94 Class E (275 psi)
For sizes larger than 24"requiring 150#rated flanges
ASME/ANSI B16.47 Series A Class 150 not available, use ANSI/AWWA C207-94 to required
pressure rating
c.Flange Material: Carbon steel
d. Pressure Rating: Meter system shall be fully rated to the same design pressure as the flanges
5. Flow Tube:
a. Meter Tube Material: 304 Stainless Steel
b. Liner Material: Hard Rubber Standard(Optional: Elastomer, PTFE)
c. Electrode Type: Conical self-cleaning electrodes
d. Electrode Material: 316 stainless steel or as recommended by the manufacturer
e. Enclosure Classification: Standard as submersible and buriable(IP68,NEMA 6P)
f. Housing Material: Aluminum or Epoxy-coated Steel
SECTION 11396—Page 1

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
g. Grounding: Grounding rings or grounding electrodes shall be provided per manufacturer's
recommendation
h. Submergence: Continuous to 30ft and direct burial 3 to 16 ft IP68/NEMA6P.
f. Octagonal Bore Design: Sensors in sizes of 1.5" to 8" shall be Octagonal Bore Design for blunt
profile and reduced piping diameters
g. Sensors in sizes 10"and larger shall be provided with full bore design to reduce head loss
h. Grounding electrode design shall be required along with grounding rings per manufacturer's
recommendation
6. Transmitter:
a. Power: 85 to 265 VAC or 11 to 24 VDC. Coordinate with electrical drawings.
b. Display: Three line back-lit graphical display with capacitive keys; allows for external configuration
without removing covers and compromising the integrity of environmental classifications.
c. Bi-direction flow: Forward and reverse flow indication; total and rate 2x10-digit user configurable
display.
d. Totalizers: Three 9 digit totalizers for forward,reverse and net
e. Enclosure: Transmitter made of Aluminum
f. "Through The Glass Control"(no key pad; capacitance keys)
g. HART protocol standard
h. Integral Transmitter rotate-able up to 270 degrees
i. Transmitter Module, 180 degrees rotate-able
j. IP 67
k. Calibration shall be per OIML R49 Type P standards
1. Type"P"continuous self checking capabilities(not just on start-up)
m. Redundant data storage in sensor and transmitter with continuous replication of calibration factors,
meter size, serial numbers,and site-specific settings.
n. Infrared service port for meter configuration and diagnostic interrogation
7. Calibration:
a. Test Mode: Provide the ability to verify the accuracy of the unit and the integrity of the current loop
without any external equipment.
b. Meter calibration shall be compliant to OIML R49 Type P, self-calibration requirements
c. Meter must be able to generate periodical simulated signals that verify that the output is within
predefined limits
d. Coil Inductance and resistance along with electrode voltage and impedance must be verifiable
through diagnostic functionality
e. Warnings and Alarms: Shall be classified to NAMUR NE 107 standards. Meter must have ability to
display severity of warning with "maintenance, check-function, failure and out of spec" warning
indications.
f. Alarm priorities shall be classified as: "None; Maintenance; Out-of-spec; Function check; and
Error."
g. The duration of an alarm, time-summation for that alarms and time elapsed since last alarm message
must be recorded and accessible
h. All replacement transmitters shall be interchangeable without need for programming sensor
calibration factors,meter size, site information,and serial numbers
i. Insitu Calibration Verification: This system shall be used to verify in a quantifiable manner the
meter's current conditions vs. the meters condition when originally manufactured. This calibration
verification of the meter shall be performed without need for physical access to the meter flow tube.
SECTION 11396—Page 2

2019 WWTP Rehabilitation FrCo-18.02
Franklin County,NC
j. Measurement diagnostics shall be in accordance with OIML standards, which shall include self-
verification of the flow meter system including, transmitter, cable, electrodes, and coils; through
software the system shall have the ability print a certificate of compliance to OIML accuracy
standards.
k. Meters to be designed, manufactured, and calibrated in an ISO9001, UKAS/NAMAS, NIST, or
NATA certified facility. Flow facility must be certified by volume or weight certified providers.
Facility must have the capability to hold the flow rate at the specified calibration points for a
minimum of five minutes to allow stabilization for flow and repeatability point checks.
8. Startup,Testing, and Warranty:
a. Meter manufacturer shall provide a factory representative onsite during startup and testing of the
meter.
b. A minimum of 4 hours of onsite training shall be provided to the Owner's representatives.
c. Meter manufacturer shall provide a one year warranty on the meter. The warranty shall begin at the
date of substantial completion for the project, not the date of installation.
--End of Section--
SECTION 11396—Page 3

GeoTechnologies,Inc.
Geotechnical and Construction Materials Testing Services
November 4,2019
Logan Parsons,E.I
LKC ENGINEERING
140 Aqua Shed Court
Aberdeen,NC 28315
Re: Subsurface Investigation
Franklin County WWTP Upgrades
Franklinton,North Carolina
GeoTechnologies Project No. 1-19-0743-EA
Gentlemen:
GeoTechnologies, Inc. has completed the authorized investigation to evaluate subsurface soil conditions for
planned upgrades at the Franklin County WWTP in Franklinton, North Carolina. Subsurface conditions were
investigated by completing eight soil test borings with an ATV drill rig as shown on Figure 1. The boring locations
were established in the field with a hand held GPS unit and coordinates provided on Figure 1. The borings were
extended to depths of about 20 to nearly 100 feet with standard penetration testing performed at selected intervals with
a conventional drop hammer.
SITE AND PROJECT INFORMATION
Provided expansion information is summarized below:
Structure Excavation Existing Maximum Boring
Elevation Elevation Bearing Numbers
(psi)
Treatment 290.5 291-310 1,500 B1-B4
Unit#3
Digesters 282 285-292 1,500 B5-B8
The area(s) of the plant expansion are cleared and open. A small soil stockpile is located near the northwest
quadrant of Treatment Unit#3.Topography falls from north to south across the planned structures.
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
Samples obtained by the drilling operation were returned to our laboratory for visual classification by an
experienced professional engineer. Detailed test boring records are included at the back of this report. A generalized
subsurface profile prepared from the test boring data is included as Figure 2.
Below a thin surface layer of topsoil,a majority of the borings encountered old fill or possible fill to depths of
2 to 13 feet. These materials were generally sandy to silty and exhibited penetration resistances of 4 to more than 25
blows per foot(bpf)indicative of marginal to very good compactive effort.
The residual soil profile included a mixture of silty to sandy soils. Penetration resistances in these soils were
on the order of 14 to more than 50 bpf.Partially weathered rock was encountered in five of the borings at depths of 20
to 44.5 feet. Partially weathered rock is defined as material which exhibited penetration resistances of 50 blows per 6
3200 Wellington Ct, Ste. 108• Raleigh. NC 27615•Phone [phone]•Fax [phone]•www.geotechpa.com•License No.C-0894

LKC ENGINEERING
Re:Franklin County WWTP Upgrades
November 4,2019
Page: 2
inch or less increment which could be penetrated by the soil drilling process. The PWR was not continuous in some
borings and was layered with hard residual soils.The borings were terminated at depths of about 20 to 90+feet.
Groundwater was present in the deeper borings at depths of about 23(B-5)and 35(B-1)feet.It should be noted
that the site is conducive to the development of perched groundwater conditions during periods of wet weather, and
groundwater levels will vary during different periods of the year.
RECOMMENDATIONS
The following recommendations are made based upon a review of the attached test boring data, our
understanding of the proposed construction, and experience with similar projects and subsurface conditions. As
additional development details become available, theyshould beprovid
ed to GeoTechnologies for review and
P g
comment.
Existing Fill. A majority of our test borings encountered old fill;however,the plan excavation depths for the
structures will carry those excavations through the old fill except at boring locations B-3 (6 feet of fill below cut grade)
and B-8(9 feet of fill below cut grade).The fill at these locations was soft(4 bpf)below the planned excavation grade,
and as such, this material will have to be removed and replaced. It is noted that old fill below plan grade could be
present intermediate of the boring locations.
Once the excavations have been carried to plan grade, the bottoms must be inspected by the geotechnical
engineer to identify those areas where undercut is necessary.As indicated,borings B-3 and B-8 suggest undercut depths
of 6 and 9 feet at those locations;however,it is likely that fill will be encountered at grade in other areas.Repairs should
be performed as directed by the geotechnical engineer. To help minimize differential settlement, we recommend that
undercut excavations be backfilled with a granular quarry material such as #57 stone, CABC stone, or processed fill
with less than 30%fines.On-site soils with less than 30%fines may also be used.
All fill materials should be compacted to not less than 95% of the standard Proctor maximum dry density
within 3%of the optimum moisture content. It is recommended that quality control testing be performed to verify that
the proper density specifications are being met and to confirm that fill placement is being performed in a controlled
manner. Excluding the undercut backfill zone below foundations, the on-site soils may be reused as structural fill
provided they are dried as necessary and provided they are free of deleterious materials. On-site soils used as backfill
in undercut areas below foundations should contain less than 30%fines.
Excavation Considerations (PWR). PWR was not present any shallower than 20 feet from existing grade in
our borings. However,it is possible that areas of more shallow difficult excavation could be encountered intermediate
of the boring locations. In our experience,mass rock is demonstrated with a larger bulldozer, equivalent to a CAT D-
8,pulling a single tooth ripper,while confined rock is demonstrated with an excavator equivalent to a CAT 330 or 345
equipped with a narrow rock bucket with rock teeth. For approximate reference purposes,our experience has been that
a CAT D-8 with a ripper can remove material as hard as 50 blows per 2 inches of penetration, while an appropriate
excavator such as a CAT 330 with a narrow bucket and rock teeth can remove material in the range of 50 blows per 4
to 6 inches of penetration. A CAT 345 with a narrow bucket and rock teeth can remove material as hard as 50 blows
per 2 inches of penetration,but the excavation rate is slow,and removal is hard on the equipment.If the contractor will
be expected to use a CAT 345 to excavate hard PWR,that should be outlined in the specifications.
The most common technique to remove confined rock which cannot be removed with conventional rock
excavation equipment is blasting;however,we expect that consideration will also be given to removing these materials
with equipment such as a ram-hoe.Removal means,and methods should be left to the discretion of the contractor,with
appropriate consideration being given to vibrations and their impact on adjacent structures.
GeoTechn ologies,In c.
rr www.9 eotechpa corn

LKC ENGINEERING
Re:Franklin County WWTP Upgrades
November 4,2019
Page: 3
If the project will be bid on a classified basis, we recommend establishing a fair unit price for difficult
excavation, with payable quantities based on in-place surveyed measurements. Additionally, we recommend that
project specifications clearly indicate what equipment should be used to demonstrate difficult excavation,and what is
considered mass excavation verses confined excavation.
Dewatering Considerations. Construction will occur within 15 feet of current grade, above any groundwater
encountered in our borings. As such, we anticipate that any water encountered will be a small quantity of perched
groundwater which can likely be handled with a sump pump.
Temporary Shoring/Sloping.Means and methods for implementing any required excavations should be left to
the discretion of the contractor. We recommend that all sloped excavations be observed and evaluated by qualified
personnel at the time of excavation to verify compliance with OSHA regulations. If slopes are used, they should be
observed daily by qualified personnel. Excavations deeper than 20 feet should be designed on a case-by-case basis by
a qualified engineer.
Below Grade Walls. Below grade walls may be designed using the soil parameters indicated in the table below.
Material placed within 4 feet of walls should be compacted with hand held rather than with heavy mechanized
equipment. Backfill should be compacted to at least 95% of the standard Proctor maximum dry density. The values
assume level grade behind or in front of the wall and should be modified for sloping grades.Appropriate safety factors
should be applied to design calculations.
At-rest EFP Active EFP Passive EFP Base Friction
Above Water Above Water
55 pcf 40 pcf 300 pcf 0.35
Permanent Slopes. In this geology, dry and well compacted unreinforced fill slopes built at 2.5H:1 V or flatter
are stable without exception provided that compaction is carried to the face of the slope. Steeper fill slopes can be used
with properly designed and installed geosynthetic reinforcement. Cut slopes should also be 2.5H:1 V or flatter. Any
water encountered on the face of slopes should be brought to the attention of the geotechnical engineer so that necessary
provisions can be made.
Seismic Design Considerations.Based on the results of the test borings,the site is generally a seismic site class
"D". To possibly provide a more favorable site class, geophysical ReMi testing to measure the average shear wave
velocity in the upper 100 feet from grade can be considered.
FOUNDATION SUPPORT
Shallow Foundations. Although the allowable bearing capacity for both structures is at least 4,000 psf, we
understand that the maximum bearing stress is 1,500 psf.Assuming that the pad areas are prepared for shallow support
as directed, we estimate that total settlements will be about 1.0 inch for both structures. Due to variable grade,
differential settlement is estimated at up to 0.75 inches.Settlement estimates should be updated as additional foundation
design details become available. All settlement estimates should be reviewed by the structural engineer, and all
foundation subgrades should be inspected by the geotechnical engineer.
Aggregate Piers.Where estimated settlements are greater than those which are acceptable,and/or to avoid deep
undercut of old fill,consideration can be given to using an intermediate support system such as aggregate piers.These
are design build systems that typically include internal design review and field quality control by the installer.As such,
the role of the geotechnical engineer is limited to providing soil data which is interpreted by the specialty contractor.
GreoTechnologies,Inc.
www.geotechpa.com

LKC ENGINEERING
Re:Franklin County WWTP Upgrades
November 4,2019
Page: 4
Unlike most conventional pile systems in the area,these foundations do not reduce settlement to some negligible value,
but when properly designed are intended to limit settlement to a given criterion. If aggregate piers are used, it is the
responsibility of the specialty contractor to verify that the design model selected is appropriate for the foundation
configuration,planned grading,and site geology.
SUMMARY
In summary,the most significant finding of our investigation is that some moderately deep old fill will have to
be removed and replaced under portions of both structures. The removal depth is 6 feet in boring B-3 and 9 feet in
boring B-8. It is also expected that old fill requiring undercut will be present intermediate of the boring locations,and
that will have to be determined by a field inspection by the geotechnical engineer at the time of excavation.Undercut
backfill should consist of a granular quarry material or on-site soils with less than 30%fines.
Following repair, estimated total settlements are estimated at about 1 inch, with differential settlement being
about 0.75 inches.
We appreciate the opportunity to have provided you with our services during this phase of the project.Please
contact us if you have questions regarding this report or if we may be of further assistance currently.
Sincerely,
,�t�{51111 JJ J//
1 /
`` ���► OA, n$/r/ l :!,� it.o :i es,Inc.
!.. Ernest L. Stitzinger,P.E.
•
NC Registration No. 25534
w'„ cc`. 'v�,t,1 s ue;'
7.L. sivt„%`�'
GeoTedrologies,Inc.
www.geotechpa.com

B...y.tio.\e00- Cto w.02 Wxrp\02 c1w\P,ow..e". Pi.n.e o a1 ao.N er-comp../10/2018 B:o207''' ' to a:c 2.0B/10/q mz,:20.e
- -goolb.o1.\r,co-1e.m-.00u*oltq. o-le. -Box1\F,co-ie.02_0...4.4 r1C.-1e.2-P,rnolm.m ewn wn..VC4-ieo2-0,r e.w va - won_V.7.2-1eo2-,..ewcM.nc.-1em-0M11.,aw Pa.-\roc.-.em-sgen,eo nm p
.V.C.-1102-in.mux B..m n -1.02-.Mpm1..\02 e1Nc1.M\CC.-le.m-..epmla.e,2Ce-1e.02-Bb...BW.LV.cs-ie.u2� bxelbn\.00-Urv.eq.\e10 4..ign o-o.bq.\0J 990d2S\r,Co-le.m-we..r Bue.e.e.
Pico-1B.02-wap.01-x.obryw-_\02 eb,¢1wV,to-1B.02-xep.01 ve.,.wp..e.a:!.1.GE xo i.ape 2018 ewln bm
1 / / / /�Ij/ ��- II\`
I I / / / h / ------- -4 \`
I I / / / / I \ \ - --ice \
Imo" \\� I \/ l )A"�/`bi�i�/� / °cf ----- \\ Iii
€ 11
/. 1\I\ \ d Y r ! l��\\ / /j / 5�L \ \III'
1n1 0. 1 1 ma g Y 7 1 I / / /--\>W-' r_ \\ I III
/� , // j 1 l \ III 1 / / ! �/><�--, �\ \ III
h7 G 1 / �"�__,_,,,, I
//ry v v Ill l i I I / 1 �/ 1 / / / I I)v�wy,�\\v 1 \ 1 P
�>,-� IIIIII1 1I /, 1 j / I _, j I / \I
���/ j 1jj11 11 I11/41 r m \1 I i\ \�
���� I IIIII 1m> � ; I / / --- I!/ Y/' 1
/ \\ \\, \\ I 11/ .` 11111111",,I111 ; 1 i I / /p ;,°=;/ j i , I \\1
//./IIIII II / 111111/ ..!7.1,A /-�i /S� e' r.> 1 \ I I�
>�G/ , 1 1 1 1 III l 1%l I ,l 1 1 1 l� `, P �� \ \ \1 1
/�4i�, �III 111111111/ 11/IIII I / ` ` I 1 / I 1 \ \ I \ I
/7 i,/11 %lllll 1%ji.1 // 11LL / I 1 \ \ 1
!l, l/ 1 I 7�� 1• `A 1 I \ 1 1
ifV/7/fr//ot 1//// //////I I /,11 I/ I / I /\ v l 1 1 A V \B1
/ -vt I / I I I \ I
(� i///i'/ /' //I 1 1.1 Y Y' \ \\ \ \ \
'"/
I\\\ \ ///// / 1 \ III (�� I I i I
i/// `•�\�\�,�/,t�%/7 I IIII// , \` \ ` \��
/j/ ///// \�''\//////`<;�j-4 /,,,,,..2./ _ -7/ / , �/ III lift
r ^
i,,t jli,iftt,///i _%11 j(// I I I I \ \\ I iIiI /Ilk.
/^\ $ / I 1
/ 1t •
r/ii i /ii \ 11 \�\I i l�l • y1\: 'a11; % `s �' /I
1"R 04110104,, '
i
I///r I '46. l- \ e�v� --+' -fit,,\\\�\ ,y . " 4' \\NI . \
//1 1 }11 ' ar \'\, 'l \ \ `ili \\\\ '6 0//� 1 I u. s{�bf" 1 { I 4 \ I i ' -��� \ \1\\\,6\ / /�1n Y,yD� .► �\ \'I IIII , R` /\ \ '0 �.B,Id \ \\1\ 1\ ` / �-
/ • f1 I \'.-- �. r. \�\\\`II\\ \I \ r \1 � 1 Ilan \ � - � 1 /
• �I 1 I 1 I .4t.. \<\\ \\ 1 \ \11 11 I I LI\\�/- 1'
111 111 ?''"' \ `> ,�� \\�\\\ l \\ \ �� I \ 1,
I I�1\ /�f�
-/ \ ..AanE--` .\ r• \��\\\\\�� ---` \ / \\\-- _-- L
/ / ;,\...,\\,..... ,..., \ r-) -,,c), / \ *,,<:---"---,----..---4,.-0, ;----... ,/ ,
1-1— \ \I ..� /
/ 1 \/; --i L I fi l I i I 1 u /gm i � i :-1 (
g l /
3e-ew--------
-- N 8 i✓ / \ p ice/ 1
'a // -- -
9• / /ram- - —\ 1 �-�''�
z I I \I i \ --- — Il
�o N X i i 1 i \91 _ oA 11 1 I ig
ggor, o 11 t .\ t 1 - ,r t ' i /j 5
g, _ I 'i I \m l I / I
s.
�0N 1q I 1 i1 ' I _
I —
^� a II I I 1 'I I=G= 1__S'dP�_ � `_—._.—. .L.—"—',-.-+
,--rrrerrr':-(
PRELIMINARY — DO NOT USE FOR CONSTRUCTION
FI $
►� LKC Engineering.Pllc
(-1 o i.. O s Franklin CountyEngineering 1ao Aqua snea coon
11 1 Y Proposed Site And Aberdeen,NC 28315
WWTP Rehabilitation _INC Landscape Architecture O:910.120.1137
�+ Grading Plan Surveying F.910.637.0096
. Y g Ikcengineering.com
cew.re:coellry,rvortn cardice
License No.P-1095

Elevation (Feet) GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE PROFILE LEGEND
■ Topsoil
310 Fffl Silty Sand
B- 1
300 -• .29
B-2 B-4 I/ Clayey Sand
• 17 1 22 B-3 : 21 B- 5 B-6 rill Low Plasticity Silt
28 , 8
290 25 / jij
_ -__ ■Sots B 4 19 �111 21 IM 14 ■1rre1 20 $-'8
•., 32 ,.•53 53 15 11 MI �7�� 'Ini 27 Silty Sand to Low Plasticity Silt
280 11111 14 ills6
21 26 4 Moderate Plasticity Clay
• 34 6'.. 50/5.5" III 14 IN 68
270 1%` .•` 52 Q'.. 50/5" 50/5' ... 25 V .31 Ed56 11133 IIII 20 Fill
26 5013" 32 /r`I 61
79 Possible Fill
260 111 .17
p.:50/6" 'ru,'77 Standard Penetration Resistance
A 5014" 111
250 .6.: 54 V Groundwater at Time of Boring
. '50/5" q• 50/6" ii�ri Auger/Roller Cone Refusal
l'. . 50/4" 9
L>.
240 �� ; •5014.5"
•�
.A. . 50/2.5" Cut Depth
1S. 50/5"
50/5" .j;.
230 50/4.5"
la 50/4.5"
220 Q. .5D/4"
4' 50/5"
.6.
210 4'. .50/3"
Q.• 50/3"
200 •�.•.50/3"
190
PROJECT: SCALE: As Shown
JOB No:1-19-0743-EA
Franklin Co. WWTP 101
GeoTechnologies. Inc.
Franklin Co. North Carolina
FIGURE No:2

TEST BORING RECORD
)EPTH DESCRIPTION ELEVATION PENETRATION BLOWS PER
(FT.) (FT.) (BLOWS/FT.) SIX INCHES
0.0 303.00 10 20 40 60 100
0.2 \Fill-Topsoil /SM
Fill-Medium Dense Brown Silty Fine to Medium 19-16-13
SAND 298
6.5 6-10-7
Medium Dense Pink Tan Silty Clayey Fine to SC
Medium SAND w/Quartz 4 293
10-11-14
y
17.5 y 288 7-10-11
Dense Tan Silty Fine to Medium SAND SM
283
• 11-12-20
278
410 12-14-17
•
273
32.0 ir- 25-16-18
Very Dense Tan Brown Slightly Micaceous Silty SM '
Fine to Medium SAND 268 • 16-22-30
37.5 ,
Hard Brown Slightly Micaceous Fine Sandy SILT ML
263_
lE.-- 24-36-43
42.5
Partially Weathered Rock-Sampled as Brown .4
Slightly Micaceous Fine Sandy SILT w/Hard Fine ;p 258 • 29-50/6"
Sandy SILT Soil Seams 4
49.0 :
Partially Weathered Rock-Sampled as Brown p 253 • 32-50/4"
Slightly Micaceous Fine SAND w/Soil Seams :A
2.
.C> 248
21 32-50/5"
.2S o
4 243 • o
50/4" o.
:
4
.L. 'a
4 238 + c4
st
69.4 4 233 • z
Boring terminated at 69.4' 50/5" gi
Groundwater estimated at 3 5' at time of boring.
JOB NUMBER 1-19-0743-EA
BORING NUMBER B- 1 �."".....
DATE 10-7-19 v* GeoTechnologies, Inc.
PAGE 1 OF 1 3200 Wellington Court,Ste 108
Raleigh, NC 27615

TEST BORING RECORD
DEPTH DESCRIPTION ELEVATION PENETRATION BLOWS PER
(FL) (FL) (BLOWS/FT.) SIX INCHES
0.0 299.00 10 20 40 60 100
0.1 \Fill-Topsoil /SM
I.
Fill-Medium Dense Brown Slightly Clayey Silty
2.5 Fine to Medium SAND 13-11-11
IF--
Fill-Very Stiff Brown Slightly Clayey Fine to ML
Medium Sandy SILT
294 •
11-15-13
7.0
Medium Dense Tan Brown Silty Clayey Fine to SC
Coarse SAND /
•
289
7 6-7-10
12.0 .
Very Stiff Tan Silty Fine to Medium SAND SM .
•
284 •
20-25-28
18.0 •
Very Dense Brown Silty Fine SAND SM
ML '
:• 279
19-28-31
•
•
•
•
24.5 ':
Partially Weathered Rock-Sampled as Brown .p 274 • 38-50/5.5" m
Silty Fine to Medium SAND .A o
27.0 . o
n
Partially Weathered Rock&Very Dense Brown 4 0.
Silty Fine to Medium SAND ;p
2 4 a'
c�
9.5
29.9 Partially Weathered Rock-Sampled as Brown ^' 269 • 31-50/5"
\Silty Fine to Medium SAND /
Boring terminated at 29.9' z
li
Dry at time of boring.
JOB NUMBER 1-19-0743-EA
BORING NUMBER B-2
DATE 10-7-19 l. ••. GCoTechnologies, Inc.
PAGE 1 OF 1 3200 Wellington Court,Ste 108
• Raleigh,NC 27615

TEST BORING RECORD
DEPTH DESCRIPTION ELEVATION PENETRATION BLOWS PER
(FI'.) (Fr.) (BLOWS/FT.) SIX INCHES
0.0 292.00 10 20 40 60 100
0.3 Fill-Medium Dense Brown Silty Fine to Medium SM.
\SAND /SM •
Fill-Very Loose Brown Silty Fine to Medium
•
SAND • 11-10-9
287
• 2-2-2
7.5
Medium Dense to Very Dense Tan Silty Fine to SM
Medium SAND
• 282
11-22-31
277
9-13-14
17.0
Very Dense Brown Silty Fine SAND SM • o
0
H
H
7
20.0 272 a
20.4 Partially Weathered Rock-Sampled as Brown .61 19-37-50/5" M
Silty Fine SAND
Boring terminated at 20.4'
i
Dry at time of boring.
JOB NUMBER 1-19-0743-EA
BORING NUMBER B-3
DATE 10-7-19 ......... GCoTechnologies, Inc.
PAGE 1 OF 1 3200 Wellington Court,Ste 108
Raleigh,NC 27615

- 1
TEST BORING RECORD
DEPTH DESCRIPTION ELEVATION PENETRATION BLOWS PER
(FT.) (FT.) (BLOWS/FT.) SIX INCHES
0.0 299.00 10 20 40 60 100
0.1 NFill-Topsoil /SMr
Fill-Medium Dense Brown Slightly Clayey Silty
Fine to Medium SAND 13-11-10
3.0
Fill-Loose Orange Brown Slightly Clayey Silty SM..
Fine to Medium SAND
294 •
4-3-5
8.0 •
Stiff to Very Stiff Orange Brown Fine Sandy SILT ML
289 .
7-9-10
284 •
5-7-8
17.5
Medium Dense Brown Silty Fine SAND SM
ML
279
5-7-7
22.0 •
Stiff to Very Stiff Slightly Fine Sandy SILT ML
274
5-6-8
O
H
::F
4\
C9
269
30.5 6-11-14
Boring terminated at 30.5'
c9
Dry at time of boring.
JOB NUMBER 1-19-0743-EA
BORING NUMBER B-4
DATE 10-7-19 1 GcoTechnologies Inc.
PAGE 1 OF 1 3200 Wellington Court,Ste 108
Raleigh,NC 27615

TEST BORING RECORD
)EPTH DESCRIPTION ELEVATION PENETRATION BLOWS PER
(Fr.) (FT.) (BLOWS/FT.) SIX INCHES
0.0 291.00 10 20 40 60 100
0.2 \Possible Fill-Topsoil /CL//
2.5 Possible Fill-Very Stiff Red Brown Fine Sandy CH 7-8-9
286
6.5 Silty CLAY MI 9-9-12
\Very Stiff Red Brown Micaceous Fine Sandy / ::
SMClayey ST 281
6-7-8
7-9-12
9-15-16
Medium Dense to Dense Brown Micaceous Silty •
Fine SAND 276
•
•
• 271
• 266
11-13-13
28.0
Medium Dense Brown Micaceous Silty Fine to SM • 261
•
Coarse SAND 9-9-8
33.5
36.5 Very Dense Brown Silty Fine to Coarse SAND SM ,• 25611/ 1740-37
Very Dense Tan Micaceous Silty Fine SAND SM •
251
15-20-34
44.5
mor
Partially Weathered Rock-Sampled as Brown 246 39-50/6"
Micaceous Silly Fine to Medium SAND w/Soil .6
Layers 4 241 + 36-50/4.5"
4 236 ' 50/5"
.6
58.0
59.5 Very Dense Brown Micaceous Silty Fine to sly'PI' 38-50/5"' 231 �
Medium SAND w/Soil Layers / .
Partially Weathered Rock-Sampled as Brown 226
67.0 Micaceous Silty Fine to Medium SAND w/Soil 4 36-44-50/4.5"
\Layers / 4
•Partially Weathered Rock-Sampled as Tan Brown .6 •221 50/4"
Micaceous Silty Fine to Medium SAND w/Roller 4
Refusal .6 216 ` 50/5" I.-.
4 o
4 211 • 50/3" 0.
.LS o
206 • 50/3" a.
.6
,Q 201 n
.6 50/3" -
93.5 4 i
Roller Cone Refusal 93.5' 196 §r
r-
o
Groundwater encountered at 23'at time of boring.
JOB NUMBER 1-19-0743-EA
BORING NUMBER B-5
DATE 10-7-19 1........ GeoTechnologies, Inc.
PAGE 1 OF 1 3200 Wellington Court, Ste 108
Raleigh, NC 27615

TEST BORING RECORD
DEPTH DESCRIPTION ELEVATION PENETRATION BLOWS PER
(FT.) (FT.) (BLOWS/FT.) SIX INCHES
0.0 292.00 10 20 40 60 100
0.1 XFill-Topsoil /SMT
Fill-Medium Dense Brown Slightly Clayey Silty
Fine to Medium SAND •
5-7-12
3.0
Medium Dense Tan Silty Fine to Medium SAND SM
287
• 6-7-7
7.5
Hard Tan Fine Sandy SILT ML
282
7-12-19
12.0
Very Dense Tan Brown Silty Fine to Medium SM
SAND
277
20-24-44
272
23-27-29
21.5
Partially Weathered Rock-Sampled as Tan Silty .
Fine to Medium SAND C>
0_
24.3 • 50/3"
Boring terminated at 24.3' 267
z
c~7
Dry at time of boring.
JOB NUMBER 1-19-0743-EA
BORING NUMBER B-6
DATE 10-7-19 I GCoTechnologies Inc.
PAGE 1 OF 1 3200 Wellington Court,Ste 108
Raleigh,NC 27615

TEST BORING RECORD
DEPTH DESCRIPTION ELEVATION PENETRATION BLOWS PER
(FI'.) (FT.) (BLOWS/FT.) SIX INCHES
0.0 287.00 10 20 40 60 100
0.1 N.Fill-Topsoil /SM•
Fill-Medium Dense Silty Fine to Medium SAND
w/Quartz •
2.0 8-12-8
Medium Dense Orange Brown Clayey Silty Fine to SM
Medium SAND
• 282
• 8-11-14
•
6.5 .
Very Stiff Gray Brown Slightly Micaceous Fine ML
Sandy Clayey SILT
277
• 8-11-15
11.0
Dense Tan Silty Fine to Medium SAND SM
272 .
9-18-15
•
•
•
•
I
q
267
20.5 W 8-14-18
Boring terminated at 20.5'
z
Dry at time of boring.
JOB NUMBER 1-19-0743-EA
BORING NUMBER B-7
DATE 10-7-19 l GCoTechnologies, Inc.
PAGE 1 OF 1 3200 Wellington Court,Ste 108
Raleigh, NC 27615

TEST BORING RECORD
DEPTH DESCRIPTION ELEVATION PENETRATION BLOWS PER
(FT.) (FT.) (BLOWS/FT.) SIX INCHES
0.0 286.00 10 20 40 60 100
0.1 \Fill-Topsoil /SM
Fill-Medium Dense Brown Silty Fine to Medium
SAND
•
9-13-14
3.5
Fill-Loose Brown Silty Clayey Fine to Medium SC
SAND
281 •
2-3-3
6.0
Fill-Soft Brown Fine to Medium Sandy Clayey ML
SILT
276 .
2-2-2
13.0
Medium Dense Brown Silty Fine to Medium SM
SAND
271 .
5-8-12
17.5
m
Very Dense Tan Brown Silty Fine to Medium SM
SAND
cD.
266
20.5 27-29-32
Boring terminated at 20.5' S
o,
z
Dry at time of boring.
JOB NUMBER 1-19-0743-EA
BORING NUMBER B-8
DATE 10-7-19 LWV1 GeoTechnologies Inc.
PAGE 1 OF 1 3200 Wellington Court,Ste 108
Raleigh,NC 27615

ATTACHMENT TO APPLICATION
FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT
PERMIT
SECTION 3.H - ENGINEERING CALCULATIONS

FRANKLIN COUNTY
2019 WWTP REHABILITATION
DWI Project No.: C370515-04
DESIGN CALCULATIONS
p+q.. .11.q:! h
se,
g0m.
L
.
'• •NCINS,:!Wi'edii;''P**\Z‘oto;
12Chh.blr)
h
Adam P. Kiker, P.E.
Prepared by:
NCr — 1
LKC Engineering, PLLC
140 Aqua Shed Court
Aberdeen, NC 28315
[phone]
License # P-1095
April 2020

Franklin County Wastewater Treatment Plant
Peaking Factor Determination
Discharge Monitoring Reports from the Franklin County wastewater plant over the last 24
months were used to determine a peaking factor. Using these historical data points, a
peaking factor of 2.1 was determined, however all calculations use a peaking factor of 2.5.
Daily Flow Rate (MGD)
Average Maximum Minimum
Oct-17 0.87 1.10 0.57
Nov-17 0.64 0.80 0.42
Dec-17 0.80 1.09 0.59
Jan-18 0.94 1.61 0.57
Feb-18 0.78 0.96 0.59
Mar-18 0.91 1.23 0.59
Apr-18 1.01 1.22 0.74
May-18 1.00 1.26 0.68
Jun-18 0.93 1.20 0.74
Jul-18 0.79 0.95 0.50
Aug-18 0.79 1.28 0.54
Sep-18 0.93 1.40 0.72
Oct-18 0.89 1.31 0.75
Nov-18 0.98 1.80 0.74
Dec-18 1.13 1.94 0.71
Jan-19 1.14 1.47 0.99
Feb-19 1.13 2.03 0.82 1
Mar-19 1.23 1.59 0.98
Apr-19 1.22 1.78 0.88
May-19 1.12 1.26 0.96
Jun-19 1.08 1.63 0.70
Jul-19 0.98 1.33 0.80
Aug-19 0.95 1.05 0.85
Sep-19 0.98 1.16 0.78
Average Daily Flow(MGD) 0.97
Max Daily Flow(MGD) 2.03
Peaking Factor 2.10
Page 1 of 1

Triple A Basin
Calculations from
Sanitaire

Confidential J
SANITAIRE
Sanitaire Activated Sludge Solution Detailed Design Calculations
SNDN Process
Project Name: Franklin county Designer PS
Project Number A29280-19 Date: 4/8/2020
Design Parameters
Number of Parallel Process Trains 2
Flow
Per process train Total for all trains
Average Annual Flow 1.5 MGD 3.0 MGD
Maximum Month Flow 1.5 MGD 3.0 MGD
Peak Hourly Flow 4.5 MGD 9.0 MGD
Treatment
Influent Effluent
_Units Quality Requirement
BODs(20°C) mg/I 250 8
Suspended Solids mg/I 250 10
TKN mg/I 36 N/A
NH3-N mg/I N/A 1.0
TN mg/I N/A 4.7
Phosphorus mg/I 5.0 0.86
Environment
Alkalinity(Minimum Requirement) 117 mg/I
Max.Wastewater Temperature 25 °C
Min.Wastewater Temperature 15 °C
Ambient Air Temperature 90 °F
Site Elevation 350 ft
Activated Sludge Solution Design Parameters
F/M 0.12 BODS/MLSS/day
Aerated HRT 17.07 hrs
SVI(after 30 minutes settling) 150 ml/g
Number of Aerated Reactors in Series 2
Water Depth 15.0 ft
RAS Pumping Rate 100% of Maximum Month Flow
MLR Pumping Rate 400% of Maximum Month Flow
Page 1 of 7

Confidential
S ANPTAIRE
Sanitaire Activated Sludge Solution Detailed Design Calculations
SNDN Process
Franklin county PS
A29280-19 4/8/2020
Process Calculations
Nitrifictiattc-r°I Kh =ti,:,
Refer to Metcalf and Eddy,Edition IV pages 614 and 705
Constants and Temperature Corrections:
Coefficient Base Temperature
Value Theta Corrected Symbol
Maximum Specific Growth Rate of Nitrifying
bacteria,g/VSS/g VSS•day 0.75 1.07 0.53474 µnm(T)
Half-Velocity constant for nitrifiers 0.74 1.053 0.5716 Kn(T)
Nitrifier decay rate 0.08 1.04 0.06575 Kdn(T)
Dissolved Oxygen in final reactor,mg/I 2.00 2.00 DO
Half-Velocity Constant for
Dissolved Oxygen,mg/I 0.5 0.5 Ko
Minimum Water Temperature,°C 15 15 T
Safety Factor 2.0 2.0 SF
Calculations
TENH3 DO
µn= µnm(T)x x -Kdn(T)
TENH3+Kn(T) DO+Ko /
= ( 0.5347 x 1.0 2 ) -0.066 = 0.21 days-1
1.0+0.572 2+0.5
1 1
SRT,,,n= —=µn 0.206 = 4.8 days 1
SRTaerobic=SRTmin x SF= 4.8 x 2.0= 9.8 days
Where:µnm(T)= Maximum Temperature Corrected Nitrifier Growth Rate(days-1)
µn= Specific Nitrifier Growth rate at Temperature,DO,and Effluent NH3(days 1)
SRTmin= Minimum Sludge age required for Nitrification(days)
SRTaerobic= Design Aerobic Sludge Age(days)
SF= Safety Factor
TENH3= Anticipated Effluent Ammonia(mg/I)
Page 2 of 7

Confidential J
BANITAIR!
Sanitaire Activated Sludge Solution Detailed Design Calculations
SNDN Process
Project Name: Franklin county Designer: PS
Project Number: A29280-19 Date: 4/8/2020
Sludge Yield
Refer to WEF MOP/8 4th Edition,pg 11-11,Eqn 11.7
Y x (BODin-BODout)
AM= IT20i +Zio+Zno / xQx8.34 1+ CS
1+(Bx6 XSRT)
0.6x(250-8)
AM= 1+(0.07 x 1.04 (15-20) x9.8d) )+50.0+75.0 x 8.34 x 1.5 + 0.0 = 2,726 lb/day
( (
where:AM= Mass of Sludge Produced(Ib/day)
Y= Volatile Cell Yield(VSS/BOD Removed)
6= Arrhenius Temperature Correction Factor
B= Decay Rate(day-1)
BODout= Anticipated Effluent BOD(mg/I)
SRT= Solids Retention Time(days)
Zio= Influent Nonvolatile Suspended Solids(mg/I)
Zno= Influent Volatile Nonbiodegradable Solids(mg/I)
Q= Maximum month flow,mgd
T= Minimum Wastewater Temperature(°C)
CS= Chemical Sludge from Phosphorus Precipitation with Alum (Ib/day)
Aerated Process Volume
AM x SRT 2,726 x 9.8
Vaer_design= _ = 1.067 mgal
8.34 x MLSS 8.34 x 3,000
where:Vaer_design= Volume of Aeration Tank,mgal
MLSS= Aeration Tank Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids Concentration,mg/I
Anaerobic Process Volume
Size Anaerobic Zone based on 1.8 hour hydraulic detention time at Max.Mo.Flow
Required Volume=MMF x HDT/24= 114893 gallons
Anoxic Process Volume
Based on assumed denitrification rates listed below,required pre-anoxic volume= 114,893 gallons
Operate first aerated reactors as aerated anoxic for aerated anoxic volume= 533,287 gallons
Total anoxic process volume= 648,179 gallons
Page 3 of 7

Confidential
SAIVITAIRE
Sanitaire Activated Sludge Solution Detailed Design Calculations
SNDN Process
Project Name: Franklin county PS
Project Number: A29280-19 4/8/2020
Nitrogen Balance
Constants
Coefficient Value Symbol
VSS/TSS 77.05%
Sludge N 0.073 Ns
Effluent Dissolved Organic Nitrogen,mg/I 1.0 EDON
TKNox=TKN-EDON-TENH3-Nassim-Npart= 36.0-1.0-1-16.0-0.56= 17.3 mg/I
where:TKNox= TKN available for oxidation(mg/I)
TKN= Influent TKN(mg/I)
TENH3= Effluent NH3-N(mg/I)
Nassim= Nitrogen assimilated into sludge(mg/I)
Npart= Nitrogen bound to VSS portion of effluent TSS(mg/I)
Nassim= AM x Ns _ 2,726 x 0.07 = 16.0 mg/I
8.34 x Q 8.34 x 1.5
Npart=TESS x Ns X VSS/TSS= 10 x 0.07 x 0.77 = 0.56 mg/I
where TESS= Effluent Total Suspended Solids(mg/I)
TENOxN =TKNox X(1-Denite%)=17.3 X(1-0.92)=1.36)
where: TENOx= Total effluent nitrate+nitrite nitrogen(mg/I)
Denite%= Predicted denitrification%,based on Anoxic Process Volume and SNDR
SNDR= See Assumed Denitrification Rates in table below
TN =TENH3+TENOx+EDON+Npart=1+ 1.36+1+ 0.56=3.92
where: TN= Effluent Total Nitrogen(mg/I)
Page 4 of 7

Confidential .J
SAKI TAIi7E
Sanitaire Activated Sludge Solution Detailed Design Calculations
SNDN Process
Project Nan Franklin county PS
Project Number: A29280-19 4/8/2020
Assumed Denitrification Rates
Check Assumed Denite Rate in each Zone
Reactor 1 2 3
Description Anoxic Aeration Aeration
NO3-N mass to remove 84.995 101.994 0 Ib/d
Mass of MLVSS 2215 10281 10281 lb
Required Denite Rate(SNDR) 0.0384 0.0099 0.0000 mass NO3-N/mass MLVSS/d
Theoretical Denite Rate at 20C 0.06 0.06 0.06 mass NO3-N/mass MLVSS/d
DO Switch Function 1 1 0.0909 At design DO concentration
Temperature Correction 0.6806 0.68058 0.6806 At design water temperature
Adjusted Theoretical Denite Rate 0.0408 0.04083 0.0037 mass NO3-N/mass MLVSS/d
Assumed Denite rate OK? YES YES YES
BOO Mass
BODL= Q x BOD x 8.34 1.5 x 250 x 8.34 = 3,128 lb/day
1,000,000 1,000,000
where: Q= Max month flow,mgd
BOD= BOD concentration,mg/I
Actual Oxygen Demand
AORT= AORc+AORN= 3755+425= 4181 lb/day
where: AORT= Total Actual Oxygen Demand,lb/day
AORc= Carbonaceous Oxygen Demand,lb/day
AORN= Nitrogen Oxygen Demand(Including any denitrification credit),lb/day
Carbonaceous Oxygen Demand
AORc= BODL x O2carb= 3,128 x 1.200 = 3755 lb/day
where: 02carb= 02/BOD
Page 5 of 7

Confidential
SANITAIRE
Sanitaire Activated Sludge Solution Detailed Design Calculations
SNDN Process
Project Name: Franklin county PS
Project Number: A29280-19 4/8/2020
Nitrogen Oxygen Demand
AORN= TKNox(Mass)x 4.6-DNC= 216 x 4.6-571= 425 lb/day
where: 4.6= 02/NH3
DNC= Denitrification Credit
TKNox(Mass)= TKNox x 8.34 x Q= 17.3 x 8.34 x 1.5= 216 lb/day
DNC= NO3-Nremoved x 8.34 x Q x 2.86 x DN= 15.9 x 8.34 x 1.5 x 2.86 x 1= 571 lb/day
where: DN= Fraction NO3-Nremoved used to calculate denitrification credit= 100%
Based on 92% denitrication in SNDN process
NO3-Nremoved= 15.9 mg/I
Standard Oxygen Demand
AOR
SOR= AOR/SOR 7919 lb/day
where: SOR= Standard Condition Oxygen Transfer(20°C,1 atm,a=(3=1),lb/day
AOR/SOR= Conversion Factor Actual to Standard condition oxygen
AOR a x 0 (Trite.20) (C*sat x a x P x
20 site/Pstd CT/C20-
DO)
SOR C*sat20
where: a= Alpha factor=0.6
6= Temperature coefficient=1.024
Tsite= Water temperature,°C=25
R= Beta factor=0.98
Psite= Site Atmospheric Pressure
Pstd= Standard atmospheric pressure,psia
C*sat20= Dissolved oxygen solubility at standard conditions,mg/I
CT= Dissolved oxygen solubility at site water temperature,mg/I
C2o= Dissolved oxygen solubility at 20°C,mg/I
DO= Residual dissolved oxygen concentration,mg/I
Aeration Design
Reactor 1 2 3 Total
DO,mg/1 0 0 2
AOR,Ib/d 0 2090 2090 4181
AOR/SOR 0 0.5999 0.47142
SOR 0 3485 4434 7919
Page 6 of 7

Confidential
SANITAIRE
Sanitaire Activated Sludge Solution Detailed Design Calculations
SNDN Process
Project Name: Franklin county Designer:ner: PS
Project Number: A2928O-19 Date 4/8/2020
Clarifier Sizing Adesign,Avg= Qavg/Oa„g/No.Clarifiers= 1.5 x 1,000,000/390/2= 3848 ft2
A design,Peak= QPkhr/°peak/No.Clarifiers = 4.5 x 1,000,000/1169/2= 3848 ft2
where: A= Area of clarifier,ft
0= Surface overflow rate,gpd/ft2
Use Larger Area= 3848 ft2
Diampe5ign= [Area/rz x 4]1/2= [3848/3.142 x 4] 1/2= 70 ft
Rounded up to nearest 1 foot
User Clarifier Diameter=70 ft
User Clarifier Quantity=2
Max.Mo.Condition=3,000 mg/I MLSS and 6,000 mg/I RAS concentration
Peak Condition=3,000 mg/I MISS and 9,000 mg/I RAS concentration
State Point Analysis
10
-Settling Curve(SVI=150)
9 -
Max Month Overflow
Max Month Underflow
8 Pk Hour Overflow
Pk Day Underflow
7 i Settling Curve(SF=1.25)
„6 , �� P ray State-. t
E
°° • 't
Y
LL
•oq
. iWir
3 Ilk
2 Max Month .
Point
•
0 _
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
MLSS,g/I
Max Month State Point is below the settling curve.
Pk Day State Point is below the settling curve.
Pk Day Underflow underflow is below the settling curve.
Clarifier design is adequate.
Page 7 of 7

SANITAIRE
a xylem brand
Diffused Aeration Equipment
for
Franklin County
Aerated Reactors
Combs &Assoc.
Sanitaire#29280-19A
February 20, 2019
Ig K:\a29280-19\29280.aer
www.sanitaire.com

Sanitaire Aeration Design Inputs for: Franklin County, Sanitaire #29280-19A
Tank Geometry
1 Train Consisting of:
Parameter Units Pass 1 Pass 2
Parallel Reactors 1 1
Pass Process Aerobic Aerobic
SWD ft 15.0 15.0
Submergence ft 14.2 14.2
Volume ft3 70,096.8 70,096.8
Reactor Geometry: Annulus Annulus
Outside Diameter ft 121.5 121.5
Inside Diameter ft 53.5 53.5
Degrees 180 180
Oxygen/Air Distribution
Zone 1 2
Pass 1 2
Taper 43.0% 57.0%
Oxygenation
Parameter Units SOR Air Flow
No. Trains Operating 1 1
Air Rate scfm 1 1,305.0
Oxygen Requirement lb/day 7,919.0-S
Standard Oxygen Correction Factor Parameters
Parameter Units SOR Air Flow
Site Elevation FASL _ 300, 300
Ambient Pressure PSIA 14.56 14.56
Water Temperature °C 20 20
Notes:
Bold, Italicized text indicate assumptions made by Sanitaire
A - Indicates Actual (AOR) Requirement.
S - Indicates Standard Condition (SOR) Oxygen requirement.
If the AOR/SOR parameter is not given, then its value will be evaluated later if suitable alpha, beta,
D.O., theta, pressure, and temperature data is supplied.
Round tanks are evaluated as rectangular tanks diameter equal to length and equal surface area.
Annular tanks are evaluated as rectangular tanks of width equal to the annular width and equal surface area.
Sanitaire,A Xylem Brand Page 2 of 5

Sanitaire Project Name: Franklin County
Sanitaire Project#29280-19A
Design Summary
Operating Point&
02 Distribution
SON Air Flow
Units Taper Taper
No. Trains in Operation 1 1
No. Grids in Operation 4 4
No. Operating Diffusers 656 656
SOR lb/day 8,097 8,136
SOTE % 24.9 24.9
Total Air Rate scfm _ 1,297 1,305
Min.Diffuser Air Rate scfm/diff. 1.71 1.71
Max. Diffuser Air Rate scfm/diff. 2.25 2.27
Static Pressure psig 6.14 6.14
Diffuser DWP @ Min Air psig 0.54 0.54
Diffuser DWP @ Max Air psig 0.58 0.58
Pressure @ Top of Dropleg psig 6.98 6.99
Est. Blower Efficiency 70% 70%
Est. Motor Efficiency 90% 90%
Shaft Power Bhp 50.94 51.27
Est. Motor Electrical Load kW 42.22 42.50
Est. Standard Aeration Efficiency #SOR/BHP-hr 6.62 6.61
Notes:
(1)Design air is the maximum of process air or mixing air
(2)Delivered oxygen based on design air
(3)Brake Horsepower based on adiabatic compression, 70%mechanical efficiency and 0.30 psi lineloss
(4)Performance based on diffuser density(At/Ad),submergence,and diffuser unit air flow.
(5)Diffuser Air Flow based on Active Valve Modulation
(6)Blower Pressure Capability also requires consideration of:
A.The Air Main headloss(piping,fittings,valves,instrumentation,etc.)between the
blower and the aeration assembly dropleg connections.
B. Potential for increased headloss resulting from diffuser fouling and/or aging. Please refer to the US EPA Fine Pore
Design Manual(EPA/625/1-89/023),WEF Manual of Practice FD-13,and other
technical publications for a detailed discussion on this subject. Note that this headloss consideration relates to all
Fine Pore systems regardless of supplier or type of diffuser element.
C. Increased diffuser submergence during Peak Flow conditions.
(7)Air Flow defined at 20°C
(8)Fine Mixing air based on MOP/8 0.12 scfm/ft2
Sanitaire,A xylem Brand Page 3 of 5

Sanitaire Project Name: Franklin County
Sanitaire Project#29280-19A
Consulting Engineer:
Operating Condition: SOR
Oxygen Distribution: Taper
Aeration System Design
Parameter Units Zone 1 Zone 2 Totals/Overall
Pass 1 2
SWD ft 15.00 15.00
Subm ft 14.19 14.19
Volume ft3 70,096.8 70,096.8 140,193.6
No. Parallel Tanks 1 1
No.Trains in Operation 1 1
Grid Count 2 2 4
Dropleg Diameter inches 6 6
At/Ad 34.7495 34.749547•
Diffuser Density % Floor 2.88% 2.88%
Diffusers/Grid 164 164 656
Oxygen Transfer
Diffuser Type SSII-9 SSII-9
Alpha
Beta
Theta
D.O. mg/I
Water Temp °C 20 20
AOR/SOR
Oxygen Distribution %/Zone 43.0% 57.0% 100.0%
AOR lb/day
SOR lb/day 3,405.2 '4,513.8 7,919.0
Air Rate(7) scfm
Performance
Mixing Criteria scfm/ft2 0.12 0.12.
Safety Factor
Mixing Air(8) scfm 560.8 560.8
Process Air(for SOR) scfm 528.0 736.7
Design Air(1,7) scfm 560.8 736.7 1,297.5
Diffuser Air Rate scfm/Diff. 1.71 2.25 1.98
Delivered SOR lb/day 3,583.3 4,513.8 8,097.1
Delivered SOTE % 25.5% 24.5°/01 24.9%
Pressure @ Top of Dropleg psig 6.83 6.98 6.98
Shaft Power Bhp 21.6 28.9 50.9
Notes:
(1)Design air is the maximum of process air or mixing air
(2)Delivered oxygen based on design air
(3)Brake Horsepower based on adiabatic compression,70°/0 mechanical efficiency and 0.30 psi lineloss
(4)Performance based on diffuser density(At/Ad),submergence,and diffuser unit air flow.
(5)Diffuser Air Flow based on Active Valve Modulation
(6)Blower Pressure Capability also requires consideration of:
A.The Air Main headloss(piping,fittings,valves,instrumentation,etc.)
between the blower and the aeration assembly dropleg connections.
B.Potential for increased headloss resulting from diffuser fouling and/or aging.
Please refer to the US EPA Fine Pore Design Manual(EPA/625/1-89/023),WEF Manual of Practice FD-13,
and other technical publications for a detailed discussion on this subject. Note that this headloss
consideration relates to all Fine Pore systems regardless of supplier or type of diffuser element.
C.Increased diffuser submergence during Peak Flow conditions.
(7)Air Flow defined at 20°C
(8)Fine Mixing air based on MOP/8 0.12 scfm/ft'
Sanitaire,A Xylem Brand Page 4 of 5

Sanitaire Project Name: Franklin County
Sanitaire Project#29280-19A
Consulting Engineer:
Operating Condition: Air Flow
Oxygen Distribution: Taper
Aeration System Design
Parameter Units I Zone 1 Zone 2 Totals/Overall
'Pass 1 2
SWD ft 15.00 15.00
i,Subm ft 14.19 14.19
Volume ft3 70,096.8 70,096.8 140,193.6
No. Parallel Tanks 1 1
No.Trains in Operation 1 1
Grid Count 2 2 4
Dropleg Diameter inches 6 6
At/Ad 34.7495 34.749547
Diffuser Density % Floor 2.88% 2.88%
Diffusers/Grid 164 164 656
Oxygen Transfer
Diffuser Type SSII-9 SSII-9
Alpha
Beta
Theta
D.O. mg/I
Water Temp °C 20 20
AOR/SOR
Oxygen Distribution %/Zone 43.0% 57.0% 100.0%
AOR lb/day
SOR lb/day
Air Rate(7) scfm 561.2 743.8 j 1,305.0
Performance
Mixing Criteria scfm/ft2 0.12 0.12
Safety Factor 13/0
Mixing Air(8) scfm 560.8 560.8
Process Air(for SOR) scfm 561.2 743.8
DesignAir(1,7) scfm 561.2 743.8 1,305.0
Diffuser Air Rate scfm/Diff. 1.71 2.27 1.99
Delivered SOR lb/day 3,585.3 4,550.9 8,136.2
Delivered SOTE % 25.5% 24.4% 24.9%
Pressure @ Top of Dropleg psig 6.83 6.99 6.99
Shaft Power Bhp 21.6 29.2 51.3
Notes:
(1)Design air is the maximum of process air or mixing air
(2)Delivered oxygen based on design air
(3)Brake Horsepower based on adiabatic compression,70%mechanical efficiency and 0.30 psi lineloss
(4)Performance based on diffuser density(At/Ad),submergence,and diffuser unit air flow.
(5)Diffuser Air Flow based on Active Valve Modulation
(6)Blower Pressure Capability also requires consideration of:
A.The Air Main headloss(piping,fittings,valves,instrumentation,etc.)
between the blower and the aeration assembly dropleg connections.
B.Potential for increased headloss resulting from diffuser fouling and/or aging.
Please refer to the US EPA Fine Pore Design Manual(EPA/625/1-89/023),WEF Manual of Practice FD-13,
and other technical publications for a detailed discussion on this subject. Note that this headloss
consideration relates to all Fine Pore systems regardless of supplier or type of diffuser element.
C.Increased diffuser submergence during Peak Flow conditions.
(7)Air Flow defined at 20°C
(8)Fine Mixing air based on MOP/8 0.12 scfm/ft2
Sanitaire,A Xylem Brand Page 5 of 5

Page 1 of 1
FLYGT
a xylem brand MIXING SELECTION REPORT
Quote Number: 3556-191125-001 (Rev.0)
Project:
Position:
INPUT DATA TANK DIMENSIONS
Wastewater Treatment>Biological Treatment Mixing Rectangular
Biological Treatment Anox/Ox-Aeration turned off [A]Length 69 ft
Type of pre-treatment Screen<=%inch,primary sedimentation [B]Width 34 ft
Outlet location in tank Bottom [C]Depth 15 ft
Recommended average velocity 0.62 ft/s
Accept recommended avg.velocity Yes
Type of diffuser 9"Sanitaire (:.
Diffusers per aerated area 0.07#/ft2
Covered bottom area fraction 100% B
Covered bottom area 2346 ft2
Total number of diffusers 164 A
Number of aerated zones 1
PRODUCT DATA MOTOR DATA
Mixer type 4220 without Jetring Rated Shaft Power 3 Hp
Number of mixers 1
Mains frequency 50/60 Hz
Thrust produced/mixer 805 N
Phases 3
Total thrust produced 805 N
Rated voltage 380-480 V
Total thrust required 705 N
Poles 10
Power uptake/mixer 2.11 kW(24%margin to input power)
Max Input Power 2.77 kW
Total power uptake 2.11 kW
Product Approval STD
Propeller diameter 22.83 in
Rated Temperature 40°C/104°F
Propeller speed 276 RPM
Number of blades 3 ISO 21630 VALUES
Rec.min Submergence 2.3 ft Nominal thrust 803 N
Hub design Shielded ISO Input Power 2.1 kW
Propeller material Stainless steel Efficiency 382 N/kW
Propeller code V323058
Mixer performance data are based on the configuration 400 V Y for 50 Hz and 460 V V for 60 Hz, for other configurations the data may be different. For mixer
performance tolerances, refer to the mixer data chart. Xylem guarantees that the proposed mixer selection will perform the specified duty when all mixers are
operating positioned according to Xylem's recommendation. The selection is a function of the input data and the supplier of the data is fully responsible for its
q correctness. �3y
Y+ w SSIN l:.b 4D31 ..v; YY . rd.11i ISO 1430t
. 1°a.�X �r`ar:m-__ W LO3RA 1Ai iTAir• f OdwinO ;tiv W
SE 556010942201.Reg.bctag'X 4Pna WM,Saia aw AB.SE-361 80 Ensmabod3,9a

Page l of 1
FLYGT
a xylem brand MIXING SELECTION REPORT
Quote Number: 3556-191126-005(Rev. 0)
Project:
Position:
INPUT DATA TANK DIMENSIONS
Wastewater Treatment>Biological Treatment Mixing Rectangular
Biological Treatment Anox or Anaerobe or Deox-No Aeration [A]Length 45 ft
Type of pre-treatment Screen<= /2 inch. no primary sedimentation [B]Width 21 ft
Outlet location in tank Top [C]Depth 15 ft
Recommended average velocity 0.92 ft/s
Accept recommended avg. velocity Yes
(
PRODUCT DATA
Mixer type 4220 without Jetring B
Number of mixers 1
Thrust produced/mixer 671 N
Total thrust produced 671 N
Total thrust required 666 N
Power uptake/mixer 1.57 kW(43%margin to input power) MOTOR DATA
Total power uptake 1.57 kW Rated Shaft Power 3 Hp
Propeller diameter 23 in
Mains frequency 50/60 Hz
Propeller speed 252 RPM Phases 3
Number of blades 3
Rated voltage 380-480 V
Rec. min Submergence 1.97 ft above top of propeller Poles 10
Hub design Shielded
Max Input Power 2.77 kW
Propeller material Stainless steel
Product Approval STD
Propeller code V303058
Rated Temperature 40°C/104°F
ISO 21630 VALUES
Nominal thrust 669 N
ISO Input Power 1.56 kW
Efficiency 429 N/kW
Mixer performance data are based on the configuration 400 V V for 50 Hz and 460 V Y for 60 Hz, for other configurations the data may be different. For mixer
performance tolerances, refer to the mixer data chart. Xylem guarantees that the proposed mixer selection will perform the specified duty when all mixers are
operating positioned according to Xylem's recommendation. The selection is a function of the input data and the supplier of the data is fully responsible for its
correctness.
SRCN 150 aco . .
!Isis0.4 0 l+7/
O W �-b
x. tac L «NITAtf godwtn
SE`,8631 701.Reg Wag:X," Water Sat'dtons AB SE-35180 Emmatoct3,9n' n

Digester Calculations
from Sanitaire
(3.0 MGD)

0
SANITAIRE
,,xylem brand
Vorelodos Aerobic Digester Design Proposal
Franklin Co. NC 3.0 MGD Sanitaire#A29280-19
Table A: SLUDGE CHARACTERISTICS AND SITE CONDITIONS
Daily Flow to Digester 55 048 GPD
Daily Decant Flow 35 021 GPD
Daily Desludge Flow 20 027 GPD
TSS Concentration to Digester 0.59% w/w
TSS Concentration in Digester (after decanting) 1.30% w/w
Max Wastewater Temperature 25 °C
Min Wastewater Temperature 15 °C
Ambient Air Temperature 20-90 °F
Site Elevation 350 ft
Table B: AEROBIC DIGESTER DESIGN CRITERIA
Process Vorelodos Nutrient and Energy Saving
Baffle No
Configuration Parallel
Digester Type Rectangular
Digester Solids Retention Time (SRT) 32.5 days
Digester Hydraulic Retention Time (HRT) 11.8 days
Predicted VSS Destruction 26% VSSd
Table C: AEROBIC DIGESTER DESIGN DETAILS
Number of Digesters 2
Volume/Digester at TWL 48 174 ft3
Volume/Digester average 44 871 ft3
Digester Length 62.0 ft
Digester Width 42.0 ft
Digester Depth at TWL 18.50 ft
Digester Depth average 17.23 ft
Minimum Digester Depth with Mixer Operating 11.60 ft
Maximum Downstream Water Level 10.63 ft
1 11/1/2019

J
SANITAIRE
a xylem brans!
AEROBIC DIGESTER PROCESS EQUIPMENT
Fine Bubble Aeration Diffuser Quantity/Digester 481
Number of Aerated Zones/ Digester 1
Blower Flowrate for Process/Digester 598 scfm
Blower Flowrate for Mixing 30scfm/kft3/Digester 1 305 scfm
Blower Flowrate Proposed/Digester 598 scfm
Blowers (PD type) Quantity/Digester(Duty) 2
Blowers (PD type) Quantity Total (Duty/Standby) 4 /1
Blowers (PD type) Motor Rating each 60 Hp
Mixer Quantity/Digester 1
Mixer Motor Rating each 7 Hp
Desludge Pump Quantity/Digester(Duty/Standby) 1 / 1
Desludge Pump Flowrate 334 GPM
Decanter Quantity/Digester 1
Decanter Flowrate 833.8 GPM
Decanter Motor Rating each 0.25 Hp
OSCAR Controls and DO, ORP and DINO Instrumentation
AEROBIC DIGESTER AERATION/MIXING POWER REQUIREMENTS (TOTAL FOR ALL TRAINS)
Operating Power/Blower 42 Hp
Operating Power/Mixer 3.1 Hp
Operating Power/Decanter 0.3 Hp
Total Operating Power 1 249 kWh/d
2 11/1/2019

CONFIDENTIAL 0
■ANITAIRE
,,xylem wsnd
SANITAIRE Detailed Design Calculations
Vorelodos Aerobic Digester with DINO
SANITAIRE Project#A29280-19 Franklin
Co.NC 3.0 MGD
l'aratnMer"i
A. Sludge Characteristics
Q, Daily Flow to Digester 55 048 GPD
TSS1 TSS Concentration to Digester 0.59% w/w
TSSE TSS Concentration in Digester (after decanting) 1.30% w/w
VSS, VSS Concentration to Digester 77.0% w/w
B. Site Characteristics
Tmax Max Wastewater Temperature 25 °C
Tmin Min Wastewater Temperature 15 °C
Ta Ambient Air Temperature 20-90 °F
E Site Elevation 350 ft
SRT2 Aerobic SRT of Upstream Secondary Process 10 days
C. Aerobic Digester Basin Dimensions
Process Vorelodos Nutrient and Energy Saving
Baffle No
Configuration Parallel
Digester Type Rectangular
N Number of Digesters 2
VTvL Volume/Digester at TWL 48 174 ft3
L Digester Length 62 ft3
W Digester Width 42 ft
Ad Digester Area 2 604 ft2/AD
TWL Digester Depth at TWL 18.50 ft
D. Cycle Times
CA React-anaerobic/anoxic(air off) 24.0 h
Co React-aerobic(air on) 19.0 h
Cs Settle 4.3 h
CD Decant 0.7 h
CT Total 48.0 h
CW Desludge 60.0 min
1 11/1/2019

CONFIDENTIAL0
BANITAIRE
xylem,....
Aerobic Digester Operation(Iterative Solution-values confirmed below)
60
iRTT Digester Total Solids Retention Time 32.5 days
HRT Digester Hydraulic Retention Time(HRT) 11.8 days21540-
VSSd Predicted VSS Destruction in digester 26.2% VSSd
(relative to VSS concentration in WAS from 2ndary process)
13
• 30
20
E. Confirm Aerobic Digester VSS Destruction,VSSd(based on Digester Total SRT listed above) • t0.
Upstream 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
2ndary Aerobic Temperature'C x sludge age,days
Process Digester Total
SRTA Aerobic SRT 9.7 12.9 22.6 days
Degree-Days at Tm;,, 146 193 338 degree-days
VSS Destruction(relative to 2ndary Process Influent) 21% 21% 42%
Where: SRTA for Aerobic Digester= 32.5 days total SRT x 19.0 hr/d air/ 24 hr/d= 12.9 days
VSS destruction in upstream 2ndary process and digester based on Fig 13-35 in Metcalf&Eddy,5th edition and degree-days in each part of process
To understand this,compare Fig 13-35 in Metcalf&Eddy,5th edition with Equation 8-20 M+E 5th edition or 8-15 M+E 4th edition.
Equation 8-20 calculates the VSS sludge production related to SRT for a WWTP. Aerobic digestion SRT is just an extension of the upstream
2ndary process,but in another tank,so the shape of the Eq 8-20 secondary treatment VSSd curve is the same as Fig 13-35 aerobic digester VSSd curve.
Figure 13-35 was based on data from non-nitrifying plants with relatively low aerobic SRT values,so to accurately prtedict the VSS destruction in an
aerobic digester,the VSS destruction in the upstream 2ndary process must also be taken into account.
VSSd=1-[(1-VSST)/(1-VSS2)]=1-(1-42%)/(1-21%)= 26.2%
Where: VSST=Total VSS destruction in upstream 2ndary process and aerobic digester combined,relative to VSS concentration in 2ndary process influent
VSST=VSS destruction in aerobic digester,relative to VSS concentration in 2ndary process influent
F. Calculate Volume of Supernate and Digester Sludge,Digester BWL,and confirm assumed SRT at BWL
Calculate mass of digested sludge using VSS destruction listed above
Biosolids Biosolids
to from
Digester Digester
Inerts 626 626 IbTSS/d
Massyss 2095 1545 IbTSS/d
MassTss 2721 2171 IbTSS/d
Where: Digested MassVSS=QI x 8.34 x TSSI/1,000,000 x VSSI x(1-VSSd)=55 048 x 8.34 x 0.59%/1,000,000 x 77.0%x(100%-26.2%)=1 545 IbTSS/d
Calculate volume of digested sludge using mass of digested sludge listed above
Qs Digested Sludge Flow=MassTSS/8.34/TSSE x 1,000,000=2 171/8.34/1.30%x 1,000,000=20 027 GPD
Qo Daily Decant Flow=QI-QS=55 048- 20 027=35 021 GPD
BWL Digester Depth at BWL=[N x Ad x TWL-(QD/7.48)]/Ad/N=[2 x 2 604 x 19-(37 305/7.48)]/2 604/2= 16.7 ft
MassBWL Digester TSS Mass at BWL=[N x Ad x BWL x 7.48)/1,000,000 x 8.34 x TSSE=(2 x 2 604 x 16.7 x 7.48)/1,000,000 x 8.34 x 13 000=70 542 lb
Confirm SRT Assumed Above:
Digester Total SRT=MassBWL/1,000,000 x 8.34 x TSSE=32.5 days
G. Calculate Digester AOR,based on VSS Destruction Calculated Above
Assume unit mass of 02 required per unit mass of VSS destroyed as: 2.3 Ib02/IbVSSd
AORD AOR per Digester=(MassVSSin-MassVSSout)x 2.3 Ib02/IbVSSd/N*24/Co=(2 095-1 545)x 2.3/2 x 24/19.0= 66.5 1b02/h
2 11/1/2019

Page 1 of 1
FLYGT
a xylem brand MIXING SELECTION REPORT
Quote Number: 3556-191126-005(Rev.0)
Project:
Position:
INPUT DATA TANK DIMENSIONS
Wastewater Treatment>Sludge Digester Rectangular
[A]Length 62 ft
Type of pre-treatment Screen<=%inch, no primary sedimentation [B]Width 42.7 ft
Outlet location in tank Top [C]Depth 18.5 ft
Recommended average velocity 1.02 ft/s
Accept recommended avg.velocity Yes
Oxygen transfer guarantee No (..
Type of diffuser 9"Sanitaire
Diffusers per aerated area 0.37#/ft2 8
Covered bottom area fraction 50%
Covered bottom area 1323.7 ft2 A.
Total number of diffusers 490
Number of aerated zones 1
Flow per diffuser 1.863 scfm@20°C MOTOR DATA
Total air flow 912.87 scfm@20°C Rated Shaft Power 3 Hp
PRODUCT DATA Mains frequency 50/60 Hz
Phases 3
Mixer type 4320 without Jetring
Rated voltage 380-480 V
Number of mixers 1
Poles 10
Thrust produced/mixer 2128 N Max Input Power 2 5 kW
Total thrust produced 2128 N Product Approval STD
Total thrust required 2080 N
Rated Temperature 40°C/104°F
Power uptake/mixer 1.79 kW(28%margin to input power)
Total power uptake 1.79 kW ISO 21630 VALUES
Propeller diameter 98.43 in Nominal thrust 2122 N
Propeller speed 27 RPM ISO Input Power 1.78 kW
Number of blades 3 Efficiency 1192 N/kW
Rec.min Submergence 1.64 ft above top of propeller
Hub design Open
Propeller material Polyurethane
Propeller code V2701325
Mixer performance data are based on the configuration 400 V Y for 50 Hz and 460 V V for 60 Hz, for other configurations the data may be different. For mixer
performance tolerances, refer to the mixer data chart. Xylem guarantees that the proposed mixer selection will perform the specified duty when all mixers are
operating positioned according to Xylem's recommendation. The selection is a function of the input data and the supplier of the data is fully responsible for its
correctness. yT,llp,
s :, rsen�so1+a�s
D7YV .._, w .r. LOW,�..+. w^ R S 4.- AI :"i ktl•.�:d::: i .})u 091V
SE 556010942231,.Reg txtag Xylem Wale!SXLVirts Ae.SE-361 ao Enrat4C19,sa ,

Sludge Holding Tank
Calculations
from Sanitaire
(Center Chamber of
New Digester)

SANITAIRE
a xylem brand
Diffused Aeration Equipment
for
Franklin CO
SHT
Prepared For:
LKC
Represented By:
Combs&Associates, Inc.
1600 Elizabeth Avenue
Charlotte, NC 28204
704 374-0450
Sanitaire#A29280-19
November 1, 2019
u K:\a29280-19\Vorelodos\SHT Aeration\2019-11-1 SHT aeration.aer
www.sanitaire.com

Sanitaire Aeration Design Inputs for: Franklin CO, Sanitaire #A29280-19
Tank Geometry
1 Train Consisting of:
Parameter Units Pass 1
Parallel Reactors 1
Pass Process Aerobic
SWD ft 18.5
Submergence ft 17.7
Volume ft3 28 675.0
Reactor Geometry: Rect
Length ft 62.0
Width ft 25.0
Oxygen/Air Distribution
Zone 1
Pass 1
Air Flow 100.0%
Oxygenation
Mixing
Parameter Units Air
No. Trains Operating 1
Air Rate scfm 375.0
Standard Oxygen Correction Factor Parameters
Mixing
Parameter Units Air
Site Elevation FASL 350
Ambient Pressure PSIA 14.53
Water Temperature °C 25
Notes:
Bold, Italicized text indicate assumptions made by Sanitaire
A- Indicates Actual (AOR) Requirement.
S - Indicates Standard Condition (SOR) Oxygen requirement.
If the AOR/SOR parameter is not given, then its value will be evaluated later if suitable alpha, beta,
D.O., theta, pressure, and temperature data is supplied.
Round tanks are evaluated as rectangular tanks diameter equal to length and equal surface area.
Annular tanks are evaluated as rectangular tanks of width equal to the annular width and equal surface area.
Sanitaire,A Xylem Brand Page 2 of 6

- I
Sanitaire Project Name: Franklin CO
Sanitaire Project#A29280-19
Design Summary
Mixing Air
Units Air Flow
No. Trains in Operation 1
No. Grids in Operation 1
No. Operating Diffusers 294
SOR lb/day 3 321
SOTE % 35.3
Total Air Rate scfm 375.0
Min.Diffuser Air Rate scfm/diff. 1.28
Max. Diffuser Air Rate scfm/diff. 1.28
Static Pressure psig 7.66
Diffuser DWP @ Min Air psig 0.25
Diffuser DWP @ Max Air psig 0.25
Pressure @ Top of Dropleg psig 7.99
Est. Blower Efficiency 70%
Est. Motor Efficiency 90%
Shaft Power Bhp 16.50
Est. Motor Electrical Load kW 13.67
Est. Standard Aeration Efficiency #SOR/BHP-hr 8.39
Notes:
(1)Design air is the maximum of process air or mixing air
(2)Delivered oxygen based on design air
(3)Brake Horsepower based on adiabatic compression,70%mechanical efficiency and 0.30 psi lineloss
(4)Performance based on diffuser density(At/Ad),submergence,and diffuser unit air flow.
(5)Diffuser Air Flow based on Active Valve Modulation
(6)Blower Pressure Capability also requires consideration of:
A.The Air Main headloss(piping,fittings,valves,instrumentation,etc.)between the blower
and the aeration assembly dropleg connections.
B.Potential for increased headloss resulting from diffuser fouling and/or aging. Please refer to the US EPA Fine Pore
Design Manual(EPA/625/1-89/023),WEF Manual of Practice FD-13,and other
technical publications for a detailed discussion on this subject. Note that this headloss consideration relates to all Fine
Pore systems regardless of supplier or type of diffuser element.
C. Increased diffuser submergence during Peak Flow conditions.
(7)Air Flow defined at 20°C
(8)Fine Mixing air based on 0.24 scfm/ft2
Sanitaire,A Xylem Brand Page 3 of 6

Sanitaire Project Name: Franklin CO
Sanitaire Project#A29280-19
Consulting Engineer: LKC
Operating Condition: Mixing Air
Oxygen Distribution: Air Flow
Aeration System Design
Parameter Units Zone 1 Totals/Overall
Pass 1
SWD ft 18.50
Subm ft 17.69
Volume ft3 28 675.0 28 675.0
No.Parallel Tanks 1
No.Trains in Operation 1
Grid Count 1 1
Dropleg Diameter inches 6
At/Ad 12.8588
Diffuser Density %Floor 7.78%
Diffusers/Grid 294 294
Oxygen Transfer
Diffuser Type SSLP
Alpha
Beta
Theta
D.O. mg/I
Water Temp °C 25
AOR/SOR
Oxygen Distribution %/Zone 100.0% 100.0%
AOR lb/day
SOR lb/day '
Air Rate(7) scfm 375.0 375.0
Performance
Mixing Criteria scfm/ft2 0.24
Safety Factor
Mixing Air(8) scfm 372.0
Process Air(for SOR) scfm 375.0
Design Air(1,7) scfm 375.0 375.0
Diffuser Air Rate scfm/Diff. 1.28 1.28
Delivered SOR lb/day 3 320.7 3 320.7
Delivered SOTE % 35.3% 35.3%
Pressure @ Top of Dropleg psig 7.99' 7.99
Shaft Power Bhp 16.5 16.5
Notes:
(1)Design air is the maximum of process air or mixing air
(2)Delivered oxygen based on design air
(3)Brake Horsepower based on adiabatic compression,70%mechanical efficiency and 0.30 psi lineloss
(4)Performance based on diffuser density(At/Ad),submergence,and diffuser unit air flow.
(5)Diffuser Air Flow based on Active Valve Modulation
(6)Blower Pressure Capability also requires consideration of:
A.The Air Main headloss(piping,fittings,valves,instrumentation,etc.)
between the blower and the aeration assembly dropleg connections.
B.Potential for increased headloss resulting from diffuser fouling and/or aging.
Please refer to the US EPA Fine Pore Design Manual(EPA/625/1-89/023),WEF Manual of Practice FD-13,
and other technical publications for a detailed discussion on this subject. Note that this headloss
consideration relates to all Fine Pore systems regardless of supplier or type of diffuser element.
C.Increased diffuser submergence during Peak Flow conditions.
(7)Air Flow defined at 20°C
(8)Fine Mixing air based on 0.24 scfm/ft'
Sanitaire,A Xylem Brand Page 4 of 6

Sanitaire Project Name: Franklin CO
Sanitaire Project#A29280-19
Headloss Summary by System Operating Point
Consulting Engineer: LKC
Operating Condition: Mixing Air
Oxygen Distribution: Air Flow
Grid Design
Units Grid 1
Diffuser Count 294
Dropleg Diameter inches 6
Line Count 6
Line Spacing ft 4.00
Manifold Diameter inches 6
Manifold Length ft 20.00
Header Length ft 55.08
Manifold Location End
Manifold Elevation Inline
Dropleg Location End
Header Orientation Length
Grid Pressure
Grid Air Flow scfm 375.0
Diffuser Air Flow scfm 1.28
Submergence ft 17.69
Orifice Diameter inches 13/64
Static Header Pressure Differential in
Assembly psig 4.30E-03
Average Header Pressure in
Assembly PSI 7.98
A: Average Headloss from
Top of Dropleg To Headers PSI 1.15E-02
B: Diffuser Orifice Headloss psi 6.77E-02
C: Diffuser Dynamic Wet Pressure psi 2.53E-01
D: Static Pressure psig 7.66
Total Pressure Required at
Top of Dropleg (A+B+C+D) psig 7.99
Friction Headloss (A+B) PSI 7.93E-02
Sanitaire,A Xylem Brand Page 5 of 6

000
000
000 0
000
N
000
000
62' — 0 "
Single Train Information
Grid Grid Drop Header Header Header Discs/ At, Discs/
No Count Leg 0" Count Spc,ft. Len,ft. Grid Ad Train _
1 1 8 6 4.00 55.08 294 12.86 294
Total Discs/Train 294
Note: Some headers may be omitted for clarity
PRELIMINARY - THIS DRAWING IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, SUBMITTALS OR CONSTRUCTION
GUST NO. THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY DRAWN BY DATE MODEL JOB
Sanitaire CONFIDENCEXND ISSUBMIT1 DIH System 11i1i19
9" Disc Aeration GHKD BY DATE
a xlyem brand DWG NO. DISCLOSED,USED OR DUPLICATED SHEET
WITHOUT PERMISSION OF XYLEM.
APPVD BY DATE
BROWN DEER,WISCONSIN 59229

Hydraulic
Calculations

Franklin County Wastewater Treatment Plant
HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS
SUMMARY PAGE
Peak Flow Scenario:Hydraulic calculations were performed to model the peak flow scenario with the plant flow
at 7.5 MGD, which equals the plant design flow x peaking factor of 2.5(3.0 MGD x 2.5= 7.5 MGD) with one
treatment train not in service.
WWTP Flow
Inf. 7.50 mgd
RAS 3.00 mgd
Total 10.50
10,500,000 gallons per day
7,292 gallons per minute
16.2 cu.ft per sec
Treatment Units in Service I (2 total units)
� I
Existing Process Train Weir Elev. (if app) Water Level Top of Wall
Grit Chamber Weir 308.00 309.14 310.25
Grit Chamber Effluent 308.96 310.25
AAA Basin#1 305.50 307.65 309.25
AAA Basin#1 Weir Effluent 306.58 309.25
Clarifiers 302.30 305.16
Page 1 of 1

Franklin County Wastewater Treatment Plant
HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS
SUMMARY PAGE
Permitted Flow Scenario:Hydraulic calculations were performed to model the flow through the wastewater
treatment facility at the design capacity of 3.0 MGD with both treatment trains in service.
WWTP Flow
Inf. 3.00 mgd
RAS 3.00 mgd
Total 6.00
6,000,000 gallons per day
4,167 gallons per minute
9.3 cu. ft per sec
Treatment Units in Service 2 (2 total units)
Existing Process Train Weir Elev. (if app) Water Level Top of Wall
Grit Chamber Weir 308.00 308.49 310.25
Grit Chamber Effluent 306.19 310.25
AAA Basin#1 305.50 306.08 309.25
AAA Basin#1 Weir Effluent 302.67 309.25
Clarifiers 302.30 305.16
Page 1 of 1

Submersible Pump
Hydraulics
System Curve &
Design Point

L4.
o I"g a-
I I I I I I
ia
I I I
I
0.1
i I I
3
V
n. I I I I
E
a i r
I I I I I
r
I
I I I I
I I I I I I
I I
I I I I
I I I I I I I I
C -
• o U (u) eaH
c z
c 2 a
O m c
U s 7
a) O N CO CO V N Ol '- N (D C NCO L- 00 CO
re E
C 0 O. 41 co (O M 7 6 (` UO co M O 6 CO N •- r- co
0- , I N V. V. V. CO M el CO OD N N N L- L-
Y
C i SC2
all C — co
LI- coR v
N LL co 3 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
N 0 O N CO O V. CO N CO O V N N (D 0 sr
N W O) LT N N N CO CO N N (0 co
a)
N Te
0 E
o
C E N (D N (O N- 00 N n (D UO UO UO (D CO V. N. N V.
0 N EL N CO (O UU L N V. 'CrV V- COM M ri C) N N r
> I L-
(i) N
E 6
2R O CDLn O CO00 N 0N N (O 0 UOO 0) 7 co 0 N- N
— N O LT v Of .- ,- N N e) CO V V V. (O UO (O (D n
Q N
E v
m
7 O
a .(
Q Q E O N 'O ? 00 N N• O LC)• (O UO 'O• M t` (O
•
E- N co ^ t` co O UO UO N N V V C h- M n N
_ CO CD N
T
N
7 — _
O CO 0
U C7
c a O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
Y O ° O UO O UO O UO O UO O UO O UO O N O
C N N el CO V. V. to N (O CO N. N. W
(6 O
u_
U
N
O
0.
a

Franklin County , £ngmeenng
2019 WWTP Rehabilitation —1��\I� LandscapeArch,tecture
Surveying
Franklin County, NC r
Project: Franklin County Digester Pumps from Digester to Sludge Holding Tank Date: March 2020
AMX446-190/2,8T/C
Pump Curve
1160 rpm ;(;
60 Hz I
Flow(gpm) Head
0 28.5
100 24
150 22.35
200 21
250 19.95 ---- --- — — --- --- --- --- -- _60 Hz
300 19
350 18.1
400 17.4 w ----System Curve
450 16.5 131 , 1111
--- --- --- -- -- ---,System Curve(Digester Level-3)
--- --- --- -- --- -- —
700 9.25
750 6.75
u
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Flow(MGD)

Franklin County 2019 WWTP Rehabilitation L Engineering
�� Landscap rveyinge Architecture
Su
Franklin County, NC
Project: Franklin County Digester Pumps from Sludge Holding Tank to Tanker Truck Date: March 2020
AMX446-190/2,8T/C
Pump Curve
1160 rpm
60 Hz
Flow(gpm) Head
0 28.5
50 26
100 24
150 22.35
200 21
250 19.95 ---- --- — _____---- --- --- --- -- —60 Hz
300 19
350 18.1
400 17.4 -System Curve(SHT
Full)
450 16.5 0 ---- --- --- --- --- -- ---
500 15.6 °1
= System Curve(SHT
550 14.5 level-3')
600 13
50 11.35
6.75
700 9.25
7 50 6.75
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Flow(MGD)